Hull Detailed Design

Setup, Customisation and Standards

User Guide
AVEVA Solutions Limited

Disclaimer
1.1 AVEVA does not warrant that the use of the AVEVA software will be uninterrupted, error-free or free from
viruses.

1.2 AVEVA shall not be liable for: loss of profits; loss of business; depletion of goodwill and/or similar losses; loss of
anticipated savings; loss of goods; loss of contract; loss of use; loss or corruption of data or information; any
special, indirect, consequential or pure economic loss, costs, damages, charges or expenses which may be
suffered by the user, including any loss suffered by the user resulting from the inaccuracy or invalidity of any data
created by the AVEVA software, irrespective of whether such losses are suffered directly or indirectly, or arise in
contract, tort (including negligence) or otherwise.

1.3 AVEVA's total liability in contract, tort (including negligence), or otherwise, arising in connection with the
performance of the AVEVA software shall be limited to 100% of the licence fees paid in the year in which the user's
claim is brought.

1.4 Clauses 1.1 to 1.3 shall apply to the fullest extent permissible at law.

1.5 In the event of any conflict between the above clauses and the analogous clauses in the software licence under
which the AVEVA software was purchased, the clauses in the software licence shall take precedence.

Copyright
Copyright and all other intellectual property rights in this manual and the associated software, and every part of it
(including source code, object code, any data contained in it, the manual and any other documentation supplied
with it) belongs to, or is validly licensed by, AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries.

All rights are reserved to AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. The information contained in this document
is commercially sensitive, and shall not be copied, reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted without
the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. Where such permission is granted, it expressly requires
that this copyright notice, and the above disclaimer, is prominently displayed at the beginning of every copy that is
made.

The manual and associated documentation may not be adapted, reproduced, or copied, in any material or
electronic form, without the prior written permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited. The user may not reverse
engineer, decompile, copy, or adapt the software. Neither the whole, nor part of the software described in this
publication may be incorporated into any third-party software, product, machine, or system without the prior written
permission of AVEVA Solutions Limited, save as permitted by law. Any such unauthorised action is strictly
prohibited, and may give rise to civil liabilities and criminal prosecution.

The AVEVA software described in this guide is to be installed and operated strictly in accordance with the terms
and conditions of the respective software licences, and in accordance with the relevant User Documentation.
Unauthorised or unlicensed use of the software is strictly prohibited.

Copyright 1974 to current year. AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries. All rights reserved. AVEVA shall not
be liable for any breach or infringement of a third party's intellectual property rights where such breach results from
a user's modification of the AVEVA software or associated documentation.

AVEVA Solutions Limited, High Cross, Madingley Road, Cambridge, CB3 0HB, United Kingdom.

Trademark
AVEVA and Tribon are registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its subsidiaries. Unauthorised use of
the AVEVA or Tribon trademarks is strictly forbidden.

AVEVA product/software names are trademarks or registered trademarks of AVEVA Solutions Limited or its
subsidiaries, registered in the UK, Europe and other countries (worldwide).

The copyright, trademark rights, or other intellectual property rights in any other product or software, its name or
logo belongs to its respective owner.
Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide

Revision Sheet

Date Version Comments / Remarks

September 2011 12.1.1 Inserted chapters from old Hull Standards User Guide.

New chapter User Defined Endcut.

January 2012 Copyright added to all pages.
December 2011 12.1.2 New module names for partnames.
February 2012 12.2 New Profile Sketch Keywords added.
January 2012 12.2 Added keywords to chapter Control of GSD:s via Default file.
October 2012 12.1.SP3 New Keyword in the General Section of the Restriction File.
SKIPTWIST_DIST = <mm>
April 2013 12.1.SP4 Two new keywords in chapter Set-Up for Profile Fabrication;
PGEN= YES/NO and CGEN= YES/NO.
May 2013 12.1.SP4 New text in chapter Fibre Reinforced Plastics Option (FRP)
Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Contents

Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide

Contents Page

Setup, Customisation and Standards

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Control of Part Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
LEVEL Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
SYMMETRY Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
BUILT_PROFILE Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Name Definition Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:4
Remark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6
Remarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:7
Module/Specific Part Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:7
Customisation of Part Names via a Vitesse Script . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:9
Vitesse script example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:9

Functional Descriptions in AVEVA Hull . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1

Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
General about Functional Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Set up of Functional Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2

© Copyright 1974 to current year. i 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Contents

Set-up via a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2

File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Layout of the File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Example of Set-up File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3
Set-up via Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4
Merging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4
Assigning Functional Descriptions to Product Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4

Configurable Note in AVEVA Marine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
The Hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
The Hook Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
getNoteName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
getNoteChar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
getNoteFilter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3
getNoteData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4
Reference Symbol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4
Free Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5
Text in Symbol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5
Free Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:6
setNoteData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:6
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7

Surface Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1

Creating the Hull Reference Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1

Bevel Excess and Weld. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Scope of AVEVA Marine Bevel Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Bevel Types and Types of Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Butt Welding Bevels, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Fillet Welding Bevels, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Types of Parts Supported by Bevel Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Activities Involving Bevelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
General Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Bevel Variants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6
Bevel Types for Butt Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6
Butt Welding Bevel Types, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6

© Copyright 1974 to current year. ii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Contents

Butt Bevel Welding Types, Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6

Bevel Type 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6
Bevel Type 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:7
Bevel Type 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:8
Bevel Type 30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:9
Bevel Type 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:10
Bevel Type 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:12
Bevel Type 40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:13
Bevel Type 41 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:14
Bevel Type 42 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:15
Bevel Type 43 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:16
Bevel Type 50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:17
Bevel Type 51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:18
Butt Welding in Knuckles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:19
Fillet Welding, Fixed Bevel Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:19
Fixed Fillet Bevels, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:19
Part Geometry and Connection Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:19
Fixed Fillet Bevel Types, Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:20
Bevel Type 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:20
Bevel Type 25 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:21
Bevel Type 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:21
Bevel Type 38 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:21
Bevel Type 44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:22
Bevel Type 45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:23
Bevel Type 46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:23
Bevel Type 48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:23
Bevel Type 55 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:24
Bevel Type 58 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:24

Fillet Welding, Bevel Types With Varying Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:25

Varying Bevels, General. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:25
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:25
Varying Fillet Bevel Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:27
Bevel Type 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:27
Bevel Type 17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:28
Bevel Type 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:29
Bevel Type 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:29
Bevel Type 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:30
Bevel Type 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:31
Bevel Type 49 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:32
Bevel Type 37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:33
Bevel Type 56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:34
Bevel Type 57 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:35

Customer Set-up of Bevel Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:36

Bevel Definition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:36
Automatic Bevel Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:37
Bevel Definition Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:37
Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:38

© Copyright 1974 to current year. iii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Contents

Statements for Standard Values and Tolerances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:40

CHAMFER Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:40
VARIANT Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:40
Text and Symbol Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:41
BASIC_TEXT Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:42
DRAW_TEXT Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:45
NEST_TEXT Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:48
BEFORE_SYMBOL_TEXT Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:50
WELD_PROCESS_TEXT Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:51
SYMBOL_COMBINATION Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:51
BEVEL Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:52
Customer Control of Continuously Varying Bevel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:56
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:56
AUTO_SET Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:56
AUTO_RANGE Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:57
AUTO_SELECT Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:58
AUTO_PRIORITY Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:62
Example of Bevel Definition for Varying Bevel Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:64

End User Handling of Bevelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:65

Definition of the Bevels in the Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:65
Bevel Information in Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:66
Detail Sketches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:67
Bevel Notes in Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:67
Selection and Display of Bevel via Text String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:70
Bevel and Extraction of Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:71
Bevel Information in Production Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:72
Symbol Font for Bevel Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:74

Excess and Excess Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Excess and Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1

Automatic Weld Definition using Execution Units (EU) . . . . . . . . . 3:1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Execution Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
General .............................................................. 3:1
Selection of Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Types of EU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Selection of an EU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
Definition of EU Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
The EU Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
RULE Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3
DEFAULT Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3
Translation of Weld Factor into WLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3
FACTOR2WELD Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3

© Copyright 1974 to current year. iv 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Contents

Restrictions when only used in Hull. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4

Example of Definition File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4

Profiles in AVEVA Marine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General about Handling of Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Shell Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Profiles in Plane Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Stiffeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Curved Stiffeners. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Knuckled Stiffeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:5
Pillars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:5
Profile Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:5
Position of the Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6
Swaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6

About Profile Standard in AVEVA Marine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Profile Types in AVEVA Marine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Use of Different Profile Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4

Customer Set-Up of I- and U-bars Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1

Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Profile Specification File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
General .............................................................. 3:1
Layout of Specification File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:2
Test of Specification File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3
Selection of a Certain Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:3

Selection of Active Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1

Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Profile Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Layout of Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1

© Copyright 1974 to current year. v 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Contents

Remark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:2

Connection Code Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1

Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
Connection Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
General .............................................................. 5:1
Layout of the Connection File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:6
Remark .............................................................. 5:8

Profile Endcuts in AVEVA Marine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Endcut Standards in AVEVA Marine, Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Endcut Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:2
Endcut Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:2
Explicit Endcut Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:2
Designer's Use of Endcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:3
Customer Set-up of Endcut Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:3
Endcut Table Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4
Selection Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4
Parameter Rows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
Selection Codes and Evaluation of Endcut Parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
Selection Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
User Defined Endcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:7
Setting Up User Defined Endcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:7
Requirements to Model Use User Defined Endcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:8
To Use the User Defined Endcut in a Schema:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:8

Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:8

Endcut Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
Principles of Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
Customer Adaptation of Endcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:2
Survey of Endcut Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:3
Endcuts for Flat Bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:3
Endcuts for Bulb and L-bars. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:20
Endcuts for Asymmetrical T-bars (Profile Type 35) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:40
Endcuts for T-bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:54
Endcuts for I-bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:76
Endcuts for U-bars (Channels). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:100

© Copyright 1974 to current year. vi 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Contents

Selection of Active Endcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1

Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
Endcut Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
Layout of Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
Remark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:3

Rules for Adaptation of Endcut Standards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1
Endcut Gap on Flange of Built T-bars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1
Toe Width Considering Web Thickness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:3
Flange Extension in Tapered Endcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:4
Curvature of Tightly Connected Profile Endcuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:5

Endcut Symbols of Stiffeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1
Symbols and Symbol Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1
Factors Affecting Symbol Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1
Profiles Connected End-to-end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:2
Abutting Profile Ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:2
Profiles with Free End or Gap at End. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:3
Overlapping Profile Ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:5

Customer Specific Endcut Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1
Alternative Endcut Designation, Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1
Purpose and Scope of Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:2
Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:2
Main Characteristics of Implementation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:2
Translation File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:3
Replace Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:4
Profile Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:5
Translation Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:5

Stiffener Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:1

© Copyright 1974 to current year. vii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Contents

Set-up of the Stiffener Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:1

Example of an Input File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:2

Stiffeners in Symbolic Hull Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1
Stiff 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1

Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folded Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
General about Flange Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Definitions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Basic Flange End Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Flange End Type 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Flange End Type 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:4
Flange End Type 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:5
Flange End Type 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:5
Flange End Type 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6
Flange End Type 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:7
Softening of Sharp Corners of Folded Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:7
The Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:8
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:8
The FLA_TYPE Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:8
The FLA_END Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:9
Folded Flanges, Special Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:11
Basic Flange End 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:14
Basic Flange End 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:14
Concave (obtuse) Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:14
Convex Obtuse Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:15
Convex Acute Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:15
Basic Flange End 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:15
Concave (obtuse) Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:15
Convex Obtuse Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:16
Convex Acute Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:16
Basic Flange End 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:17
Concave (obtuse) Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:17
Convex Obtuse and Convex Acute Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:17
Basic Flange End 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:18
Concave (obtuse) Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:18
Convex Obtuse Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:18
Convex Acute Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:19

© Copyright 1974 to current year. viii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Contents

Basic Flange End 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:19

Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:20
Defining a Flange Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:20
Defining a Flange End Type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:21

Holes and Notches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hole Standards in AVEVA Marine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Types of Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Standard Holes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Holes for Penetrating Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Standard Holes in AVEVA Marine, Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Details about Standard Hole Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:4
Customer Defined Standard Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:8
Arbitrary Holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:8

Symbols for Notches and Holes in Views. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1

Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Scope of Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Definition of Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Remark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2

Notch Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Types of Notches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Standard Notches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Corner and Edge Notches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4
Notch Type R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:4
Notch Type RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5
Notch Type KEH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:5
Notch Type KUH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:6
Corner Notches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7
Notch Type KS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7
Notch Type KSA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:7
Notch Type KSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:8
Notch Type HKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:9
Notch Type HKO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:9
Notch Type VU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10
Notch Type VUA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:10
Notch Type VUF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:11

© Copyright 1974 to current year. ix 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Contents

Notch Type VUR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:12

Notch Type VDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:12
Notch Type VDB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:13
Notch Type VOA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:14
Notch Type VOB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:14
Notch Type BKU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:15
Notch Type BR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:15
Notch Type RF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:16
Notch Type RN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:17
Notch Type VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:17
Notch Type VUG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:18
Notch Type RC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:19
Notch Type RKA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:20
Notch Type RKB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:20
Edge Notches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:21
Notch Type KD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:21
Notch Type KE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:21
Notch Type KO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:22
Notch Type KR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:23
Notch Type KU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:23
Notch Type KUF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:24
Notch Type KDU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:24
Notch Type KVU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:25
Notch Type KFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:26

Arbitrary Notches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:26

Customer Defined Standard Notches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:27

Cutouts and Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Profile Cutout Standards in AVEVA Marine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
In-built Cutouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Cutout 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Cutouts, Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Tight Cutout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:4
Cutouts with Stub on Both Sides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:5
Cutouts with Stub on Mould Line Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6
Cutouts with Stub at Non-mould Line Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:10
Cutouts for Fastening with or without Clips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:11
Cutouts, Elliptical Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:13
Cutouts for Girder Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:16
Cutouts, Elliptical Top . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:16
Cutouts, Smaller Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:17
Special Cutouts with an Ellipse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:17
External Cutout Definition Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:18
Cutouts via Geometry Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:19
Special Feature, Eggbox Cutouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:19
Mixed Use of Cutout Definition Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:19

© Copyright 1974 to current year. x 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Contents

Multiple Definitions of a Cutout Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:19

Precedence between Cutouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:19
Cutouts and Inclined Profile Penetrations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:20
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:20
Cutout Geometry and Plate Thickness. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:20
Selection of Option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:21
Default Situation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:21
Cutout Free of Profile Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:21
Cutout Fitted to Profile Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:21

External Profile Cutout Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Principles of the External Cutout Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
General about the Geometry of Cutouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Connection Radii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Language for External Definition of Cutouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:3
Options for Control of Radii . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Special Cases: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7
Options for Control of Gaps and Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9
Conflict between Radii and Clearances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:12
Manual User Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:13
Main Type 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:15
Main Type 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:15
Main Type 6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:16
Main Type 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:17
Main Type 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:17
Main Type 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:18
Main Type 19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:18
Main Type 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:19
Main Type 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:19
Main Type 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:20
Main Type 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:20
Main Type 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:21
Main Type 39 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:21

Example of a Simple Cutout Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1

Sample File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1

Profile Cutouts via Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1

© Copyright 1974 to current year. xi 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Contents

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Geometry of Cutout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Coordinate System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:2
Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:2
Cutout Macro Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:2
Macro Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:2
Input Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:2
Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:3
Environment of Cutout Macros. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:4
Connecting a Cutout Macro to Hull . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5
Cutout Macro, an Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5
Testing of User Developed Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:5
Test Running a Cutout Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:6

Example of a Cutout Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1

Named Cutouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Use of Named Cutouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Setup of Named Cutouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1

Automatic Setting of Cutouts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1

Definition of Default Cutouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
Cutout Control File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
Layout of Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
Remark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:2

Clips in AVEVA Marine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
Clip Characteristics, General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:1
Clips as Stock Material vs Clips as Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:2
Setting up the Clip Standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:2
The Use of Clips in AVEVA Marine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:2
Names of Clip Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8:3

© Copyright 1974 to current year. xii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Contents

Clips via Geometry Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1
Geometry of the Clip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1
Coordinate System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:1
Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:2
Clip Macro Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:2
Macro Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:2
The Clip Macro Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:2
Input/Output Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:4

Welding and Bevel Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:8

Environment of Clip Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:9
Connecting a Clip Macro to Hull . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:9
Example of a Clip Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9:10

Example of a Clip Macro. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10:1

Resulting Clips from Appendix 1 Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11:1
Built-in Clips Facility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12:1
Cutout Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1
Cutout Setting Set-up File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1
File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1
Layout of the File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:1
Example of Input File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:2
Example of Cutout Setting Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13:2

Brackets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bracket Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Definition of Bracket Concept. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Type Standard Bracket, Overall Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Elements of the Bracket Set-up Facility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Bracket Names. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:4
Bracket Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:4
Stiffening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:5
Connection to Surrounding Members. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6

© Copyright 1974 to current year. xiii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Contents

Softening of Upper Corners of Bracket Toes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6

Default Type Standard Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6

Type Standard Bracket KL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1

Type Standard Bracket K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Brackets in Example File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Standard Set-up of Brackets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Comments on the Use of the Bracket File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Bracket Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:2

Customer Set Up of Brackets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
Handling of Definition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
Organisation of Bracket Definition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:1
Statement Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:2
Stiffening Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:2
Statement Types, Detailed Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3
PROFILE Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:3
TOE Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:4
CONNECTION Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:8
NOTCH Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:16
CUTOUT Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:17
PATTERN Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:18
STIFFENER Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:22
FACE_PLATE Statement (for Welded Flange) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:24
FLANGE Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:26
BRACKET Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:27
Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5:29

Standardised Bracket Toes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1

Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Survey of Bracket Toes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:1
Bracket Toe 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:2
Bracket Toe 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:3
Bracket Toe 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:4
Bracket Toe 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:5
Bracket Toe 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:6
Bracket Toe 9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:7
Bracket Toe 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:8
Bracket Toe 12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:9

© Copyright 1974 to current year. xiv 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Contents

Bracket Toe 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:10

Bracket Toe 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:11
Bracket Toe 15 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:12
Bracket Toe 31 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:13
Bracket Toe 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:14
Bracket Toe 33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:15
Bracket Toe 34 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:16
Bracket Toe 35 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:17
Bracket Toe 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:18
Bracket Toe 37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:19
Bracket Toe 102 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:20
Bracket Toe 131 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:21
Bracket Toe 131, Variant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:21
Bracket Toe 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:22
Bracket Toe 132, Variant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:23
Bracket Toe 133 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:24
Bracket Toe 133, Variant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:25
Bracket Toe 134 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:26
Bracket Toe 134, Variant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:26
Bracket Toe 135 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:27
Bracket Toe 135, Variant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:28
Bracket Toe 136 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:29
Bracket Toe 136, Variant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:30

Customer Set-up of Brackets Instances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
Handling of Definition File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
Organisation of Bracket Instance Definition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:1
Statement Types, Detailed Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:2
BRACKET Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:2
INSTANCE Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:2
Example of a Bracket Instance Definition File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:4
Use of Bracket Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:5

Taps - Extension Pieces for Welding. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Extension Pieces for Welding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Tap Set-up File and Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
File Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Layout of the File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Example of symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Example of Input File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3

Knuckled Pieces and Swages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

© Copyright 1974 to current year. xv 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Contents

Handling of Knuckled Panels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1

Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
General Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Generation of Knuckled Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Knuckled Panels in Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Extracting Parts from Knuckled Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Control of Bending Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2

Swaging (Small Corrugation) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Definition and Use of Swaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
User Set-up of Swage Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
General .............................................................. 2:1
Profile Types of Swages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Swages in Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Size Compensation for Swaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4
Set-up File for Swaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
SWEDGE Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
PROFILE Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
SIZE Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7
Example File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8

Shrinkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shrinkage Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Local Shrinkage Compensation Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Fully Automatic Local Shrinkage Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:4
Local Shrinkage Compensation at Plate Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:7
Statistical Method for Shrinkage Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:8
Local Shrinkage at Butt-welded Profile Ends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:8
User Control of Shrinkage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:9
Activation of Shrinkage Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:9
Customer Set-up of Shrinkage Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:9
Input data for creation of shrinkage objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:10
SHRINKAGE Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:10
FILLET and BUTT Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:10
LONGITUDINAL Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:11

© Copyright 1974 to current year. xvi 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Contents

Example of an input file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:11

Conditions for Local Shrinkage Compensation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:11

Weld Compensation for Built Profiles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1

Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
General Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Set-up of Compensation Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Finding a Value in the Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Example of an Input File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2

Alignment Marking. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Definition of Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Statement Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Statement Qualifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2

Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3

Marks for Assembly (GSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1

General about GSD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
GSD's on Plane Panel Plate Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
General .............................................................. 2:1
Plate Corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:4
Stiffener Traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
Abutting Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Bracket Traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7
Ship Centre Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7
Shell Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7
Manual Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7
Physical Marking of GSD:s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8
GSD’s on Shell Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8
Shell Plate Corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8
Shell Stiffener Traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8
Traces from Internal Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9
GSD’s along Shell Plate Edges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9

© Copyright 1974 to current year. xvii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Contents

Centre Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:10

GSD’s in Plate Nesting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:10
GSD’s in Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:10
Plane Panel Stiffeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:10
Plane Panel Welded Flanges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:10
Shell Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:12
GSD Customising. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:12
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:12
Control of GSD:s via a Default File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:13

(Fibre) Reinforced Plastic Option (FRP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

(Fibre) Reinforced Plastics Option (FRP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Special FRP Features in Hull . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Modelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Panel sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Stiffeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Holes ............................................................................ 1:2
Beads ............................................................................ 1:2
Parts Splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Weight and Centre of Gravity (WCOG) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
FRP Material List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Setting up an FRP Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Setting the Project to FRP Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Defining Blocks as Steel or FRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Defining Laminate Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
LAMINATE_PLANE Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:4
LAMINATE_BEAD Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:4
LAMINATE_FLANGE Statement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:5
Input File, Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6

Setup for Production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Conversion of Profiles to Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Decision Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
PROFILE_TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
DIMENSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
QUAL_LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3

© Copyright 1974 to current year. xviii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Contents

BEVEL ............................................................................ 1:3

FLANGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
COMP ............................................................................ 1:3
STRAIGHT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3

Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:4
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:4

Set-Up for Profile Fabrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1

Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Automatic Addition of Bending Excess to Curved Shell Stiffeners . . . . . . . . . 2:1
General .............................................................. 2:1
Activating Bending Excess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Method M1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Customer Defined Major Profile Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Bending Excess for L-schaubilder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:2
Holes Notches and Cutouts, L-schaubilder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
Information to the User, L-schaubilder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
Keywords in the Generic File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
Plot of Nested Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
Manual Fabrication List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:5
Bending Excess for S-schaubilder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Holes Notches and Cutouts, S-schaubilder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Information to the User, S-schaubilder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Bending Table for S-schaubilders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Burner ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Keywords in the Generic File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:6
Plot of Nested Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7
Manual Fabrication List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7
Method M2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7
General Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:7
Bending Excess. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8
Holes, Notches and Cutouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8
Information to the User . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:8

Early Checks of Restrictions for Profile Robot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9

Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9
Profile Modelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9
Profgen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9
Hull Modelling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:9
Considered Restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:10
Warning Messages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:10
Curvature Control of Shell Stiffeners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:11
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:11
Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:11

© Copyright 1974 to current year. xix 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Contents

Method WHOLE_TRACE_INDEP_DIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:12

Method PER_1000_FACT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:12
Example of Control File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:13
Default Method and Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:13
Error Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:14
The Restriction File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:14
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:14
Keywords in the General Section of the Restriction File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:14
Keywords in the Profile Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:21

Miscellaneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Set-up of Material Qualities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Quality Set-up File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Default Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Quality File, Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Remark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2

Destination Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Set-up of Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1
Layout of the Destination File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2:1

Surface Treatment Set-up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Set up of Surface Treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1
Layout of the Surface Treatment File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3:1

Panel Data and Geometry Type Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1

Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:1
Layout of the Data and Geometry Type Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4:2

Customising Dialogs in Hull. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Customising Dialogues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
General Principles for Interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1

© Copyright 1974 to current year. xx 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Contents

Customising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:2
Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:6

Symbolic Hull Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Symbolic Hull Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Syntax of Customisation Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
The NAME Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
OVERRIDE_COLOUR_P Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
OVERRIDE_COLOUR_D Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Component Statements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:1
Line Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:3
Colours .............................................................. 1:3
Default Keyword in Marine Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:4
Example of Definition File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1:4

© Copyright 1974 to current year. xxi 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Contents

© Copyright 1974 to current year. xxii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
General

General

© Copyright 1974 to current year. i 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
General

© Copyright 1974 to current year. ii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Control of Part Names

1 Customer Control of Part Names

1.1 Background
Parts (e.g. plates and stiffeners) are in the production identified by names which often are
painted or otherwise fixed onto the parts. The names may also be issued in drawings and
production lists of different kinds. These production oriented names are in AVEVA Marine
referred to as part names.
(The part names are not equal to and should not be confused with the names of parts used
within the data banks. There are several reasons for this. One is that also identical parts
must have unique names because they have individual occurrences and positions and e.g.
contribute in an individual way to the centre of gravity. On the other hand it may be
advantageous to let equal parts have the same part names because that may reduce the
handling/sorting in the workshop.)
This document describes how a customer can control the structure of part names.

1.2 General
A part name normally consists of a number of constituents that are combined to build up
the name, separated by delimiters. Examples of constituents are the project name, names
of assemblies, position (piece) numbers, etc. Delimiters can be any fixed strings but often
consist of a hyphen (-) or a slash (/).
However, it may not always be necessary to present the part name in its full (maximum)
size, but only a part of it. E.g. all parts in a drawing may belong to the same assembly and
therefore it is enough to present the position (piece) number to uniquely identify the part
within the drawing. Thus there is a need for a customer to set up rules for different levels of
the part name for one and the same part. Depending on the environment or context
alternative layouts can be chosen.
There may be different rules for the names of e.g. normal plates, brackets plates and
stiffeners. Therefore there is a need that part names should be controlled individually for
different types of parts.
The length of a part name is restricted to 48 characters. However, certain applications do
not accept a part name of that length. It is recommended to restrict the part name length to
24 characters, if possible.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Control of Part Names

1.3 Control File

1.3.1 General
The customer specification of the name rules is set up in a text file in a special format,
described in detail below. This definition file may be given an arbitrary name and can be
both created and interpreted in a function of the inithull facility. In order to make the part
name definition available to the application programs it should be compiled by inithull. If the
compilation is successful a part name control object will be stored in the structure data bank
(associated with SB_OGDB) by name __TB_PARTNAME_CTRL__.
The compilation will also result in a receipt list with input and errors, if any. If inithull has
been started via the Job Launcher this list can be accessed like all other files resulting from
a Job Launcher run. If inithull has been started outside the Job Launcher the receipt list will
be stored in print directory of the current project with the file extension. lst appended to the
name of the input file.
For backwards compatibility reasons it is currently necessary to assign the input file name
(without file extension) to the environment variable TB_PARTNAME_CTRL.

1.3.2 Layout
The name control file is an ordinary text file containing input in the general TIL format (TIL =
The Interpretive Language).
The input may contain a number of different statement types as specified below.

• LEVEL Statement
The LEVEL statement is used to specify the different levels a customer may want to use in
the naming of parts. The LEVEL statements must occur before the name definition
statements.

Syntax:

LEVEL, <level_name>;

<level_name> is an optional name of the level, interpreted as a string.

Its size is restricted to 10 characters.

Example:
LEVEL, ’FULL’;
LEVEL, ’SHORT’;
A maximum of 10 LEVEL statements may occur in the file.

• SYMMETRY Statement
The SYMMETRY statement is used to specify the strings to be used if an indication about
the symmetry status (or use) of a part should be included in the part name. It is relevant only
if the attribute /SYM is used in any of the name definition statements (Cf.below). It may
occur only once.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Control of Part Names

Syntax:

SYMMETRY,
[ /PS = <ps_id> ]
[ /SB = <sb_id> ]
[ /CL = <cl_id> ]
;

PS The string to be used for a PS specific part (or for a symmetric part,
used on PS).
Default is <ps_id>='P'.
SB Ditto for an SB specific part.
Default is <sbps_id>='S'.
CL The string to be used for a part lying in the centre line plane (or
symmetrically around this plane).
Default is <cl_id>='SP'.

The size of all these strings is restricted to 4 characters.

• BUILT_PROFILE Statement
Certain profile types are "built" in the sense that the web and flange are welded together.
Such a built profile has normally a position number which is common to the profile as a
whole.
According to the practice of some yards such a built profile may actually be an assembly,
because the web and flange are fabricated to their final shape before being welded together.
Thus, they are temporarily treated as individual parts which need to have a unique part
name.
The BUILT_PROFILE statement is used to specify a constant string that should be used
when forming the part name of the web and flange, respectively, of a built profile to be
handled in this way (Cf. attribute /BUILT in the Name Definition statement below.)

Syntax:

BUILT_PROFILE,
[ /TOTAL= <tot_id> ]
[ /WEB= <web_id> ]
[ /FLANGE= <flange_id> ]
;

/TOTAL To be used when the built profile is treated as one unit

(assembly)
/WEB To be used for the web part.
/FLANGE To be used for the flange part.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Control of Part Names

Defaults are <tot_id>='' (empty string), <web_id>='W' and <flange_id>=´F´.

The size of these strings is restricted to 4 characters.

• Name Definition Statement

The Name Definition statements define how the part names should be built up for a certain
part type on a certain level of naming. One statement must be given for each part type and
for each level, for which the part naming facility will be invoked.

Syntax:

<part_type> [, <proftype>]
/LEVEL = <level_name>
<constituent> | <delimiter> (1 ... )
;

<part_type> is the type of part for which the current statement should be
valid. The following part types are currently supported.
• HGEN General (Hull)
• HPPL Plane Panel Plates (Hull)
• HSPL Shell Plates (Hull)
• HBPL Bracket Plates (Hull)
• HCPL Collar (Clip) Plates (Hull)
• HPPR Plane Panel Profiles (Hull)
• HSPR Shell Profiles (Hull)
• HBPR Bracket Profiles (Hull)
• HDOU Doubling Plate /(Hull)
HGEN is special in the case that it takes one parameter
which is a functional description (HGEN, <func_descr>)
where <func_descr> is an existing functional description
code. If a component has the code defined, then HGEN will
be the first priority rule.
<proftype> This is available for the profile part types (HPPR, HSPR and
HBPR). If given, the given profile type will get the name for
this rule instead of the given profile rule. The default rule will
be the rule where no <proftype> is give. <proftype> is one of
the Hull Standard Profile types and should be given as a
string.
LEVEL specifies the level (cf. above). A used level name must have
been specified in a LEVEL statement.
<constituent> specifies the part dependent item that should be used as a
"brick" in building up the part name. The following options
are available and any combination of them can be used.
/PROJ Use the project name.
/ASS= <ass_level number>

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Control of Part Names

An assembly name is built up by the complete path name

with the names of the "nodes" of the assembly tree
concatenated with a certain delimiter in-between.
<ass_level number> is an integer number referring to
the corresponding "node" number in the path name.
>0: To be counted from the top
<0: To be counted from the bottom
The name of the indicated node will be used for the part
name. (If no node with the given number is found in the
assembly name it will be replaced by an empty string.)
/ASSLEVEL=<assembly type>
Use the name of the assembly on the level in hierarchy of
given assembly type (Compared to /ASS the "absolute"
level is used instead of the relative level). I.e. The assembly
type is a type specified as a User Defined Element Type
(UDET) defined via the Lexicon module, here given without
the usual prefix ":". I.e. it is looking for an assembly in the
parent structure of specified type and using the name of that
assembly as result.
/BLOCK Use the block name
/SBLOCK As /BLOCK but remove ship letters
/POS Use the position (piece) number of the part
/ZPOS Use the position number of the part but skip it together with
its preceding delimiter if it equals 0.
/BPOS Relevant only for profiles on brackets.
When given it means that the position number of the
bracket should be used.
/LPOS Relevant only for profiles on brackets.
Use the number of the profile within the bracket and convert
that into a letter. (1 --> A, 2 --> B, etc.). The profile number
must not exceed 25 in this case.
/SYM For a part that is used on portside, starboard and in/over
CL, resp., an indication about this should be added to the
part name. (Cf. the SYMMETRY statement above.)
/BUILT To be used only for built profiles when different parts names
are required for the web and flange, treated as individual
parts. (Cf. the BUILT_PROFILE Statement above).
/DWG Use the name of the drawing to which the part belongs. In
the Hull system it is defined in the generation phase
(DWG=...). Available only for backwards compatibility
reasons.
/LOC Use the location code, defined in the generation phase
(MAR=...). Available only for backwards compatibility
reasons.
/GPS1 Use the strings assigned to the keywords AS1,
/GPS2 AS2, AS3 and AS4 respectively, in the
/GPS3 modelling of hull items
/GPS4

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Control of Part Names

<delimiter> Defines a fixed string as the delimiter between constituents.

<delimiter>::= (/DEL | /ZDEL) =<string>
<string> is an arbitrary string, restricted to eight characters.
The difference between /DEL and /ZDEL is that the delimiter should be
skipped if the constituent following it is an empty string.

Note: that any combination of constituents and delimiters can be used. If two constituents
are given without any delimiter in between an empty delimiter will be created
automatically by the part name facility.

1.3.3 Remark
Note that there are no default rules for the forming of part names, i.e. a name definition file
must always be available, specifying name rules for all the types of parts for which the part
name facility will be used.

1.3.4 Example
The following input file creates names that in earlier versions of the Hull system were built-in
default rules.

Example:

LEVEL, 'FULL' ;
LEVEL, 'SHORT' ;
!
! "FULL" Part Names
!
HGEN, 603 /LEVEL='FULL' /BLOCK /DEL='-H-' /POS;
HPPL /LEVEL='FULL' /SBLOCK /DEL= '-' /POS ;
HSPL /LEVEL='FULL' /SBLOCK /DEL= '-' /POS ;
HBPL /LEVEL='FULL' /SBLOCK /DEL='-B' /POS ;
HCPL, /LEVEL='FULL' /SBLOCK /DEL= '-' /POS ;
HPPR, '31' /LEVEL='FULL' /BLOCK /DEL='-L-' /POS;
HPPR /LEVEL='FULL' /SBLOCK /DEL= '-' /POS ;
HSPR /LEVEL='FULL' /SBLOCK /DEL= '-' /POS ;
HBPR /LEVEL='FULL' /SBLOCK /DEL='-B' /BPOS /LPOS;
!
! "SHORT" Part Names
!
HPPL /LEVEL='SHORT' /POS ;
HSPL /LEVEL='SHORT' /POS ;
HBPL /LEVEL='SHORT' /DEL= 'B' /POS ;
HCPL, /LEVEL='SHORT' /POS ;
HPPR /LEVEL='SHORT' /POS ;
HSPR /LEVEL='SHORT' /POS ;
HBPL /LEVEL='SHORT' /DEL= 'B' /BPOS /LPOS;

Suppose that these rules are used for parts of a panel belonging to the block AA123.
Further suppose that all position numbers equal 1. Then the part names will be:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Control of Part Names

Full part names:

Plane plate: 123-1

Shell plate: 123-1

Bracket plate: 123-B1

Clip plate: 123-1

Plane panel profile: 123-1

Plane panel profile type 31: AA123-L-1

Plane panel profile, fun=603: AA123-H-1

Shell profile: 123-1

Bracket profile: 123-B1A

For the planar profile in the above example, the priority is that if a profile has a functional
description of 603 defined, then the HGEN rule will be used. If the profile is of type 31, but
no functional description of 603 is defined then the "HPPR, '31'" rule will be used. All other
cases for planar profiles will use the "HPPR /LEVEL" rule.

Short part names ('position numbers'):

Plane plate: 1

Shell plate: 1

Bracket plate: B1

Clip plate: 1

Plane panel profile: 1

Shell profile: 1

Bracket profile: B1A

1.4 Remarks
For backwards compatibility reasons a part name control file for hull parts should always
contain part naming rules for all types of hull parts to the extent illustrated in the example
above. It is recommended to use the level names of the example, i.e. FULL for full names,
SHORT for short names. However, other LEVEL names may be chosen if they are assigned
to the environment variables TB_PARTNAME_FULL and TB_PARTNAME_SHORT.
The Hull application always supposes that there should be a complete part name
specification on levels TB_PARTNAME_FULL (with default name FULL) and
TB_PARTNAME_SHORT (with default name SHORT). However, these names may be
different for different modules, see below.

1.5 Module/Specific Part Names

Any number of partname control rules (=levels) may be defined as described above. But by
default only two levels may simultaneously be used in the different modules of AVEVA

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Control of Part Names

Marine (as described in relation with TB_PARTNAME_FULL and TB_PARTNAME_SHORT

above).
This paragraph describes a feature by which a certain name rule (="level") may be defined
to be used within a certain hull module. (This feature has currently the restriction that only
one level can be defined for a certain module, i.e. it is not possible to control different rules
in different functions of a module).
This name rule section is facilitated by a simple text file whose total file specification should
be assigned to the environment variable TB_PARTNAME_LEVEL. The layout of this file is
very simple:
<module> ( , / <blank>) <level> <CR> (1...)
The file consists of pairs of module name and level name, one per line, separated by a
comma (,) or blank.

Example:

PART_PLCM RULEA
PROFNEST, RULEB
etcetera.

This means that level RULEA will be used when creating partnames of plates in PLCM
sketches, RULEB in profnest.
The following module names are currently valid (default level is FULL unless otherwise
specified):

DATA_EXTR Hull data extraction (extraction of part identification)

DRAW_MODEL Draw model geometry (in symbolic views of plates, stiffeners,
flanges, pillars and brackets)
LABEL_PLCM For labelling of part names in nesting/PLCM
LABEL_NEST2AX
MARKING_NEST2AX For marking of names ("position numbers") along marking
lines in nesting. Default: SHORT
MARKING_PLCM For marking of names (“position number”) along marking lines
in PLCM. Default: SHORT
MODEL_INFO Hull model info (when asking for information on any of
boundaries, plates, stiffeners, flanges, pillars and brackets)
PART_NEST2AX For partnames of plates in nesting sketches
PART_PLCM For partnames of plates in PLCM sketched
PARTTAB_NEST2AX For partnames in parts table
PARTMENU_NEST2AX For partnames in parts menu
PARTPOS_NEST2AX For partnames of plates in nesting sketches (position
numbers)
PROFILE_SKETCH Profile name in sketches and listings.
PROFNEST Automatic nesting of profiles (partnames in list files)
TBRPLATEINT Plate interface (part names)
TBRPROF_CUTINT Profile interface lists and sketches (for marking on profiles).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Control of Part Names

ASS_PARTNAME Weld Planning.

WCOG_LIST Weight and Centre of Gravity List.

1.6 Customisation of Part Names via a Vitesse Script

Despite the fact that the part naming rules in the partname control file offer a great number
of options, there still may be some need for further refinement. A flexible way to offer the
customer the tools to achieve his specific needs is implemented by calling a Vitesse script.
The name of the Vitesse script is _TBhook_CustPartName.py. This Vitesse script is
called after the customer defined rules for partnames have been applied.
The Vitesse script receives as input the partname created by the Partname Control facility
together with all the constituents that have been available for that process. Vitesse
commands in the script, written by the customer, may then create the partname according
to the specific needs of the customer.

1.6.1 Vitesse script example

This script is an example of _TBhook_CustPartName.py, called after that the customer
defined rules for partnames have been applied. It is assumed that the partname is built up
sub-strings delimited by a delimiter. The last sub-string in the partname may be a assembly
name followed by position number. If the last sub-string is an 'A' followed by a number, then
the number should be removed.
The example file can be found here: TBhook_CustPartName_py.txt

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:9 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Control of Part Names

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:10 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Functional Descriptions in AVEVA Hull

2 Functional Descriptions in AVEVA Hull

2.1 Background
Parts in the AVEVA Marine Product Information Model (sometimes referred to as PIM) are
identified by names and by different identification codes, used internally in AVEVA Marine.
The names may carry some information about the part. At least when it comes to part
names (the production oriented names) the name normally contains some information about
which assembly the part belongs to.
To support more explicit description of parts, AVEVA Hull also allows descriptive name
"tags" to be assigned to all parts. These tags are called functional descriptions and they are
strings that "follow" the parts throughout the development of the project. In this document
the term "Functional Description" is normally abbreviated to FD.
In addition to serving as pure name tags (which might be valuable in request functions like
Info/Model and in parts lists), the FD:s may also be used to control certain automatic
evaluations. An example of such a use is that the functional properties may control the
automatic calculation of weld sizes.
The purpose of this document is to give a complete description of the functional descriptions
in AVEVA Marine, i.e. regarding general principles, how they are set up and assigned to
parts.

2.2 General about Functional Descriptions

Functional descriptions are strings (up to 75 character long). They may be fixed strings but
can also contain predefined parameters that may be replaced by actual values fetched from
the part that the tag is fixed to. FD:s can be assigned to panels and to physical parts in
panels, i.e. to plates, stiffeners, welded flanges, pillars, brackets and clips.
Each single FD consists of two parts: The FD string and an index associated with that string.
The index is an integer (in the range 0 -32767) that must be unique for a certain FD, i.e.
there is a one-to-one relation between the string and the index. FD:s are stored in model
objects via the index which thus is the "handle" by which the FD string is accessed.
An FD with index 0 is the default FD. This default FD is applied for all parts which have not
got any explicitly defined FD. An undefined FD (i.e. an index without any corresponding
string) may be assigned to a model part. Such an FD may be defined afterwards but if it is
asked for before being defined an error message may be issued (depending on the function
where it is asked for).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Functional Descriptions in AVEVA Hull

2.3 Set up of Functional Descriptions

2.3.1 General
The available functional descriptions are registered in an object in the data bank associated
with the environment variable SB_OGDB. This object has the fixed name
__FUNCTIONAL_PROPERTY__.
There are two ways in which the FD:s object can be updated.
1. The functional FD object is created or modified via an input text file in a specific format
described in detail below. This file is read and interpreted in a function of the hull utility
program inithull. As a result of the interpretation the file contents will be merged into the
FD object.
2. Modification of the FD object can also be done via a wizard in the FD function of inithull
without any input file.
The interpretation of the concept of "merge" in this context will be further discussed below.

2.3.2 Set-up via a File

• File Name
The name of the set-up file may be chosen arbitrarily and is given as input to the inithull
function for set-up of FD:s. However, the file extension should be .dat. A list file will be
produced during the process of interpretation of the input file. Inithull is normally run via the
Job Launcher and the list file will be stored as defined in the set-up for the Job Launcher.

• Layout of the File

The input file for FD:s is an ordinary text file in a simple language based on the general TIL
format.
This language has two statement types (DESCR and INTERVAL) that may be repeated any
number of times. The input file is incremental, i.e. it will be merged (normally added) to the
existing FD object.
Note: It is also possible to have the complete FD definition in one input file. To be certain
that the FD object has exactly the corresponding contents, the previous FD object (if any)
should be deleted before the input file is interpreted.
The statements need not be in any particular order and there may be more than one
DESCR statements for the same index in one file. However, in that case the last statement
for a particular index will overwrite all other FD:s for the same index. I.e. in the FD object,
one index occurs only once.
The INTERVAL statement is used to control the Graphical User Interface when building
planar steel. In this interval, it is possible to define the description index interval that should
be presented in the GUI for a certain component. This statement is optional.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Functional Descriptions in AVEVA Hull

Syntax:

INTERVAL /<part_type> /MIN=<min_value> /MAX=<max_value>];

DESCR, <index> [/VALUE=<value_str>];

<part_type> Any of the existing physical part types available:

2. The whole panel (PANEL)
3. Plate (PLATE)
4. Stiffener (STIFFENER)
5. Flange (FLANGE)
6. Pillar (PILLAR)
7. Bracket (BRACKET)
8. Clip (Collar) (CLIP)
9. Doubling plate (DOUBLING)
10. Curved Plate (SHPLATE)
11. Shell Stiffener (SHSTIFFENER)
<min_value> These are the two boundaries in the functional
<max_value> description table for a certain part type.
<index> An integer number representing the index of a certain
functional description string
/VALUE To be used for setting the string value for the current
index. A string (up to 75 characters), representing the
value of the functional description.

The layout of a value may be as follows:

<value_str>::= [<pre_str>] [<parameter>][<post_str>]
<pre_str> and <post_str> may be any string.
<parameter>::= !X | !Y | !Z
FD:s with parameters should currently only be used for panels (and plates) located in
principal planes. When the FD is asked for the parameter will be replaced by the
corresponding co-ordinate (x for !X, etc.). The co-ordinates will always be converted into
FR-terms (x-co-ordinates) or LP-terms (y- and z-co-ordinates) whenever possible.
Example of the use of parameters:
Two panels located at frames 85 and 90 are assigned the same functional description
"Bottom web at !X.". When the FD is requested for these two panels it will be displayed as
"Bottom web at FR85" and "Bottom web at FR90", respectively.

• Example of Set-up File

The following is a short example of an input file that will create entries in the FD object for
indices 3, 20000, 434 and 4442.

INTERVAL /FLANGE /MIN=701 /MAX=799;

INTERVAL /STIFFENER /MIN=601 /MAX=699;
DESCR, 3 /VALUE='Deck';

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Functional Descriptions in AVEVA Hull

DESCR, /VALUE='Panel';
20000
DESCR, 434 /VALUE='Panel at !X';
DESCR, 612 /VALUE='This will only be shown for stiffeners
in GUI';
DESCR, 735 /VALUE='This will only be shown for flanges in
GUI';
DESCR, 4442 /VALUE='Temp Functional Description';

Note that if some of these indices should already exist their description string will be
replaced by the one in the file (see Merging below)

2.3.3 Set-up via Wizard

When starting up inithull for Functional Descriptions and activating the wizard button the
dialog loads the current FD definitions from the FD object into a list window open for editing.
By making changes in this list it possible to delete, change and add new FD:s. See
Merging, below.

2.3.4 Merging
Since the update of the FD object is always incremental (except if the object has been
deleted completely) the result of new input will always be merged into the current object.
Therefore it is important to keep the following in mind:
1. To delete a FD: Make the FD string an empty string, retaining the index.
2. Adding a new FD: Add a new index and a new FD string.
3. Changing a FD: Keep the index but change the FD string.
Please further observe the following:
• If you rerun an input file and change the index number (e.g. 20000 to 2000 in the
example file above (e.g. to correct a misprint)) a new FD with index 2000 will be added
but the old FD with index 20000 will still be retained (with the same string). To change
the FD with index 20000 to the new index 2000 the old FD it must be explicitly deleted
as described above.
• Likewise, if you change an index number in the list form after an activation of the
wizard, you will create a new FD entry but the old one will still be retained.

2.4 Assigning Functional Descriptions to Product Model

Interactive AVEVA Hull applications have a function for assigning FD to parts and panels via
picking in views. In modules with input languages for model generation the definition of FD:s
via the language input is supported as well. For details, see the respective applications.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Configurable Note in AVEVA Marine

3 Configurable Note in AVEVA Marine

3.1 General
A number of special notes are used in drawings with different contents. The contents of the
notes are depending on both the type of the note and the component the note is made for.
The configurable note option in AVEVA Marine makes it possible to create notes with a high
degree of freedom regarding both the contents and the appearance. Each note type is given
an identifying string to appear in a selection list, and a set of characteristics described in
detail below.
The configuration is implemented as a Vitesse hook, meaning that a file with a specific
name is accessed from the AVEVA Marine functions. This file is written using the Vitesse
syntax and interfaces.

3.2 The Hook

The name of the configuration file must be _TBhook_ConfigNote.py and must be
placed in the directory indicated by the global variable PYTHONPATH.

3.3 The Hook Interface

A number of methods with predefined names and parameter lists must exist in the
configuration file. These methods are:
• getNoteName (<NoteInd>)
• getNoteChar (<NoteInd>)
• getNoteFilter (<NoteInd>, <FilterInd>)
• getNoteData (<ItemNo>)
• setNoteData (<NoteNo>, <ModelType>, <Model>, <PartType>, <Part>,
<SubPartType>, <SubPart>)
They are all described in detail below. These methods should never be changed regarding
the input parameters and the result values.

3.3.1 getNoteName
This method is supposed to have access to a list of note name strings. The input parameter
<NoteInd> is an integer index and should return the list value as a string if the index is within
the bounds of the list. If the index is outside the list bounds the nil object should be returned.
The string is supposed to be unique among the strings in the list, and must not be longer
than 80 characters.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Configurable Note in AVEVA Marine

The storing of the note names is free as long as they can be accessed as an indexed list
through the method getNoteName. The note names are used to present a list of
available notes to select from in the AVEVA Marine function that set configurable notes.

3.3.2 getNoteChar
This method is supposed to have access to a list of note characteristic records. It also takes
an integer index as parameter and should return a list of note characteristics for the
corresponding note. This list of note characteristic records should have the same number of
elements as the corresponding name list described above, i.e. there should be one entry for
each note type.
The characteristics record returned should contain the following items:
(<reference>,<placement>,<colour>,<layer>, <flip_angle>)
<reference> is a string defining the location of the reference point. The allowed values
are described below:

Value Description

cursor Use the pick point defined by the user as reference point

nearest Use the point closest to the identified geometry

midpoint Use the midpoint of the longest geometry in the identified picture
element

COG Use the centre of the circumscribed rectangle of the identified picture
element

<placement> is a string defining the location of the note body in case no reference lines
are used. The placement is related to the reference point and the values refer to the
circumscribed rectangle of the note body.
<placement> is built up by two values, one for horizontal placement and one for vertical
placement that are concatenated without delimiters to form one string. The allowed values
are described below:

Value (horizontal) Description

Left Use the left side

Mid Use the midpoint

Right Use the right side

Origin Use the origin

Value (vertical) Description

Lower Use the lower side

Mid Use the midpoint

Upper Use the upper side

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Configurable Note in AVEVA Marine

Value (vertical) Description

Origin Use the origin

Origin refers to the point (0,0) in the local coordinate system used when building up the note
body further explained below. All combinations of these values are valid, e.g. LeftLower or
MidOrigin.
<colour> is a string giving the name of a colour selected from the standard set.
<layer> is either a string defining a named layer existing in the Layer Alias File (see
User's Guide Drafting), or an integer number giving the layer. The created note component
will then get this layer.
<flip_angle> is an integer number defining the angle in degrees where the note text
along a line changes from one side of the line to the other. The angle must be between 0
and 180 degrees.

3.3.3 getNoteFilter
This method is supposed to have access to a list of pick filters for each note. These filters
define the valid models/parts/subparts to be picked for note setting. The method takes two
integer arguments, the first is the note type index and the second is a filter index within this
note type. This means that each note can have many filters. All components matching any
of the filters can be picked.
The return value should be a list of three strings defining the model type, the part type and
the subpart type. The valid string value combinations are described in the table below:

Model type Part type Subpart type

plane panel stiffener -

flange -

pillar -

plate -

bracket stiffener

flange

seam -

hole -

notch -

cutout -

hull curve part -

pipe "-

pipe spool "-

equipment "-

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Configurable Note in AVEVA Marine

Model type Part type Subpart type

cable way "-

cable "-

struct "-

placed volume "-

longitudinal - -

transversal - -

ventilation "-

accommodation "-

curved panel stiffener -

plate -

Irrelevant values should be set to empty strings. Note that it is not necessary to define the
filter all the way down even if it is possible. E.g. if a bracket as a whole should be picked the
subpart type should be empty, or if the whole panel should be picked, also the part type is
set empty.
Giving indices outside the list bounds should result in a nil object return.

3.3.4 getNoteData
This method is supposed to have access to a list of note definition records set by the
method setNoteData described below. It takes an integer item index and returns a note
definition record if the index is within the bounds of the note data list.
The records have the same basic layout, starting with six integer values followed by five
floats and ended by a string. They are interpreted differently depending on the first value.
Four different types exist, the reference symbol, the free symbol, the text in symbol, and the
free text. Irrelevant values should be set to nil values (0, 0.0 and "").
In the example below classes have been defined to encapsulate the record contents only
using relevant values for each type.

• Reference Symbol
The reference symbol is the symbol placed at the start point of the reference string-line
defined by the user, often an arrow. If the note is placed without a reference line, no
reference symbol will appear.
The reference symbol note definition record has the following contents:

(<type>,<font>,<number>,0,0,0.0,0.0,0.0,0.0,<height> "")

<type> is an integer that is set to 1.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Configurable Note in AVEVA Marine

<font> is the symbol font number used to make up the name of the
symbol font according to d012sy<font>.sbs.

<number> is the symbol number within the given font.

<height> is the size of the symbol given as symbol space height.

• Free Symbol
The free symbol is part of the note body. It can be placed freely and can be mixed with text
to form the note.
The free symbol note definition record has the following contents:

(<type>,<font>,<number>,<conn>,<mirr>,<hori>,<vert>,0.0,rotation>,<height>,"")

<type> is an integer that is set to 2.

<font> is the symbol font number. For a description on symbol fonts see
User's Guide Drafting.

<number> is the symbol number within the given font.

<conn> is the number of the symbol connection point to use

<mirr> is a mirror code where 1 means reflection in the u-axis and 2 means
reflection in the v-axis. 0 means no reflection.

<hori> is the horizontal position in mm. If set to 0.0 the symbol is left
padded.

<vert> is the vertical position in mm.

<rotation> is the rotation angle of the symbol.

<height> is the size of the symbol given as symbol space height.

• Text in Symbol
The text in symbol is placed using a predefined symbol text position with certain
characteristics. It is placed in the symbol preceding the text in symbol definition.
The text in symbol note definition record has the following contents:

(<type>,<font>,0,<conn>,0,0.0,0.0,<aspect>,<slant>, <height>,<text>)

<type> is an integer that is set to 12.

<font> is the text font number. For a description of text fonts see User's
Guide Drafting.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Configurable Note in AVEVA Marine

<conn> is the number of the text position in the symbol to use.

<aspect> is the width/height ratio (normally 1.0)

<slant> is the slanting angle of the text (normally 90 degrees).

<height> is the size of the symbol given as symbol space height.

<text> is the text string to insert

• Free Text
The free text is freely placed and can be mixed with symbols to make up the note body.
The free text note definition record has the following contents:

(<type>,<font>,0,0,0,<hori>,<vert>,<aspect>,<slant>,<height>,<text>)

<type> is an integer that is set to 11.

<font> is the text font number.

<hori> is the horizontal position in mm. If set to 0.0 the text is left padded.

<vert> is the vertical position in mm.

<aspect> is the width/height ratio (normally 1.0)

<slant> is the slanting angle of the text (normally 90 degrees).

<height> is the size of the symbol given as symbol space height.

<text> is the text string to insert (maximum 80 characters).

3.3.5 setNoteData
The parameter list is:

setNoteData(<NoteNo>,<ModelType>,<Model>,<PartType>,<Part>
,<SubPartType>,<SubPart>)

This method takes an integer note number referring to the list of notes defined by
getNoteName. The first note has # 1 and so on. The following parameters are used to
specify a model object part that has been picked by the user. The method is called once for
each model part picked and is used to populate an internal list of note definition records to
be read by the method getNoteData.
The <ModelType>,<PartType> and <SubPartType> can have the values
described under getNoteFilter above. <Model> is the name of the model object while
<Part> is the component/part number and <SubPart> is the subordinate component/
part number. Empty strings for the types implies non-valid numbers.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Configurable Note in AVEVA Marine

The implementation of the setNoteData method is entirely up to the user. The suggestion is
to use Data Extraction to retrieve relevant data from the model and then transform it into
note definition records.
When adding note definition records certain rules about the order has to be fulfilled.
• The first record must define a reference symbol.
• Only one reference symbol record is allowed.
• Before a record defining a text in a symbol, a symbol record must have been added
(containing the used text position).

3.3.6 Example
The following example creates five different kind of notes. See TBhook_ConfigNote.txt.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Configurable Note in AVEVA Marine

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Surface Setup

4 Surface Setup

4.1 Creating the Hull Reference Object

The hull reference object is created in the program Initialise Hull Standard (inithull for short).
Upon activation, the following picture shows an example of data:

Figure 4:1. Setting up the Hull reference object.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 4:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Surface Setup

If the hull reference object exists, you will get some predefined values. In the example
above, the name of the hull reference object is DS4HULLREF and it is always located on
the data bank assigned to the environment variable SB_CGDB.
The value for "Name of the hull form" is the surface name. Make sure it is the correct name.
If not, then change it and press the button "Create Object".
If additional surfaces should be used, then press the "Additional Surfaces…" button and
make sure the names are correct:

Figure 4:2. Checking the Hull reference Surface.

To check that the surface set-up is ok, start e.g. Structural Design and cut some curves.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 4:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Surface Setup

Figure 4:3. Verifying the Surface in Structural Design.

Preferably the hull reference object should be made available to the applications via the
environment variable SB_HREF.
If the default files have been copied from a previously used project, there might be some old
references to the hull reference object via default parameters. If so remove them.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 4:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Surface Setup

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 4:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Excess and Weld

Bevel Excess and Weld

© Copyright 1974 to current year. i 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Excess and Weld

© Copyright 1974 to current year. ii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

1 Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

1.1 Background
A ship is constructed by the assembly of parts to larger and larger units. In almost all
assembly operations parts or assemblies are welded together. Each weld combines two
parts and in at least one of the parts an edge of the part is involved. Edges to be welded
must in most cases be prepared in a special way to create proper conditions for the type of
welding that is selected. This is done by the application of bevel preparation along edges
according to a set of predefined bevel types.
AVEVA Marine has an advanced facility for the set-up, customisation and application of
bevels in the modelling and fabrication of parts. The purpose of this document is to give a
complete description of this facility.

1.2 Scope of AVEVA Marine Bevel Handling

The AVEVA Marine bevel facility covers several different aspects:
1. The types of bevels that are supported.
2. The types of structural members for which bevelling is supported.
3. The phases of design and production where the AVEVA Marine bevelling is involved.
Some details on these aspects are given below.

1.2.1 Bevel Types and Types of Connections

AVEVA Marine has support for the bevelling used in two main types of connections.
1. Two structural members (mostly plates) lying in principally the same plane are
connected along edges. Such a connection is called a butt joint and the corresponding
welding is called butt welding.
2. Two structural members are mounted at an angle to each other - one element (plate or
profile) is welded along an edge to the surface of another member (normally a plate).
This type of connection is achieved by what is called fillet welding.
The picture below shows a typical example of one butt joint and one fillet joint.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:1. A typical example of one butt joint and one fillet joint.

The shape of an edge involved in butt and fillet welding, respectively, may look the same but
they are always described using different bevel types as specified in detail in paragraphs to
follow.

• Butt Welding Bevels, General

Characteristic of the bevels used in butt welding is that the shape of the bevel is constant
along the weld trace, e.g. the opening angles of the chosen bevel types are fixed. On the
other hand, of course the fixed values may be different for different welds.
Depending on differences of the plate thicknesses and in the relative location of the
elements to be connected it may be necessary to have different variants of the basic
geometrical pattern, e.g. by considering the extra machining required for thick plates which
is called chamfer. More about this can be found in paragraphs below.
The nominal geometry of parts with butt bevelling may have to be changed because in this
type of joints it is often necessary to have a gap before welding.

• Fillet Welding Bevels, General

Fillet welding differs from butt welding in two respects:
1. Normally the fillet welds have no variants, i.e. only the basic bevel type is used.
2. Fillet bevel types may be fixed (like butt bevels) but they may also be varying.
Fixed fillet bevel types have constant bevel angles whereas varying bevel types have
angles that may vary along the welding trace. The reason for this may be that the
connection angle between the elements varies, e.g. when a planar member of the internal
structure is tightly connected to a shaped shell member.
Important features of the bevel handling are related to the connection angle between the
connected elements:
1. AVEVA Marine automatically evaluates the connection angle as it varies along the
edge.
2. AVEVA Marine has a facility automatically to pick different bevel types depending on
the thickness of the abutting member and/or the connection angle.
3. Depending on the location of the mould plane and details of the cross-section of the
bevel the nominal geometry of the abutting plate may have to be modified in a rather
complicated way. This may be the case both for bevel types with fixed angles and for
bevel types where the bevel varies.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Full details about various aspects of the AVEVA Marine support for the handling of fillet
bevels are given in paragraphs below.

1.2.2 Types of Parts Supported by Bevel Handling

AVEVA Marine supports bevel definition in most situations where bevel is required by the
fabrication and assembly processes. E.g. bevel may be defined
• in butts joints between plates,
• in fillet joints between plates,
• in profiles along welding trace against plates (fillet joints),
• at profile ends (butt or fillet joints),
• in brackets (butt or fillet joints)
Moreover, AVEVA Marine has support for calculation of bevel angles in the parts of profile
cutouts, welded against the profile section.
Details about these features can be found in this document but also in other documents
describing input for modelling, use of bevelling in different kinds of production control, etc.

1.2.3 Activities Involving Bevelling

The use and application of bevelling in AVEVA Marine extends from the (detail) design
phase through part fabrication.
The definition of the bevelling is logically related to work preparation. However, since the
bevelling may affect the parts and other types of information (e.g. drawings and sketches)
delivered from the detail design phase the bevel is normally introduced in the modelling,
e.g. as part of the detail design activities.
AVEVA Marine has powerful tools to visualize and present bevel information, both in
symbolic hull drawings and in production sketches for plate cutting and other types of
fabrication.
The bevels defined in the model will be extracted together with other part data and will also
affect the geometry of the generated parts. In various types of fabrication the bevel
information may - more or less automatically - be transformed into direct production
control, e.g. in bevel cutting of plates.

1.3 General Principles

1.3.1 Definitions
All standardized bevels are supposed to be an 'instance' of a number of basic bevel types
(or bevel types, for short).
Each bevel type is identified by a number, fixed by AVEVA, and has a number of parameters
associated with it. All the currently available bevel types are specified in detail in this
document.
The customer defines a bevel standard of his own as a number of instances of the basic
bevel types, each identified by a user selected number, called the user bevel code (or
bevel code, for short). Each bevel code is defined by either assigning fixed values to its
parameters or by making them depending on the connection angle between the elements
(fillet welding only!).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

If two plates with different plate thicknesses are butt welded together, the difference might
call for a variant of the basic bevel type. The different variants are also described below.
Such a variant might include extra machining, resulting in a chamfer.
The thickness of the thinner plate in a butt joint is called the e-measure of the bevel on the
thicker plate.
Most bevel types have an opening angle in one or both of the sides of the plate. The
opening angle in the positive direction is denoted Alpha and in the negative direction Beta.
U-shaped bevels have a user controllable arc (radius) in their cross section geometry,
otherwise the bevel sections consist of straight lines.
Some bevels have got a nose or a sharp knee. The bevel definition may include a gap
between the centre of the joint and the edge of the plate after preparation (to be filled in
during the welding).
In the bevel definition a bevel has one side "up" and one side "down" related to the upper
and lower plate surfaces, respectively, in the figures below. In this document the upper side
is called the positive side of the bevel, the lower side is called the negative side.
When the positive side of a bevel is upwards in a drawing of a plate the bevel is said to be in
a normal position, when it is downwards it is said to be reflected.
These concepts are illustrated in the figure below.

Figure 1:2. Definition of terms related to bevels.

Some bevel types may also have a second opening angle ( see figure below). The width
of the second opening angle on the edge of the plate, will be found in production data.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

When evaluating the chamfer of a bevel there are two different options available.
The default situation is that the extension of the chamfer line will reach the level of the
abutting plate in the centre of the joint, see the figure below.

Figure 1:3. Normal chamfer.

The second possibility is that the chamfer line reaches the level of the abutting plate in the
knuckle point of the bevel contour, see the figure below.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:4. “Wide” chamfer.

This will lead to a wider chamfer and is selected via assignment (of any value) to the
environment variable SBH_WIDE_CHAMFER.

1.3.2 Bevel Variants

In butt welding of plates in the same plane the basic type (variant 0) is normally used for
plates of equal (or close to equal) thickness.
The variants are used when the thickness differs between the two involved plates.
The bevel variant is normally evaluated quite automatically by the AVEVA Marine bevel
handling. For AVEVA Marine to be able to do so, two surfaces of the involved two plates are
supposed to coincide (or almost coincide), or the centre plane of the two plates must
coincide.
The variants are described below by words and then by pictures individually for all the bevel
types for butt welding.

Variant Description

0 Basic type (see above)

1 Difference in plate thicknesses. Common plane of plates on negative side of

bevel. Chamfer on thicker plate on positive side of bevel.

2 Difference in plate thicknesses. Common plane of plates on positive side of

bevel. Chamfer on thicker plate on negative side of bevel.

3 Difference in plate thicknesses. Common plane of plates on negative side of

the bevel. No chamfer on thicker plate.

4 Difference in plate thicknesses. Common plane of plates on positive side of

bevel. No chamfer on thicker plate.

9 Difference in plate thicknesses. Common centre plane of plates. Chamfer

on thicker plate, equal on both sides.

1.4 Bevel Types for Butt Welding

1.4.1 Butt Welding Bevel Types, General

The bevels for butt welding are always fixed, i.e. they have the same cross section along the
whole welding trace. Parts with butt bevels keep their general characteristics. However, their
nominal geometry will be modified for the bevel gap (if any).
The butt bevel types have all variants as described above. However, not all of them are
relevant for all bevel types.

1.4.2 Butt Bevel Welding Types, Survey

• Bevel Type 10
Bevel type 10 means square butt welding.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:5. Bevel type 10.

Relevant parameter: GAP

There are only three relevant variants in this case.

Figure 1:6. Variants of bevel type 10.

• Bevel Type 11
Bevel type 11 means square butt welding with overlap.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:7. Bevel type 11

Relevant parameter: GAP

Note: Please note that GAP should be defined as a negative value, i.e. the overlap.

• Bevel Type 20
This bevel type is a V-joint (without any nose)
.

Figure 1:8. Bevel type 20.

Relevant parameters: α, GAP

Variant 3 is irrelevant since it cannot be separated from variant 0

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:9. Variants of bevel type 20.

• Bevel Type 30
This bevel type is an Y-joint, i.e. a V-joint with a nose (of fixed height)

Figure 1:10. Bevel type 30.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:9 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Relevant parameters: α, NOSE, GAP

NOSE < 0 means that the height of the nose is defined as the distance from the upper
surface of the plate, i.e. the nose height is T -ABS( NOSE) (T is plate thickness).
If ABS(NOSE) = N (0<N<1) then the nose height will be calculated as NOSE = N * E (where
E is the e-measure of the joint as defined in paragraph ??.3.1 above)
Variant 3 is irrelevant since it cannot be separated from variant 0.

Figure 1:11. Variants of bevel type 30.

• Bevel Type 31
This bevel type is an Y-joint with an angle defined for the nose.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:10 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:12. Bevel type 31

Relevant parameters: ALPHA, NOSE, NOSE_ANGLE, GAP

In the picture above the angle a is defined by parameter NOSE_ANGLE and the angle a2 is
defined by parameter ALPHA.
NOSE < 0 means that the height of the nose is defined as the distance from the upper
surface of the plate, i.e. the nose height is T -ABS( NOSE) (T is plate thickness).
If ABS(NOSE) = N (0<N<1) then the nose height will be calculated as NOSE = N * E (where
E is the e-measure).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:11 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:13. Variants of bevel type 31

• Bevel Type 33
This bevel type is a variant of the Y-joint (type 30) where the "V"-shaped opening is replaced
by a "U".

Figure 1:14. Bevel type 33.

Relevant parameters: α, NOSE, RAD, GAP

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:12 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Variant 3 is irrelevant since it cannot be separated from variant 0

.

Figure 1:15. Variants of bevel type 33.

• Bevel Type 40
This bevel type is a "K" bevel, i.e. open in both directions with a nose. The bevel is
symmetric, i.e. the opening angles in both directions are equal and the nose is centred in the
middle of the plate (in variant 0)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:13 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:16. Bevel type 40

Relevant parameters: α, NOSE, GAP

If NOSE=N (0<N<1) then the nose height will be calculated as NOSE=N*E.
E is the e-measure of the joint as defined in 18.3.1
.

Figure 1:17. Variants of bevel type 40

• Bevel Type 41
This bevel is an asymmetric variant of the bevel type 40. The asymmetry means that the
opening angles on both sides of the bevel may be different and that the position of the nose
must be defined. This is done as the distance (H) to the lower edge of the nose from the

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:14 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

negative side, cf. the figure below. Apart from these differences the pictures for bevel type
40 are applicable
.

Figure 1:18. Bevel type 41.

Relevant parameters: α, β, NOSE, H, GAP

H may be given as two values: H = ( h, hf)
The second value is interpreted as a factor and H will be given the value MAX (h, hf*E).
If NOSE=N (0<N<1) then the nose height will be calculated as NOSE=N*E.
In both cases E is the e-measure as defined in 18.3.1.

• Bevel Type 42
This bevel type is a variant of the asymmetric K-joint (bevel type 41) where the "V"-shaped
opening on both sides are replaced by "U"-shaped openings. The length of the nose and the
radius of the "U" may be defined on both sides.

Figure 1:19. Bevel type 42

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:15 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Relevant parameters: α, β, H, GAP, NOSE, NOSE_LEN_A, NOSE_LEN_B, RAD, RADB

If NOSE=N (0<N<1) then the nose height will be calculated as NOSE=N*E (where E is the
e-measure).
H may be given as two values: H = ( h, hf)
The second value is interpreted as a factor and H will be given the value
MAX (h, hf * E).

Figure 1:20. Variants of bevel type 42

• Bevel Type 43
This bevel type is a variant of the asymmetric K-joint (bevel type 41) where the "V"-shaped
opening on the positive side is replaced by a "U".
Relevant parameters are: α, β, NOSE, H, RAD, GAP.
Parameters as for bevel type 41. For RAD, see bevel type 33

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:16 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:21. Bevel type 43 with variants.

• Bevel Type 50
This bevel type is an X-bevel, i.e. open in both directions with a sharp knee. The bevel is
symmetric, i.e. the opening angles in both directions are equal and the knee is centred in the
middle of the plate (in variant 0)
.

Figure 1:22. Bevel type 50.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:17 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Relevant parameters are: α, GAP

Figure 1:23. Variants of bevel type 50.

• Bevel Type 51
This bevel is an asymmetric variant of the bevel type 50. The asymmetry means that the
opening angles on both sides of the bevel may be different and that the position of the knee
must be defined. This is done as the distance H in the figure below. Apart from these
differences the pictures for bevel type 50 are applicable.
.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:18 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:24. Bevel type 51.

Relevant parameters: α, β, H, GAP

Regarding H, see bevel type 41.

1.4.3 Butt Welding in Knuckles

Butt bevel codes, defined for a seam along a knuckle line, can be automatically re-
calculated in a way that the knuckle angle is taken into consideration when presenting the
bevel angle. The adjustments to the bevel angles are, by default, made equally on the two
involved parts. By defining the environment variable BEV_NON_SYMM_KNU to any value it
is possible to get the bevel angle adjustments done on only one of the involved parts, e.g. so
that the bevel is kept on a horizontal plate.

1.5 Fillet Welding, Fixed Bevel Types

1.5.1 Fixed Fillet Bevels, General

The bevel types with fixed bevel angles do not change their shape along the welding trace,
e.g. their bevel angles (if any) are fixed.
Fillet bevels have no variants, i.e. chamfer is not supported.
The nominal size of plate parts with these bevel types is affected by the gap (if any)
associated with the bevel code. It may, however, also be changed by considering the details
of the connection, see below.

1.5.2 Part Geometry and Connection Angles

Whenever an edge is connected in a fillet connection to a plate surface, the nominal
geometry of the part may have to be re-calculated depending on the bevel type, the material
thickness and orientation and the connection angle.
This is illustrated in the figures below. For this facility to function it is essential that the
bounding curves have been intersected in the mould plane of the current panel
.

Figure 1:25. Change of nominal part contour.

In the figures the mould plane has been indicated by a cross (X). The nominal limit curve is
in P.
Both figures show a plate edge supposed to have a square bevel.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:19 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

In case A the nominal size need not be changed for the part. In case B the nominal size
must be reduced for the part so that the limit curve is moved from P to P1. This
displacement is not constant but may vary along the curve depending on the connection
angle.
All types of fixed bevels are affected by this change as illustrated in another figure below
.

Figure 1:26. Change of nominal contour.

In this case the part size is expanded, being moved from P to P1.
The facility to re-calculate the part geometry is activated by the environment variable name
SBH_BEVEL_ADJUST but also supposes that the option in product number 10517
(“Variable Bevelling in Plates and Profiles”) is available.

1.5.3 Fixed Fillet Bevel Types, Survey

In all the figures below the positive side of the fillet bevel is on the upper side of the
horizontal plate.

• Bevel Type 15
Bevel type 15 is a bevel type for square fillet, cf. the figure below. Only the basic variant is
available
.

Figure 1:27. Bevel type 15.

Relevant parameter: GAP

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:20 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

• Bevel Type 25
This bevel type is similar to bevel type 20 but is used for fillet welding
.

Figure 1:28. Bevel type 25.

Relevant parameters: α, GAP

• Bevel Type 35
This bevel type is similar to type 30 but is used for fillet welding

Figure 1:29. Bevel type 35.

Relevant parameters: α, NOSE, GAP.

If NOSE is negative it is interpreted as the depth of the bevel. Suppose e.g. that NOSE is
assigned -6 and that the thickness is T. Then NOSE = T -6.

• Bevel Type 38
This bevel type is similar to type 33 but used for fillet welding

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:21 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:30. Bevel type 38.

Relevant parameters: α, NOSE, RAD, GAP

• Bevel Type 44
This bevel type is similar to bevel type 42 but used for fillet welding.
That bevel type is a variant of the asymmetric K-joint (bevel type 41) where the "V"-shaped
opening on both sides are replaced by "U"-shaped openings. The length of the nose and the
radius of the "U" may be defined on both sides.

Figure 1:31. Bevel type 44

Relevant parameters: α, β, H, GAP, NOSE, NOSE_LEN_A, NOSE_LEN_B, RAD, RADB

If NOSE=N (0<N<1) then the nose height will be calculated as NOSE=N*E (where E is the
e-measure).
H may be given as two values: H = ( h, hf)
The second value is interpreted as a factor and H will be given the value

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:22 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

MAX (h, hf * E).

• Bevel Type 45
This bevel type is similar to the symmetric bevel type 40 but used for fillet welding
.

Figure 1:32. Bevel type 45.

Relevant parameters: α, NOSE, GAP

• Bevel Type 46
This bevel type is similar to bevel type 41 but used for fillet welding
.

Figure 1:33. Bevel type 46.

Relevant parameters: α, β, NOSE, H, GAP

H may be given two values: H = (h, hf). The second value is interpreted as a factor and H
will be given the value MAX (h, hf*T), where T is the plate thickness. If one value is given, hf
is supposed to be 0.

• Bevel Type 48
This bevel type is similar to bevel type 43 but used for fillet welding.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:23 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:34. Bevel type 48.

Relevant parameters: α, β, NOSE, H, RAD, GAP.

For use of H, see type 46.

• Bevel Type 55
This bevel type is similar to the symmetric bevel type 50 but used for fillet welding
.

Figure 1:35. Bevel type 55.

Relevant parameters: α, GAP

• Bevel Type 58
This bevel type has the same shape as type 51 but is used for fillet welding, i.e. it is an
asymmetric X-bevel (see the figure below)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:24 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:36. Bevel type 58.

Relevant parameters: α, β, H, GAP

For H, see bevel type 46.

1.6 Fillet Welding, Bevel Types With Varying Angles

1.6.1 Varying Bevels, General

AVEVA Marine has a set of reserved bevel types for which the parameters may change
depending on the connection angle (see below). The only parameters that may change
along the welding trace are the angles of the bevel, either one or both of them (for X-joints).
If you disregard the changing angle many of these bevel types look equal to the fixed angle
bevels.
For parts with these bevel types the geometry of bevelled edges will have to be recalculated
in the same way (and on the same conditions) as described above.

1.6.2 Definitions
In order for the survey of bevel types with varying bevel angle to become sensible it is
necessary to define some concepts used in this context.
The automatic selection of bevel against other structures, e.g. in a plate edge against the
shell, is - for a certain production line - in principle dependant on two factors, namely the
thickness of plate and - primarily - on the angle between the plate and the surface against
which it is welded (=connection surface). This angle is here called the connection angle
and is in each point measured in a normal plane to the part contour. It is measured relative
to the normal of the mould plane of the part in the direction from where it is regarded. For a
plate part this is the direction of the positive w-axis of its local co-ordinate system, for a
profile (web) it is the mould line side, for a profile flange it is the top view direction. The
connection angle is said to be positive if it creates an open "wedge" in this direction,
negative otherwise, see the figures below. The connection angle is in this document
denoted CON

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:25 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:37. Definition of connection angle.

From the previous figure with a plane panel it might not be directly obvious how to define the
connection angle for a stiffener. Therefore the figure below shows two stiffeners with
different connection angle. The connection angle is, once again, denoted CON.

Figure 1:38. Definition of connection angle for a shell stiffener.

As can be seen, it is important in which direction the flange is pointing. The connection
angle is said to be negative, if the flange is pointing away from the surface. And positive
otherwise. (Of course, not every stiffener has a flange with a unique direction, but you can
always temporarily change to e.g. an L-bar).
In a bevel type with varying angles parts of the bevel section may be tightly connected to the
connection surface. However there is also a possibility that some angles are fixed, or that a
bevel angle is set equal to the connection angle with a certain angular offset. This offset is
below referred to as DIFF, see the figure below for an example

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:26 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:39. Example of “angular offset”.

1.6.3 Varying Fillet Bevel Types

All the basic bevel types for fillet joints are shown below with their parameters. The positive
side of the bevel is indicated by a cross (X). In most cases the GAPs of fillet bevels are 0.
In all the bevel sketches the connection angle (CON) is supposed to be positive, unless
otherwise specified.

• Bevel Type 16
This is a completely tight joint with a full fitting (the figure shows a negative CON)
.

Figure 1:40. Bevel type 16.

A connection angle not equal to zero will result in a V-shaped bevel.

Relevant parameters: α, GAP
Varying parameter: α

CON>0: The bevel should be turned so that the positive side is turned downwards.

CON<0: The positive side should be turned upwards, see the figures below.

This means that α = -CON

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:27 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:41. Side selection depending on connection angle.

• Bevel Type 17
This is a semi-tight bevel type where the lower part of the joint is parallel to the connection
surface and the upper part is vertical
.

Figure 1:42. Bevel type 17.

Relevant parameters: β, NOSE, GAP

Varying parameter: β

| NOSE | <1 Means that NOSE is defined as factor to be multiplied by the actual
plate thickness to get the height of the nose.

NOSE > 0 Means that NOSE is the height of the vertical (upper) part of the
joint,

NOSE < 0 Means the height of the lower, tightly connected nose.

(e.g. NOSE=0.5 means that the "knee" of the bevel is in the middle
of the plate)

CON>0: The positive side of the bevel is upwards (as in the figure above).

CON<0: The positive side must be turned downwards.

This means that β = CON

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:28 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

• Bevel Type 26
This is a V-joint bevel type where the bevel angle varies. It is normally supposed to have a
certain angular offset relative to the connection surface
.

Figure 1:43. Bevel type 26.

Relevant parameters: α, DIFF, GAP

Varying parameter: α
α is defined as depending on CON with a fixed angular offset.

CON>0: The positive side of the bevel is normally supposed to be turned upwards
(as in the figure above).

CON<0: Positive side downwards.

This means that α = DIFF - CON

• Bevel Type 36
Bevel type 36 is a Y-bevel where the opening angle is depending on the varying connection
angle in a similar way as described for bevel type 26 above

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:29 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:44. Bevel type 36.

Relevant parameters: α, DIFF, NOSE, GAP

Varying parameter: α

| NOSE | <1 Means that NOSE is defined as factor to be multiplied

by the actual plate thickness to get the height of the
nose.

NOSE > 0 Means that the height of the actual toe (the vertical
(lower) part of the bevel contour),

NOSE < 0 Means the nose height is calculated as T- ABS(NOSE)

(T is the plate thickness), i.e. the nose height is defined
by the distance from the positive side to the knuckle
point of the nose.

(E.g. NOSE=0.5 means that the "knee" of the bevel is in the middle of the plate)

CON>0: The positive side of the bevel is normally supposed to

be turned upwards (as in the figure above).

CON<0: The positive side is turned downwards.

This means that α = DIFF - CON

• Bevel Type 39
This bevel type is a Y-joint with a varying connection angle defined for the nose, that is, the
nose is supposed to be tightly connected.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:30 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:45. Bevel type 39

Relevant parameters α, α2, DIFF, NOSE, GAP

Varying parameters: α, α2
α is defined as depending on the connection angle CON: α = -CON
α2 is defined as depending on the connection angle CON with a fixed angular offset: α2 =
DIFF - CON
NOSE < 0 means that the height of the nose is defined as the distance from the upper
surface of the plate, i.e. the nose height is T -ABS( NOSE) (T is plate thickness).
If ABS(NOSE) = N (0<N<1) then the nose height will be calculated as NOSE = N * E (where
E is the e-measure)

CON < 0: The positive side should be turned upwards.

CON > 0: The positive side should be turned downwards.

• Bevel Type 47
This bevel type is a variant of the asymmetric K-joint (bevel type 41) where the bevel angles
in both directions may vary.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:31 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:46. Bevel type 47

Relevant parameters: α, β, H, GAP, NOSE, DIFF-A, DIFF-B

Varying parameters: α, β
The angular offsets are individual to a and b and have here been denoted DIFF-A and DIFF-
B respectively.
If NOSE=N (0<N<1) then the nose height will be calculated as NOSE=N*E (where E is the
e-measure).
H may be given as two values: H = ( h, hf)
The second value is interpreted as a factor and H will be given the value
MAX (h, hf * E).
α = DIFF-A - CON
β = DIFF-B + CON

• Bevel Type 49
This bevel type is a variant of the asymmetric K-joint (bevel type 41) where the bevel angles
in both directions may vary. The bevel type has a tight connection on the nose.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:32 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:47. Bevel type 49

Relevant parameters: α, β, H, GAP, NOSE, DIFF-A, DIFF-B

Varying parameters: α, β
The angular offsets are individual to a and b and have here been denoted DIFF-A and DIFF-
B respectively.
If NOSE=N (0<N<1) then the nose height will be calculated as NOSE=N*E (where E is the
e-measure).
H may be given as two values: H = ( h, hf).
The second value is interpreted as a factor and H will be given the value MAX (h, hf * E).
α = DIFF-A - CON
β = CON
β2 = DIFF-B + CON

• Bevel Type 37
Bevel type 37 is a Y-bevel with a tight connection (varying angle) of the lower part of the
bevel contour. Normally, the resulting edge will be X-shaped

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:33 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:48. Bevel type 37.

Relevant parameters: α, β, NOSE, GAP

Varying parameter: β (NB: α is fixed in this case!)

| NOSE | <1 Means that NOSE is defined as factor to be multiplied

by the actual plate thickness to get the height of the
nose.

NOSE > 0 Means that the height of the actual toe (the lower part
of the bevel contour),

NOSE < 0 Means the nose height is calculated as T- ABS(NOSE)

(T is plate thickness), i.e. the nose height is defined by
the distance from the positive side to the knuckle point
of the nose.

(E.g. NOSE=0.5 means that the "knee" of the bevel is in the middle of the plate)

CON>0: The positive side of the bevel is normally supposed to

be turned upwards (as in the figure above).

CON<0: The positive side should be turned downwards.

In this case β = CON.

• Bevel Type 56
Bevel type 56 is an X-bevel type with one varying bevel angle. α is varying and β is fixed

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:34 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:49. Bevel type 56.

Relevant parameters: α, β, H, GAP, DIFF

Varying parameter: α (NB: β is fixed in this case)
α is defined as depending on CON with a fixed angular offset: α = DIFF - CON
The position of the "knee" of the X-bevel is defined by H = (h, hf). The interpretation is that
the position of the knee is defined by a distance H = MAX(h, hf*T) (where T is the plate
thickness). By setting h=0 then H will always be a factor times the plate thickness.

H> 0: Means that the position of the knee is measured from

the negative side of the bevel.

H <0: Position measured from the positive side.

CON>0: The positive side of the bevel is normally supposed to

be turned upwards (as in the figure above).

CON<0: Positive side downwards.

In this case α = DIFF - CON.

• Bevel Type 57
Bevel type 57 is an X-bevel type where the bevel angle in both directions may vary

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:35 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:50. Bevel type 57.

Relevant parameters: α, β, DIFF_α, DIFF_β, H, GAP

Varying parameters: α, β
(The angular offsets are individual to α and β and have here been denoted DIFF_α and
DIFF_β, respectively.)
This bevel type is very similar to type 56 but also β may vary (with an angular offset). H is
treated as for bevel type 56.
α= DIFF_α - CON
β= DIFF_β + CON
This bevel type may in principle be used also in areas where the connection angle shifts
from positive to negative.

1.7 Customer Set-up of Bevel Standards

Using the (extended) bevel handling of AVEVA Marine there is no default bevel standard
built into AVEVA Marine, only the possibility to establish one. Therefore, each customer is
supposed to establish a bevel standard of his own. This standard is based on the general
principles that have been outlined above.
The customer set-up takes place via a bevel definition file. This paragraph specifies how to
create and handle such a file.

1.7.1 Bevel Definition File

The bevel definitions are made by writing input in an ordinary text file in a special syntax,
described in detail in following paragraphs.
The input text file is "compiled" into an object named "__SBH_BEVEL_CTRL__" by a
function of the utility inithull. This object is stored on the data bank assigned to the
environment variable SB_OGDB and will be read into the application programs when used.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:36 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

The AVEVA Marine bevel handling is activated by assignment of the environment variable
SBH_BEVEL_CTRL. Suppose that it has been assigned the following value:
n:\usr\projdir\bevel_def
Then the total file specification of the input file is formed by adding the file extension.dat, i.e.
n:\usr\projdir\bevel_def.dat
As the result of the compilation there will also be a receipt listing the name of which is
formed by adding the file extension .lst, i.e.
n:\usr\projdir\bevel_def.lst
In addition to a print-out of the input this list may contain error messages.
The extended bevel handling is activated by the existence of this object on the data bank.

1.7.2 Automatic Bevel Definition

The possibility to let the system automatically find which bevel to use is activated via the
environment variable SBH_BEVEL_SETS. This is a text file that contains one or several
keywords indicating which of the edge types that should activate the automatic bevel
definition.
The valid keywords are:
• CUTOUT_SET = <set_no>
• BRACKET_SET = <set_no>
• CLIP_SET = <set_no>
• DOUBLING_SET = <set_no>
• HOLE_SET = <set_no>
• PROF_END_SET = <set_no>
• PROF_TRACE_SET = <set_no>
Where <set_no> is a SET defined in the bevel definition.
If the keyword for a certain edge is defined then the SET must also be defined in the bevel
definition to be used in combination with the AUTO_SELECT statement (see Customer
Control of Continuously Varying Bevel).
The automatic selection can be overridden by setting the bevel code to minus one (-1) when
creating the specific component, e.g. if automatic bevel is defined for profile traces and no
bevel is to be defined for one profile trace then TBEV should be set to -1.
In the same way it is also possible to override the automatic selection by giving a specific
bevel code e.g. TBEV=250.
The PROF_END_SET and PROF_TRACE_SET are valid for both planar stiffeners and
shell stiffeners.

1.8 Bevel Definition Language

The syntax of the bevel definition language is based on the principles of the The Interpreter
Language (TIL). This means e.g. that in the syntaxes and examples below all keywords may
be abbreviated according to the general rules of TIL.
A number of statement types define different characteristics of the bevelling. All these
statement types are specified in detail below.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:37 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

1.8.1 Parameters
In the specification of the bevel definition quite a number of parameters are mentioned, all of
which are listed below. Some of them are given values in the definition file, others are
calculated from the given parameters and are referred to when defining texts.

(Basic) bevel type

Variant

(User) bevel code See Definitions in Definitions

Gap

Chamfer

Alpha (α) Opening angle on the upper side of a bevel with opening (e.g. V-
type bevels). For symmetric K- and X-joints, Alpha is valid also as
the opening angle on negative side.

Alpha2 Second opening angle on the positive side of a bevel. Calculated

for bevel types 31 and 39.

Beta (β) Opening angle on negative side of K- and X-type bevels. For
symmetrical bevel types, Beta by definition is equal to Alpha and
should not be separately defined.

Beta2 Second opening angle on the negative side of a bevel. Calculated

for bevel type 49.

E Short for the E-measure of a joint (cf. Definitions in Definitions).

Calculated parameter (or user given in modelling).

H H-measure of the joint, i.e. the distance to the nose/knee of K- and

X-bevels (cf. the figure in the survey of the bevel types). The
detailed interpretation of this parameter has been specified
individually for each bevel type above.

D_TS, D_OS The depth of the joint, measured from the positive side and the
negative side, respectively. In case of chamfer the depth is
measured from the point where the extended chamfer line
intersects the vertical edge line of the bevel, cf. the figure below.
These two parameters are calculated from other parameters.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:38 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:51. Calculated bevel parameters.

Nose Height of nose in the basic bevel type (relevant for certain bevel
types only).

W_CHA Width of chamfer, measured from the vertical line through the edge
of the bevel (cf. the figure above). Calculated parameter.

Figure 1:52. Calculated width caused by second opening angle on

positive side.

ANGLE2_WTS Width caused by second opening angle on positive side.

Calculated for bevel types 31 and 39.

ANGLE2_WOS Width caused by second opening angle on negative side.

Calculated for bevel type 49.

OTH_TS Height of chamfer on the positive side and on the negative side,
OTH_OS respectively ("this side" and "other side"). Calculated parameters.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:39 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

RAD Radius of arc of "U"-shaped opening. RAD is relevant only for

bevel types 33, 38, 43 and 48.

RADB Radius of arc on negative side of "double U"-shaped opening.

Relevant for bevel types 42 and 44.

NOSE_LEN_A Length of nose, on positive side, for "double U"-shaped opening.

Relevant for bevel types 42 and 44.

NOSE_LEN_B Length of nose, on the negative side, for "double U"-shaped

opening. Relevant for bevel types 42 and 44.

NOSE_ANGLE Fixed angle at the nose. Relevant for bevel type 31.

1.8.2 Statements for Standard Values and Tolerances

• CHAMFER Statement
The CHAMFER statement defines the normal chamfer angle for bevel variants with
chamfer.

Syntax

CHAMFER, <angle> ;

Default: <angle> = 18;

This standard angle can be overruled in the definition of each separate bevel code.

• VARIANT Statement
The VARIANT statement sets up the conditions for selection of bevel variants, e.g. for when
a bevel should be given a chamfer.

Syntax:

VARIANT [/TOL=<tol>]
[/LIM=<th_lim>]
[/OPEN=(<diff_lt>[,<diff_gt>])]
[/SQUARE=(<diff_lt>[,<diff_gt>] )]
;

The attributes have the following interpretation:

TOL defines a tolerance, used in judging whether the surfaces

of the involved plates coincide or not. If the difference in
position is smaller than or equal to <tol> then they are
supposed to coincide.

Default value: 0.5 mm

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:40 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

LIM The difference in the thicknesses of the plates to be joined

by a certain butt bevel type may call for a chamfer in the
thicker plate. However, the allowable difference may be
different for thin and thick plates.

LIM is the 'limit thickness' above and below which the

different tolerance values should be used (cf.
<diff_gt> and <diff_lt> in the OPEN and SQUARE
attributes). It is the thickness of the thinner of the two
involved plates that should be used in the check.

Default value: 10 mm

OPEN This attribute is used to define the two differences (to be

used when the plate thickness >LIM and <=LIM,
respectively) against which a check should be made for
chamfer on the "open" side of bevels, i.e. for both sides of
X-bevels and on the open side of V- and Y-bevels.

If only one value is given this is supposed to be valid

independent of LIM.

Default values:
<diff_lt> = 3 mm
<diff_gt> = 5 mm
Example:
Suppose that the default values are used and that the
plate thicknesses are 12 and 16 mm. The difference is 4
mm. Since the thinner plate (12 mm) is thicker than the
limit (10 mm) comparison should be made to the greater
tolerance value (=5). Since 4 < 5, select a variant without
chamfer.
Changing the plate thicknesses to 9 and 13, i.e. keeping
the difference, would result in a variant with chamfer, since
comparison should be made with the tolerance for thinner
plates (=3).

SQUARE Corresponding to OPEN but valid for both sides of square

butts and the negative side of V- and Y-bevels.

Default values: <diff_lt>= <diff_gt> = 3 mm

1.8.3 Text and Symbol Statements

The text statements facilitate the definition of text strings to be set in drawings and burning
sketches.
On the lowest level a "basic text string" is formed, based on one specified parameter of a
bevel type. Several such strings may then be concatenated to form "composed strings"
which are the ones set in drawings and burning sketches.
A composed text string may be formed by the combination of up to 10 "basic texts".

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:41 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

• BASIC_TEXT Statement
The basic text is a numbered text, consisting of:
• a prefix,
• one parameter of the bevel converted into a string,
• a suffix.
Optionally, arbitrary texts may be defined as basic strings without reference to any bevel
parameter.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:42 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Syntax:

BASIC_TEXT,<no>
/PARAMETER=<parameter>
/AFFIX=(<prefix>[,<suffix>])
[/SKIP_BETA]
[/SKIP_ZERO_WELD]
[/DECIMALS=<no_dec>]
;

The attributes have the following interpretation:

<no> is the customer defined number of the resulting text string (>0 or
<0).

<no>::= <integer>
The text number 0 is reserved and has a special sense (see
DRAW_TEXT Statement and NEST_TEXT Statement below).

PARAMETER refers normally to one of the bevel parameters, listed in a

separate section above. The corresponding numeric item
referred to will be converted into a string.

<parameter>::=
ALPHA |
ALPHA2 |
BETA |
BETA2 |
D_TS |
D_OS |
E |
NOSE |
W_CHA |
ANGLE2_WTS |
ANGLE2_WOS |
OTH_TS |
OTH_OS |
WELD_SIZE |
ANY
ALPHA Alpha as described above will be converted into a string.

ALPHA2 Second opening angle on the positive side.

BETA Ditto Beta.

BETA2 Second opening angle on the negative side.

D_TS Ditto D_TS (Depth, this side).

D_OS Ditto D_OS (Depth, other side).

E Ditto E (Thickness of thinner plate).

NOSE Ditto Nose.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:43 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

W_CHA Width of chamfer.

ANGLE2_WTS Width caused by second opening angle on the positive side.

ANGLE2_WOS Width caused by second opening angle on the negative side.

OTH_TS Height of chamfer "this" side.

OTH_OS Height of chamfer "other" side.

WELD_SIZE Size of (fillet) weld.

ANY Used to define an arbitrary basic text, not based on any bevel
parameter. It does not make sense to assign any suffix in this
case.

<prefix> Defines a string to be set before the indicated item. May be an

empty string.

<suffix> Ditto after the item. May be an empty string.

The character '%' (per cent) in any of these two strings will be replaced by the symbol for
degrees (i.e. a small circle) in the resulting string.

/SKIP_BETA The whole basic text should be skipped if Beta=Alpha.

Irrelevant for other parameters than BETA.

/ An empty text string should be generated if the weld size is zero.

SKIP_ZERO_WELD
<no_dec> indicates the number of decimals to be used in the conversion of
the indicated parameter into a string.

Default: 0.

Example:

1. Suppose that Alpha=25. Then the statement

BASIC_TEXT, 1 /PAR=ALPHA /AFFIX=('', '%') ;

would create the basic text number 1 as:

'25o' (Read 'o' as the degree symbol!)

2. Suppose that the thickness is 26 mm, the E-measure 20 mm and that the chamfer
angle is 14 degrees.

BASIC_TEXT,10 /PAR=E /AFFIX= ('TS chmf. to ', '')/DEC=1 ;

BASIC_TEXT,11 /PAR=W_CHA /AFFIX=(' ,w.', '') ;

would create the following basic strings as numbers 10 and 11:

’TS chmf. to ’20.0’ and ’,w. 24’, respectively.

3. BASIC_TEXT,90 /PAR=ANY /AFFIX='½+½' ;

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:44 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Example:

defines basic text number 90 as '½ + ½'.

4. The following statements might establish almost all the basic texts required for a
customer to define his own bevel texts.
The numbers used here will be referred to in the examples of other statement types.

BASIC_TEXT, 10 /PAR=ALPHA /AFFIX= ('' , '%') ;

BASIC_TEXT, 11 /PAR=ALPHA /AFFIX= ('TS ', '%') ;
BASIC_TEXT, -11 /PAR=ALPHA /AFFIX= ('OS ', '%') ;
BASIC_TEXT, 20 /PAR=BETA /AFFIX= ('' , '%')
/SKIP_BETA;
BASIC_TEXT, 21 /PAR=BETA /AFFIX= ('TS ', '%') ;
BASIC_TEXT, -21 /PAR=BETA /AFFIX= ('OS ', '% ) ;

BASIC_TEXT, 30 /PAR=D_TS /AFFIX= (' dpth ' , '') ;

BASIC_TEXT, -30 /PAR=D_OS /AFFIX= (' dpth ' , '') ;
BASIC_TEXT, 50 /PAR=E /AFFIX= ('TS chmf. to ', '') /
DEC=1;
BASIC_TEXT, -50 /PAR=E /AFFIX= ('OS chmf. to ', '') /
DEC=1;

BASIC_TEXT, 60 /PAR=NOSE /AFFIX= (' Toe ','') ;

BASIC_TEXT, 70 /PAR=W_CHA /AFFIX=(' w.', '') ;

BASIC_TEXT, 71 /PAR=OTH_TS /AFFIX=('TS Oth. ', '') /
DEC=1 ;
BASIC_TEXT, -71 /PAR=OTH_OS /AFFIX=('OS Oth. ', '') /
DEC=1 ;

BASIC_TEXT, 90 /PAR=ANY /AFFIX= ', ' ;

BASIC_TEXT, 91 /PAR=ANY /AFFIX= ' chmf.' ;
BASIC_TEXT, 92 /PAR=ANY /AFFIX= '½+½' ;

• DRAW_TEXT Statement
The DRAW_TEXT statement is used to define the texts to be set in the bevel notes in
drawings. The text is formed via references to basic texts, defined earlier in the input
scheme.
Each text definition is related to a basic bevel type, i.e. all instances (bevel codes) of one
basic type will have the same text definition. However, each variant of the bevel type has a
text definition of its own. (The resulting texts may, of course, be different because of
differences in the values of the parameters, referred to, even if the definition is identical).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:45 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Syntax:

DRAW_TEXT,<bevel_no>
[/<var_key> = (<b_text>[,<b_text> (2...10)]) (
0...5)
;

The attributes have the following interpretation:

<bevel_no> is the basic bevel type for which the definition is valid.
It must be selected as one of the existing bevel types.

<var_key> is a keyword that defines the variant of the bevel type for which the
text should be valid.

<var_key>::= VAR_0 |
VAR_1 |
VAR_2 |
VAR_3 |
VAR_4 |
VAR_9
The digit indicates the variant number. (Not all combinations of
bevel type and variants are relevant, cf. the survey of bevel types
above).

For fillet bevel types normally only VAR_0 is relevant.

<b_text> is the number of a previously defined basic text (cf. the

BASIC_TEXT Statement above). Up to 10 basic texts may be
concatenated into one text.

For certain bevel types there might be texts above as well as

below the reference lines of the bevel note in the drawing. Giving
basic text number 0 indicates the end of the text above the
reference line and the beginning of the text below the line.

If no 0 has been indicated, there is only text above the line.

Any of the two resulting texts may be empty.

The examples below use the basic texts, defined above in the BASIC_TEXT statement.

Example:

1. DRAW_TEXT,10
/VAR_1= 91
/VAR_2=(0, 91) ;

This would result in the following texts:

• Variant 0: None.
• Variant 1: 'chmf.' above the reference line
• Variant 2: as variant 0 with 'chmf.' added below the reference line.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:46 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Example:

2. DRAW_TEXT, 30
/VAR_0= (10, 60)
/VAR_1= (10, 60, 91)
/VAR_2= (10, 60, 0, 91)
/VAR_4= (10, 60)

This would result in (supposing Alpha=30, Nose=6) (read 'o' as 'degree'):

• variant 0, 2 and 4: '30o Toe 6' (above the reference line)
• variant 1: '30o Toe 6 chmf.' (above the reference line)
• variant 2: 'chmf.' below the reference line

The statements below define a large part of the texts that may be required for a
customer to set up his texts to be used in drawings (however, with no examples for
variant 9).

DRAW_TEXT, 10
/VAR_1= 91
/VAR_2= (0, 91) ;

DRAW_TEXT, 20
/VAR_0= 10
/VAR_1= (10, 91)
/VAR_2= (10, 0, 91)
/VAR_4= (10, 60);

DRAW_TEXT, 30
/VAR_0= (10, 60)
/VAR_1= (10, 60, 91)
/VAR_2= (10, 60, 0, 91)
/VAR_4= (10, 60);

DRAW_TEXT, 40
/VAR_0= (10, 60)
/VAR_1= (10, 60, 91)
/VAR_2= (10, 60, 0, 91)
/VAR_3= (10, 60, 30)
/VAR_4= (10, 60, 30);

DRAW_TEXT, 50
/VAR_0= 10
/VAR_1= (10, 91)
/VAR_2= (10, 0, 91)
/VAR_3= (10, 30)
/VAR_4= (10, 30);

DRAW_TEXT, 51
/VAR_0= (10, 30, 0, 20)
/VAR_1= (10, 30, 91, 0, 20)
/VAR_2= (10, 30, 0, 20, 91)
/VAR_3= (10, 30, 0, 20)
/VAR_4= (10, 30, 0, 20);

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:47 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

• NEST_TEXT Statement
The NEST_TEXT statement is used to define texts to be set along the edges of parts in
burning sketches.
It is built up according to the same principles as the DRAW_TEXT Statement. However, the
parts may be oriented so that the bevel either has its positive side upwards or downwards.
Therefore, special keywords are used to define the texts in normal and mirrored cases. (For
drawing texts this is taken care of by moving the dashed reference line above or below the
solid line).

Syntax:

NEST_TEXT,<bevel_no>
[/<var_key>=<b_text>, (1...10)] (1...12)
;

The attributes have the following interpretation:

<bevel_no> is the basic bevel type for which the definition is valid. It must be
selected as one of the existing basic bevel types.

<var_key> is a keyword that defines the variant and the side (normal/
reflected) of the bevel type for which the text should be valid.

<var_key>::=
NORM_0 |
NORM_1 |
NORM_2 |
NORM_3 |
NORM_4 |
REFL_0 |
REFL_1 |
REFL_2 |
REFL_3 |
REFL_4 |
REFL_9
<b_text> is the number of a previously defined basic text (cf. the
BASIC_TEXT Statement above). Up to 10 basic texts may be
concatenated into one text.

For certain bevel types and variants the texts may have to be
divided into two lines. Giving a basic text number 0 indicates the
end of the first text and the beginning of the second.

If no text 0 has been indicated, there is only one text.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:48 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Example:

NEST_TEXT,10 /NORM_1=( 50, 70)

/REFL_1=(-50, 70)
/NORM_2=(-50, 70)
/REFL_2=( 50, 70) ;

Supposing E= 20, plate thickness= 26 and chamfer angle= 14, this would result in the
following texts:
• variant 1, normal, and variant 2, mirrored: 'TS chmf. to 20.0 w. 24'
• variant 1, mirrored, and variant 2, normal: 'OS chmf. to 20.0 w. 24'
The following input statements define most of the nesting texts that might be required for a
certain customer in burning sketches (with the exception of variant 9). (Of course this is only
one way of doing the same thing. The partition into basic texts could have been done in a
different way and other parameters could have been used).
NEST_TEXT, 10/NORM_1=( 50, 70)
/NORM_2=(-50, 70)
/REFL_1=(-50, 70)
/REFL_2=( 50, 70) ;
NEST_TEXT, 20/NORM_0= 1
/NORM_1=(50, 70, 0, 11)
/NORM_2=(-50, 70, 0, 11)
/NORM_4=( 11, 60)
/REFL_0=-11
/REFL_1=(-50, 70, 0, -11)
/REFL_2=( 50, 70, 0, -11)
/REFL_4=(-11, 60) ;
NEST_TEXT, 30/NORM_0=( 11, 60)
/NORM_1=( 50, 70, 0, 11, 60)
/NORM_2=(-50, 70, 0, 11, 60)
/NORM_4=( 11, 60)
/REFL_0=(-11, 60)
/REFL_1=(-50, 70, 0,-11, 60)
/REFL_2=( 50, 70, 0,-11, 60)
/REFL_4=(-11, 60) ;
NEST_TEXT, 40/NORM_0=( 92, 10, 60)
/NORM_1=( 50, 70, 0, 92, 10, 60)
/NORM_2=(-50, 70, 0, 92, 10, 60)
/NORM_3=( 11, 30, 0,-11, 60)
/NORM_4=( 11, 30, 0,-11, 60)
/REFL_0=( 92, 10, 60)
/REFL_1=(-50, 70, 0, 92, 60)
/REFL_2=( 50, 70, 0, 92, 60)
/REFL_3=( 11,-30, 0,-11, 60)
/REFL_4=( 11,-30, 0,-11, 60) ;
NEST_TEXT, 50/NORM_0=( 92, 10)
/NORM_1=( 50, 70, 0, 92, 10)
/NORM_2=(-50, 70, 0, 92, 10)
/NORM_3=( 11, 30, 90,-11)
/NORM_4=( 11, 30, 90,-11)
/REFL_0=( 92, 10, 60)
/REFL_1=(-50, 70, 0, 92)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:49 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

/REFL_2=( 50, 70, 0, 92)

/REFL_3=( 11,-30, 90,-11)
/REFL_4=( 11,-30, 90,-11) ;
NEST_TEXT, 51/NORM_0=( 11, 30, 90,-21)
/NORM_1=( 50, 70, 0, 11, 30, 90,-21)
/NORM_2=(-50, 70, 0, 11, 30, 90,-21)
/NORM_3=( 11, 30, 90,-21)
/NORM_4=( 11, 30, 90,-21)
/REFL_0=( 21,-30, 90,-11)
/REFL_1=(-50, 70, 0, 21,-30, 90,-11)
/REFL_2=( 50, 70, 0, 21,-30, 90,-11)
/REFL_3=( 21,-30, 90,-11)
/REFL_4=( 21,-30, 90,-11) ;

• BEFORE_SYMBOL_TEXT Statement
The texts in bevel notes are normally placed after the bevel symbol, supposing the bevel is
symmetric, i.e. there is only one "draw text". The BEFORE_SYMBOL_TEXT statement may
be used to define a text to the left of the symbol.

Syntax:

BEFORE_SYMBOL_TEXT, <bevel_no>
[/<var_key>=( <b_text>, (1...10))] (1...6)
;

The attributes have the following interpretation:

<bevel_no> The basic bevel type for which the definition is valid.

<var_key> The attribute that defines the variant of the bevel type for which
the text should be valid.

<var_key>::= VAR_0 |
VAR_1 |
VAR_2 |
VAR_3 |
VAR_4 |
VAR_9
<b_text> The number of a previously defined basic text (cf. the
BASIC_TEXT Statement). Up to 10 basic texts may be combined.
The text may be split into two parts (above and below the
reference line) by reference to a (non-exiting) basic text 0.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:50 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Example (without reference to the basic texts above):

Example:

BEFORE_SYMB_TEXT, 10,
/VAR_0 = (1, 2)
/VAR_1 = (3, 0, 4, 5)
/VAR_2 = (4, 5, 0, 3)
/VAR_9 = (4, 5, 0, 6, 7)
;

• WELD_PROCESS_TEXT Statement
This statement type defines texts that may be added at the "tail" of the bevel notes, mainly
intended to specify the welding process. Any number of weld texts may be defined and they
will all be presented for user selection when a bevel note is set. Note that these texts are
independent of the bevel type.

Syntax:

WELD_PROCESS_TEXT( ,<b_text>, (1...10));

Here,,

<b_text> Number of a previously defined basic texts (cf. the BASIC_TEXT

statement) to be concatenated. At most 10 such texts may be
combined. The text may be split into two (upper and lower text) by
reference to a (non-exiting) basic text number 0.

Example:

WELD_PROCESS_TEXT, 1,2, 0, 3,4;

• SYMBOL_COMBINATION Statement
Normally the symbols to be associated with a certain bevel type and to be presented in a
bevel note are supposed to be uniquely defined by the bevel type. However, AVEVA Marine
also allows that one from a set of predefined symbol combinations may be selected at the
time when the bevel note is set. They will be presented for interactive picking.
Each occurrence of this statement type creates one combination (set) of bevel and weld
symbols.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:51 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Syntax:

SYMBOL_COMBINATION, <symb_comb_no>
[/SYMBOL=( <symb>, ...)]
[/WELD_SYMBOL=( <symb>, ...)]
[/AFTER_TEXT_SYMBOL=( <symb>, ...)]
;

The attributes have the following interpretation:

<symb_comb_no> The number of this symbol combination definition.

SYMBOL See the BEVEL statement below.

WELD_SYMBOL Ditto.

AFTER_TEXT_SYMBOL Ditto.

1.8.4 BEVEL Statement

The BEVEL statement is used to define the bevel codes which are the customer specific
"instances" of the basic bevel types.
All variable parameters must be defined and also the symbols, etc. to be associated with the
current bevel code.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:52 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Syntax:

The attributes have the following interpretation:

<code> is the bevel code to be used in defining the bevelling in the

modelling phase.

<code> can be selected as an arbitrary positive integer

number in the range 1-999.

TYPE is the basic bevel type of which the current code is an instance.

BEV_NAME Is the string representation of the bevel code. This string may be
used instead of the code to refere to the bevel. If BEV_NAME is
defined, the system will if possible use that instead of the code
when bevels are presented.

BEV_NAME_REFL The name for the reflected bevel.

GAP is the gap between the midpoint of the joint and the utmost part
of the bevel contour.

In butt welding (and when the bevel is symmetric) the total gap
will thus be 2*<gap>.

Set to 0 if undefined.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:53 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

ALPHA The opening angle on the positive side of V-, Y-, K- and X-joints.
Moreover, the opening angle on the negative side of
symmetrical K- and X-joints. (Denoted a in the bevel figures
above.)

Compulsory for the bevels with a fixed opening angle in the

positive direction.

VAR_ALPHA Used for bevel types which have an opening angle in the
positive direction varying depending on the connection angle (cf.
the AUTO_SELECT Statement below). Must not be assigned
any value in the BEVEL statement.

BETA The fixed opening angle on the negative side of asymmetric K-

and X-bevels. If not given in these cases, BETA is supposed to
be equal to ALPHA. (Denoted b in the bevel figures above)

VAR_BETA The opening angle on the negative side should be derived from
the connection angle as specified in the AUTO_SELECT
Statement (cf. below). Must not be assigned any value in the
BEVEL statement.

NOSE Height of nose for Y- and K-bevels (compulsory for these bevel
types).

By giving a negative value, the height of the nose will be defined

from the upper edge of the plate (supported only for certain
bevel types).

A value between 0 and 1 is interpreted as a factor (times the

e-measure as defined in 18.3.1, supported only for certain bevel
types).

H Defines the position of the nose/knee in K- and X-type bevels as

specified in detail in connection with each bevel type in the
surveys above (compulsory for asymmetric K- and X-bevels). In
the definition, always suppose a variant 0.

Only one value (=<nose_pos>) is interpreted as an absolute

value.

If two values are given, the second value

(<nose_pos_factor>) is a factor to be multiplied by the
plates thickness (E-measure in butt welding).

The nose position h is then set:

h = max(<nose_pos>,<nose_pos_factor>*E)

(by giving <nose_pos>=0 h is always made a factor of the

plate thickness)

RAD is the radius of the "U"-shaped part of bevel opening.

Compulsory for these bevel types.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:54 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

SYMBOL Defines the symbol(s) to be used in drawings. A certain bevel

code may have to be represented by several symbols.

A negative symbol number indicates that the symbol is reflected

in its own u-axis.

<symb> is the number of the symbol within the bevel symbol

font.

SYMBOL_REF Symbols to be used for the reflected bevel.

AFTER_TEXT_SYM In some special cases there might occur an extra symbol after
BOL the text on the reference line. This attribute is used to select that
symbol.

The "after text" symbols are normally set above the reference
line. However, a negative value means that it should be set
below the reference line.

AFTER_TEXT_SYM Symbols to be used for the reflected bevel.

BOL_REFL
WELD_SYMBOL This attribute is used to define weld symbols that may be set in
addition to the bevel symbols to specify details about the
welding. E.g. it may be used to indicate back-welding in butt
joints and for symbols in fillet welding.

A negative symbol number indicates that the symbol is reflected

in its own u-axis.

WELD_SYMBOL_RE Symbols to be used for the reflected bevel.

FL
SYMB_COMB Reference to symbol combinations. The attribute SYMB_COMB
should not be used in combination with the attributes SYMBOL,
WELD_SYMBOL and AFTER_TEXT_SYMBOL. These attribute
are used when there is only one symbol combination whereas
the SYMB_COMB keyword is used when there are many
alternative combinations, one of which is selected when the
bevel note is set.

<symb_comb_no> is the number of a previously defined symbol combination (cf.

SYMBOL_COMBINATION Statement).

CHAMFER is the chamfer angle of the current bevel code. If not defined, the
default angle set in the CHAMFER Statement will be used.

SYMBOL_REFL Same as the ones without _REFL, but the reflected side
WELD_SYMBOL_RE
FL
NAME_REFL
AFTER_TEXT_SYM
BOL_REFL

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:55 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Example:

1. BEVEL, 101
/TYPE=10
/SYMBOL=(61,-61)
/GAP=0.75
;

2. BEVEL, 301
/NAME=(3VD)
/NAME=REFL=(3VM)
/TYPE=30
/SYMBOL=(62,32)
/SYMBOL_REFL=(63,33)
/AFTER_TEXT_SYMBOL=45
/AFTER_TEXT_SYMBOL_REFL=44
/GAP=0.75
/ALPHA=25
/NOSE=2
;

3. BEVEL, 161
/TYPE=16
/VAR_ALPHA
/SYMBOL=63
;

1.8.5 Customer Control of Continuously Varying Bevel

• General
The handling of varying bevel types has a lot in common with the fixed bevel types but is in
general more complicated from different aspects, of course not least when it comes to
evaluation of the bevel and part geometries. Special is also that the final selection of the
bevel type to large extent is automatic.
Basis for the advanced AVEVA Marine handling of continuously varying bevel angles is the
set-up of the rules that should be applied in this context. The bevel definition language has a
number of statement types that deal exclusively with this matter (in addition to the
statements presented above which are used for continuously varying bevels as well). The
names of statements relevant only for varying bevel types all in AUTO_ and they are
specified in detail below, often combined with examples how the system would use the
information in different situations.
The definition of the connection angle in Definitions is supposed to be kept in mind when
studying the statements below.

• AUTO_SET Statement
One customer may have different rules for how the continuously varying bevel types should
be applied in different production lines. E.g. a panel line with special cutting equipment may
have different rules compared to single part cutting, special materials (like aluminium) may

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:56 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

require separate rules, etc. The collection of rules for one such separate type of production
is called a set. The rules for different sets are quite independent of each other (as
independent as if they were used in different companies!).
The AUTO_SET statements define the different sets that are used by a certain customer.

Syntax:

AUTO_SET, <set_No>
[/NAME=<set_name>]
[/CUTOUT=<number>]
[/BRIDGE=<number>]
;

The attributes have the following interpretation:

<set_No> is the number of the set. It should be a positive integer number in

the range 1 to 32767. The AUTO_SET Statement can be left out if
there is only one set of rules. The only (default) set then has the
number 1 but it need never be used.
NAME An optional name of the set. The name should be unique.
CUTOUT The minimum size of a cutout opening (mm) on a limit before the
cutout will be cut. Cutouts with opening less than this size will be
cut separately as holes.
= 0 (default) All cutouts will be cut separately as holes.
= 9999 All cutouts will be cut normally included in the part
geometry.
Note: This parameter indirectly controls whether an automatically
selected bevel type on a limit is allowed to change at
cutouts.
BRIDGE The width of the bridge between the hole formed from the cutout
and the limit of the part (default=50mm).

• AUTO_RANGE Statement
Within each type of production line (identified by the "set" as defined above) there may be
different rules depending on the thickness of the plate. E.g. for a given connection angle a
thin plate may have a tight V-type of bevel, a thicker plate may (for the same connection
angle) require a semi-tight Y-bevel. The thickness intervals with separate rules within a
certain "set" are called ranges and are defined by the AUTO_RANGE statement.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:57 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Syntax:

AUTO_RANGE,<lim_1>,<lim_2>, ... (1...10)

[/SET = <set_No>]
;

The attributes have the following interpretation:

<lim_i> Defines the upper limits of interval 1, 2, etc. They should be given
in order of increasing plate thickness. The interval limits will be
included in the lower interval.
The number of ranges within one set is restricted to 10.
SET Defines the set for which the range definition is made. It can be left
out if there is only one set.

The AUTO_RANGE statement must follow the AUTO_SET statement, if any, and can be left
out for a set with the same rules for all thicknesses.

• AUTO_SELECT Statement
In most cases the actual bevel type is selected automatically depending on the set, the
connection angle and the plate thickness. The rules for how this should be done are set up
in the AUTO_SELECT statement.
In general, bevel selection should be set up, covering the whole possible connection
angle interval (-90,+90) for all sets and all ranges Syntax

Syntax:

AUTO_SELECT,
[/SET=<set_No>]
[/RANGE=<range_No> (...)]
<gap_selection> | <angle_selection>
/BEVEL = <code>
[/CASE = <case_No>]
;

The attributes have the following interpretation:

SET Defines the set for which the current definition is valid. Must
be given if there is more than one set.

RANGE Defines one or more thickness ranges within the current set
for which the current definition should be used. Must be
given if there is more than one range in the current set.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:58 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

<gap_selection> Specifies the condition that a certain bevel code should be

selected (normally simple vertical cutting) because the
connection angle creates such a narrow wedge that it can
be neglected.

The gap selection takes over the selection on angles as

long as the gap is smaller than the limit above.

<angle_selection> Used when the gap condition has not been fulfilled (or not
defined).

The two selection modes are mutually exclusive in one AUTO_SELECT statement.
For more details about the selection criteria, see below.

BEVEL Bevel code to be chosen if the selection criteria in this

statement are fulfilled. The bevel code must already have
been defined in a BEVEL statement of its own.

The bevel code may be negated, i.e. a mirrored version of a

bevel code may be selected. This means e.g. that the
positive side of the bevel should be turned in the direction of
the negative w-axis for a plate (or planar panel).

When a bevel is mirrored, the connection angle will be

negated before being used to calculate the angle(s) of
the bevel type.

CASE This is a customer defined "case" number, uniquely

identifying the selection resulting from the condition in this
statement.

It is used to control which case to select when a varying

angle along a certain edge would result in different bevel
types along that edge, see the AUTO_PRIORITY
Statement below for details. <case_No> must be unique
within a certain range.

"Gap selection":
Normally, the main criterion for selection of bevel is the connection angle. Suppose a
situation where a tight V-bevel would normally be selected based on the connection angle.
Further suppose that the angle is so small and/or the plate is so thin that the bevel wedge
becomes very narrow, ('g' in the figure below).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:59 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:53. Illustration of gap selection.

In such a situation it is possible to select the bevel type based on the width of the wedge gap
instead of on the angle. This is the interpretation of "gap selection". Thus, if the wedge gap
is smaller than a specified value, then the bevel type according to the "gap selection" should
be selected. The gap selection always takes over even if an "angle selection" has
been defined for the current angle interval and would have resulted in a different
bevel type.
This facility is mainly used to prevent unwanted bevel cutting when the bevel angle is very
small. The selected bevel type would then normally be a square bevel, e.g. of type 15.
<gap_selection>::= /GAP=<max_gap>
If the gap is smaller than <max_gap> irrespective of direction of the connection angle then
the specified bevel code should be selected.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:60 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Angle selection:

The angle selection defines the bevel type that would normally be selected for a given
angle interval. It has the following syntax.

<angle_selection>::=
/INTERVAL =(<low_lim>,<up_lim>)
[/VAR_ALPHA
[/DIFF=<angle_diff>]
[/MIN = <min_angle>]
[/MAX = <max_angle>] ]
[/VAR_BETA
[/DIFF=<angle_diff>]
[/MIN = <min_angle>]
[/MAX = <max_angle>] ]
INTERVAL Defines an interval of connection angles for which the current
definition should be valid.

<low_lim> should be smaller than <up_lim>.

Note, that in case of an interval for negative angles then
ABS(<low_lim>) > ABS(<up_lim>).

For positive angles the upper limit will be included in the interval,
the lower limit for negative angles.

VAR_ALPHA Defines that Alpha should be calculated from CON as described

for different bevel types in Varying Fillet Bevel Types .
VAR_ALPHA may only be used for bevel types which have this
attribute in their BEVEL statement.

DIFF Is used to define an angular offset to be used when calculating

Alpha from CON. Default is 0. See the bevel type survey for its
use.

MIN If the angle as calculated based on the connection angle is smaller

than MIN the angle will be replaced by the value assigned to MIN.

MAX Ditto when larger than MAX it will be replaced by MAX.

This may be used to set a "hard limit" for the bevel angle. Suppose
e.g. that CON varies between -0.5 and +15 degrees and that
normally a tight V-bevel is selected. It might not be possible to
divide the contour of this angle interval into different "segments"
(more details about this will be given in the AUTO_PRIORITY
Statement below). Thus, the tight V-bevel will be selected for this
whole contour. But a V-bevel must not have a negative opening
angle. By setting MIN=0 in this case the connection angle in the
interval [-0.5, 0] will be replaced by 0.

It might be essential to define these limits in order to protect the

burner equipment, e.g. not to violate its turning range.

DIFF, MIN and MAX are position dependent, i.e. must follow
directly after VAR_ALPHA (and VAR_BETA, resp , see below).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:61 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

VAR_BETA Ditto for the opening in the opposite direction, e.g. for X-type
bevels.

Basically the same rules are valid as for VAR_ALPHA (with DIFF,
MIN and MAX).

• AUTO_PRIORITY Statement
The AUTO_SELECT statement specifies the bevel types that should be selected within a
certain set and range as the connection angle varies. It might then happen that along one
contour the angle varies in such a way that the contour should be divided into intervals with
different bevel codes. Suppose that the following AUTO_SELECT statements have been
defined for one range within one set:
AUTO_SELECT /BEVEL=111/ INT=( 0,15), ....;
AUTO_SELECT /BEVEL=222/ INT=(15,30), ....;
AUTO_SELECT /BEVEL=333/ INT=(30,90), ....;
Further suppose that the connection angle varies between 0 and 45 degrees.
The contour should then have been divided into bevel intervals as indicated by the figure
below

Figure 1:54. Bevels according to variation of connection angle.

However, currently AVEVA Marine has no support for automatic partition of an "unbroken"
contour into intervals with different bevels.
(If, on the other hand, the contour is "broken" into pieces by e.g. notches and cutouts, then
these pieces are treated as independent intervals. If, in the example above, the contour
would have been interrupted by notches the result might have become as shown in the
figure below

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:62 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:55. Actually selected bevels in case with notches.

Another alternative is also to define different bevel intervals already in the initial bevel
definition in the modelling function.)
We now return to the initial situation in the first figure above. Since AVEVA Marine currently
does not divide the contour into intervals - which bevel code will then be selected? The
default rule for selection is that the bevel code will be selected which covers the largest
angle interval along the contour (however, if one of the bevel codes results from a gap
selection, this bevel code will never be selected).
(The result of the bevel selection may be that the connection angle in the whole interval may
exceed the allowed limits for the bevel code and that is where the MIN/MAX attributes of
the AUTO_SELECT statement will become useful.)
However, the customer may set up rules to control the selected bevel code, and that is done
by the AUTO_PRIORITY statement which is described below.

Syntax:

AUTO_PRIORITY=(<case_1>,<case_2>,....)
[/SET=<set_No>]
[/RANGE=(<range_No> (2...5) )]
;

SET and RANGE must be given if there is more than one of them.
The "cases" (<case_1>,<case_2>, etc.) are those, optionally defined in the
AUTO_SELECT statement. If a combination of cases according to the list in the statement
above has been found along one contour interval then the first of the given cases, i.e.
<case_1> will be used. The number of cases may vary in the range 2 to 5. For a certain
case to be selected there must be a "hit" on all cases in the same statement, otherwise the
default rule above will be applied. The order of the "cases" in the statement is arbitrary
(apart from the first one). Any number of AUTO_PRIORITY statements may be given,
covering all possible combinations of "cases".

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:63 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

• Example of Bevel Definition for Varying Bevel Angles

The statements below create varying bevel control in a situation with two sets (e.g. to be
produced by two different production facilities). The example does not claim to be a realistic
one.
The first set has the following characteristics:
1. Tight connection (V-bevel) independently of the connection angle and plate thickness
(no "range").
2. If the width of the bevel wedge is smaller than 3 mm, use vertical cutting.
The second set looks like this:
1. It has two ranges for plate thickness thinner and thicker than 15 mm, respectively.
2. For thinner plate (range 1):
1. Tight V-connection until 30 degrees connection angle,
2. Bevel type 17 for angles > 30 degrees.
3. For thicker plate (range 2):
1. bevel type 57 up to 40 degrees,
2. Bevel type 17 for angles >40 degrees.
AUTO_SET, 1 /NAME='STANDARD';
AUTO_SET, 2 /NAME='SPECIAL';
AUTO_RANGE, 15, 999 /SET=2,

BEVEL, 151 /TYPE=15 /SYMBOL=(61,-61);

BEVEL, 161 /TYPE=16 /VAR_ALPHA /SYMBOL=63;
BEVEL, 171 /TYPE=17 /VAR_BETA /NOSE=0.5 /SYMBOL=62;
BEVEL, 571 /TYPE=57 /VAR_ALPHA /VAR_BETA /SYMBOL=62;
!
! Set 1
!
AUTO_SELECT /SET=1 /GAP=3.0 /BEVEL=151;
AUTO_SELECT /SET=1 /INT=(0,89) /VAR_ALPHA /MIN=0 /BEVEL=-161;
AUTO_SELECT /SET=1 /INT=(-89,0) /VAR_ALPHA /MIN=0 /BEVEL=161;
!
! Set 2, Range 1 (T<=15)
!
AUTO_SELECT /SET=2 /RANGE=1 /INT=(0,30) /VAR_ALPHA /MIN=0 /
BEVEL=-161;
AUTO_SELECT /SET=2 /RANGE=1 /INT=(30,89) /VAR_BETA /MAX=45
/BEVEL=171;
AUTO_SELECT /SET=2 /RANGE=1 /INT=(-30,0) /VAR_ALPHA /MIN=0 /
BEVEL=161;
AUTO_SELECT /SET=2 /RANGE=1 /INT=(-89,-30) /VAR_BETA /MAX=45
/BEVEL=-171;
!
! Set 2, Range 2 (T>15)
!
AUTO_SELECT /SET=2 /RANGE=2 /INT=(0,40)
/VAR_ALPHA /DIFF=40 /MIN=0 /MAX=40
/VAR_BETA /MIN=0
/BEVEL=571;
AUTO_SELECT /SET=2 /RANGE=2 /INT=(40,89) /VAR_BETA /
BEVEL=171;
AUTO_SELECT /SET=2 /RANGE=2 /INT=(-40,0)
/VAR_ALPHA /DIFF=40 /MIN=0 /MAX=40

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:64 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

/VAR_BETA /MIN=0
/BEVEL=-571;
AUTO_SELECT /SET=2 /RANGE=2 /INT=(-89,40) /VAR_BETA / BEVEL=-
171;

1.9 End User Handling of Bevelling

This paragraph deals with the situations in which the ordinary designer or draftsman comes
in contact with the bevel handling. It also identifies the most important of those functions that
are involved in the calculations related to bevelling. These situations are:
1. The modelling phase when the bevels are added to the model.
2. The drawing development phase when the bevels are indicated in the drawings.
3. The phase when parts are extracted from the model and stored in the part data banks
of AVEVA Marine.
4. When bevel information is output for production.
More information about this should be found related with the functions in question.

1.9.1 Definition of the Bevels in the Modelling

In plane panel generation the user may define bevelling in the following contexts.
• Along seams in the panel (keywords BEV, RBEV, LBEV in the SEAM statement).
• Along the outer contour of the panel (WELD statement).
• At the ends of profiles (stiffeners, flanges) (keyword BEV) and along the trace of
stiffeners (keyword TBE).
• Along the edges of brackets (keyword BEV).
This is always done by reference to customer defined bevel codes. The format of the user
bevel definition may be:
<bevel>::= [-]<bevel_code>[<variant><e-measure>]

<bevel_code> Number or name of a customer defined instance of one of the

basic bevel types, see below.
If a code is given then it must be a positive integer < 1000.
If a name is given it must have been defined in the bevel object.

The bevel code must be a positive integer < 1000.

<variant> One of the variants as specified above (in the range 1-4, 9 -
normally relevant only for bevel types for butt welding).

<e-measure> The thickness of the plate on the other side of the joint (in mm).
Always two digits (if <10 then a leading 0 should be added).

The minus sign indicates that the bevel should be seen from the opposite side of the panel
or bracket (i.e. in the direction of the negative w-axis of its local coordinate system). For
stiffeners the bevel code is positive if its positive side is seen from the mould line side (web)
or top (flange), negative otherwise.
If bevel names are used and <variant> and <e-measure> should be given then the following
keywords are available:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:65 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

BVA to give the bevel variant.

BEM for e-measure.
BVA and BEM is used together with BEV.
TBV and TME is the bevel variant and e-measure to be given together with TBE (trace
bevel).

Examples:

BEV = -101

BEV = 201107

BEV = 305120

As an alternative the bevel can be given as a name. In that case; variant, e-measure and
side are given with separate keyword.

Examples:

BEV = V50

BEV = V50, BVA=1, BEM=7

BEV = K15, BVA=1, BEM=20

Remarks:
1. Thus the user defined bevel must be either a 3-digit or a 6-digit number (actually,
decimals would be accepted in the e-measure). However, bevel codes < 100 are
accepted.
2. Along seams in panels the user normally specifies only the bevel code. From customer
defined rules the system will automatically evaluate the variant and the e-measure from
the relative positions of the involved plates.
However, if these parameters are defined directly by the user they will always override
the values that would otherwise have been derived based on the bevel definition file.
3. In other cases (bevel along outer contours, in brackets and in profiles) the variant and
the e-measure must be user supplied. If variant 0 is wanted, of course only the bevel
code need be given.
(An exception is if the keyword EQUAL has been used in the WELD statement. If so,
the variant will be evaluated automatically.)

1.9.2 Bevel Information in Drawings

The bevelling added to the model is available for drawing development purposes in mainly
three different ways:
• As “blown up” detail sketches of joints.
• As symbolic indications along joints in drawings.
• Cross-section of plane panels show the bevel shape at each intersected seam and
boundary.
Restriction: In this case currently no automatic evaluation of chamfer of boundaries
will take place. I. e. even if two panels are butt connected and the thickness difference

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:66 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

between them implies chamfer, no chamfer will be shown in the view (unless explicitly
set by the designer).
These features are briefly described below.

• Detail Sketches
A true picture of the cross section of a joint between plates may be generated automatically
(this is done via the menu function Planar > View > Detail > Seam of Hull Modelling). The
detail sketch is evaluated in the position along a seam or outer contour, indicated by the
user. The sketch is shown at scale 1:1.
The figure below shows some typical examples
.

Figure 1:56. Examples of “detail views” of joints.

No text and no dimensions are set automatically in the picture. However, it may be the basis
for dimensioning, etc. like all other pictures in a drawing. In butt joints in/between panels
chamfer (if any) will be evaluated automatically. When such a detail view is recreated the
automatically evaluated chamfer between panels will currently be lost.

• Bevel Notes in Drawings

It is possible to add symbolic information about the bevelling in a standardized format, so
called bevel notes. This can be done in the following cases:
• Along joints (seams, outer contours) in plane views of plates.
• Ditto along the edges of brackets.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:67 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

• Along traces of stiffeners in symbolic drawings.

• Along the trace and edges of the endcuts in planar views of stiffeners.
The bevel notes are made in accordance with international standards, e.g. ISO 4063 and
(especially) DIN 1912, Part 5, which to a large extent are covered in those parts relevant in
shipbuilding. For details, see these standards.
The constituents of a bevel note are:
• An arrow line with an arrow.
In joints with differences in complexity of the bevels on both sides of the joint, the arrow
should point to the most complex bevel.
• One or two reference lines, connected to the arrow line.
One line is solid, the other dashed.
In quite symmetric bevels there is only one (solid) reference line. Otherwise, the
relative position of the two reference lines indicate the orientation of the bevel.
If the upper line is solid the positive side of the bevel is upwards in the drawing (i.e.
facing you). If the upper line is dashed the negative side of the bevel is turned upwards.
On and below the reference lines the bevel note may contain texts and symbols as
described in more detail below
• The text on and below the reference line(s) is derived from the bevel type/variant and is
customer defined by the DRAW_TEXT and BEFORE_SYMB_TEXT statements, see
above.
The text to the left of the bevel symbol is valid for the bevel on the side of the joint,
pointed to by the reference arrow. Text may occur both above and below the reference
lines.
• The symbols may be used to indicate the bevel type, the welding, etc.
The symbols are selected from a special symbol font with number 90. The standard
contents of that symbol font are shown below in Symbol Font for Bevel Handling.
• In case there is a special weld process text defined (by the WELD_PROCESS_TEXT
statement) the bevel note may optionally contain a trailing such text. This text will be
preceded by a "fork", connected to the reference line.
Let us introduce the following abbreviations:

xbs Text before symbols (xbsu=upper text when split into text above and below
reference line, xbsl for lower), from BEFORE_SYMBOL_TEXT statement.

xbv Bevel text from DRAW_TEXT statement (xbvu and xbvl when split).

xwp Weld process text from WELD_PROCESS_TEXT statement (xwpu and

xwpl for upper and lower text when split).

sybv Bevel symbol (from attribute /SYMBOL in BEVEL statement).

sywd Weld symbol from attribute /WELD_SYMBOL from BEVEL statement.

syaf Symbol from attribute /AFTER_TEXT_SYMBOL of the BEVEL statement.

When, in case of an asymmetric butt joint, there is a need for individual texts/symbols, let
capital letters of the abbreviations above be used for information related to the side of the
joint, pointed at by the arrow.
Any of the constituents in the specification below may, of course, be empty.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:68 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

In case of a symmetrical butt joint and in case of fillet joints the most complicated layout of a
bevel note may become as in the figure below
.

Figure 1:57. Bevel note for a symmetrical joint, most general care.

If none of the texts are split into upper and lower parts the note will become simplified as
shown by the next figure
.

Figure 1:58. Bevel note for symmetrical joint, no “under line” text.

The most complex layout of a bevel note for an asymmetric joint would have the following
layout
.

Figure 1:59. Bevel note, most general case.

Some typical examples of bevel notes are shown in the pictures below. (However, none of
them contain any text below the reference line, any 'after text' symbol nor any 'weld
processing text'.)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:69 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:60. Actual examples of bevel notes.

• Selection and Display of Bevel via Text String

An option has been implemented to use a text string for specification of the bevel when
generating seams in panels and bevelling along boundaries. This has been done by adding
a new keyword BVT (for BeVel Text) in the SEAM and WELD statements of the design
language of Hull Planar Modelling. The given text will be displayed in symbolic views
replacing the symbols normally indicating the bevel. If the bevel is symmetric the bevel text
is drawn across (and parallel with) the seam line, otherwise on the side of it where the bevel
is defined.
Furthermore, this text can be used to select a symbol via a conversion table described
below. If the given bevel text matches one of the bevel texts in column 1 of this table, the
corresponding symbol will replace the given text in the views.
The conversion file has four columns and an unrestricted number of rows. The columns
contain information as follows:
• The "name", i.e. the text given as input.
• The basic bevel type (see documentation of AVEVA Marine bevel handling). A negative
value indicates that the bevel should be looked upon from "the other side".
• The font number of the symbol.
• The number of the symbol to represent the text.

Example:

Al 10 100 2

SOVS 20 100 3

SOVN -20 100 4

etc.

The name of the table should be assigned to the environment variable SBH_BEVEL_TEXT.
When the bevel is defined in this way, the system may also examine if any of the involved
plate edges should be chamfered (see below). If so, a special chamfer text will be added
after the given text/ selected symbol. The chamfer text will be selected depending on the
side of the plate that should be chamfered.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:70 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

The appearance and contents of the bevel and chamfer text are controlled by a number of
default parameters:

BEV_TEXT_SYMB_SIZE Size (in mm) independent of scaling. Default: 5 mm.

BEV_TEXT_SYMB_COLOUR The colour. Default: Green.

CHAMFER_TEXT_DRAW Enable chamfer text analysis and setting.

CHAMFER_TEXT_DRAW_TS Chamfer text this side. Default: CTS

CHAMFER_TEXT_DRAW_OS Chamfer text other side. Default: COS

CHAMFER_TEXT_DRAW_DIST Gap between the bevel and chamfer texts

independent of scale. Default 3 mm.

Note: The feature described is used only for drawing development, i.e. this bevel setting
will not affect the bevelling in plate parts extracted from the panel.

1.9.3 Bevel and Extraction of Parts

Parts are extracted from the hull model in a number of different functions, e.g. in ppanparts
for parts from planar panels, in cpanparts for developed shell plates, in tbchm for shell
profiles. In all these modules the bevel information is transferred to the parts and may even
affect the geometry of the resulting parts. This is all done quite automatically from the
information available in the model.
Examples of operations that are performed:
• The bevel variants will be evaluated along inner seams of plane panels.
• The defined bevel gaps will be subtracted from the geometry of the parts.
• The geometry of parts may have to be re-calculated considering the connection angle
(see above).
• In case of complicated bevels several contours will be calculated for the control of the
different torches in multi-torch cutting, see the figure below
.

Figure 1:61. Contours required for bevel cutting, most general case.

A is the moulded curve used in modelling,

B is the derived curve for vertical cutting,
C is the curve controlling the cutting of the bevel on the upper side,
D is the curve controlling the cutting of the "under bevel".

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:71 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Moreover, an envelope curve will be generated as the "union" of the other curves. This
curve indicates the area, affected by the complete cutting of the part and thus restricts an
area within which no other part may be nested. This curve is called the bump curve of the
part (in the figure above it is the union of curves C and D).

The figure above is showing two identical plate edges but with two different ways to
calculate the position of the required plate width because of the bevel angle on the lower
side of the plate.
By default, variants are taken care of when calculating the addition of material for the
different bevel types. This means that the upper material curve is positioned according to
point D in the lower view in the figure above.
In older versions of the system, the upper and lower material curves were calculated from
the plate thickness of the bounding plate, i.e. the e-measure of the current bevel. This
means that the upper material curve ends according to the point D in the upper view in the
figure above.
By assigning the value NO to the environment variable
SBH_ADJUST_FOR_BEVEL_VARIANT, the old way of calculating the material curves will
be activated and the upper material curve will be positioned according to the point D in the
upper view in the figure above.

1.9.4 Bevel Information in Production Output

The bevel information is output in direct production control in different ways, e.g.
• From the nesting system the bevel information is converted to burning contours, to
burner angles, offsets, etc. The information may be output in burning sketches in a
similar way as described for bevel notes in drawings (however, just as text strings, see
NEST_TEXT above) but also in e.g. the generic format for plate cutting.
• For profiles the bevel information may be output in lists and in generic format for profile
fabrication.
Common for this information is that whereas the bevel information within AVEVA Marine is
based on occurrences of basic bevel types these references are in the output format
resolved and replaced or completed by explicit parameters related to a generalised section

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:72 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

of a bevel, e.g. as in the picture below (the parameter B is never stored, since it can always
be calculated from the other parameters)
.

Figure 1:62. Generalised bevel section.

Example:

1. DC1=DC2=A=C=0 for an ordinary square bevel.

2. DC1=DC2=C=0 and A=T for an ordinary V-bevel, open upwards.

3. DC1=DC2=A=0 and C=T for an ordinary V-bevel, open downwards.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:73 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

1.9.5 Symbol Font for Bevel Handling

Figure 1:63. Bevel symbol font, page 1.

Figure 1:64. Bevel symbol font, page 2.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:74 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:65. Bevel symbol font, page 3.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:75 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bevel Handling in AVEVA Marine

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:76 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Excess and Excess Symbols

2 Excess and Excess Symbols

2.1 General
AVEVA Marine has different means to compensate for the fact that parts when
manufactured cannot be cut to the nominal dimensions according to the design intent.
There are many reasons for this, e.g.
• Butt welding may require gaps between parts to ensure proper weld penetration. This is
considered in the AVEVA Marine bevel facility
• The fact that parts shrink during welding and other heating processes must be
compensated for. This is considered in the AVEVA Marine shrinkage compensation
facility
• In addition there may be bad fitting caused by accumulated errors in the fabrication and
assembly processes. The traditional way to get a good final fitting is to add extra
material that may be partially removed in the assembly process. This added material is
in AVEVA Marine called excess and compensation.
The two first types of modifications are normally made automatically by AVEVA Marine from
basic rules set up by the customer. In contrast excess and compensation should always be
explicitly given by the designer.
This document gives some notes on excess and compensation in AVEVA Hull. Excess may
be added to both plates and profiles. However, this document concentrates on excess in
plates.

2.2 Excess and Compensation

AVEVA Marine supports two main types of explicitly added compensation for bad fitting,
excess and compensation.
Excess means the addition of a strip of constant width along edges of panels and plates.
Compensation means addition in a triangular shape along boundaries of panels, either in
the shape of a symmetric "roof" along a complete boundary or as a wedge, starting at a
corner of a panel.
The added excess material may be removed for fitting in different steps of assembly, e.g.
either in part fabrication, in putting together parts and/or assemblies up to main section
mounting.
Accordingly, Hull allows the user to specify the excess and its type/level in the modelling
process (see Hull Planar Modelling, Default File and Design Language, Excess Statement).
The levels of excess may be illustrated in drawing by individual symbols, contained in a
special symbol font.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Excess and Excess Symbols

Moreover, the excess type will be stored also in the plate parts so that appropriate actions
can be taken in later assembly stages.
A special symbol font should exist containing the symbols to be used for indication of the
excess types. Its number is 92.
It is the customer's responsibility to see to it that this font exists (if the Hull Modelling default
parameter DRAW_EXCESS>=2) and that it contains the symbols corresponding to the
symbol numbers referred to in the default file of Hull Modelling.
A customer may add new symbols to this font with arbitrary numbers, but these numbers
should be given in the default file of Hull Modelling.
Normally, each symbol should have one connection point which will "snap" to the closest
indicated contour.
If DRAW_EXCESS=3 then the symbol should have a text point as well. Its position is
outside the tail of the symbol.
If no text point has been defined, the text will be located to the right of the actual symbol.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Automatic Weld Definition using Execution Units (EU)

3 Automatic Weld Definition using Execution

Units (EU)

3.1 General
This document describes the set-up and customisation of rules for automatic fillet weld
calculation (Weld Leg Length = WLL) in AVEVA Marine. The full implementation is made in
AVEVA Marine Weld Planning, however some of the functionality is also available when
using AVEVA Marine Planar Hull only.
The automatic calculation is activated when a fillet weld is detected between two steel
structures and no WLL values are given already in the modelling phase. All calculations are
made in two steps. First step is to calculate the weld factor and second step is to translate
this weld factor into a WLL. The rules for calculation of weld factors are stored in objects
called Execution Unit.

3.2 Execution Unit

3.2.1 General
Execution Units (EU) are objects with rules for weld calculations, stored on a data bank
assigned to the environment variable SB_WELDDB. Rules for different class societies and
ship types are supposed to be stored in different physical data banks and an appropriate
one is to be selected at the project set-up.

3.2.2 Selection of Rules

The selection of calculation rules is made on different levels in an order as specified below.
Once a selection is successful, the remaining actions are not performed.
The following checks are made in the given order:
• The functional description of the abutted and the abutting structure is checked if
defined within the EU.
• The abutted structure is checked if it is a welded flange.
• The abutting structure is checked if it is a bracket, a clip, the trace of a stiffener or the
end of a stiffener
• The default selection is made for structures with no defined functional description

3.2.3 Types of EU
EU:s can be of different types as specified below:
• A compartment by name

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Automatic Weld Definition using Execution Units (EU)

• A compartment by type
• A geographically given region (i.e. all structures between FR55 and FR60)
• A Reference Surface by name (ex. Main Deck, FR57, etc.). Stored in AVEVA Marine as
Reference Surface Objects (RSO)
• A panel by name

3.2.4 Selection of an EU
The selection of the EU object to be used can either be made automatically or manually.
The automatic selection depends on the geographical position of the two steel structures to
be joined (the abutted and the abutting structure). In the manual method a specific EU
object is selected that shall be used during a certain activity (i.e. when evaluating the welds
of an assembly in the Weld Planning application).
The selection criteria that are used during the automatic selection of an EU object should be
set up and customised by the customer. In this way it will be possible to define the search
order for EU objects (i.e. first compartment, second a reference surface, third
geographical…). The default search order is defined as below:
1. Panel
2. Reference Surface Object (RSO)
3. Compartment
4. Compartment type
5. Geographical
The search order can be changed by setting the environment variable SB_EU_ORDER to
the wanted search order, using the abbreviations P (panel), RSO, C (compartment), CT
(compartment type) and G (geographical) delimited by an underscore (_). The default
search order as shown above would be defined by the following assignment to the
environment variable:
P_RSO_C_CT_G

3.2.5 Definition of EU Objects

A definition file executed via the AVEVA Marine inithull program establishes the EU
objects. The contents of the file is built up by the syntax described in the following
sections:

• The EU Statement
This statement is used to define an EU object. It is given with the name of the object as
argument.
The statement can have the following attributes, defining the type of EU:

· /COMP Compartment

· /COMP_TYPE Compartment type

· /RSO Reference Surface Object

· /GEO Geographical

· /PAN Panel

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Automatic Weld Definition using Execution Units (EU)

If the attribute GEO is used, then the attributes /MAX_X and /MIN_X can be used, both with
an X-coordinate as argument, delimiting the geographical region.

Note: Please note that the EU types COMP and COMP_TYPE are not yet supported by the
complete AVEVA Marine software and should therefore not be used for production

• RULE Statement
The RULE statement is used to define the weld factor to be used on a steel structure of a
certain type abutting another steel structure. The attributes /ABUTTED and /ABUTTING are
used, both with a functional description as argument. The weld factor is defined by using the
attribute /WELD_FACTOR with the wanted factor as argument.
A default rule for structures with undefined functional descriptions (non-existing or equal to
zero) is automatically created in all EU objects. This automatically created default rule will
get the weld factor set to one. The default rule can of course be over-ruled by an user-
defined statement (using functional description equal to 0 as the argument of the attributes /
ABUTTED and /ABUTTING).

• DEFAULT Statement
The DEFAULT statement is used to define default weld factors for different types of steel
components, to be used when no specific rule based on functional descriptions can be
found.
The statement can have the following attributes:

/BRA Default for abutting bracket.

/CLI Default for abutting clip.

/STI_END Default for abutting stiffener end.

/STI_TRA Default for abutting stiffener trace.

/FLA Default for abutted welded flange.

All attributes above require an argument containing the weld factor.

3.2.6 Translation of Weld Factor into WLL

The resulting WLL is a function of the selected weld factor and the smallest thickness of the
involved steel structures.
If a given thickness is not found in the translation tables, the next greater value is used. If no
greater value is found, then the next smaller value of thickness is used instead.
The translation table is built up using the same definition file as used for the definition of EU
objects. There is only one valid translation table at a time meaning that all EU objects use
the same translation of factors into weld leg lengths.

• FACTOR2WELD Statement
The FACTOR2WELD statement requires the following attributes:
/THICK
/WELD_FACTOR
/LEG_LENGTH

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Automatic Weld Definition using Execution Units (EU)

The /THICK attributes requires the thickness as argument, the /WELD_FACTOR attribute
requires a weld factor as argument and the /LEG_LENGTH attribute shall be given the
WLL as argument.

• Restrictions when only used in Hull

The implementation of this facility is based on the usage of AVEVA Marine Weld Planning
application. However, some of the functionality is available also when using only Planar
Hull. The following features are available in this case:
• If a negative weld is given, it will be considered as a weld factor (absolute value) and it
will be translated using the translation table. This is done independently if the weld in
question is a fillet or a butt weld.
• If no weld is given, a geographical EU will be searched for and used. If a bevel is given,
a weld value is calculated only if the bevel is a fillet bevel. If no bevel is defined, the
limit is checked. To get a weld value, the limit must not be a free side and it must not be
a reference to another limit (which indicates that it is a butt weld).
• Functional descriptions are not considered.

3.2.7 Example of Definition File

The file below is an example of a definition file that creates both EU and a weld factor table.
EU,'GEO_1'/GEO/MIN_X=0.0/MAX_X=50000.0;
RULE/ABUTTED=0/ABUTTING=0/WELD_FACTOR=2;
RULE/ABUTTED=15/ABUTTING=12/WELD_FACTOR=3;
RULE/ABUTTED=15/ABUTTING=101/WELD_FACTOR=2;
RULE/ABUTTED=14/ABUTTING=12/WELD_FACTOR=2;
RULE/ABUTTED=14/ABUTTING=9/WELD_FACTOR=1;

DEFAULT/STI_END=1/BRA=2/STI_TRACE=2/CLI=1/FLA=2;

EU,'GEO_2'/GEO/MIN_X=50000.1/MAX_X=100000.0;
RULE/ABUTTED=0/ABUTTING=0/WELD_FACTOR=1;
RULE/ABUTTED=15/ABUTTING=12/WELD_FACTOR=3;
RULE/ABUTTED=15/ABUTTING=101/WELD_FACTOR=2;
RULE/ABUTTED=14/ABUTTING=12/WELD_FACTOR=2;
RULE/ABUTTED=14/ABUTTING=9/WELD_FACTOR=1;

DEFAULT/STI_END=1/BRA=2/STI_TRACE=2/CLI=1/FLA=2;

FACTOR2WELD/WELD_FACTOR=1/THICK=5/LEG_LENGTH=2;
FACTOR2WELD/WELD_FACTOR=1/THICK=14/LEG_LENGTH=3;
FACTOR2WELD/WELD_FACTOR=1/THICK=40/LEG_LENGTH=4;
FACTOR2WELD/WELD_FACTOR=2/THICK=5/LEG_LENGTH=3;
FACTOR2WELD/WELD_FACTOR=2/THICK=14/LEG_LENGTH=4;
FACTOR2WELD/WELD_FACTOR=2/THICK=40/LEG_LENGTH=5;
FACTOR2WELD/WELD_FACTOR=3/THICK=5/LEG_LENGTH=5;
FACTOR2WELD/WELD_FACTOR=3/THICK=14/LEG_LENGTH=6;

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Automatic Weld Definition using Execution Units (EU)

FACTOR2WELD/WELD_FACTOR=3/THICK=40/LEG_LENGTH=7;

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Automatic Weld Definition using Execution Units (EU)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profiles in AVEVA Marine

Profiles in AVEVA Marine

© Copyright 1974 to current year. i 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profiles in AVEVA Marine

© Copyright 1974 to current year. ii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
General about Handling of Profiles

1 General about Handling of Profiles

1.1 General
The Hull structure of a ship is built up by in principle two types of basic material, plates
(sheet material) and profiles (bars). Profiles are used to stiffen plates and for support, e.g.
pillars between decks.
However, plates may also be stiffened by "profiles" that are part of the plate itself, e.g. folded
flanges, swaging and corrugation (swaging is in AVEVA Marine the name of small, stiffener-
like corrugation).
It might therefore be meaningful to talk about stiffeners of two categories: those made of
profiles and those that are part of the plate. The partition into sheet material and bar material
is also made less clean by the fact that even if many profiles are fabricated from bars others
consist of assembled strips of plates.
The question about the actual profile standard used in AVEVA Marine is dealt with in a
document of its own. There are also documents describing other more specialised features
of the profile handling, e.g. how parts generated as profiles may be converted into and
manufactured as plate parts.
However, the focus of this document is on how profiles are handled from a modelling point
of view, i.e. how different types of stiffening can be generated in Hull.
From a modelling point of view profiles can be divided into shell profiles and plane panel
profiles.

1.2 Shell Profiles

The shell profiles are divided into longitudinal frames (or longitudinals for short) and
transversal frames (or transversals). They are generated in the Hull module tbchm (Curved
Hull Modelling).
The main difference between them is that longitudinals are oriented in the longitudinal
direction of the ship whereas transversals are located in or close to frame planes. Otherwise
they are organised in the same way.
Common to them both is that a shell profile organises all the profile parts (called shell
stiffeners) that belong to and are referred to by a certain longitudinal or transversal number.
Thus a shell profile is either a longitudinal or a transversal and a shell stiffener may be part
of either a longitudinal or a transversal.
Shell profiles are identified by an integer number that, in principle, may be selected freely by
the designer. The same numbers may be used for both longitudinals and transversals.
Longitudinals are normally numbered in steps of 10 with intermediate numbers towards the
end of the ship where additional longitudinals have to be inserted. Reference to shell
profiles is made via their number and from the local conditions AVEVA Marine will

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
General about Handling of Profiles

automatically decide from which shell stiffeners data should be fetched, i.e. in the modelling
work there are never any references directly to shell stiffeners.
Thus, a longitudinal normally consists of a number of shell stiffeners along the same trace
curve or along different trace curves that must not overlap along the x-axis. Similarly,
transversals consist of shell stiffeners organised along frame curves (or other transversal
curves) on the condition that their extension does not overlap when following the curve from
the centre line towards the deck.
The trace curves of shell profiles may be planar or arbitrary hull curves with double
curvature. The actual profile may be planar or twisted (even if the trace curve is planar).
Currently a shell stiffener cannot be knuckled.

1.3 Profiles in Plane Panels

When plane panels are modelled in Planar Hull Modelling or Structural Design the profiles
are treated as three different component types, each of them best suited to the way the
profile is modelled in a certain use.
The different component types for profiles on plane panels are:
• stiffeners
• flanges
• pillars
These type of parts will be further described below.

1.3.1 Stiffeners
Profiles welded to a plane plate surface are identified as stiffeners. Profiles that, from a
functional point of view, are flanges (see below) must also be generated as stiffeners if they
are not flat bars.
Stiffeners on type standard brackets are considered to be part of the bracket standards.
They cannot be generated separately as stiffeners but can be modified or deleted as part of
the bracket definition.
Stiffeners may be straight, curved or knuckled.

• Curved Stiffeners
By definition a curved stiffener has a trace curve that is not straight. On the other hand the
cross section perpendicular to the trace curve is always constant and equal to the nominal
dimension of the profile.
This means that a stiffener which is knuckled perpendicular to its trace is a curved stiffener,
not a knuckled stiffener, see the figure below

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
General about Handling of Profiles

Figure 1:1. According to definition curved (not knuckled) Stiffener.

Curved stiffeners may be set parallel to limits, holes and arbitrary curves stored in the panel.

• Knuckled Stiffeners
Knuckled stiffeners have a diagonal knuckle line, either extending diagonally across the
stiffener or affecting only a part of the stiffener. The knuckle line must not intersect the trace
line of the stiffener. Therefore, the trace line of the knuckled stiffener must always be a
straight line. The figure below shows a couple of typical knuckled stiffeners
.

Figure 1:2. Examples of knuckled Stiffeners.

Generation of knuckled stiffeners may occur in three different situations.

1. The stiffener is connected between two other profiles, e.g. between a horizontal
stiffener on a bulkhead and a "rising" longitudinal, see the figure below

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
General about Handling of Profiles

Figure 1:3. Knuckling caused by location of connecting Profiles.

In such a case the need knuckling will be discovered automatically by the system. The
knuckle line will be diagonally across the stiffener and placed in such a way that the
knuckle line starts at the weld trace in the connection to the shell profile. The knuckle
angle will be calculated automatically.
2. The second case is that an (inclined) stiffener should end (or start) in a given plane,
see the figure below. (AVEVA Marine supports only that the stiffener is knuckled into
one of the principal planes).

Figure 1:4. Knuckle when stiffener should end in a given plane.

The knuckle line will start at the trace at the indicated end of the stiffener and be
calculated so that the "triangular" bent piece of the stiffener is, located in the specified
plane.
The stiffener end and the location plane must be defined by the user.
3. The third case is that the position of the knuckle line is controlled explicitly by the user
as well as the bending angle, see the figure below for a possible case

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
General about Handling of Profiles

Figure 1:5. Manually controlled knuckle Line.

1.3.2 Flanges
In the Hull application, two different component types are identified as flanges. They are:
• Flat bars - straight or curved - welded to a plate edge along the outer contour of a panel
in a hole or along the free edge of a bracket ("face plates").
A flange may be asymmetrically located relative to the plate.
• Folded (bent) flanges along the outer contour. When a folded flange is generated, the
shape of the plate is modified simultaneously. A folded flange has the function of a
profile, but it is of course no physical bar.
Flanges must be generated as stiffeners if they are not flat bars or if they are not
perpendicular to the plate surface.
Flanges on type standard brackets are considered to be part of the bracket standards.

1.3.3 Pillars
Any profile of any type can be generated as a pillar. However, normally a pillar is a "free"
profile, connected only at its ends. Pillars are typically used to carry decks in open areas,
e.g. on passenger ships.
Pillars, built up by plate parts, must be generated as panels.

1.4 Profile Data

The profiles can normally be generated complete with all information required for
production.
The following attributes can be defined in addition to the location and orientation. Some of
the attributes are compulsory, others are optional.
• profile type and parameters,
• material quality codes,
• excess material,
• endcut data (type and parameters). Normally, connection angles of the endcut will be
calculated automatically in case of connection.
• inclination and twisting,
• bevelling at the profile ends and along the trace,
• holes, notches and cutouts (stiffeners and shell profiles only),

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
General about Handling of Profiles

• information about the welding,

• the position number of the profile,
• assembly information,
• surface treatment,
• etc.

1.5 Position of the Profile

The position in space of a profile is specified by its trace curves that - for plane panels - are
described in the coordinate system of the panel (or bracket) to which the profile belongs. In
most cases the end point coordinates are computed by connection to other parts of the
structure, i.e. the trace curve is derived (secondary) information.
The line from end point 1 to end point 2 is called the mould line (or description line) of the
profile.
For shell profiles the profile orientation is always explicitly defined. For stiffeners and
flanges, the web (and the flange, if any) of the profile is supposed to be located to the left of
the mould line. Thus, the orientation of the profile section is defined by selecting the
direction of the mould line (or the order of the end profile).
For pillars, the description line is normally located in the symmetry line of the profile section.
The orientation of the profile section is controlled by a separate data item.

1.6 Swaging
There is an additional way to stiffen a plate surface, e.g. to use small corrugations like
profiles. Such corrugations are, in Hull, called swages. From a functional point of view, they
act very much like stiffeners. In Hull Modelling, they are generated as a special type of
component with a statement type of their own, described in Hull / Planar Modelling / Design
Language of Hull Modelling / Swage Statement.
The characteristics of the swage are specified in a user defined external table, a swage
object.
Swages will modify the geometry of the part it is located on. This modification of the
geometry will take place in the splitting to parts. Therefore, the geometry of panels with
swages is according to nominal sizes.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
About Profile Standard in AVEVA Marine

2 About Profile Standard in AVEVA Marine

2.1 General
The steel structure of a ship is built up by plates and profiles welded together. The plates are
bought in rectangular pieces and are available in an unrestricted variety of sizes and
thicknesses. As a contrast profiles are traditionally available only in certain shapes, e.g. flat
bars and L-bars (angles), i.e. there is a standard for profile types. For certain profiles types
there is additionally only a restricted set of allowable parameters values.
A rather recent trend in shipbuilding is to use aluminium for certain types of vessels instead
of - or as a complement to - steel. Since profiles in aluminium are fabricated by extrusion
new shapes can rather easily be fabricated. Because of the flexibility these profile may differ
considerably from traditional profile types and even combine the function of plate and
stiffener into one object.
The purpose of this document is to describe how the profile standard is implemented in
AVEVA Hull and how it can be used and controlled.

2.2 Definition
A profile in AVEVA Marine is a bar with constant cross-section along the whole bar - apart
form the treatment at the ends of the profile (in AVEVA Marine called endcutting). In
principle the endcuts may only reduce the cross-section, i.e. cut off material from the
constant cross-section bar. However, there are some exceptions to this. Certain endcut
types for flat bars may actually expand outside the specified size of the flat bar. However,
this is an exception and can be used only if the profile is converted to a plate part for
manufacture.

2.3 Profile Types in AVEVA Marine

The AVEVA Marine profile standard covers the profile types that are traditionally used in
shipbuilding. Some of these types are open in the sense that arbitrary profile dimensions
can be defined, others are closed, meaning that the profile parameters may take on only a
restricted set of values.
A certain profile type is picked by an integer number that is fixed by the system. The table
below specifies the profile types normally used in shipbuilding. It shows the profile type, its
cross-section and the parameters that are required to control the size of the profile section.
When selecting a certain profile it is important that the correct number of parameters is
given in the order specified in the table.
AVEVA Marine supports all the profile types in this list except the profile types 56 (Z-bar), 64
(hexagon bar) and 65 (octagon bar).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
About Profile Standard in AVEVA Marine

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
About Profile Standard in AVEVA Marine

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
About Profile Standard in AVEVA Marine

In addition to the profile types listed in the table there are some optional profile variants
available.

Flat bars:
In addition to the flat bars there is also a profile type 11 which has the same properties as a
profile type 10. The only exception for a profile type 11 is that this one can not be converted
into a plate part in the production programs.

Bulb bars:
Profile type 21 is a special Polish variant of the ordinary bulb bar. If used in combination with
any of the environment variables SBH_RUSSIAN_BULB, SBH_CHINESE_BULB or
SBH_JAPANESE_BULB this profile type may be used for the type of bulb bar used in
Russia, China or Japan.
Profile type 23 is the big type of welded bulb bar with a constant bulb size that is
manufactured by the INEXA steel mill and sold under the product name Jumbo Bulb Flat.

Additional U-bar:
In addition to the U-bar with type number 50 there is one additional type of U-bar available
with different thickness in web and flanges. The type number of this U-bar is 59. (However,
most probably it is not used in shipbuilding.)

Generalised milled T-bars:

The milled profile type 40 for T-bars can be given a couple of optional interpretations by the
environment variable SBH_DOUBLE_BULB. By assignment of FUNDIA a T-bar of type
Fundia will be generated.
By assignment of any other string to the same variable a profile of type double bulb (used
e.g. in Russia) will be selected.

Customised U- and I-bars:

For U- and I-bars AVEVA Marine is loaded with profiles of these types according to the DIN
standards. However, it is possible to customise this standard and replace the in-built
standard by customer defined parameter values. Details about this may be found in
Customer Set-Up of I- and U-bars Definition.

2.3.1 Use of Different Profile Types

Profiles may be generates as shell profiles, stiffeners, flanges and pillars. There are certain
restrictions as to the combination of component and profile type.
• Flanges (face plates) must always be flat bars (profile type 10)
• Shell profiles and stiffeners may be any of the profile types 10 -55.
• Pillars are normally those of the profile types 50 -74
Thus some types may be used both as stiffeners and pillars. However, their reference point,
i.e. the point in the profile section used to specify their position, may vary when used as a
stiffener compared to when used as a pillar. When used as stiffeners the reference point is
always located on one side of the web of the profile as indicated by the bold cross for some
profile types in the figure below. The line between the two crosses is in the mould plane of
the stiffener.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
About Profile Standard in AVEVA Marine

Figure 2:1. Reference point and mould plane for profiles used as Stiffeners

The position of the reference point for some profile types used for pillars are illustrated in
relation with the specification of the pillar statement in Hull Planar Modelling, Design
Language of Hull Modelling, Pillar Statement.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
About Profile Standard in AVEVA Marine

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set-Up of I- and U-bars Definition

3 Customer Set-Up of I- and U-bars Definition

3.1 Background
AVEVA Marine has a set of predefined and reserved profile types. Certain of these, namely
I- and U-bars, are picked by giving only nominal sizes (i.e. the nominal height and
sometimes - when several different profiles have equal height - the flange width). AVEVA
Marine has a number of built-in tables for these profile types dimensions according to DIN-
standards.
This appendix describes a facility that allows a customer to set up his own tables to replace
the defaults for these profile types, i.e. for the profile types 50 through 59. It is possible to
redefine any of the profile types and still use the defaults for others.

3.2 Profile Specification File

3.2.1 General
The definition of the profiles takes place via an ordinary text file, created and maintained in
the standard editor of the computer system.
The name of the file can be selected quite freely and its total name (path+name) should be
assigned to the environment variable SBH_I_U_BARS.

3.2.2 Layout of Specification File

The file is divided into a number of statements. Each statement must be written in a
separate line and the maximum line width is 80 characters. Spaces between terms are of no
importance, but no blank lines are allowed.
Note that each statement must be terminated by a semicolon(;).
TYPE=<proftype>, 'comment';
[ANGLE=<fla_angle>;]
<H>, <B>, <Tw>, <Tf>, <R1> [, <R2>];
<H>, . . . . . . . . . . ;
.
.
.
TYPE=....
[ANGLE=< . . . . . . . . . . ;
<H>, . . . . . . . . . . ;
.
.
.
TYPE=<prof.type> ...

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set-Up of I- and U-bars Definition

.
.
.

TYPE This statement indicates the start of a definition of a certain profile type.
<proftype> can be any type of 50, 51, 52, 53, 54, 55 and 59.
The text given as a comment after the TYPE statement is the customer
description of the profile type and is not used by AVEVA Marine.
ANGLE This statement sets the flange inclination of the lower inner surface of the
flange and will be valid for all following profiles until the next ANGLE- or
TYPE-statement. Default value after a TYPE-statement is 0. This
statement is optional and may be omitted as well as given once for every
line of profile data.

The parameter statements have no statement keyword but contain only the parameters
controlling the shape of the profile section.

<H> Height of the profile. This is the actual height of the profile and not the
nominal height (if different)
<B> Width of the profile
<Tw> Thickness of the web
<Tf> Thickness of the flanges
<R1> Radius between web and flange
<R2> Second radius (interpretation varies between profiles)

The parameter lines following the TYPE statement specify a number of occurrences of this
profile type. There are no restrictions as to the number of lines specifying profile
dimensions, i.e. any number of profiles may be defined. The measures may be given in
imperial units according to AVEVA Marine standards. The lines need not be sorted on
dimensions.
The types 50, 51 and 59 must have six parameters, while 52, 53, 54 and 55 have only five.

3.2.3 Example
Below you find an example of a profile definition file

Example:

TYPE =50, 'U-bar';

30.0, 33.0, 5.0, 7.0, 7.0, 3.5;

40.0, 35.0, 5.0, 7.0, 7.0, 3.5;

TYPE =51, 'I-bar’;

ANGLE=5; 80.0, 42.0, 3.9, 5.9, 3.9, 2.3;

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set-Up of I- and U-bars Definition

Example:

ANGLE=10; 100.0, 50.0, 4.5, 6.8, 4.5, 2.7;

120.0, 58.0, 5.1, 7.7, 5.1, 3.1;

TYPE =52, 'IPE-bar';

80.0, 46.0, 3.8, 5.2, 5.0;

3.2.4 Test of Specification File

The hull utility program inithull may be used to check the profile specification file for correct
layout.

3.3 Selection of a Certain Profile

When picking a certain occurrence of the profile types described in this specification it is
normally enough to give the nominal height. Sometimes two different profiles may have the
same nominal height and in that case a second parameter must be given as well (= the
flange width). The given parameters will always be replaced by the closest occurrence in the
table.
However, there is an option to give all the parameters via input. The given parameters will
then be used as given. This can be done regardless of if SBH_I_U_BARS has been set or
not. The parameters must be given in the order of the parameter statement as specified
above.
Note that the flange angle cannot be affected in this case. The default angle of the DIN-
standard will be used (when relevant)).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set-Up of I- and U-bars Definition

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Selection of Active Profiles

4 Selection of Active Profiles

4.1 Background
When generating profiles (shell stiffeners, stiffeners, flanges and pillars) in the AVEVA Hull
application the profile type and parameters are supposed to be in accordance with the
standards of AVEVA Marine. The facility described in this document is used to define the
subset of profile types and parameters that are used in a certain project. Those defined in
this way will become available for interactive picking in the modelling of profiles.

4.2 Profile Control File

4.2.1 General
The selection of the active profiles takes place via an ordinary text file, created and
maintained in the standard editor of the computer system.
The name of this file can be selected quite freely and its total file specification should be
assigned to the environment variable SBH_PROF_CTRL.The file is normally supposed to
be stored in the default directory of the current project.

4.2.2 Layout of Control File

The layout is described by an example. The format is rather free but everything that is
written in the same line in the example must be so. Maximum line width is 132 characters.
TYPE = 10 ’Flat bar’
100, 10
100, 12
120, 12
150, 12
200, 25
250, 25
TYPE = 20 ’Bulb bar’
200, 9
220, 10
240, 10
260, 12
TYPE = 30 ’L-bar’
150, 90, 10
200, 100, 10

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 4:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Selection of Active Profiles

250, 120, 12
350, 150, 12
TYPE = 31 ’L-bar’
150, 90, 10, 12
200, 100, 10, 15
250, 120, 12, 20
350, 150, 12, 20
TYPE = 40 ’T-bar’
350, 150, 10, 12
450, 200, 12, 15
550, 200, 12, 20
TYPE = 43 ’T-bar’
350, 150, 10, 12
450, 200, 12, 15
550, 200, 12, 20
The keyword TYPE is the profile type as defined in the AVEVA Marine standard.
The text on the same line as the TYPE keyword is the customer description of the profile
type. This text will appear on a menu when creating stiffeners interactively.
The lines following the TYPE keyword select a number of dimensions for the current profile
type. The parameters should be given in the same order as they are entered in modelling
input. There is no restriction as to the number of lines selecting profile dimensions.

4.3 Remark
1. The hull utility program inithull may be used to check the profile control file.
2. The effect of this set-up is only that the specified profile types and parameters may be
picked interactively from list. The designer may, however, explicitly define arbitrary
occurrences of all profile types supported by AVEVA Marine, independently of the
profiles specified by this facility.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 4:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Connection Code Definition

5 Connection Code Definition

5.1 Background
When generating the hull model it is recommended to use topological references to as large
an extent as possible. This is valid also for profiles and a profile is often generated by
connection of the ends to another profile or to a surface.
The detailed nature of the end connection of profiles is controlled by two separate factors,
the connection code and the endcut code. (Moreover, the endcut code and the
connection code in combination control the selection of symbols at the ends of stiffeners in
drawings).
The endcut code with additional parameters controls the end treatment of the bar. An
excessive standards for endcuts can be found in Endcut Standards.
The connection code defines the position of the end of the profile relative to the
component it is connected to, e.g. butting/overlap/clearance and possibly offsets of the
mould lines of involved profiles. AVEVA Hull has an in-built standard set of connection codes
as documented below.
This guide describes how a customer can create a set of connection codes of his own, used
in parallel with, or overriding, the in-built standards.

5.2 Connection Control File

5.2.1 General
The definition of connection codes takes place via an ordinary text file, created and
maintained in the standard editor of the computer system.
The name of a connection code file can be selected quite freely and its total file specification
should be assigned to the environment variable SBH_CONCODES.

5.2.2 Layout of the Connection File

The file is a free format text file where the definition of each connection code requires four
numbers.
It is recommended to define one connection code in one line. The numbers should be
separated by at least one blank.
Formally, the layout may be described in the following way:
<input file>::=
(<user code> <type> <dist> <offset>) (1 ...100)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Connection Code Definition

<user code> is a number in the range 1-9999 that should be used by the designer. It
must be unique within the file but may very well be equal to one of the default codes. In that
case the standard code is redefined.
<type> defines the main type of connection. A picture of each type of connection is
enclosed below.

Figure 5:1. Connection type 1, examples.

<type>=1 connect to the edge of another profile with the material (flange) in the same
direction as the current profile.
The table below shows the in-built connection codes of type 1 without any offset, sorted on
gap..

Dist Code
0 4
20 30
25 44
30 83
50 3
60 35
75 2
85 36
100 1
125 37
150 38
175 39
200 41
225 42
250 43

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Connection Code Definition

The table below shows the in-built connection codes of type 1 with tight connection (dist=0)
and offset, sorted on offset.

Offset Code
5 5
8 6
10 7
12 8
15 9

Figure 5:2. Connection type 2, examples.

<type>=2 connect to profile edge, but with the material in different directions.
The table below shows those in-built connection codes of type 2 that overlap the profile they
are connected to (i.e. have a negative value of dist). They have no offset. They are sorted
on overlap.

Overlap Code
30 81
40 31
50 13
65 46
70 82
75 47
100 20
150 21
200 22
250 23
300 24
350 25
400 26
450 27
500 28
550 29
600 30

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Connection Code Definition

The table below shows the in-built connection codes of type 2 that do not overlap but has a
gap relative to the profile connected to, sorted on gap. They have no offset.

Dist Code
40 33
50 12
75 11
100 10

Figure 5:3. Connection type 3.

<type>=3 connect the end of one profile to the flat side of another profile (or possibly to
the outer contour of the panel).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Connection Code Definition

The table below shows the in-built connection codes of type 3, sorted on gap.

Dist Code
0 15
10 85
15 86
20 87
30 88
40 19
45 25
50 14
75 16
85 49
100 17
150 18
150 38
175 39
200 41
225 42
250 43

Figure 5:4. Connection type 4.

<type>=4 connect the profile end to the end of another profile. The default code for this is
40 (tight connection).

Figure 5:5. Connection type 5.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Connection Code Definition

<type>=5 connect the end of a profile to surface. The table below shows the in-built
connection codes of type 5, sorted on gap.

Dist Code
0 70
50 65
75 64
100 62
200 59
250 58
300 57
350 56
400 55
450 54
500 53
550 52
600 51

<dist> Distance between the profile end and the component it is connected to.
> 0 Gap (clearance)
= 0 Abutting
< 0 Overlap
<dist> is irrelevant for <type>=4.
<dist> <=0 for <type> >=3.
<offset> Offset of the planes of the profiles. Relevant only for <type>=1.
>0 Offset in the direction of the material (flange) of the profile to which
the connection takes place
<0 In the opposite direction.

5.2.3 Example
The input file below is an example of the input required to establish the default (= in-built)
connection standards in the above tables. As the in-built standard is very unstructured a
customer may create his own, better structured standard, e.g. 100, 125, 130, 150 etc. for
connection codes of type 1, etc.

Note: that the upper limit for the

maximum number of user
defined connection codes is
currently 100!

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Connection Code Definition

1 1 100 0
2 1 75 0
3 1 50 0
4 1 0 0
5 1 0 5
6 1 0 8
7 1 0 10
8 1 0 12
9 1 0 15
10 2 100 0
11 2 75 0
12 2 50 0
13 2 -50 0
14 3 50 0
15 3 0 0
16 3 75 0
17 3 100 0
18 3 150 0
19 3 40 0
20 2 -100 0
21 2 -150 0
22 2 -200 0
23 2 -250 0
24 2 -300 0
25 2 -350 0
26 2 -400 0
27 2 -450 0
28 2 -500 0
29 2 -550 0
30 2 -600 0
31 2 -40 0
32 1 40 0
33 2 100 0
34 3 125 0
35 1 60 0
36 1 85 0
37 1 125 0
38 1 150 0
39 1 175 0
40 4 0 0
41 1 200 0
42 1 225 0
43 1 250 0
44 1 25 0
45 3 25 0
46 2 -65 0
47 2 -75 0

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Connection Code Definition

49 3 85 0
51 5 600 0
52 5 550 0
53 5 500 0
54 5 450 0
55 5 400 0
56 5 350 0
57 5 300 0
58 5 250 0
59 5 200 0
61 5 150 0
62 5 100 0
64 5 75 0
65 5 50 0
70 5 0 0
80 1 20 0
81 2 -30 0
82 2 -70 0
83 1 30 0
85 3 10 0
86 3 15 0
87 3 20 0
88 3 30 0

5.2.4 Remark
The utility program inithull may be used to check a newly established connection code for
correctness.
The connection codes established via this facility become available for interactive picking
when creating profiles in planar or curved hull modelling. The connection codes will be
presented in a list box. If there are no customer defined connection codes, no list box
appears. To become available in this way also the in-built connection codes will have to be
redefined by the connection file.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Endcuts in AVEVA Marine

6 Profile Endcuts in AVEVA Marine

6.1 General
When a profile is manufactured, e.g. by cutting of a raw bar, the ends of it must normally be
prepared to get a suitable shape corresponding to its intended use. The shape of the end of
profiles is in AVEVA Marine called the endcut of the profile.
The total concept of profile endcut in AVEVA Marine is the subject of this guide. It describes
general principles and also how and to what extent the existing endcut standard can be
adapted to a certain customer's needs.

6.2 Endcut Standards in AVEVA Marine, Principles

AVEVA Marine contains a vast in-built endcut standard that is delivered to all customers.
The standard is divided into a number of predefined endcut types. An endcut type
corresponds to a certain geometrical pattern. Its actual shape may be controlled by a
number of parameters some of which are set up in a standard table. Others must be given
by the designer or are calculated automatically by the system, e.g. depending on the
connection in which the profile end is involved. A typical example of a simple endcut for a
flat bar is illustrated below (standard endcut type 11).

Figure 6:1. Standard Endcut 11.

The shape of this and all other endcuts is controlled by three different types of data items.
1. The endcut type (in the example above the endcut type is 11).
2. A number of implicitly defined parameters with standard values. The parameters that
may have standard values are individual to a certain endcut type. These parameters
have a restricted number of values and each combination of them is identified by an
endcut code. The standardised parameters are either radii or fixed angles of the endcut

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Endcuts in AVEVA Marine

and they cannot be given explicitly by the designer but are selected via the endcut
code. In the figure above R1 and R2 are such parameters.
3. A number of additional parameters which may take any value and which are explicitly
given by the designer or automatically calculated by the system.
In the example above V is such a parameter. These parameters are given as explicit
complements to the endcut code.

6.2.1 Endcut Type

The endcut type is a number in the range 10 - 326. The available endcut types are those
covered by and published in the AVEVA Marine endcut standards. The endcut type of the
endcut in Figure 6:1.: Standard Endcut 11. above is 11.
New endcut types must be added by AVEVA.

6.2.2 Endcut Code

Endcut codes are instances of endcut types with a certain combination of standard values
for the implicit endcut parameters. The endcut codes of a certain endcut type have always
numbers, created by adding two digits to the type number, i.e. the number of endcut codes
belonging to a certain endcut type is restricted to 100. (However, each endcut code may
have any number of occurrences by variation of the explicitly given parameter(s), in the
example above only the angle V.)
AVEVA Marine is delivered with a set of already defined endcut codes as specified in the
standards. As an example the table below shows some of the endcut codes belonging to the
endcut type 11 in Fig.1, each code with a certain combination of R1 and R2. These values
can be changed by the customer as specified in paragraphs below.

Endcut type: 11

Code R1 R2
1100 0 0
1102 0 35
... ... ...
1110 35 0
1112 35 35
... ... ...

The standardised parameters of the endcut codes are set up in an endcut table, stored in
the data bank associated with SB_OGDB and created and maintained by the utility program
inithull.

6.2.3 Explicit Endcut Parameters

The number of relevant explicitly given parameters (and their interpretation) is individual to a
certain endcut and their total number is currently restricted to 6. At most three of them are
dimension parameters (lengths) (identified by the parameter names a, b and c), and the
remaining three are angles of the endcut (identified as α1, α2 and α3. α1 is always the
angle in the web of the profile, α2 and α3 are angles in the flange(s) of the profile). The
parameters must always be given in an order, specified for each endcut type.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Endcuts in AVEVA Marine

The angle parameters always come last in the parameter list and are almost always
optional. If they are not given they will be calculated automatically by the system if the profile
end is connected. Otherwise they will by default be 90 degrees. If the designer explicitly
assigns the angles the given values will take over the automatically calculated ones.
The user given parameters are normally not changed. An exception is the a-measure of
certain endcuts.

6.3 Designer's Use of Endcuts

The designer specifies the endcut he wants to use by giving the endcut code, followed by
the explicit parameters, if any. E.g. in panel generation the endcut in Figure 6:1.: Standard
Endcut 11. above may be selected by writing
CUT = 1112, 80
This will result in an endcut type 11 with R1=R2=35 and V=80. As a comparison
CUT = 1112
will result in a calculated value of V depending on the connection or, in case of no
connection, V=90.
(In many situations it may not be necessary to explicitly define the endcut. E.g. in panel
generation the endcut code with parameters may be selected by default, depending on the
type of connection.

6.4 Customer Set-up of Endcut Standard

As mentioned above the customer can modify the in-built parameters of the endcut standard
via an endcut table. This paragraph specifies how this should be done.
Background to the discussion below is the assumption that the geometry of any endcut can
be controlled by a restricted number of parameters, e.g. in lists and sketches for profile
manufacture. The interpretation of these parameters is individual for each endcut type. The
parameters are A, B, C, R1, R2, V1, V2, V3 and V4.
A, B and C are lengths, R1 and R2 normally notch radii and V1, V2, V3 and V4 angles of the
endcut. Depending on the endcut type some of the parameters are irrelevant.
The figure below shows a rather complicated case for the endcut type 36.

Figure 6:2. Standard Endcut 36.

It is the objective of the endcut table to map from a combination of

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Endcuts in AVEVA Marine

• the endcut code (i.e. the endcut type + in-built parameters),

• explicitly given or calculated parameters (a, b, c, α1,α2,α3)
• (sometimes) dimensions of the profile section to the parameters used in realisation of
the endcut geometry in viewing, production lists, etc.
It is the purpose of this paragraph to describe in detail how this mapping can be controlled
via the input to endcut table.

6.4.1 Endcut Table Input

The customer control of endcut takes place via the endcut table, created and updated in the
structure data bank (SB_OGDB) via the hull utility inithull. To become available to the
application programs the name of the endcut table should be assigned to the environment
variable SB_ECUT.
It is possible to have project dependent endcut tables. Since only those endcut types/codes
can be used which are available in the currently used endcut table it is possible to restrict
the use of endcuts by removing them from the table. E.g. a certain project may use only a
subset of the total endcut standard of the yard. It is also possible to change the in-built
parameters between project (e.g. a small ship may require smaller notch radii than a big
one). A customer may add new endcut codes as long as the numbering rules are adhered
to.
The input file for creation of the endcut table is currently a text file organised in simple
record types. A standard input file containing examples of all existing endcut types is
included in each delivery of AVEVA Marine.
The input consists of three record types only and it is organised in the following way:
<record type 600>
<record type 601> (1 …. )
<record type 602>User defined endcut name
Thus it must start with a record of type 600 to be followed by any number of records of type
601 and 602.
The record type 600 simply contains the name of the endcut table to be assigned to
SB_ECUT. It has the following simple format:
600 '<endcut table name>'
Each record type 601 defines a row of the table. It has the following layout:
601 < type > < npar > < par1 > < par2 > .... < par<npar>
>
There are two types of type 601 records: selection rows and parameter rows.
The record type 602 contains the name of the user defined endcut name. There may be
several rows of type 602.
602 < user defined endcut name >

• Selection Rows
In a selection row <type> is the endcut type (i.e. in the range 10-326). This means that there
is only one selection row for each endcut type. The number of parameters is fixed and must
be exactly 9 and the parameters are selection codes, valid for each of the resulting
parameters according to the list above in the given order, i.e. A, B, C, etc.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Endcuts in AVEVA Marine

For irrelevant parameters the selection code parameter should be -1.

Note: In practice, the selection rows must always be set-up by AVEVA and should never be
changed by the customer.

• Parameter Rows
The parameter row specifies the in-built parameters associated with a certain endcut code,
typically notch radii and fixed angles. <type> is the endcut code. Thus there must be exactly
one parameter row for each endcut code.
When a customer wants to add a new endcut code, i.e. a new instance of an endcut type,
this is done by adding a new parameter row for the new endcut code. Most conveniently this
is done by copying one of the existing rows belonging to the current type and modifying the
relevant parameter(s).
The number of parameters may vary. Currently the maximum number is 4. (Traditionally, at
least three (3) parameters have been given and irrelevant parameters have been defined as
-1, but that is no longer necessary). The interpretation of each parameter is controlled by the
selection codes in the selection row of the endcut type of which the current endcut code is
an instance.
If the parameter defines a notch radius but the notch should be a sniped corner the size of
the snipe (KS notch) is indicated by a negative value.
The order between the records is in principle free, but the selection row should be given
before the parameter row belonging to the same type. There are two recommended options:
1. To give all selection rows first (sorted on type) and then all the parameter rows, sorted
on endcut code.
2. A selection row is immediately followed by its parameter rows.
It is a matter of taste which option is preferred.

6.4.2 Selection Codes and Evaluation of Endcut Parameters

The following designations are used in this paragraph.
1. A, B, C, R1, R2, V1, V2, V3, V4 are the parameters based on which the geometry of the
endcut can be established.
2. acut, bcut, ccut, α1, α2, α3 (sometimes α2 and α3 are replaced by α4) are explicit
parameters, stored together with the endcut code in the hull model.
3. aprof and bprof are the parameters 'a' and 'b' in the definition of the profile section
according to the profile standards.
The data items according to 2) and 3) above together with the selection codes will result in
proper values for the parameters according to 1).

• Selection Code
The selection code (SC) is an at most four-digit integer (=XYZW) which, depending on its
position in the selection row, is valid for a certain of the resulting geometry parameters. If the
selection code consists of several digits it must be interpreted from right to left, sometimes in
several steps. The parameters should also be evaluated in the order A, B, C, etc. since one
evaluated parameter may be used in the evaluation of a following one. Missing leading
digits in a positive selection code should be interpreted as zeroes, e.g. X=0, Y=0, Z=1 and
W=0 for selection code 10.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Endcuts in AVEVA Marine

For parameters whose selection code is negative the corresponding parameter value will be
set to 0. Otherwise, the parameters will be initialised as follows:
• A is set = acut,
• B is set = bcut,
• C is set = ccut.
However, these values may be changed by the selection code as described below.
The significance of the different digits is:

W If the current parameter value is still zero after the initial setting and W>0, then
fetch the value from the parameter row of the current endcut code. Fetch it from the
column within this row indicated by W.
Z If Z>0 then fetch the value from acut (bcut, ccut), if Z = 1 (2, 3).
Y Has different significance for different parameters (when >0):
=1 V1: Set V1 = α1, if α1>0, otherwise V1 = 90.
=2 V2: Set V2 to the value indicated by W, if this value is less than 90,
otherwise set V2 = α2 (if α2>0, otherwise V2 = 90).
=3 There are conditions in two steps for the different angles.
V2,V3: If abs (ccut - bprof) < 0.1 then set V2 =V3 = 0.
C,V2,V3: If V2 + V3 = 180 and α2 + α3 >=180 then set parameter C =
bprof and V2 = V3 = 0.

If the previous condition is not met, but α2 + α3 is not = 0, then

set V2 = α2 (if V2 = 90) and V3 = α3 (if V3 = 90).
=4 V2: Set V2 = 90 if C=0.
=5 There are different conditions and choices for different
parameters.
B: If A < 0 or B < 0 then let A=0 and B=0
V1: Set V1 = α1, if C < 0 or V1 < 0 then let C=0 and V1=0
V2: Set V2 = α2, if V2 < 0 then let V2=0
V3: Set V3 = α3, if V2 < 0 or V3 < 0 then let V2=0 and V3=0
=6 There are different conditions and choices for different
parameters.
V1: Set V1 = α1, if V1 < 0 then let V1=0
V3: Set V3 = α3
=7 V1: SET V1 = α1
=9 B,C: Parameter optional. Accept an undefined value (=0).
X =1 There are different conditions and choices for the different
parameters.
B If B=0 assign the value indicated by W.
C If C=0 then set C = (aprof - bcut)/2.
R1 Set R1 = 0, if B=0.
V1 Set V1 = 0, if B=0.
=2 B If bcut is not = 0 then set B = bcut, otherwise set B = aprof and
subtract parameter value according to W.
=5 Parameter may be omitted.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Endcuts in AVEVA Marine

P =9 R2 R2 evaluated according to a customer specific rule.

Finally, if V2 + V3 not = 0, set V4 = V2, otherwise set V4 = 90*sign (ccut)

The rules may seem very complicated and they actually are. However, the most
complicated cases are very rare and somewhat theoretical. As stated above, the selection
rows with the selection codes must always be defined by AVEVA when a new endcut type is
implemented and should normally not be changed by a customer. To change the
parameters in the parameter rows is rather straightforward once you know what geometrical
property a given parameter has (see example below).

6.4.3 User Defined Endcut

• Setting Up User Defined Endcuts

The geometry of a user defined endcut is defined in PARAGON. There are examples of user
defined endcut in the example project MAR; /TEE_44_EX.STCA and /TEE_145_EX.STCA
These user defined endcut examples are very similar to the built in endcuts 44 and 145. The
difference is a new parameter, D, which is a flange offset.
The definition of a user defined endcut in PARAGON, consists of SFIT, DTSE and NGMS.
The name of the SFIT is the name used to refer to the user defined endcut from within Hull.
Dtref and Ngmref attributes have to be set to valid DTSE and NGMS attributes on the SFIT
element. DTSE holds the data that is used to create the negative geometry. NGMS holds
the negative geometry. The negative geometry must only consist of NSEXs.
Attribute Splate on element NSEX indicates on what part of the profile it will be applied.
Values can be, WEB, TOPF and BOTF.
There can be more than one NSEX with the same values on the Splate, this will result in a
combination of the NSEXs. NSEXs with same values must be coherent.
To be able to create a user defined endcut which has an alpha angle greater than 90
degrees, as shown in the picture below:

The negative geometry must be defined in PARAGON as shown below:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Endcuts in AVEVA Marine

• Requirements to Model Use User Defined Endcut

User must have access to MARSTLCATA. User defined endcut name must exist in the
endcut table in record type 602.

• To Use the User Defined Endcut in a Schema:

STI, PRO=10,160,12, SID=TOP, NO=1, Y=-230.6, CON=15,
CUT=2100,30/ CON=15, UCN= 'TEST_CUT', UCP=100,50;

6.5 Example
Below you will find the selection row for endcut type 22 followed by the parameter row for
endcut code 2211.

Type A B C R1 R2 V1 V2 V3 V4
601 22 9 10 1021 -1 1 -1 100 202 -1 -1
...
601 2211 2 35 30
...

Suppose that the stiffener end has been generated by the following input:
CUT = 2211, 150, 50, 80(*) (* Normally calculated automatically)
The result will be as illustrated by Figure 6:3.: Explicit parameters for creation of endcut type
22 below.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Endcuts in AVEVA Marine

Figure 6:3. Explicit parameters for creation of endcut type 22

A (Selection code = 10, i.e. X=0, Y=0, Z=1, W=0). Since Z=1, set A = acut
(150)

B (Selection code = 1021). First set B = bcut (=50). Since B now has a value,
disregard the value indicated by W (and X). (If bcut had been zero, then B would
have been set equal to R1 (=35)).

C = 0 (Selection code = -1)

R1 (Selection code = 1). Set R1 to parameter value number 1 in parameter row

(=35)

R2 = 0 (Selection code = -1)

V1 (Selection code = 100). Since Y=1 set V1 = α1 (=80). Since X=0 no further
change.

V2 (Selection code = 202). Since W=2, set V2 equal to second parameter of

parameter row (30). Since the value of V2<90 V2 will not be affected by the
condition Y=2.

V3 = 0 (Selection code = -1)

V4 = 0 (Selection code = -1)

If a customer wants to change one of the standard values, he should proceed like this:
1. Identify the parameter you want to change (suppose e.g. that you want to change V2
from 30 to 45 degrees).
2. Examine the last digit of the selection code for that parameter (in this case 202). Look
up parameter 2 in the parameter row for endcut code 2211 and change 30 to 45.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:9 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Endcuts in AVEVA Marine

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:10 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

7 Endcut Standards

7.1 General
The general principles of the handling of endcuts in AVEVA Marine have been described in
a separate document. As stated there a number of endcut types are built into AVEVA Marine
but for an endcut standard to become available for use instances of the endcut types must
be established. These instances (end cut codes) are stored in an endcut table. A definition
file for the creation of a standard endcut table is delivered along with the Hull application to
assist a customer in creating a first endcut standard. By making changes (and editing in
general) of this file a customer may adapt the default standard to his needs to the extent
described in the document referred to and in paragraphs below.
This document contains an overview of all the endcut types currently supported by AVEVA
Marine and documents also the characteristics of the endcut codes in the standard set-up of
AVEVA Marine.

7.2 Principles of Documentation

For each of the endcut types this document contains the following information:
1. A sketch showing the shape of the endcut so that the right codes can be picked and
relevant parameters defined.
2. A table showing all the instances of the endcut types with parameters, both those open
for user setting and those defined via the endcut table (for examples, see below) and
those that may be affected by the end user. The in-built parameters shown in the tables
below are those delivered in the standard set-up of AVEVA Marine. A customer may
create new instances (endcut codes) of a the endcut types.
3. Traditionally, endcut angles are designated α1, α2, α3 (and α4) in the modelling phase
but V1, V2,V3 and V4 in production output. In most cases, there is a simple one-to-one
relation between the modelling parameters and those used for production.
4. Regarding end cut angles there are some facts to consider:
• The angle in the web may almost always be changed by the user and is by default
90 degrees.
• The angle in the flange may be changed if the default angle is 90 degrees.
• In all cases when an endcut angle may be changed by the user it will always be
calculated automatically if the profile end is connected to another part.
• However, if in these cases the user has given any angle explicitly then this will
always take over the automatically calculated one.
5. Additional comments on the use of the endcut may be added in some cases.
The table associated with each endcut type has a varying number of columns.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Column 1 contains always the endcut code (i.e. an instance of the endcut type) with a list of
parameters that may be explicitly given. Parameters within brackets ( [… ] ) are optional
and need not be given.
As mentioned above parameters that are connection angles are normally calculated
automatically by the system (in case the profile end is connected to another part) and need
not be given. They are always optional even if not surrounded by brackets.
Columns 2, 3 etc. specify those of the endcut parameters that are set-up in the endcut table.
They can normally not be overridden by the end user with the exception of flange angles
angle 90 degrees in the endcut table.
E.g. specifying the input CUT=2100,0,75 means that α2 will be set to 75 instead of the
default 90 degrees.

7.3 Customer Adaptation of Endcuts

As mentioned in ref. 1 the endcut standard may be customised via the endcut table. The
following changes may be done.
1. Irrelevant endcuts types may be removed by removing them from the endcut table.
2. Existing endcut codes may be changed by changing some of the in-built parameters in
the endcut table, i.e. those in columns 2, 3, etc. in the tables below.
3. New endcut codes may be created by adding new entries in the endcut table. A new
endcut code must consist of the endcut type with two digits added. The same
parameters should be defined (with different values) as in previously existing codes.
Please observe that quite new endcut types cannot be created in this way.

Example:
Suppose that a customer needs an endcut type 11 with R1=40 and R2=0. He has then two
options:
1. Modify the definition of e.g. endcut code 1110 so that R1 is changed from 35 to 40.
2. Define a new endcut code, e.g. 1150, with R1=40 and R2=0.

Remark:
Currently the following rule should be adhered to when creating new endcut codes: For
endcut types 21, 22, 26, 27, 28, 31, 32, 35 and 36 endcut codes ending in 0 should always
have a default flange angle 90 degrees, those not ending in 0 should have a flange angle
with a different value.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

7.4 Survey of Endcut Types

7.4.1 Endcuts for Flat Bars

Type 10:

Code, parameter
1000,a,b[,c,d]

Type 11:

Code, parameter R1 R2

1100[, α1] 0 0
1102[, α1] 0 35
1104[, α1] 0 50
1105[, α1] 0 60
1106[, α1] 0 75
1110[, α1] 35 0

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

1112[, α1] 35 35
1114[, α1] 35 50
1115[, α1] 35 60
1116[, α1] 35 75
1120[, α1] KS50 KS50
1122[, α1] 50 35
1124[, α1] 50 50
1125[, α1] 50 60
1126[, α1] 50 75
1130[, α1] 75 0
1132[, α1] 75 35
1134[, α1] 75 50
1135[, α1] 75 60
1136[, α1] 75 75
1140[, α1] 60 0
1142[, α1] 60 35
1144[, α1] 60 50
1145[, α1] 60 60
1146[, α1] 60 75
1190[, α1] KS10 0

Type 12:

1. If b=R1 then b need not be given

2. If b>H/2 then a1 should be given instead of a

Code, parameters R1

1210, a[, b, α1] 35

1220, a[, b, α1] 50
1230, a[, b, α1] 75
1240, a[, b, α1] 60

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 13:

Code, parameters R1 α2

1301, b[, α1] 0 18

1302, b[, α1] 0 30
1303, b[, α1] 0 45
1311, b[, α1] 35 18
1312, b[, α1] 35 30
1313, b[, α1] 35 45
1321, b[, α1] 50 18
1322, b[, α1] 50 30
1323, b[, α1] 50 45
1331, b[, α1] 75 18
1332, b[, α1] 75 30
1333, b[, α1] 75 45
1341, b[, α1] 60 18
1342, b[, α1] 60 30
1343, b[, α1] 60 45
1391, b[, α1] KS10 18
1392, b[, α1] KS10 30
1393, b[, α1] KS10 45

Type 14:

Remark:
If c is not given then c=(H-b)/2

Code, parameters α2

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

1401, b[, c, α1] 18

1402, b[, c, α1] 30
1403, b[, c, α1] 60
1404, b[, c, α1] 45

Type 15:

Code, parameter R1

1500, a 20
1510, a 35

LType 16:

Code, parameters R1

1600, a, b 20
1610, a, b 35

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 17:

Code, parameters R1 α1

1700 20 18
1710 20 30
1720 35 18
1730 35 30

Type 18:

Remark:
If R1 = 0 then all parameters R1, a, b, c, will be set to half the profile height (H / 2).
If c = 0 or not given then c will be set to half the profile height (H / 2).
If b = 0 or not given then b will be set to the same value as a.
If a = 0 or not given then a will be set to the same value as the radius R1.

Code, parameters R1

1800[, a, b, c] 0
1810[, a, b, c] 35
1820[, a, b, c] 50
1830[, a, b, c] 100

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 19:

Code, parameters α2

1901, b[, α1] 18

1911, b[, α1] 30
1921, b[, α1] 45

Type 61:

Code, parameters R1

6102, b[, α1] 40

Type 62:

Code, parameters R2

6202, b[, α1] 40

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 63:

Code, parameters R1 α2

6311, a, b[, α1] 40 18

6312, a, b[, α1] 40 30

Type 64:

Code, parameters R1 α2

6411, a, b[, α1] 40 18

6412, a, b[, α1] 40 30

Type 65:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:9 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Remark:
R2 is calculated automatically from in-built rules.

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2

6502, b[, α1] 0 * 30

6512, b[, α1] 40 * 30

Type 66:

Code, parameters α2

6601, a, b[, c, α1] 18

6602, a, b[, c, α1] 30

Type 67:

Code, parameters α2

6701, b, c[, α1] 18

6702, b, c[, α1] 30

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:10 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 68:

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2

6801, b, c[, α1] 0 KS15 18

6802, b, c[, α1] 0 KS15 30
6811, b, c[, α1] 40 KS15 18
6812, b, c[, α1] 40 KS15 30

Type 69:

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2

6911, a, b, c[, α1] 40 KS15 18

6912, a, b, c[, α1] 40 KS15 30

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:11 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 76:

Code, parameters R1 R2
7610, [b,c,a1,a3] 15 300
7620, [b,c,a1,a3] 25 300
7630, [b,c,a1,a3] 50 300

Type 101:

Remarks:
1. If c=0 (not given) then c=(b -H)/2
2. NB! This endcut may only be used for flanges (face plates) to be fabricated as plate
parts.

Code parameters α2 α3

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:12 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

10100, a, b[, c ] 18 18
10110, a, b[, c ] 18 30
10120, a, b[, c ] 30 18

Type 102:

Remarks:
1. If b=0 (not given) then b=H
2. If c=0 (not given) then c= (H -b)/2
3. A negative value of c is allowed
4. NB! When c<0 this endcut may only be used for flanges (face plates) to be fabricated
as plate parts.

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2 α3

10200, a, b, c 30 30 18 18
10210, a, b, c 30 30 30 30
10220, a, b, c 50 50 45 45

Type 103:

Remark:
This is very similar to endcut type 14, the difference is that α2 and α3 may be different.

Code, parameters α2 α3

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:13 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

10300, b, c[, α1] 0 0

10310, b, c[, α1] 45 50
10320, b, c[, α1] 18 30

Type 104:

Remarks:
1. If c=0 or not given then c=(b -H)/2
2. If R1=0 then “upper” edge will be straight. Similarly for “lower” edge if R2=0 or not
given.
3. NB! This endcut may only be used for flanges (face plates) to be fabricated as plate
parts.

Code parameters

10400, a, b, R1[, R2, c, α1]

Type 105:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:14 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Remark:
If c = 0 or not given then c will be set to H - 2*b.

Code, parameters

10500, a, b[, c, α1]

Type 106:

Code, parameters R1 R2

10600, a, b[, α1] 10 35

10610, a, b[, α1] 15 35
10620, a, b[, α1] 15 50
10630, a, b[, α1] KS10 50

Type 107

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:15 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Code, parameters R1

10700, a, [b, α1, α2] 20

10710, a, [b, α1, α2] 35

Type 108

Code, parameters R1 R2

10810, a, b[, α1] 35 10

10820, a, b[, α1] 50 15
10820, a, b[, α1] 50 KS10

Type 112:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:16 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Remark:
If b=0 (or not given) then b = H -R2.

Code, parameters R1 R2

11210, a[, b, α1] 0 35

11220, a[, b, α1] 0 50
11230, a[, b, α1] 0 75

Type 113:

Remark:
b may be left out.

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2

11301[, b] 25 25 18
11302[, b 25 25 30
11303[, b] 25 25 45

Type 114:

Remark:
If c=0 (or not given) then c = ( H -b)/2

Code, parameters R1 α2

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:17 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

11401, b[, c, α1] 25 18

11402, b[, c, α1] 25 30
11403, b[, c, α1] 25 60

Type 115:

Remark:
The radius R is defined by the distance a and the angle α1.

Code, parameters

11500, a[, α1]

Type 116:

Remark:
If b < = 5 the KS10 notch will not be created.

Code, parameters R1 R2

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:18 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

11600, a, b[, α1] 35 10

11610, a, b[, α1] 35 15
11620, a, b[, α1] 50 15
11630, a, b[, α1] 50 KS10

Type 117:

Code, parameters R1

11700, a, b[, α1] 10

11710, a, b[, α1] 15
11720, a, b[, α1] 35
11730, a, b[, α1] KS10

Type 118:

Remark:
R1 defines two identical arc segments.

Code, parameters R1

11800, a, b[, α1] 10

11810, a, b[, α1] 15
11820, a, b[, α1] 35
11830, a, b[, α1] 50

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:19 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

7.4.2 Endcuts for Bulb and L-bars

The endcuts described under this heading can all be used for different kinds of L-bars. In
most cases they may also be used for bulb bars and for asymmetrical T-bars that are close
to L-bars (i.e. where the flange only slightly extends outside the web on the mould side of
the profile).

Type 20:

Code, parameters

2000, a, b[, c, d]

Type 21:

Code, parameters R1 α2

2100[, α1, α2] 0 90

2101[, α] 0 30
2110[, α1, α2] 35 90

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:20 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

2111[, α1] 35 30
2120[, α1, α2] 50 90
2121[, α1] 50 30
2130[, α1] 75 90
2131[, α1] 75 30
2140[, α1, α2] 60 90
2141[, α1] 60 30
2190[, α1, α2] KS10 90
2191[, α1] KS10 30

Type 22:

Remarks:
1. If b=R1 then b need not be given
2. If b>H/2 then a1 should be given instead of a

Code, parameters R1 α2

2210, a[, b, α1, α2] 35 90

2211, a[, b, α1,] 35 30
2220, a[, b, α1, α2] 50 90
2221, a[, b, α1] 50 30
2230, a[, b, α1, α2] 75 90
2231, a[, b, α1] 75 30
2240, a[, b, α1, α2] 60 90
2241, a[, b, α1] 60 30

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:21 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 23:

Code, parameters R1 α2 α3

2301, b[, α1] 0 30 18

2302, b[, α1] 0 90 18
2303, b[, α1] 0 30 30
2304, b[, α1] 0 90 30
2305, b[, α1] 0 45 45
2311, b[, α1] 35 30 18
2312, b[, α1] 35 90 18
2313, b[, α1] 35 30 30
2314, b[, α1] 35 90 30
2321, b[, α1] 50 30 18
2322, b[, α1] 50 90 18
2323, b[, α1] 50 30 30
2324, b[, α1] 50 90 30
2331, b[, α1] 75 30 18
2332, b[, α1] 75 90 18
2333, b[, α1] 75 30 30
2334, b[, α1] 76 90 30
2341, b[, α1] 60 30 18
2342, b[, α1] 60 90 18
2343, b[, α1] 60 30 30
2344, b[, α1] 60 90 30
2391, b[, α1] KS10 30 18
2392, b[, α1] KS10 90 18
2393, b[, α1] KS10 30 30
2394, b[, α1] KS10 90 30

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:22 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 24:

Code, parameters R1 α2

2401, b[, α1] 0 18

2411, b[, α1] 35 18
2421, b[, α1] 50 18
2431, b[, α1] 75 18
2441, b[, α1] 60 18
2491, b[, α1] KS10 18

Type 25:

Code, parameters R1 α2 α3

2501, b, c[, α1] 0 18 18

2511, b, c[, α1] 35 18 18
2521, b, c[, α1] 50 18 18
2531, b, c[, α1] 75 18 18
2541, b, c[, α1] 60 18 18
2591, b, c[, α1] KS10 18 18

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:23 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 26:

Remark:
A given (or calculated) α2 will override the default value in case this is 90.

Code parameters R1 α2 R2

2600, a[, α1, α2] 0 90 KS10

2601, a[, α1] 0 30 KS10
2610, a[, α1, α2] 35 90 KS10
2611, a[, α1] 35 30 KS10
2620, a[, α1, α2] 50 90 KS10
2621, a[, α1 ] 50 30 KS10
2630, a[, α1, α2] 75 90 KS10
2631, a[, α1] 75 30 KS10
2640, a[, α1, α2] 60 90 KS10
2641, a[, α1 ] 60 30 KS10
2650, a[, α1, α2] 0 60 0
2651, a[, α1, α2] 0 60 35
2659, a[, α1, α2] 0 60 KS10
2660, a[, α1, α2] 35 60 0
2661, a[, α1, α2] 35 60 35
2669, a[, α1, α2] 35 60 KS10
2670, a[, 1, α2] KS10 60 0
2671, a[, α1, α2] KS10 60 35
2679, a[, α1, α2] KS10 60 KS10

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:24 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 27:

Remark:
A given (or calculated) α2 will override the default value in case this is 90.

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2

2700, a[, α1, α2] 0 0 90

2701, a[, α1] 0 0 30
2702, a[, α1, α2] 0 35 90
2703, a[, α1] 0 35 30
2704, a[, α1, α2] 0 50 90
2705, a[, α1] 0 50 30
2706, a[, α1, α2] 0 75 90
2707, a[, α1] 0 75 30
2708, a[, α1, α2] 0 60 90
2709, a[, α1] 0 60 30
2710, a[, α1 α 2] 35 0 90
2711, a[, α1] 35 0 30
2712, a[, α1, α2] 35 35 90
2713, a[, α1] 35 35 30
2714, a[, α1, α2] 35 50 90
2715, a[, α1] 35 50 30
2716, a[, α1, α2] 35 75 90
2717, a[, α1] 35 75 30
2718, a[, α1, α2] 35 60 90
2719, a[, α1] 35 60 30
2720, a[, α1, α2] 50 0 90
2721, a[, α1] 50 0 30
2722, a[, α1, α2] 50 35 90
2723, a[, α1] 50 35 30
2724, a[, α1, α2] 50 50 90
2725, a[, α1] 50 50 30
2726, a[, α1, α2] 50 75 90

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:25 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

2727, a[, α1] 50 75 30

2728, a[, α1, α2] 50 60 90
2729, a[, α1] 50 60 30
2730, a[, α1, α2] 75 0 90
2731, a[, α1] 75 0 30
2732, a[, α1, α2] 75 35 90
2733, a[, α1] 75 35 30
2734, a[, α1, α2] 75 50 90
2735, a[, α1] 75 50 30
2736, a[, α1, α2] 75 75 90
2737, a[, α1] 75 75 30
2738, a[, α1, α2] 75 60 90
2739, a[, α1] 75 60 30
2740, a[, α1, α2] 60 0 90
2741, a[, α1] 60 0 30
2742, a[, α1, α2] 60 35 90
2743, a[, α1] 60 35 30
2744, a[, α1, α2] 60 50 90
2745, a[, α1] 60 50 30
2746, a[, α1, α2] 60 75 90
2747, a[, α1] 60 75 30
2748, a[, α1, α2] 60 60 90
2749, a[, α1] 60 60 30

Type 28:

Remark:
A given (or calculated) α2 will override the default value in case this is 90.

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2

2802, a, b[, α1, α2] 0 35 90

2803, a, b[, α1] 0 35 30
2804, a, b[, α1, α2] 0 50 90

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:26 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

2805, a, b[, α1] 0 50 30

2806, a, b[, α1, α 2] 0 75 90
2807, a, b[, α1] 0 75 30
2808, a, b[, α1, α2] 0 60 90
2809, a, b[, α1] 0 60 30
2812, a, b[, α1, α2] 35 35 90
2813, a, b[, α1] 35 35 30
2814, a, b[, α1, α2] 35 50 90
2815, a, b[, α1] 35 50 30
2816, a, b[, α1, α2] 35 75 90
2817, a, b[, α1] 35 75 30
2818, a, b[, α1, α2] 35 60 90
2819, a, b[, α1] 35 60 30
2822, a, b[, α1, α2] 50 35 90
2823, a, b[, α1] 50 35 30
2824, a, b[, α1, α2] 50 50 90
2825, a, b[, α1] 50 50 30
2826, a, b[, α1, α2] 50 75 90
2827, a, b[, α1] 50 75 30
2828, a, b[, α1, α2] 50 60 90
2829, a, b[, α1] 50 60 30
2832, a, b[, α1, α2] 75 35 90
2833, a, b[, α1] 75 35 30
2834, a, b[, α1, α2] 75 50 90
2835, a, b[, α1] 75 50 30
2836, a, b[, α1, α2] 75 75 90
2837, a, b[, α1] 75 75 30
2838, a, b[, α1, α2] 75 60 90
2839, a, b[, α1] 75 60 30
2842, a, b[, α1, α2] 60 35 90
2843, a, b[, α1] 60 35 30
2844, a, b[, α1, α2] 60 50 90
2845, a, b[, α1] 60 50 30
2846, a, b[, α1, α2] 60 75 90
2847, a, b[, α1] 60 75 30
2848, a, b[, α1, α2] 60 60 90
2849, a, b[, α 1] 60 60 30

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:27 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 29:

Code, parameters R1 α2

2900, a, b[, c, α1] 35 90

2901, a, b[, c, α1] 35 30
2910, a, b[, c, α1] 50 90
2911, a, b[, c, α1] 50 30
2920, a, b[, c, α1] 75 90
2921, a, b[, c, α1] 75 30

Type 60:

Remark:
A given (or calculated) α2 will override the default value in case this is 90.

Code, parameters R1 α2

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:28 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

6000, a, 20 90
6001, a, 20 30
6010, a, 35 90
6011, a, 35 30

Type 70:

Remark:
The radius R is defined by the distance a and the angle α1.

Code, parameters α2

7000, a[, α1] 90

7010, a[, α1] 60
7020, a[, α1] 30
7030, a[, α1] 18

Type 71:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:29 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Remark:
If c is not given (or =0), c will be set equal to the flange width α2 will become irrelevant.

Code, parameters R1 α2 α3

7111, a, b[, c, α1] 40 18 18

7122, a, b[, c, α1] 40 18 30

Type 72:

Remark:
If c is not given (or =0), c will be set equal to the flange width α2 will become irrelevant.

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2 α3

7211, a, b[, c, α1] 50 25 18 18

7222, a, b[, c, α1] 50 25 18 30

Type 73:

Remarks:
1. If c is not given (or =0), c will be set equal to the flange width α2 will become irrelevant.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:30 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

2. May be used for asymmetrical T-bars as well (profile type 35)

3. R1 is calculated automatically according to in-built rules.

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2 α3

7311, b[, c, α1] * 30 18 30

7322, b[, c, α1] * 30 30 30

Type 74:

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2 α3

7400, b[, α1] 15 10 45 30

7410, b[, α1] 35 10 45 18
7420, b[, α1] 50 10 45 30
7430, b[, α1] KS10 10 45 18

Remark:
This endcut, which resembles endcut 23, is intended to be used mainly for bulb bars.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:31 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 75:

Code, parameter R1 a2 a3
7510, b 15 30 18
7520, b 15 90 18
7530, b 15 30 30
7540, b 15 90 30

Type 77:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:32 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

This endcut type can be used only if two equal bulb bars are connected in a simple 90
degree connection.

Code, parameters R1
7700 0
7710 35
7720 KS10

Type 119:

Code, parameters R1 α2 α3

11900, a, b, c[, α1] 10 18 30

11910, a, b, c[, α1] 15 30 45
11920, a, b, c[, α1] 35 18 30
11930, a, b, c[, α1] 50 30 45

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:33 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 120:

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2

12000, a, b, c[, α1] 15 15 30

12010, a, b, c[, α1] 35 25 45
12020, a, b, c[, α1] 50 35 30
12030, a, b, c[, α1] KS10 50 45

Type 121:

Code, parameters R1 α3
12100, c[, α1, α2] 0 18
12101, c[ ,α1, α2] 0 30
12102, c[, α1, α2] 0 45

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:34 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Code, parameters R1 α3
12110, c[, α1, α2] 35 18
12111, c[, α1, α2] 35 30
12112, c[, α1, α2] 35 45
12120, c[, α1, α2] 50 18
12121, c[, α1, α2] 50 30
12122, c[, α1, α2] 50 45
12130, c[, α1, α2] 60 18
12131, c[, α1, α2] 60 30
12132, c[, α1, α2] 60 45
12140, c[, α1, α2] 75 18
12141, c[, α1, α2] 75 30
12142, c[, α1, α2] 75 45
12190, c[, α1, α2] KS10 18
12191, c[, α1, α2] KS10 30
12192, c[, α1, α2] KS10 45

Remark:
If c is close to the web thickness or close to the flange width then use type 21.

Type 122:

Code, parameters R1 α2

12210, a, b[, α1], 25 18

12220, a, b[, α1], 25 30
12230, a, b[, α1], 25 45

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:35 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 123:

Remark:
R1 defines two identical arc segments.

Code, parameters R1 α2

12300, a, b[, α1] 10 90

12310, a, b[, α1] 15 60
12320, a, b[, α1] 35 30
12330. a, b[, α1] 50 30

Type 124:

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2 α3

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:36 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

12400, b, c[, α1] 15 KS10 90 90

12410, b, c[, α1] 33 KS10 60 90
12420, b, c[, α1] 50 KS10 30 60
12430, b, c[, α1] KS10 KS10 18 60

Type 125:

Remarks:
1. The small figure to the right shows how the geometry of this endcut may be controlled
when the endcut is drawn before the upper part of the web has been bent down.
Observe that R2 contains composed information in this case.
2. If c=0 the flange will have a straight cut and α2 becomes meaningless.

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2 α3

12510, b[,c, α1], 25 35010.5 18 30

12520, b[,c, α1], 25 35010.5 30 30
12530, b[,c, α1], 25 35010.5 45 30

Type 126:

Code, parameters R1 α3

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:37 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

12600, a, c[, α1, α2] 0 18

12601, a, c[, α1, α2] 0 30
12602, a, c[, α1, α2] 0 45
12610, a, c[, α1, α2] 35 18
12611, a, c[, α1, α2] 35 30
12612, a, c[, α1, α2] 35 45
12620, a, c[, α1, α2] 50 18
12621, a, c[, α1, α2] 50 30
12622, a, c[, α1, α2] 50 45
12630, a, c[, α1, α2] 60 18
12631, a, c[, α1, α2] 60 30
12632, a, c[, α1, α2] 60 45
12640, a, c[, α1, α2] 75 18
12641, a, c[, α1, α2] 75 30
12642, a, c[, α1, α2] 75 45

Remark:
If c is close to the web thickness or close to the flange width then use type 26.

Type 127:

Code, parameters R1 α2

12700, a, b[, α1] 15 30

12710, a, b[, α1] 35 45
12720, a, b[, α1] 50 30
12730, a, b[, α1] KS10 45

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:38 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 128:

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2
12800, a, b[, α1] 0 30 18
12810, a, b[, α1] KS10 30 18
12820, a, b[, α1] 10 30 18

Type129:

Code, parameters R1 α3
12900, a, b, c[, α1, α2] 0 18
12901, a, b, c[, α1, α2] 0 30
12902, a, b, c[, α1, α2] 0 45
12910, a, b, c[, α1, α2] 35 18

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:39 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

12911, a, b, c[, α1, α2] 35 30

12912, a, b, c[, α1, α2] 35 45
12920, a, b, c[, α1, α2] 50 18
12921, a, b, c[, α1, α2] 50 30
12922, a, b, c[, α1, α2] 50 45
12930, a, b, c[, α1, α2] 60 18
12931, a, b, c[, α1, α2] 60 30
12932, a, b, c[, α1, α2] 60 45
12940, a, b, c[, α1, α2] 75 18
12941, a, b, c[, α1, α2] 75 30
12942, a, b, c[, α1, α2] 75 45

Remark:
If c is close to the web thickness or close to the flange width then use type 22.

7.4.3 Endcuts for Asymmetrical T-bars (Profile Type 35)

In most cases the end cuts for L-bars in 2.4.2 may be used also for asymmetrical T-bars that
are close to L-bars (i.e. where the flange only slightly extends outside the web on the mould
side of the profile). However, in certain cases neither the endcuts for L-bars nor T-bars are
appropriate. This paragraph contains some endcut types that are specific for asymmetric T-
bars.

Type 40:

Remarks:
1. This endcut type is intended for asymmetric T-bars (profile type 35) with a
comparatively small "overshoot" of the flange (less than half the flange width) on the
mould line side of the web
2. α 4 is by default 90 degrees. Any given value will override this default value.

Code, parameters R1 α2 α3

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:40 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

4001, b, c[, α1, α4] 0 30 30

4002, b, c[, α1, α4] 0 30 18
4011, b, c[, α1, α4] 35 30 30
4012, b, c[, α1, α4] 35 30 18
4031, b, c[, α1, α4] 75 30 30
4032, b, c[, α1, α4] 75 30 18
4041, b, c[, α1, α4] 60 30 30
4042, b, c[, α1, α4] 60 30 18

Type 41:

Remarks:
1. This endcut type is intended for asymmetric T-bars (profile type 35) with a
comparatively large "overshoot" of the flange (larger than half the flange width) on the
mould line side of the web.
2. α 4 is by default 90 degrees. Any given value will override this default value.

Code, parameters R1 α2 α3

4101, b, c[, α1, α4] 0 30 30

4102, b, c[, α1, α4] 0 30 18
4111, b, c[, α1, α4] 35 30 30
4112, b, c[, α1, α4] 35 30 18
4131, b, c[, α1, α4] 75 30 30
4132, b, c[, α1, α4] 75 30 18
4141, b, c[, α1, α4] 60 30 30
4142, b, c[, α1, α4] 60 30 18

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:41 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 42:

Remarks:
1. This endcut type is intended for asymmetric T-bars (profile type 35) with a
comparatively small "overshoot" of the flange (less than half the flange width) on the
mould line side of the web
2. α 4 is by default 90 degrees. Any given value will override this default value.

Code, parameters R1 α2

4201, c[, α1, α4] 0 30

4211, c[, α1, α4] 35 30
4231, c[, α1, α4] 75 30
4241, c[, α1, α4] 60 30

Type 43:

Remarks:
1. This endcut type is intended for asymmetric T-bars (profile type 35) with a
comparatively large "overshoot" of the flange (larger than half the flange width) on the
mould line side of the web.
2. α 4 is by default 90 degrees. Any given value will override this default value
.

Code, parameters R1 α2

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:42 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

4301, c[, α1, α4] 0 30

4311, c[, α1, α4] 35 30
4331, c[, α1, α4] 75 30
4341, c[, α1, α4] 60 30

Type 132:

Remarks:
1. If c is not given (or =0), c will be set equal to the flange width α2 will become irrelevant
and the flange angle will be set to α4.
2. This endcut type is intended for asymmetric T-bars (profile type 35) with a
comparatively small "overshoot" of the flange (less than half the flange width) on the
mould line side of the web.

Code, parameters R1 α2

13201, b[,c, α1, α4] 35 18

13202, b[,c, α1, α4] 35 30
13203, b[,c, α1, α4] 35 45

Type 133:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:43 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Remarks:
1. If c is not given (or =0), c will be set equal to the flange width α2 will become irrelevant
and the flange angle will be set to α4.
2. This endcut type is intended for asymmetric T-bars (profile type 35) with a
comparatively small "overshoot" of the flange (less than half the flange width) on the
mould line side of the web.

Code, parameters R1 α2

13301, a, b[,c, α1, α4] 35 18

13302, a, b[,c, α1, α4] 35 30
13303, a, b[,c, α1, α4] 35 45

Type 134:

Remarks:
1. If c is not given (or =0), c will be set equal to the flange width α2 will become irrelevant
and the flange angle will be set to α4.
2. This endcut type is intended for asymmetric T-bars (profile type 35) with a
comparatively large "overshoot" of the flange (larger than half the flange width) on the
mould line side of the web.

Code, parameters R1 α2

13401, b[,c, α1, α4] 35 18

13402, b[,c, α1, α4] 35 30
13403, b[,c, α1, α4] 35 45

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:44 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 135:

Remarks:
1. If c is not given (or =0), c will be set equal to the flange width α2 will become irrelevant
and the flange angle will be set to α4.
2. This endcut type is intended for asymmetric T-bars (profile type 35) with a
comparatively large "overshoot" of the flange (larger than half the flange width) on the
mould line side of the web.

Code, parameters R1 α2

13501, a, b[,c, α1,α4] 35 18

13502, a, b[,c, α1, α4] 35 30
13503, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 45

Type 136:

Remarks:
1. If c is not given (or =0), c will be set equal to the flange width α2 will become irrelevant
and the flange angle will be set to α4.
2. The small sketch to the right shows how a small notch may be defined below the end of
the flange

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:45 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

3. This endcut type is intended for asymmetric T-bars (profile type 35) with a
comparatively large "overshoot" of the flange (less than half the flange width) on the
mould line side of the web.

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2

13601, b[,c, α1, α4] 35 55012 18

13602, b[,c, α1, α4] 35 55012 30
13603, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 55012 45

Type 137:

Remarks:
1. If c is not given (or =0), c will be set equal to the flange width α2 will become irrelevant
and the flange angle will be set to α4.
2. The small sketch to the right shows how a small notch may be defined below the end of
the flange.
3. This endcut type is intended for asymmetric T-bars (profile type 35) with a
comparatively large "overshoot" of the flange (less than half the flange width) on the
mould line side of the web.

Code, designation R1 R2 α2

13701, a, b[,c, α1, α4] 35 55012 18

13702, a, b[,c, α1, α4] 35 55012 30
13703, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 55012 45

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:46 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 138:

Remarks:
1. If c is not given (or =0), c will be set equal to the flange width α2 will become irrelevant
and the flange angle will be set to α4.
2. The small sketch to the right shows how a small notch may be defined below the end of
the flange.
3. This endcut type is intended for asymmetric T-bars (profile type 35) with a
comparatively small "overshoot" of the flange (less than half the flange width) on the
mould line side of the web.

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2

13801, b[,c, α1, α4] 35 55012 18

13802, b[,c, α1, α4] 35 55012 30
13803, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 55012 45

Type 139:

Remarks:
1. If c is not given (or =0), c will be set equal to the flange width α2 will become irrelevant
and the flange angle will be set to α4.
2. The small sketch to the right shows how a small notch may be defined below the end of
the flange.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:47 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

3. This endcut type is intended for asymmetric T-bars (profile type 35) with a
comparatively small "overshoot" of the flange (less than half the flange width) on the
mould line side of the web.

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2

13901, a, b[,c, α1, α4] 35 55012 18

13902, a, b[,c, α1, α4] 35 55012 30
13903, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 55012 45

Type 153:

Remarks:
1. If c is not given (or =0), c will be set equal to the flange width α2 will become irrelevant
and the flange angle will be set to α4.
2. The small sketch to the left shows the parameters of the corner notch.
3. This endcut type is intended for asymmetric T-bars (profile type 35) with a
comparatively small "overshoot" of the flange (less than half the flange width) on the
mould line side of the web.

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2

15301, a, b[,c, α1, α4] 50 25 18

15302, a, b[,c, α1, α4] 50 25 30
15303, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 50 25 45

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:48 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 157:

Remarks:
1. If c is not given (or =0), c will be set equal to the flange width α2 will become irrelevant
and the flange angle will be set to α4.
2. The small sketch to the left shows the parameters of the corner notch.
3. This endcut type is intended for asymmetric T-bars (profile type 35) with a
comparatively large "overshoot" of the flange (more than half the flange width) on the
mould line side of the web.

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2

15701, a, b[,c, α1, α4] 50 25 18

15702, a, b[,c, α1, α4] 50 25 30
15703, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 50 25 45

Type 160:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:49 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Remarks:
1. If c is not given (or =0), c will be set equal to the flange width α2 will become irrelevant
and the flange angle will be set to α4.
2. This endcut type is intended for asymmetric T-bars (profile type 35) with a
comparatively small "overshoot" of the flange (less than half the flange width) on the
mould line side of the web.

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2

16001, b[,c, α1, α4] 35 0 18

16002, b[,c, α1, α4] 35 0 30
16003, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 0 45
16004, b[,c, α1, α4] 35 KS10 18

Type 161:

Remarks:
1. If c is not given (or =0), c will be set equal to the flange width α2 will become irrelevant
and the flange angle will be set to α4.
2. The small sketch to the left shows the parameters of the corner notch.
3. This endcut type is intended for asymmetric T-bars (profile type 35) with a
comparatively small "overshoot" of the flange (less than half the flange width) on the
mould line side of the web.

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2

16110, a, b[,c, α1, α4] 35 0 18

16120, a, b[,c, α1, α4] 50 10 30
16130, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 60 KS10 45

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:50 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 162:

Remarks:
1. If c is not given (or =0), c will be set equal to the flange width α2 will become irrelevant
and the flange angle will be set to α4.
2. The small sketch to the left shows the parameters of the corner notch.
3. This endcut type is intended for asymmetric T-bars (profile type 35) with a
comparatively small "overshoot" of the flange (less than half the flange width) on the
mould line side of the web.

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2

16201, a, b[,c,α1, α4] 50 25 18

16202, a, b[,c, α1, α4] 50 25 30
16203, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 50 25 45

Type 163:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:51 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Remarks:
1. If c is not given (or =0), c will be set equal to the flange width α2 will become irrelevant
and the flange angle will be set to α4.
2. This endcut type is intended for asymmetric T-bars (profile type 35) with a
comparatively large "overshoot" of the flange (more than half the flange width) on the
mould line side of the web.

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2

16301, b[,c, α1, α4] 35 0 18

16302, b[,c, α1, α4] 35 0 30
16303, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 0 45
16304, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 KS10 18

Type 164:

Remarks:
1. If c is not given (or =0), c will be set equal to the flange width α2 will become irrelevant
and the flange angle will be set to α4.
2. This endcut type is intended for asymmetric T-bars (profile type 35) with a
comparatively large "overshoot" of the flange (more than half the flange width) on the
mould line side of the web.

Code, parameters R1 R1 α2

16401, a, b[,c, α1, α4] 35 0 18

16402, a, b[,c, α1, α4] 35 0 30
16403, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 0 45
16404, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 10 18

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:52 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 165:

Remarks:
1. If c is not given (or =0), c will be set equal to the flange width α2 will become irrelevant
and the flange angle will be set to α4.
2. The small sketch to the left shows the parameters of the corner notch.
3. This endcut type is intended for asymmetric T-bars (profile type 35) with a
comparatively large "overshoot" of the flange (more than half the flange width) on the
mould line side of the web.

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2

16501, a, b[,c, α1,α4] 50 25 18

16502, a, b[,c, α1, α4] 50 25 30
16503, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 50 25 45

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:53 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 167:

Remark:
If be equals the profile height aplha3 will be set to 90 deg.

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2 α3

16700, a, b[, α1] 35 20010 18 30

16710, a, b[, α1] 35 20010 30 45
16720, a, b[, α1] 50 20010 18 30
16730, a, b[, α1] 50 20100 30 45

7.4.4 Endcuts for T-bars

This section contains endcut types that may be used for (symmetrical) T-bars. In some
cases these endcut types may be used also for asymmetrical T-bars (profile type 35).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:54 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 30:

Code, parameters

3000, a, b[, c, d, e, f]

Type 31:

Remarks:
1. A given (or calculated) α4 will override the default value for α2 and α3 in case this is
90.
2. Endcut codes with α2=α3=90 may be used for asymmetrical T-bars as well.
.

Code, parameters R1 α2 α3

3100[, α1, α4] 0 90 90

3101[, c, α1, α3, α4] 0 30 90
3102[, c, α1, α4] 0 30 30

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:55 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

3103[, c, α1, α3, α4] 0 18 90

3104[, c, α1, α4] 0 18 18
3110[, α1, α4] 35 90 90
3111[, c, α1, α3, α4] 35 30 90
3112[, c, α1, α4] 35 30 30
3113[, c, α1, α3, α4 ] 35 18 90
3114[, c, α1, α4] 35 18 18
3120[, α1, α4] 50 90 90
3121[, c, α1, α3, α4] 50 30 90
3122[, c, α1, α4] 50 30 30
3123[, c, α1, α3, α4] 50 18 90
3124[, c, α1, α4 ] 50 18 18
3130[, α1, α4] 75 90 90
3131[,c, α1, α3, α4] 75 30 90
3132[, c, α1, α4] 75 30 30
3133[, c, α1, α3, α4] 75 18 90
3134[, c, α1, α4] 75 18 18
3140[, α1, α4] 60 90 90
3141[, c, α1, α3, α4] 60 30 90
3142[, c, α1, α4] 60 30 30
3143[, c, α1, α3, α4] 60 18 90
3144[, c, α1, α4] 60 18 18

Type 32:

Remarks:
1. For this endcut type α2 and α3 are always equal.
2. c is relevant only when α2=α3=90.
3. A given (or calculated) α4 will override the default value of α2/α3 in case this is 90.
4. Endcut codes with α2=α3=90 may be used for asymmetrical T-bars as well.

Code, parameters R1 α2
α3

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:56 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

3210, a[, α1, α4] 35 90

3211, a[, c, α1, α4] 35 30
3212, a[, c, α1, α4] 35 18
3220, a[, α1, α4] 50 90
3221, a[, c, α1, α4] 50 30
3222, a[, c, α1, α4] 50 18
3230, a[, α1, α4] 75 90
3231, a[, c, α1, α4] 75 30
3232, a[, c, α1, α4] 75 18
3240[, a, α1, α4] 60 90
3241[, a, c, α1, α4] 60 30
3242[, a, c, α1, α4] 60 18

Type 33:

Code, parameters α2 α3

3311, b, c[, α1] 30 30

3312, b, c[, α1] 18 30
3321, b, c[, α1] 30 18
3322, b, c[, α1,] 18 18

Type 34:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:57 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Remark:
A given (or calculated) α4 will override the default value for α2 and α4 in case this is 90.
.

Code, parameters R2 α2 α3

3411, a, b, c[, α1] 35 30 30

3412, a, b, c[, α1] 35 18 30
3413, a, b, c[, α1] 35 30 18
3414, a, b, c[, α1] 35 18 18
3421, a, b, c[, α1] 50 30 30
3422, a, b, c[, α1] 50 18 30
3423, a, b, c[, α1] 50 30 18
3424, a, b, c[, α1] 50 18 18
3431, a, b, c[, α1] 75 30 30
3432, a, b, c[, α1] 75 18 30
3433, a, b, c[, α1] 75 30 18
3434, a, b, c[, α1] 75 18 18
3441, a, b, c[, α1] 60 30 30
3442, a, b, c[, α1] 60 18 30
3443, a, b, c[, α1] 60 30 18
3444, a, b, c[, α1] 60 18 18

Type 35:

Remarks:
1. For this endcut type α2 and α3 are always equal.
2. c is relevant only when α2=α3=90.
3. A given (or calculated) α4 will override the default value of α2/α3 in case this is 90.
4. Endcut codes with α2=α3=90 may be used for asymmetrical T-bars as well.

Code, parameters R1 α2
α3

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:58 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

3510, a, b[, α1, α4] 35 90

3511, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 30
3512, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 18
3520, a, b[, α1, α4] 50 90
3521, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 50 30
3522, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 50 18
3530, a, b[, α1, α4] 75 90
3531, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 75 30
3532, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 75 18
3540, a, b[, α1, α4] 60 90
3541, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 60 30
3542, a, b[, c, α1, α 4] 60 18

Type 36:

Remarks:
1. For this endcut type α2 and α3 are always equal.
2. c is relevant only when α2=α3=90.
3. A given (or calculated) α4 will override the default value of α2/α3 in case this is 90.
4. Endcut codes with α2=α3=90 may be used for asymmetrical T-bars as well.

Code, parameters R1 α2
α3

3610, a, b[, α1, α4] 35 90

3611, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 30
3612, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 18
3620, a, b[, α1, α4 50 90
3621, a, b[, c, α1, α4 50 30
3622, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 50 18
3630, a, b[, α1, α4] 75 90
3631, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 75 30
3632, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 75 18

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:59 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

3640, a, b[, α1, α4] 60 90

3641, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 60 30
3642, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 60 18

Type 37:

Remark:
This endcut type may be used for asymmetric T-bars (profile type 35) as well.

Code, parameters R1 α2

3701, b[, α1,] 0 18

3711, b[, α1,] 35 18
3721, b[, α1,] 50 18
3731, b[, α1] 75 18
3741, b[, α1] 60 18
3791, b[, α1] KS10 18

Type 38:

Code, parameters R1 α2 α3

3801, b, c[, α1] 0 18 18

3811, b, c[, α1] 35 18 18
3821, b, c[, α1] 50 18 18
3831, b, c[, α1] 75 18 18
3841, b, c[, α1] 60 18 18
3891, b, c[, α1] KS10 18 18

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:60 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 39:

Remark:
If c = 0 or not given then c will be set to the flange width and α2 will become irrelevant. R2
contains encoded information according to the small sketch in the upper left corner. If R2 <
1000 then R2 will define an arc segment.

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2 α3

3900, a, b[, c, α1] 35 20010 18 30

3910, a, b[, c, α1] 35 20010 30 45
3920, a, b[, c, α1] 50 20010 18 30
3930, a, b[, c, α1] 50 20010 30 45

Type 44:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:61 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Remark:
If c = 0 or not given then c will be set to the flange width, α2 will become irrelevant and the
flange angle will be set to α4 (90 by default).

Code, parameters R1 α2

4400, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 10 18

4410, a, b[, c,α1, α4] 15 30
4420, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 18
4430, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 50 30

Types 45 and 47:

Remarks:
1. The difference between type 45 and type 47 is that type 45 has a temporary bridge, 40
mm wide.
2. These endcut types may be used for asymmetric T-bars as well.

Code, parameters α2 Relation

major axis/
minor axis

4560, a, b, c[, α1] 90 1/0,5

4580, a, b, c[, α1] 90 1/0,6

Code, parameters α2 Relation

major axis/
minor axis

4760, a, b, c[, α1] 90 1/0,5

4780, a, b, c[, α1] 90 1/0,6

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:62 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Types 46 and 48:

Remarks:
1. The difference between type 46 and type 48 is that type 46 has a temporary bridge, 40
mm wide.
2. These endcut types may be used for asymmetric T-bars as well.

Code, parameters α2 Relation

major axis/
minor axis

4660, a, b, c[, α1] 90 1/0,5

4680, a, b, c[, α1] 90 1/0,6

Code, parameters α2 Relation

major axis/
minor axis

4860, a, b, c[, α1] 90 1/0,5

4880, a, b, c[, α1] 90 1/0,6

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:63 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 49:

Remark:
If c = 0 or not given then c will be set to the flange width, a2 will become irrelevant and the
flange angle will be set to a4 ( 90 by default).
Endcut codes with a2=a3=90 may be used for asymmetrical T-bars as well.

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2 α3

4910, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 50 35 30 30

4920, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 50 35 30 18
4930, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 75 50 30 30
4940, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 75 50 30 18

Type 50:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:64 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Remarks:
1. This endcut has a temporary bridge, 40 mm wide.
2. Endcut type 50 may be used for asymmetric T-bars as well.
3. Type 50 is similar to type 46 but the flange extends outside the web in this case.

Code, parameters Relation

major axis/
minor axis

5060, a, b, c, 1/0,5

Type 81:

Remark:
If c is not given (or =0) then c will be set equal to the flange width and α2 becomes irrelevant
(=90).

Code, parameters R1 α2 α3

8111, a, b[, c, α1] 40 18 18

8122, a, b[, c, α1] 40 30 30

Type 82:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:65 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Remark:
If c is not given (or =0) then c will be set equal to the flange width and α2 becomes irrelevant
(=90).

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2 α3

8211, a, b[, c, α1] 50 25 18 18

8222, a, b[, c, α1] 50 25 30 30

Type 83:

Remarks:
1. If c is not given (or =0) then c will be set equal to the flange width and α2 becomes
irrelevant (=90).
2. R1 is calculated automatically depending on H.

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2 α3

8311, b[, c, α1] * 30 18 30

8322, b[, c, α1] * 30 30 30

Type 130:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:66 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Remark:
If c is not given (or =0) then c will be set equal to the flange width and α2 becomes
irrelevant.

Code, parameters R1 α2

13001, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 18

13002, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 30
13003, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 45

Type 131:

Remark:
If c is not given (or =0) then c will be set equal to the flange width and α2 becomes
irrelevant.

Code, parameters R1 α2

13101, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 18

13102, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 30
13103, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 45

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:67 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 140:

Remarks:
1. If c is not given (or =0) then c will be set equal to the flange width and α2 becomes
irrelevant and the flange angle equal to α4 (90 by default).
2. The small sketch to the right shows how R2 controls the small notch at the end of the
flange. Note that R2 contains encoded information.
3. If R2<1000 then the notch will be placed in the upper corner of the web as shown in the
small figure below. Note that R2<0 in this case will produce a sniped corner.

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2

14001, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 55012 18

14002, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 55012 30
14003, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 55012 45

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:68 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 141:

Remarks:
1. If c is not given (or =0) then c will be set equal to the flange width and α2 becomes
irrelevant and the flange angle equal to α4 (90 by default).
2. The small sketch to the right shows how R2 controls the small notch at the end of the
flange. Note that R2 contains encoded information.
3. If R2<1000 then the notch will be placed in the upper corner of the web as shown in the
small figure below. Note that R2<0 in this case will produce a sniped corner.

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2

14101, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 25 55012 18

14102, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 25 55012 30
14103, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 25 55012 45

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:69 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 142:

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2

14200, a[, c, α1, α4] 0 12 18

14201, a[, c, α1, α4] 0 25 30
14210, a[, c, α1, α4] 35 12 18
14211, a[, c, α1, α4] 35 25 30
14220, a[, c, α1, α4] KS10 12 18
14221, a[, c, α1, α4] KS10 25 30

Remarks:
1. R1 defines two identical notches at the lower and upper corner of the web respectively.

Type 143:

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2

14300, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 0 12 18

14301, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 0 25 30
14310, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 12 18
14311, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 25 30
14320, a, b[, c, α1, α4] KS10 12 18
14321, a, b[, c, α1, α4] KS10 25 30

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:70 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 144:

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2

14400, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 0 12 18

14401, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 0 25 30
14410, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 12 18
14411, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 25 30
14420, a, b[, c, α1, α4] KS10 12 18
14421, a, b[, c, α1, α4] KS10 25 30

Remarks:
1. R1 defines two identical notches at the lower and upper corner of the web respectively.

Type 145:

Remark:
If c = 0 or not given then c will be set to the flange width, α2 will become irrelevant and the
flange angle will be set to α4 (90 by default).

Code, parameters R1 α2 α3

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:71 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

14500, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 10 18 30

14510, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 15 30 45
14520, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 18 30
14530, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 50 30 45

Type 146:

Remark:
R1 defines two identical arc segments.
If c = 0 or not given then c will be set to the flange width, α2 will become irrelevant and the
flange angle will be set to α4 (90 by default).

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2

14600, a, b[, c, α1, α4] KS10 10 18

14610, a, b[, c, α1, α4] KS10 15 30
14620, a, b[, c, α1, α4] KS10 35 18
14630, a, b[, c, α1, α4] KS10 50 30

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:72 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 147:

Remark:
If c = 0 or not given the c will be set to the flange width, α2 will become irrelevant and the
flange angle will be set to α4 (90 by default).

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2

14700, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 10 KS10 18

14710, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 15 KS10 30
14720, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 KS10 18
14730, a, b[, c, α1, α4] KS10 KS10 30

Type 148:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:73 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Remark:
The value given for radius R1 and R2 has the following meaning:
• A negative value indicates a KS-notch.
• A positive value less than 1000 indicates a scallop radius.
• A positive value greater than 1000 indicates a fillet radius. The radius is received by
subtracting 1000.
Note that c contains encoded information. If c < 1000 then c will define an arc segment.

Code, parameters R1 R2 c

14800, a, b[, α1] KS10 15 35

14810, a, b[, α1] KS10 35 50
14820, a, b[, α1] KS10 50 30010
14830, a, b[, α1] KS10 KS10 40010

Type 158:

Remark:
If c is not given (or =0) then c will be set equal to the flange width and α2 becomes irrelevant
and the flange angle equal to α4 (90 by default).

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2

15801, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 50 25 18

15802, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 50 25 30
15803, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 50 25 45

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:74 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 166:

Remark:
If c is not given (or =0) then c will be set equal to the flange width and α2 becomes irrelevant
and the flange angle equal to α4 (90 by default).

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2

16601, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 50 25 18

16602, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 50 25 30
16603, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 50 25 45

Type 167:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:75 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Remark:
If b equals the profile height alpha3 will be set to 90 degrees.

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2 α3
16700, a, b[,α1] 35 20010 18 30

16710, a, b[,α1] 35 20010 30 45

16720, a, b[,α1] 50 20010 18 30

16730, a, b[,α1] 50 20010 30 45

Type 168:

Remark:
If c = 0 or not given then c will be set to the flange width and a2 will become irrelevant. R2
contains encoded information according to the small sketch in the upper left corner. If R2 <
1000 then R2 will define an arc segment.

Code, parameters R1 R2 α2 α3

16800, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 20010 18 30

16810, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 35 20010 30 45
16820, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 50 20010 18 30
16830, a, b[, c, α1, α4] 50 20010 30 45

7.4.5 Endcuts for I-bars

This section contains endcut types that may be used for I-bars. In all cases the upper and
lower flanges are supposed to be equal as far as the shape is concerned. However, they
may be of different length.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:76 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

The figures below associated with each endcut type show one web view and one flange
view of the I-bar.

Type 173:

Remark:
The value given for radius R1 has the following meaning:
• A negative value indicates a KS-notch.
• A positive value less than 1000 indicates a scallop radius.
• A positive value greater than 1000 indicates a fillet radius. The radius is received by
subtracting 1000.

Code, parameters R1 R2

17300, a, b[, α4] KS10 16

17310, a, b[, α4] KS10 26
17320, a, b[, α4] KS10 35
17330, a, b[, α4] KS10 50

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:77 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 174:

Code, parameters R1 R2

17400[, α1, α4] 10 10

17410[, α1, α4] 15 15
17420[, α1, α4] 35 35
17430[, α1, α4] 50 50

Type 175:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:78 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Remark:
The value given for radius R1 has the following meaning:
• A negative value indicates a KS-notch.
• A positive value less than 1000 indicates a scallop radius.
• A positive value greater than 1000 indicates a fillet radius. The radius is received by
subtracting 1000.
R2 contains encoded information according to the sketch above. If R2 < 1000 then R2
defines an arc segment.

Code, parameters R1 R2

17500, a, b[, c, α4] KS10 16

17510, a, b[, c, α4] KS10 26
17520, a, b[, c, α4] KS10 20010
17530, a, b[, c, α4] KS10 30015

Type 176:

Remark:
The value given for radius R1 has the following meaning:
• A negative value indicates a KS-notch.
• A positive value less than 1000 indicates a scallop radius.
• A positive value greater than 1000 indicates a fillet radius. The radius is received by
subtracting 1000.

Code, parameters R1 R2

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:79 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

17600, a, b[, c, α4] KS10 16

17610, a, b[, c, α4] KS10 26
17620, a, b[, c, α4] KS10 35
17630, a, b[, c, α4] KS10 50

Type 177:

Remark:
The value given for radius R2 has the following meaning:
• A negative value indicates a KS-notch.
• A positive value less than 1000 indicates a scallop radius.
• A positive value greater than 1000 indicates a fillet radius. The radius is received by
subtracting 1000.

Code, parameters R1 R2

17700, a, b, c[, α4] 16 KS10

17710, a, b, c[, α4] 26 KS10
17720, a, b, c[, α4] 35 KS10
17730, a, b, c[, α4] 50 KS10

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:80 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 178:

Code, parameters

17810[, α1, α4]

Type 179:

Remarks:
1. b=0 (or not given) means that b=R2

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:81 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

2. α2=0 means that c becomes irrelevant.

Code, parameters R2 α2

17910, a[, b, c, α1, α4] 0 0

17920, a[, b, c, α1, α4] 20 0
17930, a[, b, c, α1, α4] 20 30
17931, a[, b, c, α1, α4] 30 30
17940, a[, b, c, α1, α4] 50 0
17941, a[, b, c, α1, α4] 50 30
17950, a[, b, c, α1, α4] 75 0
17951, a[, b, c, α1, α4] 75 30

Type 180:

Remarks:
1. b=0 (or not given) means that b=R1
2. α2=0 means that c becomes irrelevant

Code, parameters R1 α2

18010, a[, b, c, α1, α4] 0 0

18020, a[, b, c, α1, α4] 20 0
18030, a[, b, c, α1, α4] 30 0

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:82 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 181:

Remark:
If c = 0 or not given then c will be set to the value of b.
The value given for radius R1 has the following meaning:
• A negative value indicates a KS-notch.
• A positive value less than 1000 indicates a scallop radius.
• A positive value greater than 1000 indicates a fillet radius. The radius is received by
subtracting 1000.
R2 contains encoded information according to the sketch above. If R2 < 1000 then R2
defines an arc segment.

Code, parameters R1 R2

18100, a, b[, c, α4] KS10 35

18110, a, b[, c, α4] KS10 38
18120, a, b[, c, α4] KS10 50
18130, a, b[, c, α4] KS10 30010
18140, a, b[, c, α4] KS10 40010
18150, a, b[, c, α4] KS10 60015

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:83 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 182:

Remark:
If c = 0 or not given then c will be set to the value of b.
The value given for radius R1 has the following meaning:
• A negative value indicates a KS-notch.
• A positive value less than 1000 indicates a scallop radius.
• A positive value greater than 1000 indicates a fillet radius. The radius is received by
subtracting 1000.
R2 contains encoded information according to the sketch above. If R2 < 1000 then R2
defines an arc segment.

Code, parameters R1 R2

18200, a, b[, c, α4] KS10 35

18210, a, b[, c, α4] KS10 38
18220, a, b[, c, α4] KS10 50
18230, a, b[, c, α4] KS10 30010
18240, a, b[, c, α4] KS10 40010
18250, a, b[, c, α4] KS10 60015

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:84 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 183:

Remark:
The value given for radius R1 has the following meaning:
• A negative value indicates a KS-notch.
• A positive value less than 1000 indicates a scallop radius.
• A positive value greater than 1000 indicates a fillet radius. The radius is received by
subtracting 1000.
R2 contains encoded information according to sketch above. If R2 < 1000 the R2 defines an
arc segment.

Code, parameters R1 R2

18300, a, b[, α4] KS10 35

18310, a, b[, α4] KS10 50
18320, a, b[, α4] KS10 20010
18330, a, b[, α4] KS10 30015

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:85 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 184:

Remark:
The value given for radius R1 has the following meaning:
• A negative value indicates a KS-notch.
• A positive value less than 1000 indicates a scallop radius.
• A positive value greater than 1000 indicates a fillet radius. The radius is received by
subtracting 1000.
R2 contains encoded information according to the sketch above. If R2 < 1000 then R2
defines an arc segment.

Code, parameters R1 R2

18400, a, b[, c, α4] KS10 16

18410, a, b[, c, α4] KS10 26
18420, a, b[, c, α4] KS10 40010
18430, a, b[, c, α4] KS10 60015

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:86 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 186:

Code, parameters R1 R2

18610, a[, α4] 20 0

18611, a[, α4] 20 30
18620, a[, α4] 30 0
18621, a[, α4] 30 30
18630, a[, α4] KS10 0
18631, a[, α4] KS10 30

Type 187:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:87 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Code, parameters R2

18710, a[, R1, α4] 0

18711, a[, R1, α4] 30

Type 188:

Remark:
b=0 (or not given) means that b=R1.

Code, parameters R1

18810, a[,b, α4] 20

18820, a[,b, α4] 30
18830, a[,b, α4] 50

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:88 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 191:

Remark:
• If R1 = 0 then notch will be omitted.
• If R1 < 0 then notch will be a KS notch
• If R1 > 0 and R1 < 1000 then notch will be a R notch
• If R1 > 0 and R1 > 1000 then notch will be a fillet notch, where radius = R1-1000

Code, parameters R2 α2
19100, a, [b, c, R1, α4] 60015 18
19110, a, [b, c, R1, α4] 40010 30

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:89 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 192:

Remark:
• If R1 = 0 then notch will be omitted.
• If R1 < 0 then notch will be a KS notch
• If R1 > 0 and R1 < 1000 then notch will be a R notch
• If R1 > 0 and R1 > 1000 then notch will be a fillet notch, where radius = R1-1000

Code, parameters R2 α2
19200, a, [b, c, R1, α4] 20010 18
19210, a, [b, c, R1, α4] 30015 30

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:90 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 193:

Remark:
• If R1 = 0 then notch will be omitted.
• If R1 < 0 then notch will be a KS notch
• If R1 > 0 and R1 < 1000 then notch will be a R notch
• If R1 > 0 and R1 > 1000 then notch will be a fillet notch, where radius = R1-1000

Code, parameters R2 α2
19300, a, [b, c, R1, α4] 16 18
19310, a, [b, c, R1, α4] 26 30

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:91 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 194:

Remark:
• If R1 = 0 then notch will be omitted.
• If R1 < 0 then notch will be a KS notch
• If R1 > 0 and R1 < 1000 then notch will be a R notch
• If R1 > 0 and R1 > 1000 then notch will be a fillet notch, where radius = R1-1000

Code, parameters R2 α2 α3
19400, a, [b, c, R1, α4] 60015 18 40
19410, a, [b, c, R1, α4] 40010 30 60

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:92 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 195:

Remark:
• If R1 = 0 then notch will be omitted.
• If R1 < 0 then notch will be a KS notch
• If R1 > 0 and R1 < 1000 then notch will be a R notch
• If R1 > 0 and R1 > 1000 then notch will be a fillet notch, where radius = R1-1000
• If R1 > 0 and R1 < 1000 then notch will be a R notch

Code, parameters R2

19500, a, [b, c, α4] 0

19510, a, [b, c, α4] 20

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:93 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 196:

Remark:
• If R1 = 0 then notch will be omitted.
• If R1 < 0 then notch will be a KS notch
• If R1 > 0 then notch will be a R notch

Code, parameters R2 α2
19600, a, [b, c, R1, α4] 16 18
19610, a, [b, c, R1, α4] 26 30

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:94 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 197:

Remark:
• If R2 = 0 then notch will be omitted.
• If R2 < 0 then notch will be a KS notch
• If R2 > 0 then notch will be a R notch

Code, parameters R2 α2 α3
19700, a, [c, α1, α4] 0 15 30
19710, a, [c, α1, α4] 30 25 45
19720, a, [c, α1, α4] -30 25 45

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:95 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 198:

Remark:
• If R1 = 0 then notch will be omitted.
• If R1 < 0 then notch will be a KS notch
• If R1 > 0 then notch will be a R notch

Code, parameters R1 α2 α3
19800, a, [c, α4] 0 15 30
19810, a, [c, α4] 30 25 45
19820, a, [c, α4] -30 25 45

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:96 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 199:

Remark:
• If R1 = 0 then notch will be omitted.
• If R1 < 0 then notch will be a KS notch
• If R1 > 0 and R1 < 1000 then notch will be a R notch
• If R1 > 0 and R1 > 1000 then notch will be a fillet notch, where radius = R1-1000

Code, parameters R2 α2 α3
19900, a, [b, c, R1,α4] 60015 85 40
19910, a, [b, c, R1, α4] 40010 30 60

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:97 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 200:

Remark:
• If R1 = 0 then notch will be omitted.
• If R1 < 0 then notch will be a KS notch
• If R1 > 0 and R1 < 1000 then notch will be a R notch
• If R1 > 0 and R1 > 1000 then notch will be a fillet notch, where radius = R1-1000

Code, parameters R2 α2
20000, a, [b, c, R1,α4] 20010 18
20010, a, [b, c, R1, α4] 30015 30

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:98 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 201:

Remark:
• If R1 = 0 then notch will be omitted.
• If R1 < 0 then notch will be a KS notch
• If R1 > 0 and R1 < 1000 then notch will be a R notch
• If R1 > 0 and R1 > 1000 then notch will be a fillet notch, where radius = R1-1000

Code, parameters R2 α2
20100, a, [b, c, R1,α4] 60015 18
20210, a, [b, c, R1, α4] 40010 30

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:99 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 202:

Code, parameters α2 α3
20200, [c, α1,α4] 16 18
20210, [c, α1, α4] 18 30

7.4.6 Endcuts for U-bars (Channels)

This section contains endcut types that may be used for U-bars. In all cases the upper and
lower flanges are supposed to be equal as far as the shape is concerned. However, they
may be of different length.
The figures below associated with each endcut type show one web view and one flange
view of the U-bar.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:100 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 186:

Code, parameters R1 R2

18610, a[, α4] 20 0

18611, a[, α4] 20 30
18620, a[, α4] 30 0
18621, a[, α4] 30 30
18630, a[, α4] KS10 0
18631, a[, α4] KS10 30

Type 187:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:101 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Code, parameters R2

18710, a[, R1, α4] 0

18711, a[, R1, α4] 30

Type 188:

Remark:
b=0 (or not given) means that b=R1.

Code, parameters R1

18810, a[,b, α4] 20

18820, a[,b, α4] 30
18830, a[,b, α4] 50

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:102 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Type 189:

Remarks:
1. b=0 (or not given) means that b=R2.
2. α2=0
3. means that c becomes irrelevant.

Code, parameters R1 α2

18910, a[, b, c, α1, α4] 0 0

18920, a[, b, c, α1, α4] 20 0
18930, a[, b, c ,α1, α4] 20 30

Type 190:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:103 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Standards

Remarks:
1. b=0 (or not given) means that b=R2.
2. α2=0 means that c becomes irrelevant.

Code, parameters R1 α2

19010, a[, b, c, α1, α4] 0 0

19020, a[, b, c, α1, α4] 20 0
19030, a[, b, c, α1, α4] 20 30

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:104 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Selection of Active Endcuts

8 Selection of Active Endcuts

8.1 Background
AVEVA Marine provides a large number of in-built endcut types. Most customers use only a
few of these.
This document describes how a customer may set up default endcuts depending on the
type of connection, i.e. endcuts that will be selected if not otherwise actively decided by the
designer. Only the endcuts defined in this way will be available for interactive picking.
The information is used when creating profiles in Hull Modelling and in Curved Hull
Modelling.
A way to inhibit the use of certain endcuts completely is to remove them from the endcut
table.

8.2 Endcut Control File

8.2.1 General
The definition of default endcuts takes place via an ordinary text file, created and maintained
in the standard editor of the computer system.
This file allows the user to define a subset of relevant endcuts from the total set of available
according to AVEVA Marine standards. It is also possible to define default endcuts to be
picked automatically depending on the type of connection. An endcut may in this way be
selected for a specific combination of profile type and connection code.
The name of a endcut file can be selected quite freely and its total file specification should
be assigned to environment variable SBH_ENDCUT_CTRL. The file is normally supposed
to be stored in the default directory of the current project.

8.2.2 Layout of Control File

The layout of the file is described by an example. The format is rather free but everything
that is written in the same line in the example must be so. Maximum line width is 132
characters.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 8:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Selection of Active Endcuts

TYPE = 11 ‘User defined string´

PROF = 10
1102 CON= 5,10,12
1100 CON= 4,20,18
1104,30
1110,40
.
.
.

TYPE = 12 ‘User defined string´

PROF = 10
1210,80 CON= 81
1210,100 CON= 13
1210,13
.
.
.

TYPE = 21 ‘User defined string´

PROF = 30,31
2100,30 CON=4,14,16
2100,40
.
.
.
TYPE = 22 ‘User defined string´
PROF = 31
2210,10,20
2211
.
.
.

The keyword TYPE is the endcut type as defined in the standards. This keyword starts a
"type group" and may occur any number of times.
The text given on the same line as the TYPE keyword is the customer description of the
endcut group.
The keyword PROF defines for what profiles types this endcut group is relevant. Any
number of profile types can be given but at least one.
The lines following the PROF keyword select a set of endcut codes. Each of these lines
starts with an endcut code according to AVEVA Marine standards. It is also possible to set
predefined values for the "free" parameters of the endcut (optional). With the keyword
"CON" it is possible to define a number of connection codes. Doing this means that the
endcut on the current line is the default for the profile type(s) in combination with the
connection code(s). Maximum number of connection codes following the "CON" keyword is
20. Use of the keyword "CON" is optional.

Note: that the same endcut may appear several times, e.g. with different parameters, to be
the default for different connections (cf. 1210 in the second "type group" in the
example).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 8:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Selection of Active Endcuts

The input example above should be interpreted in the following way: when generating a flat
bar and using any of the connection codes 5, 10 or 12 the default endcut type for that end is
1102. (However, the designer may select any other endcut at will.)

8.3 Remark
The utility found at: Initiate Hull Standards - Profiles and Flanges - Endcut selection, may be
used to check a definition of active endcuts.
This utility also updates settings drawing __SBH_ECUT_MENU__ with information used by
the Endcut Selection Dialog.
Further information can be found in Customising Dialogues .

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 8:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Selection of Active Endcuts

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 8:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Rules for Adaptation of Endcut Standards

9 Rules for Adaptation of Endcut Standards

9.1 General
The AVEVA Marine endcut standards consist of a number of built-in endcut types, which
may be customised via the endcut table. When the profile endcut is modelled, the desired
endcut geometry is defined by the endcut code and some endcut parameters. Sometimes,
however, a general rule for adjusting the geometry of an endcut type may be formulated.
Such a rule may override endcut parameters given by the user.
Currently, rules for the following definition purposes are supported:
• Endcut gap on flange of built T-bars depending on the profile height.
• Toe width of flange on T-bars considering web thickness.
• Knuckle angle and flange extension of tapered endcuts considering profile height and
endcut parameter "b".
• Endcuts adapted to curvature of parts connected to.
The rules are written in a project specific text file in a simple language based on the TIL
format. Before the rules may be used they must be interpreted by a function of the Hull
Initialisation program.
If the syntax in the text file is correct, an object __SBH_ADJUST_ENDCUT__ will be
created in OGDB. When this object is available, the geometry of the endcuts may be
adjusted according to the defined rules.

9.2 Endcut Gap on Flange of Built T-bars

By applying a special rule, a gap between the flange of a T-bar and a connected plate may
be automatically defined at modelling time. The width of such a gap is marked with 'e' in the
endcut sketches below. The size of the gap is depending on the endcut type and the profile
height. When looking at the profile there will be an offset between the end of the flange and
the end of the upper edge of the web.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 9:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Rules for Adaptation of Endcut Standards

The customer can control the gap between the flange of a T-bar and a connected plate via a
file in TIL-format. For each relevant end cut type designed for T-bars, it is possible to specify
the size of the gap for different profile heights. Relevant end cut types are: 30, 31, 32, 33,
34, 42, 43, 44, 49, 83, 145.
The rule is composed of the CUT keyword, an endcut type and a number of pairs of /H-
attributes and /E-attributes.

Syntax
CUT, <endcut type> /H=<profile height> /E=< flange gap>……….;
Example of a text file defining the gap on the T-bar flange:

CUT, 42
/H=200 /E=40
/H=300 /E=50
/H=400 /E=60;
CUT, 43
/H=200 /E=40
/H=300 /E=50
/H=999 /E=38;
CUT, 145
/H=999 /E=38;

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 9:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Rules for Adaptation of Endcut Standards

H=999 has a special meaning in that it defines all other profile heights, which have not been
defined for the endcut type. For example, the gap for endcut 145 is defined to 38 mm for all
profile heights, while for endcut type 43 the gap is 38 mm for all profile heights except
heights 200 and 300.

9.3 Toe Width Considering Web Thickness

By applying a special rule, the width of the toe on the flange of a T-bar may be automatically
defined at modelling time. It is possible to define this rule for all T-bar endcuts having a toe
defined on the flange. The width of this toe is defined by parameter "c" in the endcut
standards. The flange geometry of such endcuts is illustrated below.
This rule defines, per endcut type, the extension of the flange toe outside the web. That
measure is marked with a 'd' in the sketch below. At modelling time a new toe width C is
calculated according to the following formulas:

C = d + web thickness + d ( T-bars)

C = d + web thickness + flange overshoot ( Asymmetrical T-bars)

The customer can control the extension of the flange toe outside the web via a special file in
TIL-format. The rule should be written on the following format:
CUT, <endcut type> /D=< extension of the flange toe outside the web>;
The endcut type should be designed to be used for T-bars and have a toe on the flange
defined by a C-measure.
Example of a text file defining the extension of the flange toe outside the web:

CUT, 42 /D=8;
CUT, 43 /D=8;

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 9:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Rules for Adaptation of Endcut Standards

CUT, 31 /D=10;
CUT, 32 /D=10;

When this facility is activated the value of 'c' in modelling is irrelevant and need not be given
at all except in certain cases as illustrated below ('old' input to the left, 'new' to the right).

CUT = 3101, 50 -> CUT = 3101

CUT = 3101, 50, 85 -> CUT = 3101, 50, 85 ( or e.g. 3101, 0, 85)

9.4 Flange Extension in Tapered Endcuts

By applying a special rule, the knuckle angle and flange extension of tapered endcuts for L-
bars and T-bars may be automatically defined at modelling time. The flange geometry of
such endcuts is illustrated below. When tapered endcuts are modelled a 'b'-measure is
defined, as indicated in the figure. This rule defines, per endcut type, the knuckle angle and
flange extension as a function of the difference of the profile height and the b-measure (that
is normally the height of another profile which the current profile abuts).

The customer can control the knuckle angle and flange extension via a special file in TIL-
format.
The file consists of a number of statements, each consisting of the CUT keyword, an endcut
type and a number of triples of /HKN-attributes, /ANG-attributes and /EXT-attributes.

CUT, <endcut type> HKN=<profile height - b-measure>

/ANG=<knuckle angle> /EXT=< flange extension>……;

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 9:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Rules for Adaptation of Endcut Standards

Example of a text file defining knuckle angle and flange extension of tapered endcuts:

CUT, 24
/HKN=25 /ANG=30 /EXT=6
/HKN=100 /ANG=18 /EXT=8;
CUT, 37
/HKN=50 /ANG=30 /EXT=6
/HKN=100 /ANG=18 /EXT=8;

Note: These rules are not valid for User Defined Endcuts.

9.5 Curvature of Tightly Connected Profile Endcuts

By applying a specific rule, the endcut may be adapted to the curvature of the part it is
connected to. The current stiffener may be connected to a shell profile or directly to the
shell. The curvature of the connected part is approximated by a circle segment with
calculated amplitude and the original endcut geometry of the web is intersected by this circle
segment. The resulting geometry represents the adapted endcut geometry.
The adapted endcut geometry will be drawn in all sketches. The amplitude approximating
the curvature of the connected part will be reported in production documents.
The figure below shows the endcut curvature of a stiffener tightly connected to a shell
profile.

The customer specifies that a specific endcut type may adapt to the curvature of connected
parts by setting up a rule in a file in a special TIL-format. The rule is written on the following
format:
CUT, <endcut type> /CUR;

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 9:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Rules for Adaptation of Endcut Standards

Example of a file defining endcut adaptation to curvature of connected parts:

CUT, 11 /CUR;
CUT, 21 /CUR;

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 9:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Symbols of Stiffeners

10 Endcut Symbols of Stiffeners

10.1 General
In symbolic hull views (planar views and shell expansion views) stiffeners are drawn
symbolically in top views. (The term stiffener refers in this document to both plane panel
stiffeners and to shell stiffeners, i.e. longitudinal or transversal frames). In this type of views
a stiffener is represented by its mould line, by a material symbol and by a symbolic
representation of the endcuts.
The purpose of this document is to describe to some detail the principles of the currently
used symbols for endcuts. These symbols are supposed to give a fair idea of the shape of
the endcut and the connection at a stiffener end.

10.2 Symbols and Symbol Font

The symbols used for endcut representation are included in one of the system symbol fonts
of hull modelling with symbol with font number 8. The endcut symbols occupy the numbers
61-77, 79 and 85-87 in this font.
A customer may well change the symbols but currently not the principle for how they are
selected as described below.
User defined endcut symbols is handled by default variables; UCN_SYMBOL and
UCN_SYMBOL_FONT.

10.3 Factors Affecting Symbol Selection

The selection of symbol is based on three different factors:
• The type of connection (profile-end to profile-end, butt, gap, overlap)
• The type of endcut (and hence type of profile)
• Whether the flange is straight-cut/firmly welded or sniped.
Details about the selection are given below.

Remark:
Not all possible combinations are described below of the factors affecting the symbol
selection, only the most relevant or typical ones. Symbols for other combinations are
selected in analogy wherever reasonable. However, there might even be cases when the
available symbols are improper.
The figures below show a side view of the stiffener, a profile type symbol, the top view of the
stiffener and the symbol separately with its number.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 10:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Symbols of Stiffeners

10.3.1 Profiles Connected End-to-end

Independent of the profile and the endcut types the symbol $ ("dollar sign") will be used in
ends of stiffeners connected to the end of another stiffener. Its symbol number in the font is
63.

10.3.2 Abutting Profile Ends

When profiles are abutting (normally welded against another part): the following symbols
are used.

Case 1:
No snipe and no offset of flange end (figure below).

Case 2:
Sniped flange ends, no flange end offset (figure below).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 10:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Symbols of Stiffeners

Case 3:
As case 2 but flange end offset (figure below)

Case 4:
Straight cut in web and flange, flange end offset (figure below).

10.3.3 Profiles with Free End or Gap at End

The following cases show free profile ends or profile ends with a gap relative to the part it is
connected to.

Case 1:
Straight cut in both web and flange (figure below).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 10:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Symbols of Stiffeners

Case 2:
Same as case 1 but with sniped flange (figure below)

Case 3:
Both web and flange sniped (figure below).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 10:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Symbols of Stiffeners

Case 4:
Like case 3 but flange not sniped (figure below).

10.3.4 Overlapping Profile Ends

The figure below shows a few typical cases of endcuts in profile overlaps and the symbols
generated for them.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 10:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Endcut Symbols of Stiffeners

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 10:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Specific Endcut Interface

11 Customer Specific Endcut Interface

11.1 General
Profile endcuts are in AVEVA Marine specified via an endcut code that is a four or five digit
integer (e.g. 1302). They are all instances of a number of predefined endcut types with
numbers equal to the two or three leftmost digits of the endcut code (in the example above
the type is 13). In addition the endcut description is completed by a variable number of
parameters. Some of these parameters are normally connection angles, calculated and
added automatically by the system (e.g. the total endcut specification may be 1302, 100,
85.7 (where the last number is a calculated connection angle). This is all described in some
more detail in Profile Endcuts in AVEVA Marine .
Some yards have by tradition other ways to specify and present endcuts to production than
those used in AVEVA Marine. This document describes how one specific way of specifying
endcuts can be used in relation with AVEVA Marine in a situation where the system
internally still treats the endcuts in its traditional way.

11.2 Alternative Endcut Designation, Introduction

Some characteristics of the endcut standards to be interfaced to AVEVA Marine are
described below. The description does not claim to create any complete understanding of
how this is organised, only to give some hints.
• The complete endcut information consists of one string that may become rather
complex for endcuts with complicated geometry.
• This string specifies both the type and all the parameters that are separately specified
in AVEVA Marine.
• Endcuts for built profiles are specified separately for web and flange (as though they
were individual flat bars).
• The endcut string always starts by the endcut type that is a letter, e.g. C.
• The rest of the endcut strings consists of a variable number of constituents, each
preceded by a "flag" telling if the information that follows next is valid at the lower or
upper edge of the profile (suppose a flat bar). (However, for certain types this flag may
be embedded between one preceding and one trailing parameter). These flags are 'a'
for lower edge, 'b' for upper.
• The information following each flag may be a number or one of another set of flags (on
level two) identifying how to interpret the information that follows.
• If the secondary flag is missing the dimension given is interpreted as a distance along
the edge that is used to produce an endcut with a non-right connection angle (or
similar).
• Reserved secondary flags are e.g. R for round notches, C for a sniped corner ("KS
notch"), etc.
• A couple of simple examples illustrate these principles:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 11:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Specific Endcut Interface

• Ca45aR50 is a simple cutout of type 11 with an endcut angle that makes it extend 45
mm outside the nominal end point of the stiffener. The endcut has notch R50 in its
lower corner (similar to the right endcut in the figure in paragraph 9.5 below).
• D15bS0 corresponds to the endcut 1302, 15.

11.3 Purpose and Scope of Implementation

This feature should offer the following options for a user of this customer specific way of
representing endcut standards:
• Endcut strings should be possible to use as input in modelling, both of planar panels
and for profiles in the shell. Setting up of default endcuts and picking of endcuts via lists
in interactive modelling should be equally well supported for endcut strings as for
traditional AVEVA Marine endcuts
• Likewise, if used in input the endcut should also be output in the same format when
profile information is extracted, e.g. in the generic files for profile information, in data
extraction, in profile sketches and some profile lists.
• The connection angles of the endcut affect the geometry of the cutout and also the
endcut string. AVEVA Marine should support that calculated endcut (connection)
angles are converted into measurements (depending on the connection) that are part
of the endcut string.

11.4 Restrictions
This implementation is subject to a number of restrictions:
• The main restriction is that there must be a one-to-one relation between a used endcut
string and the standards available in AVEVA Marine.
• In AVEVA Marine there is no correspondence to the feature of defining individual
endcuts for web and flange of built profiles. Thus, the previous condition excludes all
endcuts for built profiles.
• The same condition also excludes a considerable portion of the endcuts to be used for
flatbars and milled profiles where this feature otherwise may be applied.
To conclude: This feature offers an alternative way of using part of the existing endcut
standard for flat bars and milled profiles. It does not support the definition of any new endcut
types or standards.

11.5 Main Characteristics of Implementation

A conclusion of the description above is that this feature consists of two parts:
1. Translation forth and back between the customer specific endcut strings and the
corresponding internal AVEVA Marine representation.
2. Modification/update of the given endcut strings with measurements, calculated from the
connection angles.
The second of these issues is addressed first.
Suppose the simple case illustrated by the figure below,

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 11:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Specific Endcut Interface

Figure 11:1. Endcuts with calculated connection angles.

Traditionally the endcut would in this case have been specified as CUT=1120 in both cases.
The result after generation will in the two cases be equal to CUT=1120, 60 and CUT=1120,
120, respectively.
The corresponding endcut string should be Cb173R50 and Ca173R50, respectively (here
173 is the result of the connection angle and the profile height). But beforehand the designer
may not know the connection angle and thus not whether it is <90, >90 or should happen to
be exactly 90 degrees. So the question is: How should he present his request for endcut to
the AVEVA Marine modelling function?
The following approach has been chosen as a general feature. The endcut should be
specified (in this case) as:
C$##aR50
Here:

$ The primary flag, specifying a resulting snipe should be heading downwards

(angle >90) or upwards (angle<90). Possible values are 'a' (in the first case)
and 'b' (in the second). (In case of 90 degree no flag may be set, see below).

## The distance (length of snipe) to be calculated from the connection angle and
the profile height.

Thus, when the designer gives an endcut string containing $ and ## he expects the system
to exchange these characters by appropriate values, evaluated from the result of the
modelling. These characters are allowed only immediately following the leading character
specifying the endcut type.
The mapping from endcut strings to AVEVA Marine endcuts are performed by the aid of a
translation file that is described in the next section.

11.6 Translation File

The translation file is a text file in a simple language based on the TIL format. It should be
compiled by a function of the hull utility program inithull.
If the input file is correct an object __SBH_ENDCUT_TRANSLATE__ will be created in
OGDB. When this object is available the translation feature is activated.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 11:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Specific Endcut Interface

Note: Any endcut string used by the designer must be registered in this file.

The input file consists of an unrestricted number of statements that may be organised in the
following way:

[<replace_stmt>] ( ....)
<profile_definition>
<translate_stmt>
<translate_stmt>
<translate_stmt>
....
<profile_definition>
<translate_stmt>
<translate_stmt>
....
<profile_definition>
<translate_stmt>
....

The different statement types are described below.

11.6.1 Replace Statement

Contrary to AVEVA Marine Hull the alternative standard differentiates between endcuts with
and without calculated endcut angles. E.g. a simple endcut 1100 is corresponded by endcut
string A, whereas 1100, 60 is corresponded by e.g. Cb125 (cf. above). Since you do not
know beforehand if the connection angle is 90 degrees or not (in case of a connected profile
end) the user may preliminary select a C-type endcut. If the connection angle should
happen to be 90 degrees the resulting endcut should be replaced by Ca0.
The REPLACE statement will allow the customer to specify that an initial part of the endcut
string may be replaced by another string.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 11:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Specific Endcut Interface

Syntax:

REPLACE, <prefix>

/ BY = <exch_str>
/ WHEN = <TB_type1> (1....10)
;

<prefix> The initial part of an endcut string that, if found, should be exchanged.
BY Specifies the string, by which to exchange.
WHEN This replacement should occur only when the corresponding AVEVA
Marine endcut type is <TB_type>. WHEN is the 2 or 3 digit endcut
type. Maximum 10 types can be given.

Examples:
REPLACE, Ca0 /BY = A / WHEN = (11, 21);
REPLACE, Ca0 /BY = B / WHEN = (12, 22);

11.6.2 Profile Definition

The PROFILE statement specifies the profile types for which the endcuts are valid that
follow until the next PROFILE statement. (The reason for this statement type is that the
same endcut strings may be used for e.g. flat bars and angles even if they are corresponded
by different endcut types in AVEVA Marine)

Syntax:

PROFILE, <proftype> (1....10) ;

<proftype> are valid profile types. Maximum 10 different profile types can be given in
one statement.

Examples:
PROFILE, 10;
PROFILE, 20, 21, 30, 31;

11.6.3 Translation Statement

The translation statement translates between a certain endcut string and the AVEVA Marine
code with parameters.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 11:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Specific Endcut Interface

Syntax:

TYPE, <ec_string>
/TB_TYPE = <endcut_code>
[/PAR = <par1>,<par2>,...]
;

TYPE This is the endcut string that the designer specifies as input and that
normally will be picked from a list created based on this translation file.
Normally all parameters are fixed except some parts of the endcut
designation that may be depending on the connection angle (see above).
TB_TYPE AVEVA Marine endcut code. This code must exist in the current endcut
table.
PAR Explicit AVEVA Marine endcut parameters. They must match in numbers
those required by the endcut code.

Below you will find as an example a part of a translation file.

Example:
REPLACE, Ca0 /BY = A /WHEN = (11, 21);
REPLACE, Ca0 /BY = B /WHEN = (12, 22);
PROFILE, 10;
TYPE, A /TB_TYPE=1100 /PAR = 90;
TYPE, AaC8 /TB_TYPE=1190 /PAR = 90;
TYPE, AaR50bR50 /TB_TYPE=1124 /PAR = 90;

TYPE, C$## /TB_TYPE=1100 ;

TYPE, C$##aR50 /TB_TYPE=1120 ;

TYPE, Ba50R50 /TB_TYPE=1220 /PAR = (100, 90);

TYPE, C$##a50R50 /TB_TYPE=1220 /PAR = 100;
...
...
PROFILE, (20, 21, 30, 31);

TYPE, A /TB_TYPE=2100 /PAR = (90, 90);

TYPE, AaR50 /TB_TYPE=2120 /PAR = (90, 90);
TYPE, C$## /TB_TYPE=2100 ;
TYPE, C$##aR50 /TB_TYPE=2120 ;
...
...

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 11:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Specific Endcut Interface

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 11:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Specific Endcut Interface

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 11:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Stiffener Connections

12 Stiffener Connections

12.1 General
The automatic generation of panels in Structural Design is based on RSOs with defined
properties. One of the properties made use of in the modelling is standardized stiffener end
connections. These may be of type SNIPE, TIGHT or OVERLAP and will contain sets of
combinations of connection and endcut codes. Once the designer has selected any of
SNIPE, TIGHT or OVERLAP for a stiffener connection AVEVA Marine will automatically,
based on the profile type, pick a suitable endcut and connection code
When defining a profile end connection, both CON and CUT must be given in order to get
the profile end connection correct. The combination of CON and CUT are very often a
standard used by the yard. It is possible to define those standard connections as any
arbitrary name to be used in the continuing detailed design.
The underlying connection between these keywords and the profile endcuts and the
connection codes is defined in a standard object named __SBED_STIFF_ENDS__.
The standard object is created using a TIL input file and the interpretation of this file is made
in Inithull.

12.2 Set-up of the Stiffener Connections

The standard object for stiffener connections is defined using an ordinary text file in TIL
format with statements as specified below:
CON_TYPE, <type> /TIGHT_CODE=<code> /SNIPE_CODE=<code> /
OVERLAP_CODE=<code> /DESC=<text>;
PROF_TYPE, <ptype> /TIGHT=<endcut> /SNIPE=<endcut> /
OVERLAP_CODE=<endcut>;

<type> is the connection type and could have any of the values 1, 3, 4 or 5.
Connection type 2 is covered within type 1 and is not needed to be
defined. <type> shall be given as an integer.
<code> is the connection code that shall be used for this type of definition. The
connection code shall be given as an integer. For available codes, see
Connection Code Definition.
<text> is a free descriptive text, currently not used by the system.
<ptype> is profile type identified by the AVEVA Marine code for the profile. Given
as integer.
<endcut> is a complete endcut description with code and parameters. Given as a
string.

The arbitrary stiffener connections format is as specified below:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 12:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Stiffener Connections

CON_NAME, <name> /PROFILE='<ptype>' /CON=<code> /

CUT='<endcut>';

<type> is the connection name to be used as a substitute for CON and CUT
when defining the stiffener end..
<code> is the connection code that shall be used for this type of definition. The
connection code shall be given as an integer. For available codes, see
Connection Code Definition.
<ptype> is profile type identified by the AVEVA Marine code for the profile. Given
as string.
<endcut> is a complete endcut description with code and parameters. Given as a
string.

In the schema, instead of using CON=87, CUT=1210,70,35 the connection name

MY_TIGHT can be used instead, CON=MY_TIGHT.
STI, PRO=10,16,12, …… CON=MY_TIGHT / CON=15, CUT=1100;
It is possible to combine connection names with standard CON and CUT i.e. to have a
named connection in one end of the profile and a numerical CON/CUT in the other end.

12.3 Example of an Input File

CON_TYPE, 1 /TIGHT_CODE=4 /SNIPE_CODE=3 /OVERLAP_CODE=13 /DESC='To Edge';
CON_TYPE, 3 /TIGHT_CODE=14 /SNIPE_CODE=15 /DESC='To Side';
CON_TYPE, 4 /TIGHT_CODE=40 /OVERLAP_CODE=50 /DESC='To End';
CON_TYPE, 5 /TIGHT_CODE=70 /SNIPE_CODE=65 /DESC='To Surf';
PROF_TYPE, 10 /SNIPE='1100,70' /TIGHT='1100' /OVERLAP='1100';
PROF_TYPE, 20 /SNIPE='2100,70' /TIGHT='2100' /OVERLAP='2100';
PROF_TYPE, 30 /SNIPE='2100,70' /TIGHT='2100' /OVERLAP='2100';
PROF_TYPE, 35 /SNIPE='4201,50,70' /TIGHT='4201,50' /OVERLAP='4201,50';
PROF_TYPE, 40 /SNIPE='3100,70' /TIGHT='3100' /OVERLAP='3100';
CON_NAME, 'FLAT_EASY' /PROFILE='10' /CON=15 /CUT='1100';
CON_NAME, 'MY_TIGHT' /PROFILE='10' /CON=87 /CUT='1210,70,35';
CON_NAME, 'MY_HP' /PROFILE='20' /CON=15 /CUT='2100,70';

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 12:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Stiffeners in Symbolic Hull Views

13 Stiffeners in Symbolic Hull Views

13.1 General
In planar sections of the hull structure (symbolic hull views) stiffeners are represented in a
symbolic way by a line (mould line) and symbols for end treatment and material orientation.
For an example, see Hull Detailed Design/ Planar Modelling/ User's Guide/ Information on
Drawings and Information Structure/ Views/ Plane Panels/ Plane Views.
By default the mould line is represented by a dash-dotted line if the stiffener is located on
the side against you, by a dashed line if located on the side away from you. However, this
can be overridden by customer settings in the default files of involved programs. This is also
the case with the material symbol.
The conditions at the ends of stiffeners regarding end treatment and connection to adjoining
elements is indicated by symbols at the ends of the mould line. These symbols depend on
the combination of profile type, end cutting and connection (tight, gap, overlap).
The selection of a certain symbol is currently glued into the system and these rules cannot
be changed by the customer. However, a customer may modify the standard symbols
delivered by the system.
The tables below describe the symbols that are chosen in a special combination of profile
type, endcut type and connection.

13.1.1 Stiff 1

No Side View (elevation) Form Description Symbols on Drawings

Symbol

4 Web and flange cut

straight and
welded.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 13:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Stiffeners in Symbolic Hull Views

5 Web and flange cut

straight and
welded.
Web cut outs.

6 Web and half the

flange straight cut
and welded, other
half of the flange
bevel cut.

7 Web and flange cut

straight, stops clear.

8 Web cut straight.

Flange bevel cut,
stops clear.

9 Web and flange

bevel cut, stops
clear.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 13:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Stiffeners in Symbolic Hull Views

10 Web bevel cut,

flange cut straight,
stops clear.

11 Web cut straight,

flange bevel cut.

12 Web and flange cut

straight.

13 Web and flange

slotted.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 13:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Stiffeners in Symbolic Hull Views

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 13:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Flanges

Flanges

© Copyright 1974 to current year. i 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Flanges

© Copyright 1974 to current year. ii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Folded Flanges

1 Folded Flanges

1.1 Background
There are different ways in shipbuilding to stiffen free plate edges. One way of doing it is to
weld a flat bar ("face plate" - in Hull called (welded) flange) symmetrically or asymmetrically
to the edge. Another method is to weld a stiffener parallel to the edge at a certain distance.
A third method, often used especially in small parts, typically brackets, is to bend a part of
the actual plate to form a structure that looks and acts like a profile. This is in Hull called a
folded (or bent) flange.
A number of characteristics of folded flanges, e.g. the width of the area to be bent related to
the nominal height, the radius of the bending tool, the shapes of the ends of the flange, may
vary considerably between different yards. Therefore, a yard should be able to set up a
suitable flange standard of its own. AVEVA Marine has a facility with exactly this objective.
Based on a number of basic patterns it may establish any number of flange alternatives to
be used both in brackets and other plate parts. The flange definition facility is described in
this document.

1.2 General about Flange Definition

The customer set-up of a flange standard is done via a text file in an application specific
syntax based on the general TIL language for text input. This definition file may be given an
arbitrary name. In order to make the flange definition available to the application programs it
should be compiled by a function of the hull utility inithull. If the compilation is successful a
flange definition object will be stored in the structure data bank (associated with SB_OGDB)
by name __SBH_FLANGE_CTRL__.
The compilation will also result in a receipt list with input and errors, if any. If inithull has
been started via the Job Launcher this list can be accessed like all other files resulting from
a Job Launcher run. If inithull has been started outside the Job Launcher the receipt list will
be stored in print directory of the current project with the file extension .lst appended to the
name of the input file.
The flange definition is divided into two parts:
• The definition of the flange type.
• The definition of flange ends.
The flange type describes parameters common to the whole flange, e.g. width of the
flange, the position of the marking line (the line indicating where the bending tool should be
placed) and the bending radius. Each flange is assigned a user defined type number.
Normally, a customer would have only one flange type.
The flange end type describes the shape of the ends of the flange. These definitions are
based on predefined basic types, specified below. By setting the parameters of the basic

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Folded Flanges

flange ends types, each customer creates his own set of standardized flange ends. A folded
flange is not necessarily symmetric. The flange ends may be different, while - of course the
total height of the flange and the position of the marking line must be independent of the
flange ends. Normally, any combination of flange type and flange ends is allowed.
When generating a flange the user selects a certain flange type and also specifies the (user
defined) flange end types. If not specified the user defined default types will be used.

1.3 Definitions
In this document some terms will often be used. They are shortly described below
:

Figure 1:1. Folded flange, general definitions

Base line The line to which the flange geometry will be added.
For brackets this line usually goes through the top of
the bracket toes.

Marking line A line on the flange indicating where the bending tool
should be placed while bending the flange.

Knuckle point Some flange ends have a profile-looking shape. Their

geometries have in one point a knuckle (the knuckle
point) which corresponds to the top of the 'toe' of the
'end cut'. Its position is defined by the orthogonal
distance from the base line.

FLA_W The width of the flange, before it has been bent.

FLA_W is the orthogonal distance between the base
line and the edge of the flange.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Folded Flanges

W_KN The orthogonal distance between the base line and the
knuckle point.

MARK_D The orthogonal distance between the base line and the
marking line.

Bending radius The radius on top of the bending tool.

1.4 Basic Flange End Types

Below follows a survey of the predefined basic flange end types. In the pictures the folded
flanges are placed on bracket toes, but it should be pointed out that folded flanges might as
well be used on any plane panels, not necessarily together with a toe.
When defining a folded flange on an arbitrary border of a plane panel, there are some
special rules deciding how the flange will be connected to the panel. This is described
below.
For all flange end types, default for the slope angle of the flange (FLA_V) should be
specified in the definition file. It can always be overridden by the user when generating the
flange.

1.4.1 Flange End Type 1

Figure 1:2. Flange end type 1.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Folded Flanges

1.4.2 Flange End Type 2

Figure 1:3. Flange end type 2.

Characteristics:
• The radius (R1) must be defined in the definition file.
• The arc of the flange starts perpendicular to 'toe'.
• The arc ends at the intersection point with the base line.
Normally the contour has a knuckle here.
The radius as given will be recalculated before being used (R=R1/(sqrt(2)*sin(V))). This
means that R=R1 only when V=45.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Folded Flanges

1.4.3 Flange End Type 3

Figure 1:4. Flange end type 3.

Characteristics:
• The radius (R1) must be defined in the definition file.
• The arc starts perpendicular to 'toe' and ends perpendicular to the base line.
• Formula for W_KN has to be defined.

1.4.4 Flange End Type 4

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Folded Flanges

Figure 1:5. Flange end type 4.

This type has the same characteristics as type 3, except that the arc starts parallel to the
base line and ends perpendicular to the base line.
TOE_L is optional and set to 0 if not defined.

1.4.5 Flange End Type 5

Figure 1:6. Flange end type 5.

The characteristics are the same as for type 3, but the arc starts as a continuation of the
'toe' and ends perpendicular to the base line.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Folded Flanges

1.4.6 Flange End Type 9

Figure 1:7. Flange end type 9.

This is a very special flange end type that usually occurs with a toe. However, even if
defined to be set at a toe it might be generated anywhere.
Special is that the base line passes through a point P (defined by DX_P, DY_P), and not
through the top of the toe. This means that the edge will not be set parallel to the 'original'
base line. The base line will thus be modified while setting the flange.
The shape of the toe is generated from two arcs (radius R1 (the larger one) and R2) and the
distance DIST from a certain line. This line passes through the given point P and a point on
the toe defined by TOE_H and TOE_L. All these parameters have to be set in the definition
file.
Furthermore, the distance from the base line to the knuckle point has to be defined as for
flange end types 3, 4 and 5.

1.4.7 Softening of Sharp Corners of Folded Flanges

All types of folded flanges specified above have at least one knuckle in the flange end
contour and flange end types 3 - 9 have a second knuckle at the start of the "snipe" (sloped
part of flange end contour).
However, there is an option to soften these knuckles by a fillet arc. The radius of this arc is
defined in the FLA_END statement (see paragraph The FLA_END Statement below).
For flange ends with more than one knuckle the same radius will be used for both fillet arcs.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Folded Flanges

1.5 The Control File

1.5.1 General
The input file should be written in a syntax based on TIL (The Interpretative Language). In
this application the syntax is very simple with only two different statements, FLA_TYPE and
FLA_END.
The order of the statements is arbitrary. Note, however, that the default flange type and
flange end type will depend on the order if not otherwise specified. A flange definition file
must contain at least one flange type and one flange end type, but otherwise the customer
may define as many flange types and flange end types as he wishes.

1.5.2 The FLA_TYPE Statement

In accordance to what is mentioned before, statement FLA_TYPE defines parameters
affecting the flange width (FLA_W) and the position of the marking line (MARK_D), related
to the base line

Figure 1:8. Folded flange, basis for size calculation.

The idea is to make it possible to let FLA_W and MARK_D be calculated according to the
following formulas, where the items above are 'variables' and the customer defines the
factors (constants) and R.

FLA_W = W_H_FACT*H + W_RAD_FACT*R + W_T_FACT*T +

W_CONST
MARK_D = M_H_FACT*H + M_RAD_FACT*R + M_T_FACT*T +
M_CONST

where H = a nominal value of the flange height (i.e. the size of the flange as given by the
user, not necessarily equal to the actual height of the flange)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Folded Flanges

R = the bending radius

T = material thickness
The coefficients, the constants and the value of R will compose a FLANGE TYPE.
The syntax of the FLA_TYPE statement:
FLA_TYPE, <flatype_no>

/RADIUS = <radius>
[ /DEFAULT ]
/W_H_FACT = <fact>
[ /W_RAD_FACT = <fact> ]
[ /W_T_FACT = <fact> ]
[ /W_CONST = <const> ]
[ /M_H_FACT = <fact> ]
[ /M_RAD_FACT = <fact> ]
[ /M_T_FACT = <fact> ]
[ /M_CONST = <const> ] ;

[] means that the attribute is optional.

<radius>, <fact> and <const> are all real numbers.

<flatype_no> is an integer and the user's reference number for this flange type.
It must be a unique number (among flange types), and not
between 200 and 300.
/RADIUS Defines the bending radius.
/DEFAULT Attribute used if the flange type defined in this statement should be
the default type. Only one type may be default. If default is not
defined for any type, the first flange type in input will be the default.
/W_H_FACT These attributes define constants affecting FLA_W as described
/W_RAD_FACT above. If any of the attributes is omitted the corresponding value
/W_T_FACT will be set to 0.
/W_CONST
that W_H_FACT is mandatory.
/M_H_FACT These attributes define constants affecting MARK_D as described
/M_RAD_FACT above. If any of the attributes is omitted the corresponding value
/M_T_FACT will be set to 0.
/M_CONST

1.5.3 The FLA_END Statement

When defining a flange end type, the first thing to do is to choose a basic flange end type.
The choice of basic type determines the attributes that are necessary in order to make a
correct flange end definition.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:9 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Folded Flanges

The figures in paragraph 1.4 show the basic types and their parameters.
For all basic types except type 1 and 2, the position of the knuckle point, W_KN, must be
defined. In analogy with the flange width, W_KN will be calculated according to the formula:
W_KN = KN_H_FACT*H + KN_RAD_FACT*R + KN_T_FACT*T + KN_CONST
where H, R and T have the same meaning as above.
The syntax of the FLA_END statement:
FLA_END, <fla_end_no>

/TYPE = <basic_type_no>
[ /DEFAULT ]
[ /KN_H_FACT = <fact> ]
[ /KN_RAD_FACT = <fact> ]
[ /KN_T_FACT = <fact> ]
[ /KN_CONST = <const> ]
[ /TOL = <tolerance> ]
[ /FLA_V = <angle> ]
[ /R1 = <radius> ]
[ /R2 = <radius> ]
[ /TOE_H = <distance> ]
[ /TOE_L = <distance> ]
[ /DX_P = <distance> ]
[ /DY_P = <distance> ]
[ /DIST = <distance> ]
[ /R_FILLET = <radius> ];

All the assigned values except <fla_end_no> and <basic_type_no> are real
numbers.
[ ] means that the attribute is optional.

<fla_end_no> is an integer and the user’s reference number for this

flange end. It must be a unique number (among flange
ends).
/DEFAULT Defines a default flange end. The same rules are valid
as for the flange type.
/TYPE The basic flange end type on which the current flange
definition is based. The value of TYPE will affect which
of the following attributes that are relevant.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:10 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Folded Flanges

/KN_H_FACT Defines constants affecting the position of the knuckle

/KN_RAD_FACT point.
/KN_T_FACT
/KN_CONST If TYPE is 3,4,5 or 9 at least one of the "KN-constants"
has to be set.
/TOL When flange ends are set along an arbitrary contour,
the geometrical conditions may make it impossible or
unsuitable to use a certain flange end type. TOL
specifies a limit angle that in certain cases is used to
decide whether a flange end type should be replaced
by another type.
Default value: 1.
/FLA_V The flange angle. Relevant for all basic flange end
types. If the flange angle is not specifically defined with
this attribute then it will get the default value 30
degrees.
/R1 The radius of the first arc segment, relevant for all basic
types, except 1.
/TOE_L Relevant for end types 4 and 9 (compulsory for type 9).
For its sense, cf. the figures describing these two end
types.
/R2 Relevant only when TYPE = 9.
/TOE_H
/DX_P Please look at the figure Flange end type 9., to get a
/DY_P description of their geometrical interpretation.
/DIST The last three parameters are mandatory.
/R_FILLET Knuckle softening radius (See Softening of Sharp
Corners of Folded Flanges).
Default value 0.0 (i.e. knuckles retained).

1.5.4 Folded Flanges, Special Cases

When using folded flanges on the free side of a bracket it is normally quite clear how the
flange will connect to the bracket toes. This is not the case when the folded flange is set on
an arbitrary straight part of the outer contour of a plane panel.
The determining factor when choosing how to place the folded flange is the angle between
the base line of the flange and the adjoining segment of the outer contour

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:11 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Folded Flanges

Figure 1:9. Definition of points and vectors.

P End point of the flange.

B Direction vector of the base line of the flange.

T1 Direction vector for the segment adjoining the flange in P.

T2 Tangent of the arc of the flange in point P. The following discussion will
concern how to choose T2 depending on B and T1.

V The angle between T1 and B.

A connection in the point P can be either concave or convex depending on V. Each of these
connection types can be divided into one obtuse and one acute case
.

Figure 1:10. Convex Obtuse. 0 < V < 90.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:12 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Folded Flanges

Figure 1:11. Convex Acute. 90 < V < 180.

Figure 1:12. Concave Obtuse. -90 < V < 0.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:13 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Folded Flanges

Figure 1:13. Concave Acute. -180 < V < -90.

Concave acute is an extreme case, where no folded flange can be used. Only the other
three cases will be regarded below.

1.5.5 Basic Flange End 1

This type can be used in all connection cases.

1.5.6 Basic Flange End 2

• Concave (obtuse) Connection

.

Figure 1:14. Flange end type 2 in concave “corner”.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:14 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Folded Flanges

• Convex Obtuse Connection

.

Figure 1:15. Flange end type 2 in convex “corner”.

When V0 < TOL then the flange will be replaced with type 1. TOL is the tolerance angle
which can be defined in the FLA_END statement.
When V0 > TOL the flange will remain a type 2 and T2 will be perpendicular to T1.

• Convex Acute Connection.

The flange end will be replaced with type 1.

1.5.7 Basic Flange End 3

• Concave (obtuse) Connection.

Figure 1:16. Flange end type 3 in concave “corner”.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:15 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Folded Flanges

• Convex Obtuse Connection.

Figure 1:17. Flange end type 3 in convex obtuse “corner”.

When V0 < TOL then the flange will be replaced with type 4, and T2 will be parallel with B.
(See the figure below.)
When V0 > TOL the flange will remain a type 3 and T2 will be perpendicular to T1.

• Convex Acute Connection.

Figure 1:18. Flange end type 3 in convex acute “corner”.

The flange end will be replaced with type 4, and T2 will have the same direction as B.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:16 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Folded Flanges

1.5.8 Basic Flange End 4

• Concave (obtuse) Connection.

Figure 1:19. Flange end type 4 in concave “corner”.

The flange end will be replaced by a type 3 and T2 will have the same direction as T1.

• Convex Obtuse and Convex Acute Connection.

Figure 1:20. Flange end type 4 in convex “corner”.

The flange end will remain a type 4, and T2 will have the same direction as B.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:17 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Folded Flanges

1.5.9 Basic Flange End 5

• Concave (obtuse) Connection.

Figure 1:21. Flange end type 5 in concave “corner”.

The flange will be replaced with a type 3. T2 will have the same direction as T1.

• Convex Obtuse Connection.

Figure 1:22. Flange end type 5 in convex obtuse “corner”.

This is the normal (and only possible) case for flange end type 5. T2 will have the same
direction as T1.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:18 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Folded Flanges

• Convex Acute Connection.

Figure 1:23. Flange end type 5 in convex acute “corner”.

The flange end will be replaced with type 4, and T2 will have the same direction as B.

1.5.10 Basic Flange End 9

This flange end can only be used in the two convex connection cases.

Note: that this flange end type will affect the position and direction of the base line.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:19 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Folded Flanges

1.6 Examples

1.6.1 Defining a Flange Type

Figure 1:24. Figure showing a folded flange after bending.

Suppose that we want to calculate the width of the flange before bending, FLA_W. This
means that we want to calculate the length of the dashed line, which is the neutral line in
bending.
Make the following assumptions:
• H is the nominal height of the flange, as given by the user. Here it is supposed to be the
total height after bending.
• The neutral line is on the depth 1/3 of the material thickness.
Then FLA_W is calculated:

FLA_W = 2*PI*(R + T/3)/4 + (H - (R + T)) <=>

FLA_W = H + ((PI-2)/2)*R + ((PI-6)/6)*T + 0

i.e.:

W_H_FACT = 1
W_RAD_FACT = (PI-2)/2 ~= 0.571
W_T_FACT = (PI-6)/6 ~= -0.476
W_CONST = 0

Now we want to calculate the position of the marking line, MARK_D. Make the following
assumptions:
• The bending should start at the base line of the flange.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:20 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Folded Flanges

• The bending tool is to be placed in the midpoint of the arc.

• The neutral line is on the depth 1/3 of the material thickness.
Then
MARK_H = 2*PI*(R + T/3)/8 = (PI/4)*R + (PI/12)*T
i.e.:

M_H_FACT = 0
M_RAD_FACT = PI/4 ~= 0.785
M_T_FACT = PI/12 ~= 0.262
M_CONST = 0

Assume that the bending radius is 30, and we want to refer to the flange type as number 10.
Then our flange type could be defined with the statement:
FLA_TYPE, 10
/RADIUS =30
/W_H_FACT = 1
/W_RAD_FACT = 0.571
/W_T_FACT = -0.476
/M_RAD_FACT = 0.785
/M_T_FACT = 0.262;

1.6.2 Defining a Flange End Type

Suppose that we want our flange end type to be an instance of the basic type 4. For this
type the position of the knuckle point, W_KN, has to be defined. Assume that the knuckle line
should be 15 mm above the end of the arc. Besides the conditions are the same as for the
flange width. W_KN will be calculated:
W_KN = 2*PI*(R + T/3)/4 + 15 <=>
W_KN = (PI/2)*R + (PI/6)*T + 15
i.e. :

KN_H_FACT = 0
KN_RAD_FACT = PI/2 ~= 1.571
KN_T_FACT = PI/6 ~= 0.523
KN_CONST = 15

Basic type 4 also requires the parameters R1 and FLA_V. If we set R1 to 30, FLA_V to 25,
and we want to refer to the flange end type as number 5, then our flange end will be defined
with the statement:

FLA_END, 5
/TYPE = 4
/KN_RAD_FACT = 1.571

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:21 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Folded Flanges

/KN_T_FACT = 0.523
/KN_CONST = 15
/FLA_V = 25
/R1 = 30;

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:22 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Holes and Notches

Holes and Notches

© Copyright 1974 to current year. i 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Holes and Notches

© Copyright 1974 to current year. ii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Hole Standards in AVEVA Marine

1 Hole Standards in AVEVA Marine

1.1 General
By definition closed contours in plate parts and profiles are in AVEVA Hull called holes.
Holes should normally bet set in the interior of panels and in the interior of the web of
profiles. In panels holes may very well be located across seams dividing the panel into plate
parts. In that case the hole will result in edge openings in the parts on both sides of the
seam. It is also possible to place a hole across the outer contour of a panel. The extracted
plate parts will then be correct but holes across panel boundaries may cause
inconveniences in 3D views of the hull model. A better solution in these cases is to replace
the hole by a notch.
A hole can be either a physical hole or a fictitious hole. A physical hole is always presented
in both symbolic views and 3D view as a free space. A fictitious hole is a hole that in the
parts generation will rather be treated as a marking of a hole that will at a later stage in the
production be cut out manually. This fictitious hole is by default not presented in 3D view. To
enable these holes in a 3D view, the environment variable SBH_INPM_FICT_HOLE has to
be defined (set to any arbitrary value). The hole is always presented in symbolic views.
It is possible to specify bevels to be applied around any hole. If the hole is created by
reference to a penetrating object the possibly varying bevel angle may be calculated and
applied for the selected bevel type ("dotori"). (Contrary to dotori along plate edges the bevel
type is not picked automatically).

1.2 Types of Holes

Holes may be of several different types:
• Standard holes, identified by a type (string) and followed by a number of parameters,
separated by asterisks.
• Holes generated by reference to penetrating objects (like pipes, pillars, ventilation
ducts). The geometry of such holes is generated depending on the geometry of the
penetrating object.
• Finally, any close planar curved can be used as a hole ("arbitrary holes"), see Arbitrary
Holes below.

1.2.1 Standard Holes

Standard holes are identified by a hole type (string), followed by a variable number of
parameters, separated by asterisks (e.g. HO600*400 for a manhole). They may have two
origins:
1. Standard holes built into AVEVA Marine and always available to any AVEVA Marine
customer.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Hole Standards in AVEVA Marine

2. Standard holes created by the customer.

Both types of standard holes are used in exactly the same way. The in-built hole standard is
described in detail in Standard Holes in AVEVA Marine, Overview and Details about
Standard Hole Types below.
Some details of customer defined standard holes can be found in Customer Defined
Standard Holes .

1.2.2 Holes for Penetrating Objects

When generating plane panels it is possible to create holes in plates by references to
penetrating objects of the following types:
• Pillars
• Pipes
• Ventilation ducts
If not otherwise specified the hole contour is equal to the section curve of the penetrating
object. It is also possible to specify a clearance around the penetrating object.
If the object penetrates at a non-right angle there will two somewhat different contours on
the two sides of the penetrated plate. These two contours will automatically be merged into
one "enclosing" contour.
It is also possible to have the fitting angle ("dotori") calculated around the holes and use this
angle for control of bevel burning.
For details, see Hull / Planar Modelling / Design Language of Hull Modelling / Hole
Statement.

1.3 Standard Holes in AVEVA Marine, Overview

A standard hole in AVEVA Marine is selected by a hole designation (string) of the following
layout.
<hole designation> ::= <type> <par_1>*<par_2>*….<par_n>

<type> is a registered 'name' of the hole.

<par_i> are parameters controlling the size of the hole. They can be given
arbitrary values as far as they produce a reasonable hole contour. The
number of parameters is different for different types of holes and may
also vary for a certain type of hole because certain parameters may
have default values.

New standard holes must be implemented in AVEVA Marine by AVEVA.

Examples:
• D250 specifies a circular hole with diameter 250 mm
• HE250*125 specifies an elliptical hole with major axis 250 mm and a minor axis 125
mm
The menu below shows all existing standard hole types. They are described in detail in
paragraphs below.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Hole Standards in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:1. Menu of AVEVA Marine standard hole types.

A standard hole is described in a co-ordinate system of its own. It is located by specifying

the position of the origin of its local co-ordinate system. Turning of the hole is done by
specifying the angle which the u-axis should be turned, see the figure below.

Figure 1:2. Locating a hole in a panel co-ordinate system.

In the specification of the different hole types below the figures show the shape of the holes,
their local co-ordinate system and thus their reference point. The figures also show how the
holes will be oriented if no turning angle is specified.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Hole Standards in AVEVA Marine

1.4 Details about Standard Hole Types

The available standard holes are described in detail below.

Circular hole (D)

Designation: D <d>

Example: D250
Turning angle is irrelevant.

Symmetrical Manhole ("Oval Hole") (HO)

Designation: HO <a> * <b> (a>b)

Example: HO600*400

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Hole Standards in AVEVA Marine

Asymmetrical Manhole (HOR)

Designation: HOR <a> *< r1 >*< r2>

Example: HOR600*200*100

Elliptical Hole (HE)

Designation: HE <a> *<b>

Example: HE250*125

Superelliptical Hole (HSE)

Designation: HSE <a> *<b> * <e>

Here e is the exponent of the “super ellipse” equation

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Hole Standards in AVEVA Marine

(x/a) ** e + (y/b) ** e = 1

e = 2.5 results in a “super ellipse”

e=2 results in “normal” ellipse, closer to the mathematical

ellipse than the HE hole

Example: HSE1200*600*2.5

Elliptical-Rectangular Hole (HER)

Designation: HER <c> *<d> * <a> * <b>

Example:¨ HER2100*950*1500*950

(This is an elliptical hole where rectangular “strips” have been inserted around the symmetry
axes).

Rectangular Hole (HR)

Designation: HR <a> *<b> * <r>

Example: HR1480*680*40

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Hole Standards in AVEVA Marine

Rectangular Hole with "Mickey Mouse Ears" (HRM)

Designation: HRM <a> *<b> * <r> [*<d>]

Example: HRM2000*700*50*10

(If <d> is left out the corner arc passes through the sharp corner of the rectangle, i.e.
d=0).

Triangular Hole (HT)

Designation: HT <a> *<b> * <r1> [*<r2>[*<r3>]]

Example: HT600*600*75

If r2 and r3 are left out, r2 = r3 = r1

If only r3 is left out, r3 = r2
The reference point of this hole is in the intersection point between the lines along edges “a”
and “b”.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Hole Standards in AVEVA Marine

1.5 Customer Defined Standard Holes

AVEVA Marine has an option to let a customer define a hole standard of his own that may be
used in parallel with the in-built standard. This is done via a special Vitesse trigger with the
fixed name _TbhookCustHole, written in the Python language. A simple version of this
hook is delivered along with AVEVA Marine and it is supposed to be extended and added to
by the customer, either by extending the hook itself or by calling sub-scripts.
This hook gets as input the hole type and its parameters and is expected to deliver the hole
as a closed contour consisting of lines and arcs together with a status variable. For details,
see documentation within the hook itself, and the on-line documentation Vitesse, Hull where
its interface is described.
The contour should be described in a local 2D coordinate system. The origin is the
reference point used to position the hole and the rotation to be specified is that of its u-axis.
The circulation direction of the hole should preferably be clockwise.
Currently, condition for use of this option is that a Vitesse license is available.

1.6 Arbitrary Holes

Arbitrary holes are supposed to be described in a local co-ordinate system (uv). The hole
contour must be closed and may have an arbitrary circulation direction. The hole may be
located arbitrarily (like a standard hole) by specifying the position of the origin of its co-
ordinate system in the uv-system of the panel and by specifying the turning angle of the u-
axis relative to that of the panel.
If the hole is already described in the co-ordinate system of the panel in its proper position
its location need not be further specified.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Symbols for Notches and Holes in Views

2 Symbols for Notches and Holes in Views

2.1 Background
In symbolic hull views different types of components are represented partly by symbols. E.g.
the end cut and connection types are indicated by symbols at the ends of the stiffener trace
line.
This document describes a facility that offers a customer a possibility to decide the symbols
to be used for a similar symbolic representation of holes and notches in symbolic views.

2.2 Scope of Use

The symbolic representation of holes and notches is restricted to symbolic representations
of components in symbolic views. They are primarily used in profiles, i.e. in stiffeners in
planar views of panels and in shell profiles (longitudinals and transversals) in shell
expansion views. However, additionally it may be used to indicate holes, close to the shell in
plane panels in shell expansion views.

2.3 Definition of Symbols

The definition of the symbols takes place via an ordinary text file, created and maintained in
the standard editor of the computer system.
The name of the file can be selected quite freely and its total name (path+name) should be
assigned to the environment variable SBH_PENETR_SYMB_CTRL.
The file is divided into a number of statements. Each statement must be written in a
separate line and the maximum line width is 80 characters. Spaces between terms are
ignored but no blank lines are allowed.
Note that each statement must be terminated by a semicolon (;).
The layout of all lines is identical:

<type> , <designation> , <symb_No> ;

type The statement type can be either NOT for notches or HOL for holes.

designation This item is the standard designation of the notch or hole.

Symb_No This is the number of the symbol in the symbol font No 94.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Symbols for Notches and Holes in Views

The designation does not have to be complete, e.g. HOL,HE,55; designates symbol 55 to all
elliptical holes, i.e. there is a kind of implicit "wild card" facility.
Additionally there is an option to define a default symbol for all notches or holes not
otherwise defined. This is done by giving an empty designation. Holes and notches must
have separate default specifications. If multiple default statements of the same kind exist,
only the last one is used.

Example:

NOT, ,100;

NOT, VU125*50, 1;

NOT, VU150*75, 2;

NOT, HKO150, 3;

.
.
.

HOL, , 250;

HOL, HE250*125, 11;

HOL, HO, 12;

.
.
.

2.3.1 Remark
The definition of SBH_PENETR_SYMB_CTRL will activate the drawing of symbols for holes
both in symbolic hull views and in shell expansion views.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

3 Notch Standards

3.1 General
"Notch" is the common denomination of the normally small openings in corners ("corner
notches") and along edges ("edge notches") of plates. In other contexts they may be called
"scallops" or "rat holes". Notches (only edge notches) may also be set along traces of
profiles but must not in this case be part of the end cut of the profile.
Some corner notches are supposed to be used only in brackets.

3.2 Types of Notches

A notch may be of two types, either a standard notch or an arbitrary notch. A standard notch
is identified by a registered type and may have a varying number of parameters. An arbitrary
notch may be any open contour that is stored in the hull data banks or available in the work
area during modelling.
New standard notches must be implemented in AVEVA Marine by AVEVA.

3.3 Standard Notches

A standard notch is selected by a notch designation (string) of the following layout.
<notch designation> ::= <type> <par_1>*<par_2>*….<par_n>
<type> is a registered 'name' of the notch.
<par_i> are parameters controlling the dimensions of the notch.
In certain notches some parameters are optional and have default values. Suppose a notch
with four parameters of which the last two are optional:
NOT<a>*<b>*<c>*<d>. If in such a case the user wants to give the last parameter <d> but
stay with the default value for parameter <c>, this parameter must be replaced by a zero,
i.e. NOT*<a>*<b>*0*<d>.

Examples:
• R50 specifies a circular arc with radius 50 mm
• HE250*125*100 specifies an elliptical notch ("edge hole") with major axis 250
mm and a minor axis 125 mm and with a 100 mm wide opening against the edge. The
toe height at the ends of the opening is by default 15 mm high.
The three menus below show:
1. Notches that may be used both in corners and along edges

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

2. Notches that are exclusively used in corners

3. Notches that are mainly used along edges. Under certain circumstances these notches
may be used in corners as well.

Figure 3:1. Edge and corner notches, menu.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

Figure 3:2. Corner notches, menu.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

Figure 3:3. Edge notches, menu

The survey below gives all required details about each notch: how it should be selected,
controlled and used.
A standard notch is described in a co-ordinate system of its own. It is normally positioned
and orientated by reference to items in the model, e.g. corner or limits of the panel. A user
need normally not bother about how a standard notch is described in its own co-ordinate
system.
Certain types of standard notches (currently the types HKE, HKO, VUR, VDA, VDB, VOA,
VOB, KD, KE, KO, and KR) have toes with sharp corners.
An option has been implemented to soften these sharp corners by a fillet arc. The radius of
this arc is set by the environment variable SBH_NOTCH_TOER. Simultaneously, the built-in
toe height may be changed by another environment variable SBH_NOTCH_TOEH.

3.3.1 Corner and Edge Notches

• Notch Type R

Picking:

Designation: R<rad>

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

Example: R50

Usage:

In plates: In corners, along edges.

In brackets: In corners

In profiles: Along trace

• Notch Type RW

Picking:

Designation: RW<rad>

Example: RW50

Usage:

In plates: In corners, along edges.

Note: that the geometry differs slightly in the two

cases.

In brackets: No

In profiles: Along trace

• Notch Type KEH

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

Picking:

Designation: KEH<A>*<B>[*<C>[*<R>]]

Default value for C=A/3

Default value for R=20

Example: KEH250*125

Usage:

In plates: In corners, along edges. When used in corners the

notch will not be affected in any way by the knuckle
angle at the corner.

In brackets: No

In profiles: Along trace

• Notch Type KUH

Picking:

Designation: KUH<A>*<B>

Example: KUH250*70

Usage:

In plates: In corners, along edges. When used in corners the

notch will not be affected in any way by the knuckle
angle at the corner.

In brackets: No

In profiles: Along trace

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

3.3.2 Corner Notches

• Notch Type KS

Picking:

Designation: KS<C>

Example: KS10

Usage:

In plates: In corners

In brackets: In corners

In profiles: No

• Notch Type KSA

Picking:

Designation: KSA<C1>*<C2>

Example: KSA15*10

Usage:

In plates: In corners.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

In brackets: In corners.

In profiles: No.

• Notch Type KSN

Picking:

Designation: KSN<H>*<W>[*<KS>]

Example: KSN75*25*13

Default value: KS = 10

Usage:

In plates: In corners.

In brackets: In corners.

In profiles: No.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

• Notch Type HKE

Picking:

Designation: HKE<A>*<B>*<C>

Example: HKE200*100*100

Usage:

In plates: In corners

In brackets: In corners

In profiles: No

• Notch Type HKO

Picking:

Designation: HKO<A>*<B>*(C=A/2 - B/2)

Example: HKO200*100

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:9 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

Usage:

In plates: In corners

In brackets: In corners

In profiles: No

• Notch Type VU

Picking:

Designation: VU<C>*<R> (when B1=R)

VU<C>*<B>*<R> (when B1 ><R)

Examples: VU100*50, VU100*75*50

Usage:

In plates: In corners

In brackets: In corners

In profiles: No

• Notch Type VUA

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:10 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

Picking:

Designation: VUA<X>[*<R>]
Default value of R=75

Examples: VUA100

Usage:

In plates: In corners

In brackets: In corners

In profiles: No

• Notch Type VUF

Picking:

Designation: VUF<C>*<B>*<R>

Example: VUF100*75*50

Usage:

In plates: In corners

In brackets: In corners

In profiles: No

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:11 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

• Notch Type VUR

Picking:

Designation: VUR<A>[*<B>[*<T>[*<R1>[*R2>]]]]
Default value B = 30

Default value T=15

Default value R1=30

Default value R2=R1

Examples: VUR130*75, VUR130*75*0*25 (T=15, R1=R2=25)

Usage:

In plates: In corners

In brackets: In corners

In profiles: No

• Notch Type VDA

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:12 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

Picking:

Designation: VDA<X>

C=X*(1 +cot(V)) when V<=90 degrees,

C=X when V>90 degrees

R=min( C*tan(0.5*V) -15, X)

Example: VDA75

Usage:

In plates: In corners

In brackets: In corners

In profiles: No

• Notch Type VDB

Picking:

Designation: VDB<X>

C=X*(1 +cot(V)) when V<=90 degrees,

C=X when V>90 degrees

R= cos(0.5*V) *(C*tan(0.5*V) -15)

Example: VDB75

Usage:

In plates: In corners

In brackets: In corners

In profiles: No

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:13 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

• Notch Type VOA

Picking:

Designation: VOA<X>

C=X*(1 +cot(V)) when V<=90 degrees,

C=X when V>90 degrees

Example: VOA75

Usage:

In plates: In corners

In brackets: In corners

In profiles: No

• Notch Type VOB

Picking:

Designation: VOB<C1>

C2=0.5*C1*(1 +cot(V)) when V<=90 degrees,

C2=0.5*C1 when V>90 degrees

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:14 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

Example: VOB75

Usage:

In plates: In corners

In brackets: In corners

In profiles: No

• Notch Type BKU

Picking:

Designation: BKU<A>*<R>[*<T>]

Default value T=15

Example: BKU75*30

Usage:

In plates: No

In brackets: In corners

In profiles: No

• Notch Type BR

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:15 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

Picking:

Designation: BR<R>*[<T>[*<H>]]

Default value T = 15

Default value H = R

Example: BR30

Usage:

In plates: No

In brackets: In corners

In profiles: No

• Notch Type RF

Picking:

Designation: RF<R>

Example: RF50

Usage:

In plates: In corners

In brackets: In corners

In profiles: No

Remark: The contour on both sides of the corner where this

notch is applied should preferably be straight or at least
have a moderate curvature otherwise the result may be
poor.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:16 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

• Notch Type RN

Picking:

Designation: RN<R>[*<C>[*<H>]]

Default value C = 20.

Default value H = 10

Example: RN50

Usage:

In plates: In corners

In brackets: In corners

In profiles: No

• Notch Type VDC

Picking:

Designation: VDC<A>*<B>[*<R1>[*<R2>[*<T>]]]

Default value R1 = B.

Default value R2 = R1/2.

Default value T = 10.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:17 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

Example: VDC85*50

Usage:

In plates: In corners

In brackets: In corners

In profiles: No

• Notch Type VUG

Picking:

Designation: VUG<A>[*<B>[*<C>[*<T>[<R1>[*<R2>]]]]]

Default value B = 20.

Default value C = B.

Default value T = 15.

Default value R1 = 30.

Default value R2 = 30.

Example: VUG100

Usage:

In plates: In corners

In brackets: In corners

In profiles: No

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:18 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

• Notch Type RC

Picking:

Designation: RC<A>[*<B>[*<R1>[<R2>[*<T>[<V1>[*<V2>]]]]]]

Default value B = 25.

Default value R1 = 30

Default value R2 = 20.

Default value T = 15.

Default value V1= 30.

Default value V2 = 45.

Example: RC70.

Usage:

In plates: In corners.

In brackets: In corners.

In profiles: No.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:19 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

• Notch Type RKA

Picking:

Designation: RKA<R>*<S>

Example: RKA50*20.

Usage:

In plates: In corners.

In brackets: In corners.

In profiles: No.

• Notch Type RKB

Picking:

Designation: RKB<R>*<S>

Example: RKB50*20.

Usage:

In plates: In corners.

In brackets: In corners.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:20 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

In profiles: No.

3.3.3 Edge Notches

• Notch Type KD

Picking:

Designation: KD<D>*<C>

Example: KD100*70

Usage:

In plates: Along edges. May be set in corners but corner angle

will not be considered.

In brackets: No

In profiles: Along trace.

• Notch Type KE

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:21 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

Picking:

Designation: KE<A>*<B>*<C>

Example: KE250*125*100

Usage:

In plates: Along edges. May be set in corners but corner angle

will not be considered - use notch type HKE instead.

In brackets: No

In profiles: Along trace.

• Notch Type KO

Picking:

Designation: KO<A>*<B>

Example: KO250*100

Usage:

In plates: Along edges. Use notch type HKO in corners.

In brackets: No

In profiles: Along trace.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:22 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

• Notch Type KR

Picking:

Designation: KR<A>*<B>*<C>*<R1>[*<TAP> *<R2>]

Default value R2=R1

Example: KR1000*500*800*50

Usage:

In plates: Along edges. May be used in corners but corner angle

does not affect the result.

In brackets: No

In profiles: Along trace.

• Notch Type KU

Picking:

Designation: KU<A>*<B>

Example: KU150*50

Usage:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:23 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

In plates: Along edges. Use notch type VU in corners.

In brackets: No

In profiles: Along trace.

• Notch Type KUF

Picking:

Designation: KUF<A>*<B>*<R>

Example: KUF200*100*50

Usage:

In plates: Along edges. Use notch type VUF in corners.

In brackets: No

In profiles: Along trace.

• Notch Type KDU

Picking:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:24 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

Designation: KDU<A>*<B>[*<C>[*<R1>[*<R2>]]]
Default value C = 150
Default value R1= 40
Default value R2 = 30

Example: KDU75*175

Usage:

In plates: Along edges. May be set in corners but only when

corner angle is very close to 90 degrees.

In brackets: No

In profiles: Along trace.

• Notch Type KVU

Picking:

Designation: KVU<A>*<B>[*<R>]

Default value R=40

Example: KVU100*150

Usage:

In plates: Along edges. May be set in corners but only when

corner angle is very close to 90 degrees.

In brackets: No

In profiles: Along trace.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:25 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

• Notch Type KFS

Picking:

Designation: KFS<D>

(A = D*sqrt(2) )

Example: KFS30

Usage:

In plates: Along edges.

In brackets: No

In profiles: Along trace.

3.4 Arbitrary Notches

Arbitrary notches can be used in two different ways:
1. Like a standard notch, i.e. positioned by reference to model items. In this case the
notch must be described in a local co-ordinate system in a similar way as the standard
notches. The difference in use compared to a standard notch is that the notch has a
fixed size, i.e. it cannot be parameter controlled.
2. The notch is described directly in the co-ordinate system of the panel in the position
where it is located. In this case the notch need not be further "positioned". E.g. the
notch may be created using normal drafting tools. The notch is then converted to a
modelling curve that is used as a notch.
In both cases the geometry of the notch should be described so that it reaches well outside
the contour where it should be inserted. The contour must be open and have exactly two
intersection points with the part contour. Its circulation direction may be arbitrary.
The figure below shows a case where a notch of a special shape has been created along an
edge for a couple of penetrating pipes. The contour of this notch has been described directly
in the co-ordinate system of the panel.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:26 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

Figure 3:4. Arbitrary notch, created as a curve.

3.5 Customer Defined Standard Notches

The system has an option to let a customer define a notch standard of his own that may be
used in parallel with the in-built standard. This is done via a special Vitesse trigger with the
fixed name _TbhookCustNotch, written in the Python language. A simple version of this
hook is delivered along with AVEVA Marine and it is supposed to be extended and added to
by the customer, either by extending the hook itself or by calling sub-scripts.
This hook gets as input the notch type and its parameters and is expected to deliver the
notch as a contour consisting of lines and arcs together with a status variable. For details,
see documentation within the hook itself, and the on-line documentation Vitesse / Hull
where its interface is described.
The contour should be described in a local 2D coordinate system. The origin is the
reference point used to position the notch and the rotation to be specified is that of its u-axis.
Currently, condition for use of this option is that a Vitesse license is available.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:27 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Notch Standards

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:28 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Cutouts and Clips

Cutouts and Clips

© Copyright 1974 to current year. i 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Cutouts and Clips

© Copyright 1974 to current year. ii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutout Standards in AVEVA Marine

1 Profile Cutout Standards in AVEVA Marine

1.1 General
In shipbuilding it is most common that the stiffening of the main structural members
penetrate the plating of subordinate elements, e.g. so that longitudinal frames in the shell or
in the decks/bulkheads pass through webs and double floor bottoms. Such penetrations are
in AVEVA Marine called cutouts. (Cutouts need often be reinforced by small plate pieces, in
AVEVA Marine called clips or collars. The clips are defined in association with the cutouts
but they are described in separate documents.)
The cutouts are normally standardised regarding general shape, radii, clearances, etc. and
have well defined dependencies on profile types and sizes. Therefore they lend themselves
well to be generated by different types of parameterised macros.
The first part of this document describes the three options for generation of cutouts that
currently are available in the system. These options are:
1. AVEVA Marine contains a large number of cutouts which have been hard coded into
the programs. These cutouts with their design rules are specified in the Hull Standards.
2. The majority of cutouts used by a certain yard are common to all other yards in their
general principles. They may vary in details regarding e.g. clearances, radii, etc. but
the pattern is common. For this category of cutouts, AVEVA Marine has an "External
Cutout Definition Facility" which allows a customer easily to set up his own standards.
3. Very special and yard specific cutouts with an arbitrary geometry can be built up in
AVEVA Marine geometry macros which allows a customer to develop cutouts with any
shape.
These three options are described on an overall level in this specification. Details about
them can be found in separate documents.
Independently of the way they have been created all cutout types can be used both in plates
and profiles.
Cutouts are in AVEVA Marine normally identified and picked by a number that can be
selected quite arbitrarily by the customer when setting up the cutout standard. However, an
option to use “named” cutout is described in a separate document Named Cutouts.

1.1.1 In-built Cutouts

The following pages give an overview of those cutouts that are delivered as an integrated
part of the hull application and for which no set-up is required.
These cutouts were originally developed for different types of ship, some for big tankers,
others for smaller types of ships. The cutouts must be accepted as they are specified, i.e.
normally no parameters of them can be changed by the customer or end user.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutout Standards in AVEVA Marine

(Many of the cutouts can be redefined to follow the same rules by use of External Cutout
Definition Facility, described in the next paragraph.)

• Cutout 1

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutout Standards in AVEVA Marine

• Cutouts, Survey

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutout Standards in AVEVA Marine

• Tight Cutout

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutout Standards in AVEVA Marine

• Cutouts with Stub on Both Sides

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutout Standards in AVEVA Marine

• Cutouts with Stub on Mould Line Side

Type 3 F = 60, G = 40, R = R75, if A > 300 else R50

Type 31 Flat bar: F = 90, G = 40, R = R75, if A > 300 else 50

Type 32 L-bar: G = 90, R = R75 if A > 300 else R50

Type 301 F = 60, G = 40, R = KS8

Type 311 Flat bar: F = 90, C = 40, R = KS 8

Type 321 L-bar: G = 90, R = KS8

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutout Standards in AVEVA Marine

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutout Standards in AVEVA Marine

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutout Standards in AVEVA Marine

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:9 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutout Standards in AVEVA Marine

• Cutouts with Stub at Non-mould Line Side

Type 4 F = 60, G = 40, R = R75

Type 41 Flat bar: F = 90, G = 40, R = R75

L-bar: F = 90, G = 90, R = R75

Type 401 F = 60, G = 40, R = KS8

Type 411 Flat bar: F = 90, G = 40, R = KS8

L-bar: F = 90, G = 90, R = KS8

Type 42 F = 60, G = 40

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:10 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutout Standards in AVEVA Marine

• Cutouts for Fastening with or without Clips

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:11 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutout Standards in AVEVA Marine

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:12 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutout Standards in AVEVA Marine

• Cutouts, Elliptical Top

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:13 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutout Standards in AVEVA Marine

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:14 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutout Standards in AVEVA Marine

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:15 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutout Standards in AVEVA Marine

• Cutouts for Girder Flange

• Cutouts, Elliptical Top

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:16 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutout Standards in AVEVA Marine

• Cutouts, Smaller Profiles

• Special Cutouts with an Ellipse

Ellipse:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:17 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutout Standards in AVEVA Marine

A x B
A = H sin V + 25
B = 370/sin(V) + cos(V)(H + 55/sin(V))-120 sin(V)

cos V must be < 60/H

1.1.2 External Cutout Definition Facility

The External Cutout Definition Facility contains ‘templates’ for a number of typical cutouts
some of which are used by virtually all shipyards. Each customer can easily create his own
‘instances’ of these cutouts with radii, clearances, etc. in accordance with his need and
practice.
The ‘templates’ have reserved numbers but the customer instantiation can be made using
arbitrarily selected user numbers.
The cutouts will always and automatically consider the fact that the angle between web and
flange may not always be 90 degrees depending on the orientation of the penetrating profile
relative to the plate.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:18 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutout Standards in AVEVA Marine

1.1.3 Cutouts via Geometry Macros

AVEVA Marine also allows arbitrary cutouts to be described in AVEVA Marine geometry
macros. These can be developed by any customer and connected to AVEVA Marine without
any need for additional software deliveries.
It is up to the customer to take the details of the profile penetration into consideration to the
extent he finds this necessary, e.g. whether it is to be considered that the angle between
web and flange is not always 90 degrees.
The performance of cutouts implemented in macros is somewhat slower than for cutouts in
the External Cutout Definition Facility.

1.1.4 Special Feature, Eggbox Cutouts

Normal cutouts for profile penetrations must be defined according to any of the options
described above (and further detailed below). However, AVEVA Marine supports the
additional type of cutout that is required when two panels are halfway inserted into each
other, like the walls of an old-fashioned egg box. The slice for the penetrating part of a panel
is treated as a cutout that is built into the system with the predefined and reserved number
9999. The user may control miscellaneous parameters of this cutout. All details may be
found in the User´s Guide Hull Planar Modelling.

1.2 Mixed Use of Cutout Definition Options

It is possible to mix the use of the cutout options described above. This can be done in
different ways including multiple definitions of the same cutout type.

1.2.1 Multiple Definitions of a Cutout Number

It may happen that two cutouts for e.g. a flatbar and T-bar have rather big differences in their
geometry and that they nevertheless are considered to be functionally equal. In this
situation it is natural for the user to refer to them by the same number irrespective of the
profile type.
To cope with the difference in geometry it might be convenient to have quite separate
definitions of the two cutouts. This is supported by AVEVA Marine. Thus two different cutout
definitions may have the same number if only the profile types are different. It may even
happen that for one profile type an external cutout definition is used, and that for a second
profile type the definition is made via a macro.

1.2.2 Precedence between Cutouts

As specified above it is possible to have several independent definitions of a special cutout
type. However, it is impossible to define the same cutout number twice for the same profile
type using macros for both (or the external cutout definition). If a try is made an error
message will be issued.
On the other hand it is possible to redefine a certain cutout number (for a certain profile
type) using different cutout definition options. E.g. the cutout definition of one user number
for a certain profile type may have one version defined by a macro and a second version
described in the external definition facility.
In case of true multiple definition of a certain cutout type the precedence rule is that cutouts
via macros have the highest precedence, i.e. will be selected first.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:19 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutout Standards in AVEVA Marine

1.3 Cutouts and Inclined Profile Penetrations

1.3.1 General
When cutouts are made in plates or profiles for penetrating profiles the cutouts will
automatically adjust to the type, size and orientation of the penetrating profile. This means
e.g. that the cutout should consider the angle between the profile and the plane of the
penetrated plate / profile. Normal consequences are that the height of the profile and the
width of the flange in the section are bigger than the nominal values and that the angle
between the web and flange might be different from the normal 90 degrees.
This is to be taken into account when the geometry of the cutouts are generated. This is
done automatically by the External Cutout Definition facility but is the responsibility of the
customer when writing geometry macros for cutouts.
However, there is also another aspect that might have to be taken into consideration,
namely the thickness of the penetrated plate / profile. The options supported by AVEVA
Marine are described below.

1.3.2 Cutout Geometry and Plate Thickness

When the profile penetrates the plate / profile perpendicularly the shape of the cutout is
independent of the plate thickness, in other cases not.
In cases of inclined passing it is normally only the parts of cutouts that are welded against
the profile (section) that require action. The system offers the following three possibilities.
1. The geometry of the cutout is not affected by the plate thickness.
2. The cutout is made bigger so that the profile may penetrate the plate without
interference even in case of a tight connection, see the figure below.

Figure 1:1. Cutout made bigger to prevent interference with profile.

3. The cutout contour is supposed to bevelled to create a tight connection against the
profile, see the figure below.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:20 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutout Standards in AVEVA Marine

Figure 1:2. Cutout being bevelled to prevent interference with profile.

1.3.3 Selection of Option

The customer selects the option to be applied via an environment variable,
SBH_CUTOUT_BEV, which may have a number of predefined values (see below). The
selected option will be applied for all cutout types.
In all cases the cutout geometry should be described to fit the profile section in the mould
plane of the intersected plate / profile. The system automatically performs the required
adjustments.

• Default Situation
The default situation is that no adjustment takes place. This happens when
SBH_CUTOUT_BEV is unassigned.

• Cutout Free of Profile Section

The second alternative above (enlarged cutout) is activated by assigning
SBH_CUTOUT_BEV = CUT_FREE
and
SBH_CUTOUT_BEV= CUT_DRAW_FREE
The difference is that in the first case only the cutouts in extracted plate parts are affected, in
the second case also the shape of cutouts in views.

• Cutout Fitted to Profile Section

The third alternative (enlarged plate, reduced size of cut) is activated by assigning the
following values:
SBH_CUTOUT_BEV = CUT
SBH_CUTOUT_BEV = CUT_CHECK
SBH_CUTOUT_BEV = CUT_DRAW
CUT means that the geometry is affected only in plate parts, not in views.
CUT_CHECK has the same effect but the system will check also in the modelling phase if
the change of geometry will cause the cutout to "overlap itself". If so, a warning message is
issued.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:21 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutout Standards in AVEVA Marine

CUT_DRAW means that the cutout is adjusted also in views. Also in this case a warning
message will be issued in case of overlap.
Only the parts of a cutout directly connected (welded) to the profile are effected. No
additional environment variables are relevant in this situation.

SBH_CUTOUT_TIGHT=<d> Specifies a tolerance to be used in checking whether

a part of the cutout is welded against the profile or not.
Default value: 2mm

SBH_CUTOUT_SEGTOL=<e> It may happen that a line segment is welded partly

against the profile section and that it partly is free.
Then only the part of the line welded against the
profile will be moved unless it extends more than <e>
outside the profile section. Default value: 10 mm.

Figure 1:3. Condition for introducing "step"in line segment of cutout.

A condition for this kind of change to function properly is that the part of a cutout between
two straight lines is supposed to be a fillet that should be translated together with the
surrounding lines without change of its size.
This method is normally supposed to be combined with bevel cutting of the part of the cutout
against the profile section, currently only using a simple V-bevel, the angle of which is
calculated automatically.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:22 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
External Profile Cutout Definition

2 External Profile Cutout Definition

2.1 Introduction
The current document describes the AVEVA Marine option for External Definition of Profile
Cutouts as defined in the superior document mentioned in that document.

2.2 Principles of the External Cutout Control

2.2.1 Definitions
The external cutout definition supposes that the customer cutouts are 'instances' of a
number of predefined basic cutout types which are described in this document.
Each such basic cutout type is called a main type and is identified by a type number. Thus
all the existing main types (with their numbers) must have been set up by AVEVA.
A customer may establish any number of instances of a main cutout type. Each instance is
identified by a number, the user type, selected freely by the customer. This number is used
when a cutout is picked in the modelling.

2.2.2 General about the Geometry of Cutouts

In most cases a cutout is built up by lines, parallel to the different line segments of the profile
sections. At node points these lines are connected to each other, e.g. by fillets or directly by
knuckles. The cutout is thus defined by the distances (clearances) of these lines and the
radii, etc. connecting them.
The node points are numbered and they are individual to each profile type. The figure below
shows the points and their numbers. (Except for tight cutouts a bulb bar is 'replaced' by an
'enclosing' L-bar (profile type 31) in the evaluations)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
External Profile Cutout Definition

Figure 2:1. Node numbers for different profile types.

U-bars (profile type 50) are treated as L-bars (profile type 31) in all those profile types where
they are supported.

2.2.3 Connection Radii

When an instance of a main cutout is defined, the customer assigns values to those radii
which are relevant according to the main type (see survey of them below).
The connecting radii are identified by the numbers of the node points. Below R<i> denotes
the radius at node point No. <i>. R5 is the (big) radius in the ellipse of cutouts with an
elliptical top.
Each radius may be given several different values depending on either the profile height or
the thickness of the penetrated plate.

2.2.4 Clearances
The clearances between the segments of the cutout and the line segments of the profile
section are numbered like the radii, if not otherwise specified according to the figure below

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
External Profile Cutout Definition

Figure 2:2. Clearances for different profile types.

Certain clearances may be irrelevant for certain cutout types, e.g. C3 for flat bars, bulbs and
L-bars when the cutout is quite open on the mould line side.

2.3 Language for External Definition of Cutouts

Cutouts in the external cutout definition facility are described in a text file in the general TIL
language. The syntax of this implementation of the language is rather straight-forward and
contains only one statement type as described in detail below. One statement establishes
one cutout for a certain number of profile types.
The definition file may be given an arbitrary name. In order to make the cutout definition
available to the application programs it should be compiled by a function of the hull utility
inithull. If the compilation is successful a cutout definition object will be stored in the
structure data bank (associated with SB_OGDB) by name __CUTSTDOBJ__.
The compilation will also result in a receipt list with input and errors, if any. If inithull has
been started via the Job Launcher this list can be accessed like all other files resulting from
a Job Launcher run. If inithull has been started outside the Job Launcher the receipt list will
be stored in the print directory of the current project with the file extension .lst appended to
the name of the input file.
The external cutout definition facility is activated as soon as a valid cutout object is found in
the data bank.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
External Profile Cutout Definition

The syntax for one statement is as follows:

CUT, <number>
/TYPE=<base_type>
[/BULB_CLEARANCE
/PROF=(<type1>, <type2>,...) (1 ...)
<arc_definition> (1 ...9)
<gap_definition> (1 ...7)
;

Explanation:

<number> Is the number by which a user picks a certain cutout. There

may be several occurrences of the same number but then the
profile types must be different (see below).
TYPE Specifies the main type of which the cutout is an occurrence.
Must be picked from one of the basic types available.
BULB_CLEARANCE When given the clearance between the flange end of bulb bars
and the cutout is measured from the centre of the arc of the
bulb contour, otherwise from the extreme point. Irrelevant for
cutouts not used for bulb bars.

Figure 2:3. Alternative interpretations of C5 for bulb bars.

PROF Specifies the profile types for which the current cutout should
be applicable. The AVEVA Marine standard profile types
should be used.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
External Profile Cutout Definition

<arc_definition> Specifies how a certain arc of the cutout shall be calculated.

One such definition must be given for each of the relevant arcs
of a certain cutout type. Each arc/fillet has an order number
according to the definition above.

Remark:
If an arc with a certain number is irrelevant for a certain cutout
it may be used to define gaps depending on profile heights,
see below.
<arc_definition>::=
/ARC=<arc_no> [,R_MIN=<rad>]

ARC Specifies the order number of the arc in the definition of the
cutout (see above). The relevant arc numbers are specific for
each basic type of cutout. If not given for a relevant arc this is
supposed to have radius 0.

Note: that irrelevant arcs can be used to define clearances as

a function of the profile height.
R_MIN Minimum radius in a certain case, see Main Type 6 in Chapter
External Profile Cutout Definition .
RAD Radius of the arc (sniped corner ("KS notch") when RAD<0).
At most four different values may be given as a function of the
profile height.
However, see Main Type 6 in Chapter External Profile Cutout
Definition for special values of RAD for cutouts with an elliptical
top.
H_LIM h<i> is the profile height up to and including the one for which
radius r<i> should be used.
If h<i> <50 then check is made by the plate thickness rather
than by profile height.
The order should be in increasing heights and the number of
values should be exactly one less than the number of radii.

Example:
/RAD= (-10, 40, 60)
/H_LIM = (100, 250)
will result in:
R=KS10 for profile height (H)<=100,
R=40 for 100<H<=250,
R=60 for H>250

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
External Profile Cutout Definition

MICKEY_MOUSE, These attribute are applicable only for R4 and R6 and

MM_SHALLOW, irrelevant otherwise. Normally an arc will be a fillet but using
OWL these attributes the fillet will be replaced by a "full Mickey
Mouse ear", a "shallow" Mickey Mouse ear or an "owl's ear",
respectively. For details, see below.
WIDTH This option can be used for R4, R5 and R6 of cutouts with An
elliptical top. Irrelevant otherwise.
REF As an alternative to giving the radius explicitly this option can
be used to specify that the definition of one arc should be
equal to that of another (already defined) arc.
<gap_definition> Specifies the clearance along one of edges of the profile
section. One separate specification should be made for each
relevant clearance. A missing definition for a relevant
clearance is interpreted as 0. For more details, see below.
<gap_definition>::=

/GAP=<gap_no>
[/DIST=<gap>]
[/REFERENCE=<arc_no>]
[/OPPOSITE]
[/FL_WIDTH]
[/SKIP_OVERSHOOT]

GAP The sequence number of the clearance according the

specification above (in the range 1-7).
DIST The clearance given as a distance. It may also be defined as
an offset relative to a radius of an arc, cf. REF below.
REF Number of an arc that the clearance should be set equal to.
The size of the radius may be extended by an offset (positive
or negative) assigned to DIST.

Example:
/REF=6 /DIST=-20 means that the clearance should be
equal to the radius of arc 6 minus 20.
By reference to an arc the clearance may be made dependent
on the profile height in the same way as the radius. Also arcs
not otherwise affecting the geometry of the cutout may be used
in this way.
OPPOSITE Relevant only for certain clearances, see below.
FL_WIDTH Relevant only for C1 and C7. For details, see below.
SKIP_OVERLAP Relevant only for T bars (normally only profile type 35) (C3)
and profile type 36 (C4). For details, see below.

Example of a Simple Cutout Definition contains a simple example of a CUTOUT set-up file.

2.3.1 Options for Control of Radii

There are a number of options available to control the corner radii and gaps of the cutouts
compared to the straightforward way described above. This control is normally exercised via
special keywords of the input language.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
External Profile Cutout Definition

The normal situation is as follows:

R = 0 (or undefined) causes a knuckle.

R < 0 results in a connecting line segment (notch type KS).

R > 0 The connecting segment will be one (or maybe two, cf. below) arcs.

• Special Cases:
1. As a special case for R1 and R9 these radii may be set to xxx yyy rrr (one number,
where xxx, yyy and rrr are three-digit integers) creating a notch with the following
shape.

Figure 2:4. Control of generalised notch of profile “root”.

xxx = 0 creates a VU-notch along the profile web,

yyy = 0 creates a VU-notch along the plate contour,

xxx = yyy = 0 creates an ordinary circular notch (or sniped corner

if rrr< 0).

Example:

When xxx = yyy = 100 and rrr = 50 the radius should be given as 100100050.

2. For the "shoulder arcs" R4 and R6 the following special cases are supported in case of
non-elliptical and non-circular top of the cutout.
An ordinary fillet (default situation):

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
External Profile Cutout Definition

Figure 2:5. Ordinary corner fillet.

MICKEY_MOUSE The connection will consist of two arcs forming a

"Mickey Mouse ear" with their centre in the
intersection point between the segments to be
connected.

Figure 2:6. “Mickey Mouse” corner.

MM_SHALLOW Similar to the previous case but the "ear" will be

shallow as illustrated in the figure below.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
External Profile Cutout Definition

Figure 2:7. Shallow “Mickey Mouse” corner.

For the two “Mickey Mouse” variants C3 (C5) should be set as the distance between the
start of the arc and the profile. C3 will be set to C2 if not given.

OWL The connection will be made using a semicircle (an

"owls ear") as illustrated below.

Figure 2:8. “Owl´s ear” corner.

3. For the shoulder arcs R4 and R6 in cutouts with an elliptical, see e.g. Paragraph 2.3.7
Main Type 6.

2.3.2 Options for Control of Gaps and Clearances

The general rule is (as already mentioned in the specification of the input language above)
that the gaps may be defined in one of the following ways:
• By an explicit value
• By a radius with a given offset

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:9 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
External Profile Cutout Definition

• By leaving it undefined. This is interpreted as 0.

Moreover, certain clearances may be overridden by input.
Special options are:
1. For certain combinations of cutouts and profile types the clearances C1/C3 and C5/C7
are not independent of each other. (However, for profiles without flange on the moulded
side C1=C3 and for flat bars C5=C7).
The following rules are applied (in the given order):
• If C1=-1 then calculate C1 from C3.
• If C3=-1 then calculate C3 from C1.
• In cutouts which are open (without lug) on the mould line side C3 will be used for T
bars, C1 for all other profile types.
Regarding C5 and C7 the following rules hold (applied in the specified order):
• If C7=-1 then calculate C7 from C5.
• If C5=-1 then calculate C5 from C7.
• In cutouts which are open (without lug) on the non-mould line side C7 will be used
as given for flat bars, recalculated from C5 for all other profile types, even if
explicitly given.
2. For bulb bars, the cutout control offers two ways of interpreting C5, see the attribute /
BULB_CLEARANCE in the input specification.
3. For asymmetrical T-bars (type 35) C3 is normally measured from the leftmost edge of
the flange.
Option /SKIP_OVERSHOOT makes C3 be measured from the web of the profile
instead, cf. the figure below.

Figure 2:9. Options for C3 for asymmetric T profiles (type 35).

4. In a similar way /SKIP_OVERSHOOT for a profile of type 36 will make C4 be measured

from the upper edge of the flange. Otherwise C4 is measured from the top of the web.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:10 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
External Profile Cutout Definition

Figure 2:10. Options for C4 for profile type 36.

5. For cutouts with a lug on one side and quite open on the other, giving option
/FL_WIDTH means that these clearances are set to B -S +<xxx>. (Here, B is the width
of the flange and S the thickness of the web and <xxx> the given value).
This will normally result in a cutout with total width between the lug and the opposite
side equal to B+<xxx>. It is especially useful when T-bars should be inserted as
described in the figure below and should be used only for cutouts with lug one side.
This option is valid for C1 and C7.

Figure 2:11. Clearance depending on flange width.

6. Similarly, the option /OPPOSITE means that the distance <xxx> should be measured
from the opposite side of the web normally applicable for C1 and C7.
However, the same technique can be used to calculate C6 according to the figure
below, and C2 as in Figure 2:13.: Options for control of C2.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:11 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
External Profile Cutout Definition

Figure 2:12. Clearance measured from upper flange surface.

7. If C2 is defined for profile types where the flange is not extending into the mould line
side of the profile this inhibits the direct connection between R3 and R4 in main types
10, 11, 19, 20, 21 and 39.
The clearance between the starting point of R2 and the lower flange surface is
supposed to be C2 (with a possibility to calculate if from the upper surface by adding
option /OPPOSITE) as shown in the figure below.

Figure 2:13. Options for control of C2

2.3.3 Conflict between Radii and Clearances

Depending on the combination of radii, clearances and profile dimensions conflicts may
arise as illustrated in the figure below.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:12 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
External Profile Cutout Definition

Figure 2:14. Deteriorated cutout geometries.

R3/R4 (R6/R7) may overlap. In such a case the system treats the problem in the following
way..

1 R4/C3/C4 are always kept

2 R3 < 0: R3 is kept and will be connected directly to R4. C2 will be adjusted
accordingly.

R3 > 0: C2 is kept and R3 is adjusted to fit in, connected directly to R4. R6/R7
are treated in a similar way.

In a similar way R2/R3 (R7/R8) may overlap. Then the starting point of R3 will be moved to
have the same starting position in the x-direction as the ending point of R2. R2 will be
moved downwards if R3 and R4 are connected. Normally a knuckle will be introduced
between R2 and R3.
R7/R8 will be treated accordingly and R7 will be changed in case of conflict

2.3.4 Manual User Control

When generating a cutout in a plate or profile, the cutout will normally automatically fit into
the current profile as specified in the cutout definition. This includes fitting due to inclined
passing and also to the fact that the web and flange may not be perpendicular to each other
in the current section.
Normally the shape of the cutout is controlled entirely by the cutout definition. However, the
user can determine its shape in a couple of respects by user input, thus partly overriding the
original definition of the cutout.
1. One of the sides of open cutouts may be given a slope by use of the parameter C in the
input of plane panel modelling as illustrated in the figure below.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:13 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
External Profile Cutout Definition

Figure 2:15. Definition of parameter C (for sloped cutout >).

If the cutout is open on both sides, C>0 gives a slope on the non-mould line side, C<0
on the mould line side.
2. Similarly, the distance from the mould plane of the profile to the free side of an open
cutout can be controlled by the parameter M1 in panel modelling, cf. the figure below.

Figure 2:16. Definition of Parameter M1 (for control of clearance).

The given measure will replace the clearance set in the cutout definition.
If the cutout is open on both sides, M1>0 defines the width on the non-mould line side,
M1<0 on the mould line side.

Note: that M1 defines the measure from the moulded side to the open side of the cutout.
Survey of Main Cutout Types

Below follows a survey of all the main cutout types, currently supported in this facility. The
general principles above are applicable if not otherwise stated.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:14 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
External Profile Cutout Definition

2.3.5 Main Type 1

Main cutout type 1 is supposed to be a tight cutout, i.e. the clearances are normally small,
cf. the figure below. However, by selecting proper values of clearances many of the cutouts
normally belonging to other main types can be created as instances of main type 1 as well.
This might be of special interest for profile type 36 if the cutout is supposed to follow the
shape of the top of the profile.

Figure 2:17. Main type 1, radii.

All the "normal" profile types (type<50) are supported.

Some radii are irrelevant for certain profile types:

For flat bars (type 10): R2, R3, R7, R8

For bulb bars (type 20): R2, R3, R5-R8

For angle bars (type 30, 31, R2, R3

33, 37, 38):

2.3.6 Main Type 5

This is a completely open cutout with flat top, see the figure below.

Figure 2:18. Main type 5, clearances.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:15 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
External Profile Cutout Definition

All the normal profile types are allowed including U-bars.

Irrelevant radii: R2, R3, R5, R7, R8. In normal use, R1 and R9 are
irrelevant as well.

For the use of C1/C3 and C5/C7, respectively, see the general principles above.
Normally C3 and C5 would be defined, and C1 and C7 would be supposed to be calculated
from them. For other profile types than T:s, C1 is equal to C3. Therefore, if both C1 and C3
are given, C3 will be used only for the T-bars.

2.3.7 Main Type 6

This cutout is similar to type 5, but it has a top with an ellipse, consisting of three arcs with
radii R4, R5 and R6, cf. the figure below. R4 and R6 are normally supposed to be smaller
than R5.

Figure 2:19. Main type 6, radii.

R5 can be given explicitly.

If not given at all, it will automatically be set equal to the length of the "major axis" (W) of the
top ellipse.
If option /WIDTH is given then R5=W+<xxx>, where <xxx> is the value (with sign), assigned
to R5.
R4 and R6 are usually supposed to be given explicitly. However, they can also be defined as
a factor times the "major axis" (W) of the top ellipse according to the following format.
Suppose that R4 (or R6) have been defined in the following way:
/WIDTH
/RAD =0.25
/R_MIN =30
WIDTH specifies that R4 should be calculated as a factor (<1) times the width (W).
However, R4 should not be allowed to be smaller than 30 (R_MIN).
In this case then R4= maximum of ( 0.25*W, 30)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:16 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
External Profile Cutout Definition

2.3.8 Main Type 9

This is a completely open cutout with one arc on the top, cf. the figure below.

Figure 2:20. Main type 9.

Clearances as for the previous cutout types. However, C4<0 means the distance from the
upper edge of the flange to the centre of the top arc.
Normally no radii should be defined (even if R1 and R9 may be).

2.3.9 Main Type 10

This cutout type has a lug welded to the mould line side of the profile, cf the figures below.

Figure 2:21. Main type 10, radii and clearances.

All the normal profile types are supported. The general principles of clearances are
followed.
R2, R5, R7 and R8 are irrelevant.
C2 is normally irrelevant except for T-bars.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:17 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
External Profile Cutout Definition

R3 and R4 will be directly connected to each other except for T-bars (and unless C2 is
explicitly defined)

2.3.10 Main Type 11

This cutout is identical to type 10 except for the elliptical top. This, in turn, is treated in the
same way as for main type 6.

Figure 2:22. Main type 11, radii.

2.3.11 Main Type 19

This type is a variant of cutout types 10 and 11 with a circular "top" controlled as for main
type 9.

Figure 2:23. Main type 19, radii and clearances.

The top circle of this cutout is handled and controlled in the same way as in main type 9.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:18 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
External Profile Cutout Definition

2.3.12 Main Type 15

This cutout type is similar to main type 10 but the lug is on the non-mould line side, cf. the
figure below. U-bars are not supported.

Figure 2:24. Main type 15, radii and clearances.

The cutout supports all the normal profile types (type<50).

General principles are followed regarding clearances.
R2, R3 and normally also R1 are irrelevant for this cutout type.
For flat bars, C6 is irrelevant and R6 and R7 will be directly connected.

2.3.13 Main Type 16

This cutout type is similar to main type 15 only that the top is elliptical, see the figure below.

Figure 2:25. Main type 16, radii and clearances.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:19 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
External Profile Cutout Definition

2.3.14 Main Type 29

This cutout type is a variant of main types 15 and 16 with a circular "top" controlled as for
main type 9.

Figure 2:26. Main type 29, radii and clearances.

2.3.15 Main Type 20

This cutout type is a combination of the cutout types 10 and 15, i.e. it has got a lug on both
sides, cf. the figure below.

Figure 2:27. Main type 20, radii and clearances.

All normal profile types are supported (not U-bars).

R2, R5 and R8 are irrelevant.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:20 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
External Profile Cutout Definition

C2 is normally irrelevant except for T-bars and C6 is irrelevant for flat bars.

2.3.16 Main Type 21

This cutout is similar to main type 21 except that the top is elliptical, cf. the figure below.

Figure 2:28. Main type 21, radii.

2.3.17 Main Type 39

This cutout type is a variant of the main types 20 and 21 with a circular "top" controlled as
for main type 9, see the figures below

Figure 2:29. .Main type 39, radii.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:21 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
External Profile Cutout Definition

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:22 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Example of a Simple Cutout Definition

3 Example of a Simple Cutout Definition

The figure below defines the conditions for two cutouts that are very similar to each other.
The rules for both of them differ slightly when used for bulb bars and L-bars, respectively,
which means that separate definitions must be made for the two profile types. The definition
file is listed below the picture.

Type 308: R = KS10 (sniped corner)

Type 309: R = 75 if H>360, else 50

For bulb bars: R1 = 40 if H>220, else 30

For L-bars: R1 = 40

3.1 Sample File

The file below establishes the cutouts according to the specification above.
!
! Type 308, bulb bars
!
CUTOUT, 308
/TYPE=10
/PROF=20

/ARC=1 /RAD=-10
/ARC=3 /RAD=15
/ARC=4 /RAD=(30, 40)
/H_LIM=220
/ARC=6 /REF=4

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Example of a Simple Cutout Definition

/GAP=1 /DIST=1.5
/GAP=3 /REF=3 /DIST=1.5
/GAP=4 /DIST=40
/GAP=5 /DIST=25
;
!
! Type 308, L-bars
!
CUTOUT, 308
/TYPE=10
/PROF=(30,31)
/ARC=1 /RAD=-10
/ARC=3 /RAD=15
/ARC=4 /RAD=40
/ARC=6 /REF=4

/GAP=1 /DIST=1.5
/GAP=3 /REF=3 /DIST=1.5
/GAP=4 /DIST=40
/GAP=5 /DIST=25
;
!
! Type 309, bulb bars
!
CUTOUT, 309
/TYPE=10
/PROF=20
/ARC=1 /RAD=(50, 75)
/H_LIM=360
/ARC=3 /RAD=15
/ARC=4 /RAD=(30,40)
/H_LIM=220
/ARC=6 /REF=4

/GAP=1 /DIST=1.5
/GAP=3 /REF=3 /DIST=1.5
/GAP=4 /DIST=40
/GAP=5 /DIST=25
;
!
! Type 309, L-bars
!
CUTOUT, 309
/TYPE=10
/PROF=(30,31)

/ARC=1 /RAD=(50,75)
/H_LIM=360
/ARC=3 /RAD=15
/ARC=4 /RAD=40
/ARC=6 /REF=4

/GAP=1 /DIST=1.5
/GAP=3 /REF=3 /DIST=1.5
/GAP=4 /DIST=40

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Example of a Simple Cutout Definition

/GAP=5 /DIST=25
;

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Example of a Simple Cutout Definition

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutouts via Macros

4 Profile Cutouts via Macros

4.1 General
The general principles for handling of profile cutouts are described in a separate document.
The specific case that cutouts are created in geometry macros is described in the current
document. In doing so it covers the following topics:
• General assumptions about the coordinate system to be used for a cutout, supposed
orientation of the profile, etc.
• The environment in which the macros should be executed.
• The user interface (= the parameters) of the macro.
• Specification of how to make a customer written cutout macro available to AVEVA
Marine.
This specification also contains an example of an actual macro with the resulting cutout and
a macro that can be used in the testing of user developed macros.

4.2 Geometry of Cutout

The geometry of the cutout should be delivered in a well defined coordinate system with a
well defined direction.
In writing the macro a certain orientation of the profile in this coordinate system is also
supposed.

Figure 4:1. Parameters for controlling a Cutout.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 4:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutouts via Macros

4.2.1 Coordinate System

The origin of the coordinate system of the cutout should coincide with the foot point of the
profile section (i.e. the intersection point between the profile trace and the penetrated plate).
The v-axis is in the direction of the web of the profile and the u-axis is 90 degrees to the right
of the v-axis, i.e. the w-axis has the same direction as that of the panel coordinate system,
see the figure above.
The profile should be oriented in this coordinate system so that the web (and the flange of
angle bars) is in the positive u-direction.

4.2.2 Geometry
The geometry of the cutout should be oriented in the clockwise direction around the profile
section.
Make certain that the start and the end of the cutout contour extend well outside of the panel
boundary so that there are two intersections even in case of excess, etc.

4.3 Cutout Macro Characteristics

4.3.1 Macro Names

The name of a geometry macro has to be the same as the name of the file in which the
macro is stored.

4.3.2 Input Parameters

The following parameters are defined as input parameters:

NO_PROF_PARAMS INTEGER

PROF_TYPE INTEGER

PROF_PARAM1 DECIMAL

PROF_PARAM2 DECIMAL

PROF_PARAM3 DECIMAL

PROF_PARAM4 DECIMAL

PROF_PARAM5 DECIMAL

PROF_PARAM6 DECIMAL

V2 VECTOR_2D

V3 VECTOR_2D

WEB_FACTOR DECIMAL

FLANGE_FACTOR DECIMAL

PLATE_THICKNESS DECIMAL

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 4:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutouts via Macros

R1 DECIMAL

R2 DECIMAL

M1 DECIMAL

M2 DECIMAL

M3 DECIMAL

M4 DECIMAL

NO_PROF_PARAMS gives the number of relevant profile parameters, PROF_TYPE the

type code for the profile and PROF_PARAM1 - PROF_PARAM6 correspond to a, b, s, t, c
etc. according to the specification of profiles in AVEVA Marine.
V2 is a normalized 2D vector along the flange. V3 is a normalized 2D vector along the
tangent of the contour of the panel in the foot point of the profile section (= the origin). It is in
the positive direction of the V-axis (see the picture above). The vector along the web (V1) is
always assumed to be (0,1) and need therefore not be given.
The WEB_FACTOR and FLANGE_FACTOR are prolonging factors along V1 and V2. These
factors will be different from 1.0 only if the intersecting profile is not directed along the
normal of the intersected plate.
PLATE_THICKNESS gives the thickness of the intersected plate (or profile if the cutout is
to be defined in another profile).
All above described parameters will be given appropriate values when the macro is called
from the system.
R1, R2, M1 - M4 are intended to be used as customer controllable parameters.
However, if the input parameter C is given in modelling input (to control the “slope” of
cutouts) it is transferred to the macro via the parameter M2. Likewise, the modelling
parameter M1 (controlling the width of the cutout) is transferred to the macro via the
parameter with the same name (M1). They are all initialized to -1.0 when the macro is called
from the system.

4.3.3 Output Parameters

The following parameters are defined as output parameters:

CUTOUT_CONTOUR CONTOUR_2D

WELD_INFO STRING

After execution of the macro, the CUTOUT_CONTOUR should contain the contour
describing the cutout geometry.
WELD_INFO is a string with the order numbers of line segments that are welded against the
profile section. The first line segment along the contour has got number 1, the second
number 2, etc. (even if there should happen to be arc segments in between). The segment
numbers are separated by commas (In the figure above this string would be "1, 2" or
possibly "2" only). Currently, this parameter is not taken care of in AVEVA Marine.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 4:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutouts via Macros

4.4 Environment of Cutout Macros

Geometry macros for cutouts are handled just like all other geometry macros. When a
cutout macro has been defined, it has to be pre-interpreted before it can be called from the
AVEVA Marine system. This may be done using the geomac command (cf. User’s Guide
Basic). The location of the source, list and resulting binary files are controlled by three
environment variables:
SBB_GEO_MACRO_SRC
SBB_GEO_MACRO_LST
SBB_GEO_MACRO_BIN
Make sure that these variables have an appropriate definition and then issue the command
"geomac" to perform the interpretation. Observe that the command does not run but only
performs an interpretation of the macro. Below you find an example of the user dialogue
when interpreting a macro (the prompt is >).

> geomac
Present Geometry Macro:

(0) Exit

(1) Print on terminal

(2) Create 2D geometry and store on DB

(3) Create 3D volume model and store on DB

(4) Create 3D volume model + picture and store on DB

(Enter activity: 1 <RET>

Give name of macro to be run: cutout_1.gml <RET>

Give parameter NO_OF_PROFPARAMS (INTEGER): <RET>

Once more ?: <RET>

Give name of macro to be run: <RET>

>

Observe that giving the name of the macro including the file extension .gml instructs the
geomac system to interpret this file instead of simply running an already pre-interpreted
macro.
If interpretation warnings are issued, these will be found in the file cutout_1.lst located in the
directory given by the definition of SBB_GEO_MACRO_LST. If the interpretation was
successful, the file cutout_1.glb will be present in the directory given by the definition of
SBB_GEO_MACRO_BIN.
See to it that any required auxiliary macros, called from this macro, are compiled in the
same way.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 4:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutouts via Macros

4.5 Connecting a Cutout Macro to Hull

The connection between a customer controlled cutout definition macro and its cutout code
by which it can be accessed from within e.g. Hull Modelling is defined in an ASCII file. Its
total file specification should be given by the environment variable SBH_CUTOUT_MACRO.
If this variable is undefined, the system will simply ignore the handling of cutouts via macro.
The contents of this file is one line for each macro according to:
<cutout> <macro> <no_prof> <ptype1> <ptype2> ...
as shown in the following example:
1101 'cutout_1' 2 30 31
1102 'cutout_2' 2 30 31
1103 'cutout_3' 2 30 31
1104 'cutout_4' 2 30 31
...
...
The first line in the file states that cutout type 1101 will cause the system to call the macro
'cutout_1' located at the definition of SBB_GEO_MACRO_BIN (cutout_1.glb) to obtain the
cutout contour. This cutout-code will be valid for 3 profile types, namely 0, 30, 31.
The hull utility program inithull can be used to check that the layout of this file is correct.

4.6 Cutout Macro, an Example

Example of a Clip Macro shows an actual example of a cutout macro that has been used to
produce the cutouts in Resulting Clips from Appendix 1 Macro.
The example macro contains two solutions, one for the simple case that the flange can be
considered to be perpendicular to the web, one for the general case. This is only for
performance reasons. It is up to the customer to decide if the general case need to
considered or if the performance loss of always calculating the general case is acceptable.
The example contains calls on auxiliary macros. A number of such macros will be delivered
as source texts together with an ordinary AVEVA Hull delivery. They contain a specification
of their use. They are currently:
• fillet_radius_20.gml
• intersect_line_2D.gml
• move_point_2D.gml
• orthonormal_vector_2D.gml
• scalar_multiply_2D.gml
• Bicircle_2D.gml

4.7 Testing of User Developed Macros

Customer written macros can be tested by connecting them to Hull Modelling as described
above, i.e. in their final environment.
As an alternative the tests can be done using the Geometry Macro command in the pull
down menu Macros in e.g. Hull Modelling.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 4:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Profile Cutouts via Macros

4.7.1 Test Running a Cutout Macro

Due to the fact that a stand-alone macro cannot handle parameters of all types (e.g.
VECTOR_2D, CONTOUR_2D, a cutout definition macro cannot be run as a stand-alone
macro. If a user wishes to test such a macro before it is used in e.g. Hull Modelling this is
achieved by calling it from another "test" macro. An example of such a test macro by name
'cutout_1.gml' should be included in a normal AVEVA Marine Hull delivery. If such a macro is
run using the command geomac, a present statement will print the coordinates of each
curve segment building up the contours. However, if the macro is run from an interactive
application the contours will be presented in the graphical window.
The figures in Resulting Clips from Appendix 1 Macro are the result of such tests.
The delivered test macro can be used for test of any customer written macro when slightly
modified. In addition to the actual cutout the macro shows also the section of the specified
profile.
The cutouts in Resulting Clips from Appendix 1 Macro have been generated with the
following answers to prompts from the test macro (values for appendix 3 within parenthesis).

Angle Web-Flange: 90 (110)

Angle Web-Contour: 90 (110)

Flange Factor: 0 (1.2)

Web Factor: 1 (1.2)

Thickness of Intersected Plate/Profile: 10 (10)

Profile Type: 31 (31)

Profile Parameter 1 (a) 200 (200)

Profile Parameter 2 (b) 75 (75)

Profile Parameter 3 (s) 15 (15)

Profile Parameter 4 (t) 10 (10)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 4:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Example of a Cutout Macro

5 Example of a Cutout Macro

A sample file can be found here: Cutout_Macro_example.txt.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Example of a Cutout Macro

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Named Cutouts

6 Named Cutouts

6.1 General
Traditionally in AVEVA Marine cutouts (and clips) are identified by integer numbers that are
selected by the customer when the standard is set up. These numbers must be used when
the designer picks/specifies a cutout to be generated.
This document describes an option to identify cutouts (including clips/collars) in the
modelling phase by "names" (strings) instead of (and in parallel with) numbers.

6.2 Use of Named Cutouts

Named cutouts may be used in exactly the same way as traditional numbered cutouts, i.e.
they are accepted when the cutouts are defined, occur in panel input schemes and are
available in different kinds of output. However, there must always exist a numbered cutout in
the normal setup of the cutout standard that the named cutout can refer to, i.e. the cutout
name is a kind of "alias" for the numbered cutout.
The setup of the named cutout as described in this document can be combined with a
definition of a clip arrangement to be used in association with the cutout in question.

6.3 Setup of Named Cutouts

Named cutouts are defined in a text file in a format based on the general TIL language. The
syntax of this implementation of the language is rather straight-forward and contains only
one statement type as described in detail below. Each statement establishes one named
cutout consisting of a combination of a certain cutout number and, optionally, the clip
arrangement.
The definition file may be given an arbitrary name. In order to make the named cutouts
available to application programs it should be compiled by a function of the hull utility inithull.
If the compilation is successful a named cutout definition object will be stored in the
structure data bank (associated with SB_OGDB) by name __SBH_NAMED_CUTOUTS__.
The compilation will also result in a receipt list with input and errors, if any. If inithull has
been started via the Job Launcher this list can be accessed like all other files resulting from
a Job Launcher run. If inithull has been started outside the Job Launcher the receipt list will
be stored in the print directory of the current project with the file extension .lst appended to
the name of the input file.
The option of named cutouts is activated as soon as a valid named cutout object is found in
the databank.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Named Cutouts

The syntax of one statement is as follows. The input file may consist of any number of such
statements.

CUTOUT, <name>

/CUT_NO = <cutout_number>
[/CLIP_1 = <clip_code_1>]
[/CLIP_2 = <clip_code_2>]
[/CLIP_3 = <clip_code_3>]

<name> The name the user wants to give the combination of the cutout number and
the clip arrangement. It may be a string or a number. (To use this option for a
cutout referred to by a number is a way to associate also numbered cutouts
with a clip arrangement).
CUT_NO Specifies the number of the cutout in the cutout standard available. (This is
the number to be used if this facility had not been available.)
CLIP_1 Specifies the number of a customer defined clip. This clip is valid for the
mould line side of the profile (or for a clip covering the whole cutout). (This is
number that should have been assigned to the keyword CT1 in panel input if
this facility had not been available.)
CLIP_2 Same as CLIP_1 but on the non-mould line side of the profile.
CLIP_3 Same as CLIP_1 but on the top of the profile.

Example:

The file below defines two named cutouts, with and without clip included.

CUTOUT, ABC
/ CUT_NO = 308
/ CLIP_1 = 22
;

CUTOUT, DEF
/ CUT_NO = 130
;

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Automatic Setting of Cutouts

7 Automatic Setting of Cutouts

7.1 Definition of Default Cutouts

7.2 Background
When designing the internal structure in AVEVA Marine the cutouts for penetrating profiles
are supposed to be selected from a set of available cutout types. These are of two types:
those built into the system and those created by the customer. In both cases the cutout
types may be explicitly picked by the designer.
This document describes an alternative facility that lets the customer define default cutouts.
A cutout is default for a specific combination of a profile type and a panel data type. The
facility can be used to simplify the establishment of cutouts in the Planar Hull Modelling
module.

7.3 Cutout Control File

7.3.1 General
The definition of default cutouts takes place via an ordinary text file, created and maintained
in the standard editor of the computer system.
The name of the file can be selected quite freely and its total file specification should be
assigned to the environment variable SBH_CUTOUT_CTRL. This file is normally supposed
to be stored in the default directory of the current project.

7.3.2 Layout of Control File

The syntax of the file is described below. Please note that everything that is written in the
same line in the syntax description must be so. Maximum line width is 132 characters.
TYPE = <proftype_1>
<panel_dt> <defcut> <defclip>
<panel_dt> <defcut> <defclip>
<panel_dt> <defcut> <defclip>
...
TYPE = <proftype_2>
<panel_dt> <defcut> <defclip>
<panel_dt> <defcut> <defclip>
<panel_dt> <defcut> <defclip>

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Automatic Setting of Cutouts

...
• <proftype_i> is one of the normal profile types used in AVEVA Marine, e.g. 10, 20
and 30.
• <panel_dt> is the data type of the current panel. This data type together with the
profile type is the key to find the appropriate default cutout. <panel_dt> may contain
the wild card character % in one or several positions. Examples are "410", "%2%",
"%%%" and "%12". In this document <panel_dt> will also be referred to as a panel
data type mask.
One panel data type mask can be more specific than another. A panel data mask, A, is
less specific than another mask, B, if A contains more wild card characters than B.
Example: "12%" is less specific than "121".
The system does not check for multiple or overlapping panel data type masks. If two
masks overlap each other then the first one will be applied. Because of this the most
specific data type masks should appear first in the definition file.
• <defcut> is the cutout type to be applied to the current profile type if there is a match
of the data type of the current panel.
• <defclip> is the clip arrangement that should be applied. Zero indicates no clips.
If <defclip> is given with slashes (/), it indicates that the extended clip handling
should be used. All three CT's must always be given.
This shows, as in the example below, that CT1=190, CT2 is undefined and CT3 should
be 230.

Example:

TYPE = 10

410 38 011

41% 42 0

4%% 1 0

1%% 511 011

%%% 202 004

TYPE = 20

300 .. ..

TYPE = 43

325 5 190/0/230

7.3.3 Remark
The hull utility inithull may be used to check the cutout control file.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Clips in AVEVA Marine

8 Clips in AVEVA Marine

8.1 General
In shipbuilding it is most common that the stiffening of the main structural members
penetrate the plating of subordinate elements. Such penetrations are in AVEVA Marine call
cutouts. Normally the penetrated plate is connected to the penetrating plate, either for
strength reason or simply to tighten the penetration (or a combination of both). Often at least
a part of this connection is produced by the cutout itself; part of it may be welded to the
profile. However, very often the connection must be completed by extra plate pieces. The
parts used for fastening/sealing are always referred to as clips in AVEVA Marine, although it
sometimes would be more relevant to call them collars or lugs.

8.2 Clip Characteristics, General

Clips are always standardized in different ways and in different aspects. The geometry of
clips is always standardized in a way that very much resembles the cutouts which they, of
course, also depend on. They usually fall into one of a number of clip types that are created
and maintained by each customer. Some typical examples of clip types are pictured below:

Figure 8:1. Typical examples of Clips (collars).

As can be seen in these examples the geometry of the clips depends on the profile section,
the geometry of the cutout, on rules for overlaps and clearances, etc. in a large variety of
ways.
But clips are also parts and may have common attributes with other types of parts,
especially plate parts, e.g. plate thickness and quality, part names and position numbers.
They may be bevelled and they are connected by welding which may have different
characteristics.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 8:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Clips in AVEVA Marine

Clips further have a location, either on a selected side of the penetrated plate or even as
insert clips which are welded in the cutout without overlap.
The AVEVA Marine clip handling covers most of the aspects mentioned above and allows
the customer to specify most of these matters, often in such a way that the designer may
use the defined standards but also override it in the individual cases.

8.3 Clips as Stock Material vs Clips as Parts

In a yard, clips may be treated as standard parts/stock material or they may be treated as
individual plate parts. A combination of these options may be used for different types of
clips.
Typical for standard parts is e.g. that they get a standard name or designation rather than
an individual part name. Fabrication information is not developed for them individually. The
relevant question is rather how many of them are required in a certain assembly and they
are manufactured for store. This handling is primarily applicable for the simpler types of
clips.
Clips as parts have all the characteristics of other plate parts and are treated in a similar
way, e.g. they are nested and cut like ordinary plate parts. When the clip standard of a
certain yard is established it is possible to decide whether a certain clip type should be
handled as standard clips or as individual parts.

8.4 Setting up the Clip Standards

The normal way to establish a clips standards of a yard is via geometry macros that are
supposed to be created by the customers themselves. This facility is in principle very similar
to the corresponding facility for cutouts.
For backwards compatibility reasons the hull application retains support of a simple facility
for in-built clips with simple geometry and with fixed and glued-in rules for positioning and
size. This facility is described in a separate section In-built Clips Facility. Customers are
encouraged to use the more advanced facility via geometry macros.
When generating clips via geometry macros the geometry of the clip is created but also the
welding geometry and bevels along different intervals along the clip contour. The macro can
also select plate thickness and material quality as a function of that of the "mother" plate,
etc. Most of the attributes optionally available from the macro can be overridden by user
input.
The end user selects a certain clip by a number - thus each clip macro must be associated
with a number.

8.5 The Use of Clips in AVEVA Marine

The clips have a close relation with the cutouts and correspondingly they are defined
together with the cutout in Hull Modelling. The forms for cutout definition contain fields for
user control of most of the attributes of the clips. Each cutout may be associated with at
most three clips. For details see User Guide Planar Modelling / Design Language of Hull
Modelling / Cutout Statement.
The functions for setting position numbers, forming part names, display of position numbers
in drawings, etc. behave in principle in the same way as for other plate parts. The
functionality is normally extended to clips without any need for special activation.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 8:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Clips in AVEVA Marine

Clips have series of position numbers reserved for them (i.e. they will not be sorted together
with other plate parts and behave in this respect as e.g. brackets). It is also possible
(necessary) to set up special rules for the part names of clips. Clips are extracted to the
plate databank at the same time as all other parts in the ppanparts module and the nesting
system treats them also equally.

8.6 Names of Clip Parts

When clips are stored as plate parts in the plate databank they are named according to the
same principles as other plate parts. Each clip is associated with a clip sequence number,
unique within a panel. This number is normally set automatically in the same way as for
stiffeners, plates, etc. The name of a clip part is formed in the following way:
<panel>/C<clip_no>[S|P]
Here, <clip_no> is the running clip number and S and P are suffixes added if portside
and starboard side parts are stored individually.

Note: this is the name of the part in the plate data bank and should not be confused with
the production oriented part name, created via the Part Name Control facility.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 8:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Clips in AVEVA Marine

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 8:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Clips via Geometry Macros

9 Clips via Geometry Macros

9.1 General
This document describes how to make clips via macros. It covers the following topics:
• general assumptions about the coordinate system of the clip, orientation of the profile
section, etc.
• the environment in which the clip macros are executed.
• the interface of the macros (= the parameters)
• how to make a customer defined clip macro and how to integrate it in the system.

9.2 Geometry of the Clip

9.2.1 Coordinate System

The geometry of the clip should be generated in a local "clip co-ordinate system":

Figure 9:1. Parameters for controlling clips.

This local clip coordinate system has the following characteristics:

The origin coincides with the foot point of the profile section, i.e. the intersection between
the profile trace and the penetrated plate.
The v-axis system is always along the web of the profile.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 9:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Clips via Geometry Macros

The u-axis is perpendicular to the v-axis and always points in the direction of the flange. (In
case of a flat bar or a T-bar section it would be more correct to say that it points towards the
non-mould side of the profile section.)

9.2.2 Geometry
The clip contour delivered by the macro must be closed.
The clip contour should be defined in a counter clockwise direction, as seen from the w-axis
of the local clip coordinate system.
The macro itself must make allowance for the case when the profile penetration is not
perpendicular.

9.3 Clip Macro Characteristics

9.3.1 Macro Names

The name of the clip macro must be the same as the name of the file containing the macro.

9.3.2 The Clip Macro Interface

A clip macro to be integrated in AVEVA Marine must match a specific interface, i.e. it must
have a predefined set of input and output parameters. The following text describes this
interface.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 9:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Clips via Geometry Macros

Input Parameters

<Name> <Description>

VERSION<no> (INTEGER) This parameter is special in the sense that it is

not used to transfer any data to the macro. Instead the
name of the parameter is of importance. The name tells the
system what version of the clip macro interface this specific
macro matches. In the future there may be minor changes in
the clip macro interface such as new input or result
parameters. This "version" handling makes it possible for
AVEVA Marine to maintain backward compatibility for old
clip macros. The current version number is 2, thus this first
parameter should be named VERSION2 in newly written
macros.

PROFTYPE (INTEGER) Type code for the profile, according to Hull

Standard.

PROF_PARAM<1-6> (DECIMAL) For bulb bars the parameters are used in the
following way (both original parameter values and when
countered into a "similar" L-bar. (Values in a certain case
within apostrophes).

V2 (VECTOR_2D) Vector along profile flange.

V3 (VECTOR_2D) Vector along contour in the direction of the

flange.

V4 (VECTOR_2D) Vector along contour in the opposite

direction to V3. (in case of a straight plate contour V4 = -V3).

WEB_FACTOR (DECIMAL) Scale factor along the web (along the v-axis).
This factor will be different from 1.0 only when the profile
penetration is not perpendicular to the panel.

FLANGE_FACTOR (DECIMAL) The same as "WEB_FACTOR" but for the

profile flange. (Scale factor along the vector V2.)

PLATE_THICKNESS (DECIMAL) Thickness of the intersected plate.

CLIP_LOC (INTEGER) Clip location:

1=clip on the mould side of the profile section
2=clip on the non mould side
3=clip on the top side

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 9:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Clips via Geometry Macros

<Name> <Description>

CUT_TYPE (INTEGER) The cutout type

PARAM1 (DECIMAL) User-defined parameter for macro input
PARAM2 (DECIMAL) User-defined parameter for macroinput

GAP_M,GAP_N,GAP_T (DECIMAL) Gaps between cutout and profile section on

mould line side, and on top of profile, see the picture below.

Note: These gap values are available only for cutouts

generated according to the External Cutout definition
facility. For other type of cutouts (standard cutouts or
cutouts generated via macro), these parameters are
always zero. They can of course, be redefined inside
the macro itself.

For cutouts generated via macros, GAP_N contains

the value assigned to the modelling keyword M1 (> 0)
, and GAP_M this value if < 0.

C_MEA C-measure for cutouts with a “slope”.

Figure 9:2. Specification of clearances in cutouts.

• Input/Output Parameters
In general, output parameters need not be initialized in the geometry macro if they are not
relevant.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 9:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Clips via Geometry Macros

The four first parameters (CLIP_THICKNESS - EXCESS) are both input and output
parameters.

<Name> <Description>
CLIP_THICKNESS (DECIMAL) Thickness of the clip.
The clip thickness can be assigned in three ways:
1. By the clip macro parameter CLIP_THICKNESS.
2. In the input scheme, by the keyword "MAT" in the cutout
statement.
3. Default thickness: the thickness of the penetrated plate.
The above order is also the precedence between the rules,
i.e. the thickness given by the macro will always override
the thickness given in the input scheme.
SURFACE (STRING) Surface treatment of the clip.
QUALITY (STRING) The quality designation as a string. If the environment
variable SBH_CLIPQUAL_PLATE is set and no quality is given
in the scheme and no quality is given in the macro, the quality
from the plate that is closest to the clip will be chosen.
EXCESS (DECIMAL) Excess on edge abutting shell (or plate carrying the
profile).
If SURFACE, QUALITY and EXCESS are given as user input the given values will
override the values defined in the macro.
CLIP_CONTOUR (CONTOUR_2D) The geometry of the clip.
In the clip macro it is possible to define bevel/welding intervals. Paragraph Welding and
Bevel Information gives a detailed description.

INTERVALS (INTERVAL LIST_2D) Defines intervals on the clip contour by

specifying pairs of startpoints and endpoints.
The intervals should be created so that both the welding type
and the bevel type are constant in the interval.
INTERVAL_TYPE (STRING) Defines the interval type in corresponding intervals.
This string contains a number of interval type codes separated
by comma:
INTERVAL_TYPES ::= '<int1type>, <int2type>, ... '
WELD (DECIMAL) Size of the weld in general. If not otherwise specified
this is supposed to be used for all welds.
WCLIP (DECIMAL) Size of the weld at a seam in the clip (i.e. when two
clips are welded together).
WPROF (DECIMAL) Size of the fillet weld abutting profile.
WSHELL (DECIMAL) Size of the weld fillet abutting the shell (or plate
carrying the profile). For an explanation of the weld types, see
below.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 9:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Clips via Geometry Macros

Figure 9:3. Specification of different Weld Intervals.

BCLIP (DECIMAL) Bevel type when two clips are welded together.
BWEB (DECIMAL) Bevel type against the web of the profile section
BCWEB (DECIMAL) Bevel type against the web of the profile section where
coinciding with cutout contour.
BFLA (DECIMAL) Bevel type against the flange of the profile section.
BCFLA (DECIMAL) Bevel type against the flange of the profile section where
coinciding with cutout contour
BSHELL (DECIMAL) Bevel type against the plate that is carrying the profile.
BCSHELL (DECIMAL) Bevel type against the plate that is carrying the profile
where coinciding with panel contour. For an explanation of the bevel
types, see below:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 9:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Clips via Geometry Macros

Figure 9:4. Specification of different Bevel Intervals.

The parameters WELD-BCSHELL should be regarded as default values for the clip. They
will be overridden if corresponding values are given as user input.
TCODE (INTEGER) Treatment code:
0 = standard part (i.e. stock material). This code implies that the clip will
not be stored as an individual plate part and it will not be assigned a
position number by the setposno program.
1 = will be treated a true "part" by the system.
DESIGNATION (STRING) Designation of the clip (of special interest when the clip
should not be position numbered but considered as stock material).
POS (INTEGER) Position number of the clip.
DESTINATION (STRING) Destination of clip.
INSERT_CODE (INTEGER) This flag can be used in the special case when a clip is
"inserted" into the cutout.
0 = Ordinary clip on panel surface. This is the normal situation.
1 = "Inserted" clip. It will be placed symmetrically "inside" the panel, see
below.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 9:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Clips via Geometry Macros

Figure 9:5. “Inserted” clip.

ASSEMBLY (STRING) Assembly definition of the clip.

The parameters POS, DESTINATION and ASSEMBLY
should be regarded as default values. They will be overridden
by data given in the input scheme.
RESULT (INTEGER)
Result code:
= 0 If normal operation
= -1 An error has occurred in the macro
= 1 A warning is issued from the macro when RESULT = -1/1 a
message may be output in ERROR_MESSAGE (cf. below). A
warning or error message when RESULT = -1 or 1.
Message (STRING) Message, delivered by the macro, e.g. an error
diagnosis.

9.4 Welding and Bevel Information

In the clip macro it is possible to define bevel/welding intervals along the clip geometry.
Each interval is defined by a starting point, ending point and a type code indicating the type
of interval. The type code indicates for instance that this specific part of the clip contour is
welded against the shell, against the web of the profile section or along the plate which the
clip overlaps. Depending on the type code a certain bevel code/weld is chosen. Bevel codes
and welds can be given either in the macro via the output parameters WELD-BCSHELL, or
by corresponding keywords in the input scheme. User input will always override the values
given in the macro.
Below is a table listing all types of intervals and the macro parameter/scheme keyword that
is connected to this specific type of interval.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 9:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Clips via Geometry Macros

The connection angles of the clip edges against the web, the flange and the shell plate are
calculated automatically.

Type Description Weld Bevel Conn. angle

0 Free side None None

1 Sniped corner WPROF None -

10 Profile web WPROF BWEB WEB

11 ..overlapping plate WPROF BCWEB WEB

12 Profile web (non-mould side) WPROF BWEB WEB

13 ...overlapping plate (non-mould WPROF BCWEB WEB

side)

20 Profile flange WPROF BFLA FLA

21 ..overlapping cutout WPROF BCFLA FLA

22 Profile flange (lower side) WPROF BFLA FLA

23 Edge of profile flange (mould side) WPROF BWEB WEB

24 Edge of profile flange (non-mould WPROF BWEB WEB

side)

30 Shell contour WSHELL BSHELL SHELL

31 ..overlapping plate WSHELL BCSHELL SHELL

40 Clip overlaps plate WELD None -

50 Along cutout contour WELD None -

("inserted" clip only)

60 Seam in clip WCLIP BCLIP -

70 Apply excess None None -

9.5 Environment of Clip Macros

The handling of clip macros is very similar to the handling of cutout macros. The
environment for clip macros is the same as for cutout macros. Refer to Cutout Macro
Characteristics in Chapter Profile Cutouts via Macros and Environment of Cutout Macros in
Chapter Profile Cutouts via Macros. This part is applicable also for clip macros.

9.6 Connecting a Clip Macro to Hull

In Hull Modelling a clip is referenced by a clip code. The clip code is connected to a specific
macro in a setup file. The total file specification of the setup file should be assigned to the

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 9:9 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Clips via Geometry Macros

environment variable SBH_CLIPS_MACRO. The following example defines the layout of

the setup file

Example:

1.clip-code
|
| 2. macro-name
| |
| | 3. no_of_profile_types type1 type2, etc.
| | |
| | | 4. no_of_cutout_types,
| | | | type1, type2, etc.
| | | |
101 'clip1a' 3 30 31 32 2 505 506
101 'clip1b' 3 30 31 32 2 507 508
101 'clip1c' 1 10 2 505 506
102 'clip2' 1 10 3 101 102 103
103 'clip3' 3 10 20 30 1 100

A setup file contains a number of lines, normally one for each clip macro. One line may have
up to 500 characters. Each line contains the following information:
1. The clip code.
2. The name of the clip macro implementing this clip code.
3. A group of numbers selecting for what profile types this clip macro is valid.
4. A group of numbers selecting for what cutout types this clip macro is valid.
From the example file it can be seen that clip code 102 is valid for flat bars (profile type
10) and for cutout types 101-103.
The example also shows that the same clip code can be used more than once in the
setup file. Clip type 101 is implemented with different macros depending on the profile
type and the cutout type.
The hull utility inithull can be used to check if the file syntax is correct.

9.7 Example of a Clip Macro

Example of a Clip Macro shows an example of a clip macro. The resulting geometry is
shown in Resulting Clips from Appendix 1 Macro.
The clip macro calls some other "auxiliary" macros. A number of such macros will be
delivered as source texts together with an ordinary AVEVA Hull delivery. They contain a
specification of how to use them. Currently the following auxiliary macros are available:
• fillet_radius_2d.gml
• intersect_line_2d.gml
• move_point_2d.gml
• orthonormal_vector_2d.gml
• scalar_multiply_2d.gml
• bicircle_2d.gml

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 9:10 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Example of a Clip Macro

10 Example of a Clip Macro

! ****************************************************************

! NAME:
!

! clip_1 - Calculate Clip contour

!

! PURPOSE:

!
! This macro calculates the clip contour for:
!

! clip type 101

! cutout type 101

! profile type 10,20,30,31,35,36,40,43

!

! DECLARATION:
!

! VERSION2 "Version" parameter.

! PROF_TYPE Profile type

! PROF_PARAM1..6 The meaning of the profile
! parameters is dependent of the
! profile type.

! V2 2D Vector along the flange.

! V3 2D Vector along the contour in the

! direction of the flange.

! V4 2D Vector along the contour in the

! opposite direction.

! WEB_FACTOR Scaling factor along the web.

! FLANGE_FACTOR Scaling factor along the flange

! (along V2).

! PLATE_THICKNESS Plate thickness.

! CLIP_LOC 1. On mould line side.

! 2. On non mould line side.
! 3. On top side.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 10:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Example of a Clip Macro

! CUT_TYPE Cutout type code.

! PARAM1 Parameter 1 of the clip (0 when

! undefined).

! PARAM2 Parameter 2 of the clip (0 when

! undefined).

! GAP_M Gap on mould line side (0 when

! undefined).

! GAP_N Gap on non-mould line side (0 when

! undefined).

! GAP_T Gap on top side (0 when undefined).

!

! C_MEAS Cutout “c-measure”

!
!
! INPUT/OUTPUT:
!

! Parameters:

! CLIP_THICKNESS Thickness of the clip.

! SURFACE Surface treatment

! QUALITY Material quality

! EXCESS Excess against "shell" plate.

!

! RESULT:
!

! Parameters:

! CLIP_CONTOUR The contour defining the clip.

! ______________________________________________________________

! The following parameters are optional in the sense that they need
! only be assigned a value if this is relevant.

! However they are always required in the macro head and should thus
! always be declared as output parameters.

! ______________________________________________________________

! INTERVALS List of 2D point intervals for

! which weld and/or bevel information
! is of interest.
! If C0, C1, C2 are 2D points on the
! clip contour then C0, C1 and C1, C2
! define two valid intervals.
!

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 10:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Example of a Clip Macro

! INTERVAL_TYPES String containing a comma separated

! list of interval types for the
! previously defined intervals.
! INTERVAL_TYPES = '10,40' means that
! interval type 10 is attached to the
! first interval and interval type 40
! is attached to the second interval.
!
!

! WELD General weld size. If not otherwise

! specified this is used for all
! welds.

! WCLIP Weld size for welding clip to clip.

!

! WPROF Size of weld against profile.

! WSHELL Size of weld against shell.

! Bevel types when:

! BCLIP Two clips are welded together.

! BWEB The clip is welded against the web

! of the profile.

! BCWEB The clip is welded against the web

! of the profile where it is
! coinciding with the plate contour.
!

! BFLA The clip is welded against the

! flange.

! BCFLA The clip is welded against the

! flange where it is coinciding with
! the plate contour.

! BSHELL The clip is welded against the

! plate that is carrying the profile.
!

! BCSHELL The clip is welded against the

! plate that is carrying the profile
! where it is coinciding with the
plate contour.

! POS_CODE = 0 Should not be position-

! numbered.
! = 1 Should be position-numbered

! DESIGNATION Clip designation.

! POS Position number of the clip

! DESTINATION Destination

! INSERT_CODE = 0 Overlapping clip

! = 1 Clip insert in cutout

! ASSEMBLY Assembly string

!

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 10:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Example of a Clip Macro

! RESULT Result code.

! 0 = Clip contour was generated
! successfully.
! 1 = Clip was generated but with
! warnings, warning message in
! MESSAGE.
! -1 = Failed to generate the clip,
! error message in MESSAGE.
!
! MESSAGE Message string. Will be output to
! screen if RESULT = 1 or -1.

! **************************************************************

MACRO, 'clip_1',
VERSION2,
PROF_TYPE,
PROF_PARAM1,
PROF_PARAM2,
PROF_PARAM3,
PROF_PARAM4,
PROF_PARAM5,
PROF_PARAM6,
V2,
V3,
V4,
WEB_FACTOR,
FLANGE_FACTOR,
PLATE_THICKNESS,
CLIP_LOC,
CUT_TYPE,
PARAM1,
PARAM2,
GAP_M,
GAP_N,
GAP_T,
C_MEAS,
CLIP_THICKNESS,
SURFACE,
QUALITY,
EXCESS,
CLIP_CONTOUR,
INTERVALS,
INTERVAL_TYPES,
WELD,
WCLIP,
WPROF,
WSHELL,
BCLIP,
BWEB,
BCWEB,
BFLA,
BCFLA,
BSHELL,
BCSHELL,
POS_CODE,

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 10:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Example of a Clip Macro

DESIGNATION,
POS,
DESTINATION,
INSERT_CODE,
ASSEMBLY,
RESULT,
MESSAGE;
!

DECLARE,VERSION2, INTEGER;
DECLARE, PROF_TYPE, INTEGER;
DECLARE, PROF_PARAM1, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, PROF_PARAM2, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, PROF_PARAM3, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, PROF_PARAM4, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, PROF_PARAM5, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, PROF_PARAM6, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, V2, VECTOR_2D;
DECLARE, V3, VECTOR_2D;
DECLARE, V4, VECTOR_2D;
DECLARE, WEB_FACTOR, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, FLANGE_FACTOR, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, DECIMAL;
PLATE_THICKNESS,
DECLARE, CLIP_LOC, INTEGER;
DECLARE, CUT_TYPE, INTEGER;
DECLARE, PARAM1, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, PARAM2, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, GAP_M, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, GAP_N, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, GAP_T, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, C_MEAS, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, CLIP_THICKNESS, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, SURFACE, STRING;

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 10:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Example of a Clip Macro

DECLARE, QUALITY, STRING;

DECLARE, EXCESS, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, CLIP_CONTOUR, CONTOUR_2D;
DECLARE, INTERVALS, INTERVALLIST_2D;
DECLARE, INTERVAL_TYPES, STRING;
DECLARE, WELD, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, WCLIP, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, WPROF, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, WSHELL, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, BCLIP, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, BWEB, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, BCWEB, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, BFLA, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, BCFLA, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, BSHELL, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, BCSHELL, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, POS_CODE, INTEGER;
DECLARE, DESIGNATION, STRING;
DECLARE, POS, INTEGER;
DECLARE, DESTINATION, STRING;
DECLARE, INSERT_CODE, INTEGER;
DECLARE, ASSEMBLY, STRING;
DECLARE, RESULT, INTEGER;
DECLARE, MESSAGE, STRING;

! Local declarations
! V2 is the normalized 2d vector along the flange
DECLARE, V2_X, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, V2_Y, DECIMAL;
! C0 - C5 define the node points of the clip contour.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 10:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Example of a Clip Macro

DECLARE, C0, POINT_2D;

DECLARE, C1, POINT_2D;
DECLARE, C2, POINT_2D;
DECLARE, C3, POINT_2D;
DECLARE, C4, POINT_2D;
DECLARE, C5, POINT_2D;

!
! Some additional variables
DECLARE, DIST1, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, DIST2, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, DIST3, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, FIXED_R1, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, OVERLAP, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, Q0, POINT_2D;
DECLARE, RES, INTEGER;
DECLARE, V1, VECTOR_2D;
DECLARE, V2_NEG, VECTOR_2D;
DECLARE, WB1, POINT_2D;
DECLARE, WB2, POINT_2D;
DECLARE, X0, DECIMAL;
DECLARE, Y0, DECIMAL;

! **************************************************************

! Main procedure of clip_1

! **************************************************************

! Assign treatment code.

ASSIGN, POS_CODE, 1;

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 10:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Example of a Clip Macro

! FIXED_R1 is the corner radius (15 mm).

ASSIGN, FIXED_R1, 15.0;

! DIST1 is the gap between the bottom side of the clip and the plate
! carrying the profile.

! DIST2 is the width of the clip. It depends on the clip side, so it

! will be calculated later.

! DIST3 is the gap between the top side of the clip and the (top side)
! of the flange.

ASSIGN, DIST1, 50.0;

ASSIGN, DIST3, 50.0;
ASSIGN, OVERLAP, 50.0;
GET/STRUCTURE = ( V2_X, V2, 'VEC', 'X');
GET/STRUCTURE = ( V2_Y, V2, 'VEC', 'Y');

! V1 is a vector along the web of the profile cross section, i.e. along
! the V-axis of the local clip coordinate system.

VECTOR_2D, V1, 0.0, 1.0;

! Vector in the negative direction of V1.

VECTOR_2D, V1_NEG, 0.0, -1.0;

! Vector in the negative direction of V2.

VECTOR_2D, V2_NEG, -V2_X, -V2_Y;

! ---------------------------------------------------------------

! Define clip contour node points on mould line side

! ---------------------------------------------------------------

IF, CLIP_LOC == 1;

! Set DIST2. It may depend on the clip side.

ASSIGN, DIST2, GAP_M + OVERLAP;

! C0 is located DIST1 from the bottom of the web

POINT_2D, C0, 0.0, DIST1;

! C1 is located DIST3 from the top of the profile.

POINT_2D, C1, 0.0, WEB_FACTOR * PROF_PARAM1 - DIST3;

! Let Q0 be a point on distance "DIST2" from C1, in the negative

! direction of V2.

CALL, 'move_point_2d', C1, V2_NEG, DIST2, Q0;

! C2 C3 defines the starting and ending point on the upper arc segment
! with radius FIXED_R1.

CALL, 'fillet_radius_2d',
C1, V2_NEG, Q0, V1_NEG, FIXED_R1, C2, C3, RES;

! C4 C5 defines the starting and ending point on the lower arc segment
! with radius FIXED_R1

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 10:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Example of a Clip Macro

CALL, 'fillet_radius_2d',
C3, V1_NEG, C0, V2, FIXED_R1, C4, C5, RES;

! Calculate the start and the end point of the bevel/welding interval
! that overlaps the penetrated plate.

CALL, 'move_point_2d', C1, V2_NEG, GAP_M, WB1;

CALL, 'move_point_2d', C0, V2_NEG, GAP_M, WB2;
ENDIF;

! ---------------------------------------------------------------

! Define clip contour node points on non-mould line side

! ---------------------------------------------------------------

IF, CLIP_LOC == 2;

! Set DIST2

ASSIGN, DIST2, GAP_N + OVERLAP;

IF, PROF_TYPE == 10;
ASSIGN, X0, FLANGE_FACTOR * PROF_PARAM2 * V2_X;
ASSIGN, Y0, FLANGE_FACTOR * PROF_PARAM2 * V2_Y;
ELSE;
ASSIGN, X0, FLANGE_FACTOR * PROF_PARAM3 * V2_X;
ASSIGN, Y0, FLANGE_FACTOR * PROF_PARAM3 * V2_Y;
ENDIF;

! C0 is located DIST3 from the top of the profile.

POINT_2D, C0, X0, Y0 + WEB_FACTOR * PROF_PARAM1 - DIST3;

! C1 is located DIST1 from the bottom of the web

POINT_2D, C1, X0, Y0 + DIST1;

! Let Q0 be a point on distance "DIST2" from C1, in the direction of

! V2.

CALL, 'move_point_2d', C1, V2, DIST2, Q0;

! C2 C3 defines the starting and ending point on the lower arc

! segment with radius FIXED_R1

CALL, 'fillet_radius_2d',
C1, V2, Q0, V1, FIXED_R1, C2, C3, RES;

! C4 C5 defines the starting and ending point on the upper arc segment
! with radius FIXED_R1

CALL, 'fillet_radius_2d',
C3, V1, C0, V2_NEG, FIXED_R1, C4, C5, RES;

! Calculate the start and the end point of the bevel/welding interval
! that overlaps the penetrated plate.

CALL, 'move_point_2d', C1, V2, GAP_N, WB1;

CALL, 'move_point_2d', C0, V2, GAP_N, WB2;
ENDIF;

! Define the clips contour.

! The direction of the clip contour should be counter
clockwise starting with the first segment that is
! welded against the profile.
!

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 10:9 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Example of a Clip Macro

CONTOUR, CLIP_CONTOUR, C0
/LINEEND = C1
/LINEEND = C2
/ARCRADIUS = ( C3, FIXED_R1)
/LINEEND = C4
/ARCRADIUS = ( C5, FIXED_R1)
/LINEEND = C0;

! Define weld/bevel intervals.

INTERVALLIST_2D, INTERVALS
/APPEND = ( C0, C1)
/APPEND = ( WB1, WB2);

! Set weld/bevel interval types.

ASSIGN, INTERVAL_TYPES, '10,40';

ASSIGN, RESULT, 0;
ASSIGN, MESSAGE, ‘’;
ENDMACRO;

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 10:10 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Resulting Clips from Appendix 1 Macro

11 Resulting Clips from Appendix 1 Macro

These pictures show the resulting clip generated with the example macro "clip_1". In this
case the penetrating profile is perpendicular to the plate.
(The cutout is of main type 5, generated via the external cutout definition.)

Figure 11:1. Figure showing clip/cutout in a perpendicular penetration.

Figure 11:2. Figure showing clip/cutout in a non-perpendicular penetration.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 11:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Resulting Clips from Appendix 1 Macro

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 11:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Built-in Clips Facility

12 Built-in Clips Facility

The Hull application has a built-in facility for definition of simple clips with straight edges.
The geometry of these clips is so simple that they traditionally have been manufactured by
‘clipping’ rather than by burning. (This is actually the reason for the name ‘clips’ for this type
of parts in Aveva Marine.)
A cutout may be supplied with at most three clips of this type:
• One on the moulded side of the profile
• One on the non-moulded side
• One on top of the profile.
The clips are picked by a three-digit code (XYZ). The significance of the digits are:

X Specifies the location of the clip on the mould line side of the profile section

Y Specifies the location of the clip on the non mould line side of the profile section

Z On top (against the flange)

If any of XYZ is zero this means that the corresponding clip is missing.
The table below shows how different values of XYZ control the position of the clips relative
to the profile section.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 12:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Built-in Clips Facility

Clip 1

The constants below are examples that may be used by the system to control the position of
the clips. These values and rules that are used in generating the clips are glued into the
code and cannot be changed by the customer or end user.
From these built-in rules the system evaluates both the size and location of the clip.
However, the automatically evaluated size of the bracket (length/width/thickness) may be
overridden by user input when generating the cutout/clip. For details refer to Hull Detail
Design / Planar Modelling / Design Language of Hull Modelling / Cutout Statement.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 12:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Built-in Clips Facility

Clip 2

Figure 12:1. Measurement controlling position of clips

For the exact positioning of clips, the following instances may occur:

F=0

F = 20 at drainage cut-outs measured from the top edge of the drainage cut-out

F = 40

F = 50 for A <= 225

F = 75 for A > 225

G=0

G = 20 at flat bars and the mould side of L-profiles

GS = 20 at the opposite side to the mould side of welded L-profiles

G = T at T-sections and L-sections sides opposite to the mould side

G = 40 + T at T-sections and L-sections sides opposites to the mould side

G = 60 + T at T-sections sides opposite to the mould side

Note: For welded angle profiles is GS = 20 first chosen for the positioning of clips and the
side opposite to the mould side. If by this the clip area will become insufficient,
choose G = 60 + I in stead

FT respectively GT = 0

FT respectively GT = 20

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 12:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Built-in Clips Facility

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 12:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Cutout Settings

13 Cutout Settings

13.1 Background
In a project, many different types of cutouts are used for different types of profiles. In order
to get this organized, this tool makes it possible for the system manager to set up the cutout
standard to use in a project. The result of this tool is that after a profile section is indicated,
only those cutouts defined in the project that is available for the profile type will be presented
for selection.

13.2 Cutout Setting Set-up File

13.2.1 File Name

The name of the set-up file may be chosen arbitrarily and is given as input to the inithull
function for set-up of Cutout Setting. However, the file extension should be .dat.
The result of the interpretation (if successful) will be a "Cutout Standard Drawing" stored in
SB_SETTINGS named "__SBH_CUTOUT_TYPES__". Moreover, a list file will be produced
during the process of interpretation of this file. Inithull is normally run via the Job Launcher
and the list file will be stored as defined in the set-up for the Job Launcher.

13.2.2 Layout of the File

The input file for Cutout Setting is an ordinary text file in a simple language,

Note: Existing cutout Setting Drawing object, __SBH_CUTOUT_TYPES__, will be

replaced when the function is used.

The statements need not be in any particular order and there may be more than one
statement for the same cutout in one file.

Syntax:

<cutout> <profile>
<cutout> An integer number or a named cutout representing the
cutout.
<profile> The profile type that the cutout is valid for

If a named cutout is used, then also the clip arrangement will be presented.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 13:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Cutout Settings

13.2.3 Example of Input File

The following is a short example of an input file that will create a Cutout Setting standard
drawing.

1 10
1 20
1 30
1 31
1 33
1 40
1 43
2 10
2 30
2 31
2 40
2 43

13.2.4 Example of Cutout Setting Drawing

The following is an example of a Cutout Setting standard drawing.

The following is an example of the usage in Hull Modelling Create Statement for Cutouts. In
this example a profile type 31 has been indicated and available cutouts are presented for
selection.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 13:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Cutout Settings

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 13:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Cutout Settings

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 13:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Brackets

Brackets

© Copyright 1974 to current year. i 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Brackets

© Copyright 1974 to current year. ii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bracket Types

1 Bracket Types

1.1 General
"Bracket" is in shipbuilding the common denomination of plate parts used as connection
pieces between structural members of the steel structure, e.g. in connection plate-plate,
plate-profile or profile-profile. They are normally rather small, often "triangular" (with two
arms connected by a free side) but may also be comparatively large, have three arms, be
stiffened, etc. The picture below shows some typical bracket connections.

Figure 1:1. Examples of bracket connections.

There is no sharp distinction between a bracket plate and an "ordinary" plate part - they may
look very much the same. It is more a matter of definition that is up to the individual yard to
make. The reason to identify a plate part as a bracket may be that they are handled
differently from other plate parts in production, e.g. have special production lines, be named
for production differently from other plate parts, etc.

1.2 Definition of Bracket Concept

To be accepted as a bracket the following conditions must be fulfilled:
• A bracket must not consist of more than one plate part.
• It must not (currently) have any holes

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bracket Types

• In the ship model a bracket must always belong to a panel, i.e. it can only be accessed
in the hull structure via the panel it belongs to.
Brackets are often standardised regarding their general shape, how they are stiffened and
not least how they are related to other elements that they connect or support. For this type
of standardised brackets the system has an advanced facility that allows a customer to set
up his own brackets standards. Moreover, a default standard bracket set-up goes along with
an installation of the Hull application. These brackets are called type standard brackets
(because they are identified by their type (name)).
Some brackets cannot be described as type standard brackets because they are so special
that they cannot easily be controlled by standard parameters. An example of such a bracket
can be found in the figure below.

Figure 1:2. A bracket that must be generated as a panel bracket or as a “contour bracket”.

For such brackets there are two options available:

1. Any closed contour may be used as a bracket, provided it is connected to a panel and
assigned necessary attributes, e.g. material thickness and orientation, position in
space, etc.
It is especially convenient to create such a bracket in a symbolic hull view in the plane
of the bracket to be. Picture elements of the surrounding structure can be used when
creating the bracket contour in drafting mode and the contour will fetch its position in
space from the view.
(However, brackets of this type are normally not topological, i.e. they will not
automatically adjust to changes.)
2. The second option is to generate the bracket as a panel with a special tag identifying it
as a panel bracket. A panel bracket is built up using the same tools that are used when
generating a plane panel but it must be tied up to a "mother" panel.
Panel brackets are in most cases generated separately and tied up to its mother panel
when this has been activated. If, however, there exists a "standard" of non-standard
brackets the system offers an option to integrate the generation of such brackets with
the generation of the panel via a Vitesse hook according to a routine that is similar to
generation of type standard brackets.
(In addition to the two categories of brackets mentioned above there are a few very special
built-in type standard brackets which a customer cannot change).
AVEVA Marine has a built-in bracket standard and in addition the system is open to let a
customer define his own standards.
The rest of this document will give a general description of the conditions for type standard
brackets.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bracket Types

1.3 Type Standard Bracket, Overall Characteristics

A type standard bracket has the following main characteristics as further developed below.
1. It is in one way or other registered by a name ("bracket designation") by which it is
accessed for modelling. The names can in principle be selected arbitrarily.
2. Its geometry is well defined and must follow certain principles: It must be built up by two
or three arms. Two arms end in toes that are connected by a free side. Notches may be
inserted in all corners and the free side may be supplied with a folded or welded flange.
The figure below shows one typical two-arm and one three-arm bracket.

Figure 1:3. Example of one 2-arm and one 3-arm bracket.

3. A bracket may occur in a number of connection cases. Each connection case

corresponds to how a bracket in a certain structural arrangement interacts with other
structural members. A connection case may have many variants. A certain bracket may
occur in several connection cases.
The connection cases analysed and supported by the system can be found in Hull
Planar Modelling, Design Language of Hull.
AVEVA Marine evaluates the position and orientation and in many cases also some
size parameters from the connected elements.
4. A bracket may or may not be stiffened. The stiffening is produced either via a flange,
(bent or welded) or by stiffeners, welded onto the bracket or along its free edge. A
bracket may have one flange and/or stiffeners.
5. Brackets cannot be generated with holes but may have cutouts for penetrating profiles.

1.4 Elements of the Bracket Set-up Facility

The customer definition of a bracket standard can be done within the general frame-work of
the bracket definition facility. Elements of this framework are:
• A number of predefined bracket toe types of which the customer can set up his own
instances (see Standardised Bracket Toes).
• A number of predefined connections on detail level, e.g. for the connection of a bracket
toe to an intersecting stiffener. The customer may create his own instances of these
connections (see CONNECTION Statement).
• The general facility for the control of folded flanges may be used to define folded
flanges on brackets (see Folded Flanges).
• The set of standardised notches is available for brackets. Currently only corner notches
may be used (see Notch Standards).
• A special definition language, based on the general TIL format, is available to create
new brackets, using instances of the general bracket framework. It is described in a
separate document (see Customer Set Up of Brackets).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bracket Types

Additionally a number of predefined connection cases are available, specifying how a

bracket should "fit" into its surrounding structure. The bracket itself can be set up without
any connection case but in order to be instantiated the bracket definition must in practice in
most cases be applied in a certain connection.

1.4.1 Bracket Names

New brackets can be created in any number. Each bracket is identified by a name that must
be unique.
The following rules are valid for bracket names:
• They should be short, preferably not longer than 4 characters (however, the hard limit
is 8 characters).
• The name must start in a character and should preferably end in a character as well.
This is because the total bracket designation will be extended with the lengths of the
bracket arms (in cm) and if the bracket name ends in a digit the limit between the name
and the "arm length" is hard to identify.
• Traditionally the names of almost all brackets with a folded flange has ended in a K. It is
a matter of taste if this rules should be kept for new brackets but there might be some
value in doing so. To get the brackets shown in the dialogues for picking a
corresponding view, named as the bracket, must exist in the drawing
_ _SBH_BKT_MENU_ _. Running the bracket setup in Inithull will generate the
dialogues for picking brackets based on this drawing. Further details on this can be
found in Customising Dialogues.

1.4.2 Bracket Geometry

The geometry of a type standard bracket is always built up in the following way.
1. By two arms, connected by a free side. There are two possibilities:
1. The arms are directly connected to each other in the origin of the bracket. The
bracket is then a normal "2-edge", triangular bracket.
2. The arms are connected by an extra edge ("connection edge") so that the bracket
becomes a "3-edge" bracket.
The two arms of the bracket are identified as "arm A" and "arm B", respectively.
See Figure 1:3.: Example of one 2-arm and one 3-arm bracket. above.
2. The arms in turn consist of the edge contour and the toe. The edge contour is always
welded to an adjoining structure (partially or completely) and the bracket toe may either
be free or connected to e.g. an intersecting stiffener (depending on the combination of
connection type and toe type). See the figure below for a couple of examples.

Figure 1:4. Examples of bracket arms (edge + toe).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bracket Types

3. The edge contour may be either a straight line or the true limit shape may be
approximated by one arc. The amplitude of this arc will automatically be calculated in
such a way that the bracket edge fits correctly in its end points and in the midpoint. The
fitting is in most cases satisfactory but may - in case the curvature of the limit is very
"irregular" - require that the bracket is generated as a panel bracket instead.
4. The basic toe types available are documented in Standardised Bracket Toes including
a specification of relevant parameters. Some of these parameters are normally derived
automatically from the surrounding structure, others defined in the set-up of a bracket,
whereas finally some may be set directly by the end user when generating the bracket.
5. The free side of the bracket may be associated with a folded flange which forms part of
the actual bracket geometry. The shape of this folded flange is under full customer
control.
6. Notches may be inserted in the corners of the bracket for the bracket individually
depending on the type of bracket and bracket toes. Most existing corner notches may
be used. It is possible to set up default rules for the notches to select.
Note: It is possible to use corner notches also in brackets with overlaps along one edge -
the notch geometry will automatically be adjusted to fit correctly. In the figure below a
simple standard circular notch (type R) has got its origin at the edge of the
overlapped profile. The notch contour has been extended perpendicular to the profile
edge. The figure also shows the result if the user specifies an unsymmetrical notch
(type VU) instead. (This way of using corner notches in relation with overlaps can
only be used in type standard brackets.)

Figure 1:5. Using a corner notch in an overlap bracket.

1.4.3 Stiffening
The free edge of the bracket may be stiffened in three different ways:
1. By a folded flange (see above)
2. By a welded flange (face plate), either welded symmetrically (forming a symmetrical T
section) or asymmetrically (forming an asymmetric T section). This flange may either
be straight or curved depending on the shape of the free edge of the bracket.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bracket Types

3. By a stiffener, welded parallel to the free edge (or part thereof) at a specified distance.
This stiffener may be double, i.e. occur on both sides of the bracket.
In addition it is possible to specify at most four additional stiffeners in the interior of a
bracket, all set parallel to the free edge. Options are available to control the number of
stiffeners as a function of the size of the bracket and to control their position and
dimensions in a similar way.
When calculating the end points of a bracket stiffener the specified distance is by
default calculated between the edge and the closest point of the stiffener (=d1). By
adding the default parameter BKT_OLDPROF to the default file of Hull Modelling the
distance will be calculated to the closest end point on the mould line instead (=d2), see
the figure below.

Figure 1:6. Optional distances stiffener end/ bracket contour.

1.4.4 Connection to Surrounding Members

A large portion of the parameters controlling the bracket shape is derived more or less
automatically from the structural elements which are involved in the connection where the
bracket is an integral part. AVEVA Marine supports the evaluation of a number of frequently
used bracket connection cases (in a modelling context a connection case is identified as a
"syntax"). The characteristics and options of the different connection cases are described
together with the specification of the Design Language for bracket generation (See Hull
Planar Modelling, Design Language of Hull Modelling, Bracket Statement).

1.4.5 Softening of Upper Corners of Bracket Toes

All standardised bracket toes (except the "Variant" versions of toe types 131-136) have a
knuckle at the upper end of the toe. An option has been implemented to soften this knuckle
by a fillet arc with a given radius. This option may insert a fillet arc in all bracket toes with
knuckles except in the toe types 11, 12 and 14.
Normally the parameters of bracket toes are controlled individually by the External Bracket
Set-up facility. However, this feature is controlled by the default parameter
BKT_TOE_FILLET. If given this feature will be applied to all brackets with the relevant toe
types. 'All' includes also panel brackets: If a part of the outer contour of a panel bracket is
identified to be like a bracket toe (and shorter than 50 mm) it will be softened in the
corresponding way.

1.5 Default Type Standard Brackets

The system is delivered with a definition file for a default set up of a variety of brackets of
different kinds . A survey of these brackets can be found in Brackets in Example File .

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bracket Types

As further developed below, the bracket definition file can be extended interactively via a
wizard in the inithull module.
In this way the file can be used as a starter (pattern) for a customer in defining his own
standards. Many of the brackets are very similar to each other (almost duplicates!) and a
customer is encouraged to remove those brackets which are of no interest in order to
reduce menu sizes in picking of brackets.
For a couple of brackets (types KL and K) following paragraphs contain the detailed
specification upon which the bracket definition has been made. The remaining brackets
have been created according to similar principles.
Type Standard Bracket KL contains a specification of the most simple of all brackets (type
KL) with the option of having at most one stiffener parallel to the free edge.
Type Standard Bracket K contains a specification of a big bracket (type K) which may have
a different number of stiffeners parallel to the free edge depending on the size (depth) of the
bracket.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Bracket Types

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Type Standard Bracket KL

2 Type Standard Bracket KL

This appendix contains the specification of the bracket KL. This specification is the basis for
the bracket set-up data in the definition file going along with a standard delivery of Hull.

Figure 2:1. Bracket type KL.

The bracket is set-up based on the following conditions in addition to what can be
interpreted directly from the figure above.
1. The bracket is symmetric, i.e. the definition of arm B is equal to arm A.
2. If the length of the stiffener (L1) becomes larger than 700 mm the stiffener should
normally be set.
3. The size of the stiffener should be picked from the set of standard dimensions for
bracket profiles available for this and similar types of brackets. It should also have the
same quality (grade).
4. The profile size should be picked whose cross-section area is the closest smaller value
compared to 0.1*t*L (L in the figure above, t is the plate thickness).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Type Standard Bracket KL

5. Plate thickness and size (A, B) to be given by the designer if not calculated from
geometrical constraints.
6. This bracket may occur in many different types of connections.
7. If the bracket size is defined by a "gap connection" to an intersecting stiffener or to a
free edge the gaps/overlaps should be as in the figures below.

Figure 2:2. Clearances when bracket KL stops at stiffener or edge.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Type Standard Bracket K

3 Type Standard Bracket K

This appendix contains the specification of the bracket K and it is the basis for the bracket
set-up data in the definition file going along with a standard delivery of Hull. This bracket is
normally large and the number of stiffeners will vary with the size of the bracket.

Figure 3:1. Bracket type K.

The bracket is set-up based on the following conditions in addition to what can be
interpreted directly from the figure above.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Type Standard Bracket K

1. The bracket is symmetric, i.e. the definition of arm B is equal to arm A.

2. The toe height is 15 mm, the length of the toe is 0.175 times the length of the bracket
side, i.e. 0.175*A and 0.175*B, respectively. The tangent of the arc of the toe in its
starting point is at angle 75 degrees relative to the bracket arm.
3. The depth of the bracket perpendicular to the free edge (Z in the figure above) is a
controlling parameter for the number of stiffeners.
4. All stiffeners should be picked from a defined set of profile sizes. No stiffener shorter
than 700 will be set.
5. If Z<=750 at most one stiffener (S1) should be set. The profile size should be picked
whose cross-section area is the closest smaller value compared to 0.1*t*L (t is the plate
thickness of the bracket. For L, see the figure above). It should be located at 20 mm
from the free edge.
6. If 750< Z<=1850 two stiffeners (S1 and S2) should be set. Their sizes should be
calculated according to the same principles as described when there is only one
stiffener. Their cross-section areas should be selected from
0.6*0.1*t*L and
0.4*0.1*t*L, respectively.
S2 to be located at distance X2=0.4*Z from the free edge (cf. the figure above).
7. If 1850< Z<=2700 three stiffeners (S1,S2,S3) should be set. Their sizes are calculated
from
0.6*0.1*t*L,
0.4*0.1*t*L and
0.1*L3, respectively (for L3, see the figure above).
S2 and S3 to be located at distances X2=0.28*Z and X3=0.59*Z, respectively.
8. If 2700< Z<=3550 four stiffeners (S1,S2,S3,S4) should be set. Their sizes are
calculated from
0.6*0.1*t*L,
0.4*0.1*t*L,
0.1*L3 and
0.1*L4, respectively.
S2, S3 and S4 to be located at distances X2=0.21*Z, X3=0.45*Z and X4=0.69*Z,
respectively.
9. If, finally, Z>3550 five stiffeners (S1,S2,S3,S4,S5) should be set. Their sizes are
calculated from
0.6*0.1*t*L,
0.4*0.1*t*L,
0.1*L3,
0.1*L4 and
0.1*L5, respectively.
S2, S3, S4 and S5 to be located at distances X2=0.17*Z, X3=0.36*Z, X4=0.55*Z and
X5=0.74*Z, respectively.
10. Plate thickness and size (A, B) to be given by the designer.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Brackets in Example File

4 Brackets in Example File

4.1 Standard Set-up of Brackets

Hull is delivered with a file for bracket set-up file. For definition of a couple of other types of
brackets, refer to Examples in Chapter Customer Set Up of Brackets.
This file defines externally the majority of the brackets that used to be in-built in earlier
versions of Hull.
The purpose of this file is:
• It should allow customers of earlier versions to switch to externally defined brackets
smoothly and without any conversion problems.
• It may be considered as a rather extensive example that may be used as a starter for
customers wanting to set up a bracket standard of their own.

4.2 Comments on the Use of the Bracket File

In the use of the standard bracket file the following matters should be considered.
• The brackets have been created from conditions, similar to those specified for bracket
types KL and K in appendixes 1 and 2, respectively, of the main document.
• Several of the brackets are close to duplicates of each other. Customers are
encouraged to review the file and remove those brackets that are of no interest in order
to minimise the number of active brackets.
• It is, of course, quite possible to modify different characteristics of the brackets in the
bracket set-up file, e.g. regarding toes, flanging, connections, etc. This can be done
either by direct editing of the file or interactively wizard-driven in the initHull module.
• Since the purpose of this file primarily has been to support backwards compatibility the
file is not quite representative for all the types of brackets that may be set up in the
bracket set-up facility. Some brackets that are quite different are described to some
detail in Examples in Chapter Customer Set Up of Brackets .
• Some brackets have one or both of their toes tightly connected to intersecting
stiffeners. For all of these brackets the toe shape will change according to the
orientation of the flange (if any) as illustrated by the figure below. The map on the
following pages shows otherwise only connections to a non-flanged profile side.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 4:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Brackets in Example File

Figure 4:1. Automatic change of toe shape depending on flange orientation

4.3 Bracket Survey

The maps of brackets on the following pages show instances of all the brackets in the
bracket set-up file, sorted on:
1. "Free brackets": without overlaps, with overlap along one arm, with overlap along two
arms.
2. Brackets with tight connection to intersecting stiffeners.
3. Brackets with profile end overlaps of different types.
The following should be observed:
• Non-flanged brackets are always shown with stiffeners if they may have stiffeners.
Those that do not have any stiffeners can, of course, be changed to have stiffeners.
Likewise, the stiffener definition may be removed for brackets with stiffeners.
• For some of the brackets the connection in which the brackets may occur are
suggested. It should be pointed out that many of the brackets may occur in several
different types of connections, not indicated here (but specified in bracket definition
file).
• The brackets are shown with their default notches, to the extent possible the same as
those of the previously in-built brackets.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 4:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Brackets in Example File

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 4:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Brackets in Example File

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 4:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Brackets in Example File

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 4:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Brackets in Example File

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 4:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

5 Customer Set Up of Brackets

5.1 General
This document specifies in detail a facility that is intended to be used to adapt the bracket
standard to the needs of a certain customer.
The final shape of a bracket is affected by a large number of factors, most of them possible
to set up rules for. These factors may be related to the shape of the bracket plate, rules for
how the bracket should be stiffened and for how it should be connected to the structure
surrounding it, etc.
Via Bracket Set Up Facility it is possible for customers to control many of the features of
brackets and set up their own standards. This is done by writing definition data in an
ordinary text file in a special language based on the Interpretative Language (TIL). The
format and the handling of the bracket definition file are described in detail in the current
document.
The inithull module has a function by which brackets in the setup file can be modified
interactively via a wizard. This module can also be used to create quite new brackets. The
result will be an updated bracket definition file that has to be compiled for the new/modified
brackets to become available for use.

5.1.1 Handling of Definition File

The definition file may be given an arbitrary name. In order to make the bracket definition
available to the application programs it should be compiled by a function of the hull utility
inithull. If the compilation is successful a bracket definition object will be stored in the
structure data bank (associated with SB_OGDB) by name _ _ SBH_BRACKET_CTRL_
_.
The compilation will also result in a receipt list with input and errors, if any. If inithull has
been started via the Job Launcher this list can be accessed like all other files resulting from
a Job Launcher run. If inithull has been started outside the Job Launcher the receipt list will
be stored in the print directory of the current project with the file extension.lst appended to
the name of the input file.

5.2 Organisation of Bracket Definition File

The bracket definition file is built up by a number of statements. The statements may be of
different types, each statement type used for a specific task. They are organised in a
hierarchical way so that certain statement types create information that is used in the
"higher level" statements.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

Typically, the low level statement types define standard bracket toes, standard connections
of bracket toes and available profile types. - The very top level statement type is the one that
defines a bracket with reference to much of the information, created by the other
statements.
The statements must be given in a logical order, i.e. information that is referred to from one
statement must have been defined in another statement earlier in the input file.

5.2.1 Statement Types

With reference to Organisation of Bracket Definition File above the low level (independent)
statement types are:
PROFILE
CONNECTION
TOE
NOTCH
CUTOUT
PATTERN
Dependent on an intermediate level are the following statement types:
STIFFENER
(FLANGE) (is actually independent but belongs logically to the group)
FACE_PLATE
Dependent on highest level is the BRACKET statement.
The statement types are related to different aspects of a bracket:
• The TOE, NOTCH and CUTOUT statements are geometry statements, i.e. directly
affecting the geometry of the bracket.
• The CONNECTION statement specifies details about how the bracket arms may be
connected to the surrounding structural members.
• The PROFILE, PATTERN, STIFFENER, FLANGE and FACE_PLATE statements are
all related to the stiffening of the bracket.
• The BRACKET statement, finally, defines a given bracket by reference to geometry,
stiffener and connection definitions, created in the other statement types. It moreover
gives the bracket a name and specifies in which types of connections it may occur.

5.2.2 Stiffening Statements

The stiffening statements are maybe the most complicated ones, therefore this paragraph
contains a survey about how they are related to each other. The details about their use can
be found in relation with each individual statement.
Some basic facts and conditions:
• A bracket may be stiffened along its free edge and/or in its interior.
• Stiffening along the edge can take place via
• a) a folded (bent) flange,
• b) a stiffener welded parallel to the free edge at a short distance,
• c) a flange (face plate) welded against the free edge.
• Any way of stiffening the free edge may be combined with additional stiffeners in the
"interior" of the bracket.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

• If there are several stiffeners on a bracket they are all supposed to be parallel.
Except for folded flanges the stiffening of a bracket means that profiles are welded to the
bracket. A set of profiles (types, dimensions) available for the bracket stiffeners can be
defined in a PROFILE statement. Many independent such sets may be defined, e.g. to be
used in different brackets.
The PATTERN statement specifies the location of the stiffeners on a bracket. Each pattern
is valid when a bracket has a certain number of stiffeners. For certain brackets the number
of required stiffeners may increase as the bracket size grows. This means that there must
be a number of patterns set up for such a bracket, each valid in case of a certain number of
stiffeners, e.g. one pattern when there is one stiffener, another when there are two, etc. The
position of bracket stiffeners in the interior are normally supposed to be depending on the
depth of the bracket.
In addition the PATTERN statement specifies how the profile dimensions should be selected
from the profiles available in a certain profile set, selected for the current bracket. Normally
the profile section is supposed to be compared to a tenth of the profile length times the
bracket thickness. Suppose that the profile length is L and the bracket thickness t. Let A =
L*t/10. Then the profile should be selected whose cross section area is comparable to A
(times a factor which is normally close to 1). Further details will be found in relation with the
PATTERN statement.
The STIFFENER statement specifies the stiffener pattern to select as a function of the
bracket size, specifies the profile set to be used and also the endcuts of the stiffeners (which
are all supposed to have the same endcut). The FACE_PLATE statement is used in a
similar way for welded flanges.
The different statement types will be specified in subsequent paragraphs of their own in this
document in the logical order, which is the order in which they are presented above.

5.3 Statement Types, Detailed Specification

5.3.1 PROFILE Statement

The PROFILE statement specifies one set of profile types and dimensions that can be used
for stiffeners on brackets. Several independent such sets can be established to be used in
different brackets, but it is also possible to use one set for all brackets.

Syntax:

PROFILE = [ <set_name > ]

/ DIM = ( < type >, <p1>, <p2> [, <p3> [,

<p4> [,<p5>[,<p6>] ] ] ] )
/ DIM = .....
.....
;

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

<set_name> A name (string not longer than eight (8) characters) that
uniquely identifies a certain set of profile dimensions.
Can be left out if there is only one set.
DIM Specifies the profile type and dimensions. The profiles
should be sorted in increasing cross-section area.
Should be given in accordance with the standards.
The number of dimensions is unrestricted.

5.3.2 TOE Statement

The TOE statement specifies bracket toes as instances of a number of basic toe types. An
instance of a toe may be used in many brackets. For most of the toe parameters reference
is made to the figures in that document.

Syntax:

TOE, <user_name>
/ TYPE = <toe_type>
[ / TOE_H = < h > ]
[ / H_TOT = < h > ]
[ / O_LAP = < lap1 > [,< lap2 >, [ < lap3 >] ] ]
[ / O_LAP_LIM = < lim1 > [ ,< lim2 >] ]
[ / R_ANG = < r > ]
[ / TOE_L = < len1 > [,< len2 >, [ < len3 >] ] ]
[ / TOE_L_LIM = < lim1 > [ ,< lim2 >] ]
[ / RAD = < r >
[ / R_CORN = < r > ]
[ / R_LUG = < r > ]
[ / KNUCKLE_PT ]
;

The attributes have the following sense:

<user_name> Freely selectable user toe name (string not longer than 8
characters).
TYPE Basic toe type. Compulsory. Must be picked from the ones
available in the document, referred to above.
TOE_H Toe height (parameter TOE_H). Compulsory for toe types 1, 2,
3, 4, 8, 9, 13, 21, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 37, 102, 131, 132, 133, 134,
135, 136. (For some toe types (11, 12, 14) the toe height is
normally calculated by the application. If not calculated the given
value is a default height to be used, e.g. when the brackets is
attached to an (unrestricted) plate surface).
In certain cases given an negative value makes sense. For toe
types 13 and 15 a TOE_H<O means that the toe height will be
calculated as H_TOT -ABS(TOE_H). This can e.g. be used to
create a toe with a notch (type KS/ a the upper corner.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

H_TOT Total toe height. To be defined for toe types 13, 15.
Normally to be calculated by the application for toe types 31, 32,
33, 34, 35, 36, 131, 132, 133, 134, 135, 136.
Otherwise irrelevant.
O_LAP Overlap at (normally perpendicular to) the profile edge. The
overlap may be dependent on the bracket thickness (see
O_LAP_LIM below). At most three values can be given.
Compulsory for toe types 2, 4, 9, 31, 32, 33, 34, 35, 36, 102,
131, 132, 133, 134, 135, 136.
O_LAP = -1 has for the toe types 33 and 133 the meaning that
the overlap should be set equal to the profile height minus the
radius at the lug, cf. the figure below.
Irrelevant otherwise.

Figure 5:1. Toe type 33 with O_LAP=-1.

O_LAP_LIM Defines the limit bracket thickness, controlling the size of
overlap. The number of assigned values must be exactly one
less than the value assigned to O_LAP.
Attribute O_LAP_LIM must be given after attribute O_LAP.
(If the bracket thickness (T)< <lim1>, then the overlap is <lap1>,
else if T< <lim2> then the overlap is <lap2>, else <lap3>)
R_ANG Angle controlling the tangent direction of the arc (or line
segment) following the toe height segment in certain toe types.
Compulsory for toe types 3, 4, 13, 15.
For toe types 8 and 9 the angle is relevant only if the bracket is
symmetric (bracket arms of equal length) or if the radius of the
free side is not defined by the user at run time.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

TOE_L Length of toe along edge. The toe length may be dependent on
length of the bracket arm (see TOE_L_LIM below). At most
three values can be given.
Must be given for toe types 3 and 4. (May be overridden by user
input). (Must be calculated by the application for toe types 12,
13, 14).
Irrelevant otherwise.
= -1 means that the toe length should be calculated by
projection of TOE_H (or H_TOT) of the opposite toe on the
current arm, e.g. when combined with a connection of type 7.
See figure below, showing a toe of type 3 the length of which is
calculated by projection of the other toe.

Figure 5:2. Toe length by projection of opposite toe height.

0< |TOE_L| < 1 means that the toe length should be interpreted
as a factor and that the actual toe length is calculated as
TOE_L*LEN where LEN is the length of the bracket arm.
> 0: Calculate using length of current arm.
< 0: Use length of the opposite arm.
TOE_L_LIM Defines the limit size, controlling the toe length. The number of
assigned values must be exactly one less than the values
assigned to TOE_L.
Attribute TOE_L_LIM must be given after attribute TOE_L.
(If the arm length (L)< <lim1>, then the toe length is
<len1>, else if L< <lim2> then the toe length is <len2>,
else <len3>).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

RAD (=R_TOE) Radius associated with certain toe types (8, 9, (11,)
12, 13, 14). This radius may often be changed or given directly
by the end user.
= -1 Means that the radius must be given via input at run time.
< -1 May in certain cases be relevant and used to indicate an
amplitude instead of a radius, e.g. in a situation like the one
below where two toes of type 8 are connected to form the free
edge of three-edged bracket (the left figure below). In a similar
situation a toe type 11 (which otherwise is not supposed to be
combined with a radius) can be assigned a radius, both in the
TOE statement and as user input in the generation phase (the
right figure below).

Figure 5:3. Options for definition of radius of free side.

R_CORN Fillet radius at the corner of certain bracket toes. Compulsory for
toe type 102.
Optional for the following toe types: 131, 132, 133, 134, 135,
136 (if not given for these toe types the radius will be calculated
from H_TOT, TOE_H and O_LAP, resulting in the "variants" of
these toe types).
R_LUG Radius of lug of certain toe (arm) types. Compulsory for the toe
types 33, 34, 133, 134, otherwise irrelevant.
KNUCKLE_PT A stand-alone keyword. Normally the toe length of a toe of type
14 is calculated to the start of the arc of the toe.
However, if this keyword is given the distance is measured to
the knuckle point between the two line segments for which the
arc is a fillet. See figure below.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

Figure 5:4. Options for calculating toe length.

5.3.3 CONNECTION Statement

The CONNECTION statement specifies different types of connections of bracket toes as
named instances of a number of basic connection types.

Syntax:

CON, <user_name>
/ TYPE = <con_type
/**** Next options only for con. type 1 (and partly type 2) ****/
[ / CL_TS = < s > ]
[ / CL_OS = < t > ]
[ / CL_FREE = < u > ]
/**** Next options only for con. type 2 ****/
[ / TIGHT_H = < h > ]
[ / FLAT_DX = < x > ]
[ / FLAT_DY = < y1 >, [<y2>] ]
[ / FLAT_LIM_A = < a > ]
[ / FLANGE_DX = < dx > ]
[ / FLANGE_DY = < dy > ]
/**** Next options only for con. type 3, 4, 5, 6 and an 7 ****/
[ / LAP = < f > ]
[ / PT_CTRL = < n > ,[ / PT_FACT = < pt_f > ] ]
[ /DIST = < d1 > [, <d2> / DIST_LIM_A = < a > ]
;

<user_name> is a unique user defined name of the connection type. Its length is
restricted to eight (8) characters.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

The options have the following sense:

TYPE Registered basic connection type with allowed values as described
below. Since most of the options are specific to a certain
connection type the relevant options are described in direct relation
with the connection type.

TYPE= 0:
Default, free bracket end. The length of the bracket arm is normally supposed to be given by
the user. This connection has no options or additional parameters. For a typical case, see
figure below.

Figure 5:5. “Free” toe.

TYPE= 1:
Connection with gap to an intersecting profile (or to a free edge). In case of profile the
connection may take place with the bracket on the same or the opposite side compared to
the profile. Can be used together with toe types 1, 3, 8, 13 and 15. Even if defined it may not
be applicable in all connection cases, e.g. if defined for a bracket used in syntax 2 the
connection type is disregarded because in this syntax the bracket arm is always free and its

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:9 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

length is supposed to be given by the user. Relevant options:

CL_TS
CL_OS See s, t and u, resp., in figure below.
CL_FREE t should be negative in the case illustrated below, i.e. when the
bracket passes the intersections stiffener.

Figure 5:6. Toe connection with gap (type 1).

TYPE= 2:
Tight connection to either side of a profile section (or to a surface in general). Is compulsory
for toe types 11, 12, 14 and 15. See the figures below.

Figure 5:7. Tight toe connection (type 2).

CL_TS See 's' in the figure above. This toe type has a tight
connection to the intersecting member, but sometimes a
welding gap should be inserted. 's' is supposed to be a small
number.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:10 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

TIGHT_H See 'h' in the figure above. The default height for connection
to an unrestricted surface. It can always be overridden by the
user.
All the keywords, starting in FLAT_ are relevant when connecting a toe to the flat side of a
profile section (as in the figure b above).
FLAT_DX 'x' in the figure above. Default is 0.
FLAT_DY 'y' in the figure above. The distance from the top of the profile
to the upper end of the bracket toe. One or two values may be
given. In case of two values the first is used if the angle is <
FLAT_LIM_A (v in the figure above), the second otherwise.
FLAT_LIM_A 'v' in the figure above. Default is 45 degrees.
All the keywords starting in FLANGE_ are relevant for connection to the side of a profile
section in which there is a flange (see fig. a above).
FLANGE_DX Normally the toe length is set equal to the free width of the
flange. Any change to this default should be given in this
option. >0 means addition to the default value, <0 means
subtraction.
Adding 10000 to the value (>0) means that a fixed toe length
should be given independently of the flange width.
FLANGE_DY 'dy' in fig. a above. Distance from the top of the profile to the
upper limit of the bracket toe. Normally this distance is
calculated from the lower edge of the flange (dy>0). If dy<0
then the distance will be calculated from the upper surface of
the flange. Adding 10000 to the value (>0) means that a fixed
toe height should be given independently of the profile height.
In calculating the flange thickness and flange widths of bulb
bars the following approximations have been made. FL_T is
the used flange thickness and FL_W is the used flange width.

Figure 5:8. Dashed lines indicate "substitute" angle bar

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:11 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

Profile types 20, 21 & 22 Profile type 23

FL_T = 0.5*T FL_T = 0.85*T

FL_W = 0.5*C FL_W = 0.67*C

This means that the connection will be evaluated as if they had been against an L-bar
of the size indicated by the dashed line in the figures above.

TYPE= 3:
Overlap of profile end without lug with one straight line in overlap edge. No fillet welding
along edge - see figure below. Relevant parameters described below the figure. Compulsory
for types 31, 32, 131, 132.

Figure 5:9. Overlap connection, no lug (type 3).

.
LAP See 'f' in the figure above. Specifies the overlap as a factor (that is
supposed to be multiplied by the profile height). If missing, 'f'=1.5 will
be used.
DIST See 'd' of the figure above. Distance from intersection point between
panel and profile trace to origin of bracket. Two values may be given
(d1 and d2), the first to be used when the connection angle is < 'a' (see
the figure above, = DIST_LIM_A), the second otherwise.
DIST_LIM_A Angle 'a' in figure above. Cf. also DIST.

TYPE= 4:
Similar but with lug of bracket welded against plate, see the figure below. Relevant
parameters described below the figure. Compulsory for toe types 33, 34, 133, 134.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:12 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

Figure 5:10. Overlap connection with lug (type 4)

LAP As for TYPE=3

DIST See 'd' of the figure above. Distance from the end of the profile to
the start of the bracket lug along the profile trace.

TYPE= 5:
Similar to 4, but with a "free" lug of the overlap edge, see figure below. Relevant
parameters described below the figure. Compulsory for toe types 5, 36, 135, 136.

Figure 5:11. Overlap connection with “free” lug (type 5)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:13 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

LAP See TYPE=4.

DIST Two values (d1 and d2) should be assigned to DIST with the interpretation
according to Figure 5:11.: Overlap connection with “free” lug (type 5)

Common to connection types 3, 4 and 5 is that the position of the free side of the bracket
may be affected by an extra control point through which the free edge (or its extension) is
supposed to pass. The options PT_CTRL and PT_FACT can be used for this purpose, see
the figures below.

Figure 5:12. Options for automatic calculation of free bracket arm

PT_CTRL Specifies a control point controlling the direction of the free side.
=1 The control point in located in the extension of the web endcut of
the overlapped profile, see figure a above.
=2 By a point perpendicular to the profile trace at a given distance, see
figure b above.
PT_FACT See 'pt_f' in the figures above. This is a factor used to calculate the
distance of the control point by multiplication with the profile height.
If, for a connection type 3, 4 or 5, PT_CTRL is undefined, then
PT_CTRL=1 is supposed to be valid.
If PT_FACT is undefined, then 'pt_f'=0.5 if PT_CTRL=1, else if
PT_CTRL=2 then 'pt_f'=2.0.

TYPE= 6:
Connection where bracket is attached along the edge of a profile. The bracket arm length is
defined as a factor times the profile height and an optional control point is used to control

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:14 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

the shape of the toe. Can be used together with a toe of type 1 (and possibly 2 and 102).
(Supported only in syntax 1.)

Figure 5:13. Parameter controlled profile edge connection (type 6)

LAP 'f' in the figure above. Multiplied by the height ('H') of the 'profile along'
this is used to calculate the (default) length of the bracket arm (default
is 1.5).
PT_FACT See 'pt_f' in the figure above. When multiplied by the profile height the
resulting distance is used to position a point, controlling the direction of
the free side. Default value is 1.0.

TYPE= 7:
Simple free toe where the length of bracket arm is defined as a factor times the total height
('h') of the opposite bracket toe see figure below.

Figure 5:14. Parameter Controlled Profile Edge Connection (type 7)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:15 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

LAP Cf. TYPE=6 and the figure above (default is 2.0).

Connection types 6 and 7 are supported in syntaxes 1 and 7. However, when connection
type 6 is used in syntax 7 the length of the bracket arm (normally B) must be given explicitly
by the user. These connection types can be used only in combination with certain toe types,
both in the current bracket arm and in the opposite arm.
Connection types 3, 4 and 5 will be supported in syntaxes 5 and 6 but are not yet
implemented.

5.3.4 NOTCH Statement

The NOTCH statement specifies a set of default notches to be used in brackets. Any
number of such default rules can be established. Either one fixed notch can be given or the
notch can be made dependent on the length of the surrounding bracket arms. The same
default notch rule can be used for several brackets (and for several different notches in the
same bracket).

Syntax:

NOTCH , <set_name >

/ NOTCH_TYPE = (<not1>,<not2>, ..... ) (1 .....
10)
[ / LIMIT_SIZE = (< L1 >, < L2 >, ..... ) (1
..... 9) ]

<set_name> A name (string shorter than eight (8) characters) that uniquely
identifies a certain notch selection rule.
NOTCH_TYPE Specifies the notch to be used. If the notch type/size should be
dependent on the length of the surrounding edges then < not1 >
will be used up to < L1 >, < not2 > up to < L2 >, etc. The
length of each notch definition is restricted to 24 characters.
No notch at all is indicated by assignment of an empty string (' ').
LIMIT_SIZE Specifies the length of the shortest of the two surrounding edges, up
to which the previously defined notch should be used. Should be
given in increasing sizes.
The LIMIT_SIZE attribute should follow after the NOTCH_TYPE
attribute.
If the number of notch types added to NOTCH_TYPE is N, then N-1
values must be assigned to LIMIT_SIZE.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:16 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

Example:
NOTCH, NOT_KL
/ NOTCH_TYPE = (KS10, R30, R50)
/ LIMIT_SIZE = (250, 500)
;

Note: If the notch type contains a mathematical operator (e.g. an asterisk (*)) then it must
be surrounded by apostrophes (‘).

Thus a notch type VU100*50 should be written as:

/NOTCH_TYPE=’VU100*50’

5.3.5 CUTOUT Statement

The CUTOUT statement specifies a cutout type to be used for specific profile types.

Syntax:

CUTOUT, <name>

/ CTYP = < cutout_type >

/ PROF = (<prof_type1>,< prof_type2 > ….. )(1 ….. 10)

< name> A name (string shorter than eight (8) characters) that uniquely identifies
a certain cutout selection rule. The same name may be used in several
statements provided the profile types occur only once in a rule with a
certain name. Thus one specific rule may be the result of several
CUTOUT statements.
CTYP The cutout type to be used
PROF The profile types for which CTYP should be valid in this cutout selection
rule.
The same cutout selection rule may be referred to from any number of brackets.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:17 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

Example:

Example:

CUTOUT, CUT_BKTA
/CTYP = 31
/PROF = 10
;

CUTOUT, CUT_BKTA
/CTYP = 308
/PROF = (20,30,31)
;

CUTOUT, CUT_BKTB
/CTYP = 31
/PROF = 10
;

CUTOUT, CUT_BKTB
/CTYP = 305
/PROF = (20,30,31)
;

5.3.6 PATTERN Statement

The PATTERN statement specifies rules for the selection of a certain profile pattern on a
bracket. In general it is supposed that the depth of the bracket perpendicular to the free side
of the bracket (Z in the figure below) is a controlling parameter for the position of the
stiffeners and that the dimensions of the profiles are depending on certain lengths and on
the thickness of the bracket.
These lengths are (see the figure below for explanation):
1. Length of the free side of the bracket when extended to the surrounding restricting
structural elements (=L0).
2. The actual length of the stiffeners (L1, L2, L3, ...)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:18 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

Figure 5:15. Lengths for calculation of profile sizes.

It is supposed that maximum 5 stiffener positions need be considered in a bracket. In a

pattern for a welded flange (face plate) only one profile may be generated. All the stiffeners
must be parallel to each other.
If a bracket contains both a face plate and stiffeners separate patterns must be used for the
face plate and the stiffeners.

Syntax:

PATTERN, < pattern_name >

/ NO_STI = < N >
[ / DOUBLE ]
/ LOCATION = (<loc1>, ..... , <locN>)
/ SIZE_FACTOR = (<fact1>, ..... ,<factN>)
/ LENGTH_NO = (<No1>, ..... , <NoN>)
/ RULE = < rule_No >
;

< pattern_name> A name (string not longer than eight (8) characters) that uniquely
identifies a certain stiffener pattern specification.
NO_STI Number of stiffener positions in this pattern. Should be 1 for face
plate.
This attribute must be given before any of those where the
number of arguments are depending on < N >.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:19 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

DOUBLE Means that the first stiffener should be doubled, i.e. one stiffener
on each side. Both stiffeners should be equal and the given
factor should be shared half for each of them.
LOCATION Specifies the distance of the stiffeners from the free edge (or
possibly part of it, e.g. an arc, cf. below), with one specification
for each stiffener position. Should be 0 for a face plate.
Suppose that the depth of the bracket perpendicular to the free
side is Z. The position is always given as a distance from the
free edge (or a specified part of it).
<loc> >1 means that the distance is given explicitly,
<loc> <1 means that the distance is given as a factor.
<loc1> is used for stiffener position 1, <loc2> for stiffener
position 2, etc.
SIZE_FACTOR Specifies a factor that shall be used for the calculation of the
profile dimensions. <fact1> is used for the stiffener in position 1,
etc. One size factor shall be given for each of the stiffeners of
the given pattern. For more details, see below.
LENGTH_NO Specifies the length that shall be used in the evaluation of the
dimension of each of the profiles:
= 0 means L0,
= 1 means L1, etc.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:20 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

RULE Specifies how the cross-section area shall be evaluated (cf.

below). Normally the profile cross section area should be
compared to the area of the selected length (L0, L1, etc., cf.
above) multiplied by the thickness of the bracket and divided by
10. (The rules specified below will always be overruled if the
user controls the profile dimensions by input.)
> 0: = 1 Pick profile with closest to cross-section area.
= 2 Ditto closest but smaller.
= 3 Ditto closest but larger.
< 0: In this case the dimensions are not calculated
automatically but a fixed profile is picked from the
currently used profile set. Abs (RULE) is the index within
this profile definition set for the profile to be picked.
Normally, the profile is should be set parallel to the longest
straight line in the free side of the bracket. However, in certain
cases it may be necessary to set the stiffener parallel to part of
the free side according to another rule. Then the following rules
apply:
• Adding 100 (with the same sign as RULE as per above)
means that the stiffener(s) will be set parallel to the tangent
of the mid-point of the largest circular arc of the free side (to
be used e.g. for a bracket where the free side consists of
one arc).
• Adding 200 means that the stiffener will be located parallel
to the last segment preceding the largest arc (cf. adding
100).
• Adding 300 means that the stiffener will be located parallel
to the first line segment following the largest arc (cf. adding
100).
These cases are illustrated in the figures below.

Figure 5:16. Options for positioning of bracket stiffener.

Suppose that stiffener 2 shall be calculated and the following values have been assigned:

RULE =1

<loc2> =0.45

<fact2> =0.4

<No2> =0

Bracket thickness =1

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:21 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

Then stiffener number 2 will be located 0.45*Z from (and parallel to) the free edge.
Let A = L0*t/10. The profile size (among the available standard dimensions) will be selected
whose cross-section area is closest to 0.4*A.
Following example corresponds to the situation for a bracket that may have up to three
stiffeners. Three different patterns must be defined corresponding to the case that the
bracket has 1, 2 and 3 stiffeners, respectively.

Example:

First the case with only one stiffener.

PATTERN , PAT_A_1

/ NO_STI = 1
/ RULE = 1
/ LOCATION = 20
/ SIZE_FACTOR = 1.0
/ LENGTH_NO = 0;

The pattern definition for the same bracket when there are two stiffeners should be:

PATTERN , PAT_A_2

/ NO_STI = 2
/ RULE = 1
/ LOCATION = (20, 0.4)
/ SIZE_FACTOR = (0.6, 0.4)
/ LENGTH_NO = (0, 0);

Finally in case of three stiffeners:

PATTERN , PAT_A_3

/ NO_STI = 3
/ RULE = 1
/ LOCATION = (20, 0.28, 0.59)
/ SIZE_FACTOR = (0.6, 0.4, 1.0)
/ LENGTH_NO = (0, 0, 3);

5.3.7 STIFFENER Statement

The STIFFENER statement specifies rules for the generation of stiffeners on brackets. This
statement can be used to specify stiffeners welded onto the surface of the bracket, i.e. not
profiles welded to the edge of the bracket and not flanges (bent flanges). Several
independent stiffener sets can be established to be used in different brackets. One and the
same set can also be used in different brackets if the stiffeners should be set according to
the same rules.
Normally the STIFFENER statement refers to definitions already done in other statements.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:22 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

Syntax:

STIFFENER, < set_name >,

/ PROF_SET = < profset_name >
[ / MIN_LENGTH = < len > ]
/ END1_CUT = (type [,<par1>[, <par2>[,<par3>] ] ])
/ END1_DIST = < d >
/ END2_CUT = (type [,<par1>[, <par2>[,<par3>] ] ])
/ END2_DIST = < d >
/ PATTERN = (<pt1>[,<pt2>[,<pt3>[,<pt4>[,<pt5>] ] ] ] )
[ / SIZE_LIM = (<size1>[,<size2>[,<size3>[,<size4>] ] ])]
[ / END_DIST_MOULD ]
;

<set_name> Is a name (string not longer than eight (8) characters) that
uniquely identifies a stiffener pattern in a bracket.
PROF_SET Specifies the name of a set of profile dimensions that shall be
used when picking the profile. This set must previously have
been defined in a PROFILE statement.
MIN_LENGTH Normally stiffeners shorter than MIN_LENGTH will not be
accepted (unless explicitly asked for by the user). Default
value is 700 mm.
END1_CUT Defines the endcut (type and parameters according to
standards) for end 1 of the stiffener (close to arm A of the
bracket).
If there is more than one stiffener they are all supposed to
have the same endcut.
END1_DIST Distance from end 1 of the stiffener (close to arm A of the
bracket) from the contour of the bracket (see the figure below).
Valid for all stiffeners on the bracket.
END2_CUT Ditto for end 2 of the stiffener (close to arm B).
END2_DIST
PATTERN Defines the name of the pattern that should be applied for the
bracket. The patterns referred to must have been defined
before in one or several PATTERN statements.
Several patterns can be defined to be selected depending on
the depth of the bracket (denoted Z, see the PATTERN
statement above). The first pattern (<pt1 >) will be used when
Z <= <size1>, etc.
If a certain pattern is set to an empty string (' ') this means that
in 4the corresponding size interval there should not be any
stiffener at all.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:23 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

SIZE_LIM Cf. PATTERN. The values should always be given in

increasing order.
The SIZE_LIM attribute must always be given after the
PATTERN attribute.
If the number of values assigned to PATTERN is N, then the
number of values assigned to SIZE_LIM must be N-1.
END_DIST_MOULD See figure below.

Figure 5:17. Options for measuring distance stiffener/contour.

When given the end point of the stiffener will be calculated
from the end point on the mould line, otherwise from the
closest point on the stiffener. In the latter case there will be a
true gap according to END_DIST_MOULD between the
stiffener ends and the elements against which they end (in the
figure above 'd2' is the distance in case of option
END_DIST_MOULD, 'd1' is the distance otherwise (default
situation)).

5.3.8 FACE_PLATE Statement (for Welded Flange)

The FACE_PLATE statement specifies rules for the generation of profiles welded to the
free edge of brackets. This statement can be used to specify either an asymmetrical
stiffener or a symmetrically welded flange ("face plate"). It will generate only one stiffener or
flange.
The FACE_PLATE statement refers to definitions already done in other statements. The
FACE_PLATE and FLANGE statements (see below) are mutually exclusive.

Syntax:

FACE_PLATE, < set_name >,

/ PROF_SET = < profset_name >
[ / MIN_LENGTH = < len > ]
/ END1_CUT = (type, [<par1>[, <par2>[,<par3>] ] ] )
/ END1_DIST = < d >
/ END2_CUT = (type, [<par1>[, <par2>[,<par3>] ] ] )
/ END2_DIST = < d >
/ PATTERN = (<pt1>[,<pt2>[,<pt3>[,<pt4>[,<pt5>] ] ] ] )
[ / SIZE_LIM = (<size1>,[<size2>[,<size3>[,<size4>] ] ] ] )
[ / OVERSHOOT = < overshoot > ];

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:24 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

<set_name> Is a name that uniquely identifies a certain rule for placement of

the face plate (<= 8 characters).
PROF_SET Specifies the name of the set of profile dimensions that shall be
used when picking the profile. This set must previously have
been defined in a PROFILE statement.
MIN_LENGTH Normally a face plate shorter than MIN_LENGTH will not be
accepted (unless explicitly asked for by the user). Default value
is 700 mm.
END1_CUT Defines the endcut (type and parameters according to
standards) for end 1 of the face plate (close to arm A of the
bracket).
An endcut parameter >10000 (e.g. a toe height) will be
interpreted in the following way, suppose 1xxxx.y. Here, xxxx is
a maximum value and 0.y is factor to be multiplied by the profile
height/width.
Example:
Suppose that a normal endcut for a free flange has been defined
by /END1_CUT=(1402, 10060.3) and that the width of the face
plate is 180 mm. The parameter (toe height) will then be
assigned the value 0.3*180= 54 mm. If, on the other hand, the
profile width had been 250 mm the toe width would have been
60 mm since 0.3*250=75 (which is greater than 60).
END1_DIST Distance from end 1 of the face plate to the end of the free side
along the bracket contour (close to arm A of the bracket), see
figure below.

Figure 5:18. Free distance of welded flange.

END2_CUT Ditto for end 2 of the face plate.
END2_DIST

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:25 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

PATTERN Defines the name of the pattern that should be applied for the
flange. The patterns referred to must have been defined before
in a PATTERN statement.
Several patterns can be defined to be selected depending on
the depth of the bracket (denoted Z). The first pattern ( <pt1 >
) will be used when Z <= <size1 >, etc.
(This means e.g. that a given bracket may have no profile at all
up to certain size, then in the next size interval have a stiffener
set parallel to the free edge, and finally in another size interval
have a welded flange).
If a certain pattern is set to ' ' (an empty string) this means that in
the corresponding size interval there should not be any face
plate at all.
SIZE_LIM Cf. PATTERN. The values should always be given in increasing
order.
The SIZE_LIM attribute must come after the PATTERN
attribute in sequence.
If the number of values assigned to PATTERN is N, then the
number of values assigned to SIZE_LIM must be N-1.
OVER_SHOOT A face plate is normally placed symmetrically relative to the
plate surface of the bracket. The attribute OVER_SHOOT can be
used to control that the face plate should be placed
asymmetrically.
The distance given is the offset outside the mould plane of the
bracket in the direction opposite to the "positive profile side"
(defined by PSID in the generation).
A face plate with an offset will be stored as a stiffener, whereas
symmetrical face plates are stored as flanges.

5.3.9 FLANGE Statement

The FLANGE statement specifies one set of nominal flange heights and calculation rules for
folded (bent) flanges on brackets. Several independent such sets can be established to be
used in different bracket types. The same set may be used in many brackets, provided the
same rule is applicable.

Syntax:

FLANGE, < flange_set >

[ / TYPE = < flange_type > ]
[ / END1_FLANGE = < fla_end_type > ]
[ / END2_FLANGE = < fla_end_type > ]
/ H = (< h1 >, < h2 >, < h3 > , .... ) (1 ... 10)
[ / RULE = < rule_No > ]
;

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:26 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

<flange_set> A name (string) that uniquely identifies a certain set of heights and
calculation rules (<= 8 characters).
TYPE Number that specifies the flange type to be used in this set. Must be
selected from one of the types defined in the flange control facility .
If left out the default flange type will be used.
END1_FLANGE Number that specifies the flange end type to be used in end one of
the flange (close to arm A of the bracket). Must be selected from
one of the flange end types defined in the flange control facility.
If left out the default flange end type will be used.
END2_FLANGE Ditto end 2.
H Specifies allowable flange heights. The heights should be sorted in
increasing order.
RULE The flange height is selected based on the length of the free edge
(=L), divided by 10. I.e. the flange height should be picked from the
set of heights, assigned to H based on its relation to L/10.
= 1 Select closest height to L/10
= 2 Select closest to L/10 but smaller
= 3 Select closest to L/10 but larger
Creation of the actual geometry of the flange is controlled by the
normal flange control facility as described in the document referred
to above.

5.3.10 BRACKET Statement

The BRACKET statement is used for the definition of a new bracket and to specify how it
should be generated. Condition for the bracket statement is that a previous definition of
"building stones" have been made in other types of statements.
In short, this statement specifies the name of the bracket, the toes by which it is built up,
how it should be stiffened, how the bracket should be connected to the surrounding
structure, in which connection cases ("syntaxes") the bracket can be used, etc.

Syntax:

BRACKET, < name >

/ SYNTAX = (<syn1>, <syn2>, ..... ) (1 .... 8)
[ / SYMBOL = <symb_No > ]
[ / EDGE_3 ]
/ TOE_A = < toe_name > [, < toe_name > ]
[ / CON_A = < con_name > ]
/ TOE_B = < toe_name > [, < toe_name > ]
[ / CON_B = < con_name > ]
[ / STIFFENER = < stiff_set_name > ]
[ / FACE_PLATE = < face_plate_set_name > ]
[ / FLANGE = < flange_set_name > ]
[ / NOTCH = < notch_name > ]
[ / NOA = < notch_name > ]
[ / NOB = < notch_name > ]
[ / NOC = < notch_name > ]
[ / CUTOUT = < cutout_name > ]
;

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:27 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

<name> Is the unique name of the bracket, used when the bracket is
generated. The name should start (and preferably end) in a letter
and be maximum 8 characters long.
Brackets defined in this facility are automatically activated, i.e.
will pop up in the menus of Component/Create/Brackets
without any separate action in accordance with the
specification of the attributes SYNTAX and SYMBOL below.
SYNTAX Specifies the connection cases (syntaxes) in which the bracket may
occur. The first of the given syntaxes is the default syntax, i.e. if not
explicitly specified by the user this syntax will be supposed in the
generation of the bracket. Syntax number 8 is the "free syntax"
when all bracket parameters will have to be supplied by the user.
SYMBOL Specifies the symbol number within the symbol font number 91
which is used in the interactive picking of the bracket type when
generating the bracket. If not given it is not possible to pick the
bracket by a symbol of it. It is the responsibility of the customer to
create an appropriate symbol for the bracket.
EDGE_3 Specifies that the bracket has three edges, i.e. two arms which are
connected by an "extra" connecting edge. If this option is left out the
bracket is supposed to have two arms connected directly to each
other.
TOE_A Selects a certain toe instance which must have been set up with a
unique name in a TOE statement and which shall be applied at the
end of bracket arm A. Two different toe selections can be assigned
in case of a tight connection (e.g. to a profile section). The first one
will be used for connection to a flat side, the second to the side of a
flanged side of a profile section (see the CONNECTION statement
above).
It should be noted that for brackets in syntaxes 1 and 5 bracket
arm A is always the bracket arm that is welded against the
plate surface.
CON_A Selects a certain toe connection instance with a unique name which
must have been set up in a CONNECTION statement and that shall
be used in the connection of bracket arm A to adjacent structural
members.
If not given, the bracket arm is supposed to be free.
It may happen that even if a connection has been defined that
connection is relevant only in certain connections and that in other
connections the bracket arm is free.
TOE_B Ditto for bracket arm B.
CON_B
STIFFENER Specifies the set of stiffening rules that should be applied for this
bracket. The referred stiffener set must have been defined with a
unique name in a previous STIFFENER statement. If not given, the
bracket will not get any stiffener. I.e. condition for a bracket to get
any stiffener at all is that the bracket has been set up with a stiffener
definition.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:28 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

FACE_PLATE Specifies how a face plate should be positioned on the free edge of
the bracket. If not given, no face plate will be set.
This option and the FLANGE option (see below) are mutually
exclusive.
FLANGE Specifies the set of flange rules that should be applied for this
bracket. The referred flange set must have been defined with a
unique name in a previous FLANGE statement. If not given, the
bracket will not get any folded flange.
NOTCH Specifies a default notch selection set for use in the origin corner of
a bracket. The picked notch set must previously have been defined
with a unique name in a NOTCH statement.
If no NOTCH option has been given the bracket cannot have any
notch in this corner.
/ NOTCH=' ' (empty string) means that a notch may occur but
that no default notch exists.
NOA Ditto for notches at the end of arms A and B, respectively. May not
NOB be relevant for all toe types.
NOC Ditto for the notch at the start of arm A for a three-edge bracket
(only when the option EDGE_3 has been used).
The figure below specifies the corners where the notches may be
used.

Figure 5:19. Keywords for control of corner notches.

CUTOUT Specifies a default cutout selection rule to be used for cutouts of a
bracket. The referred cutout rule must previously have been
defined in one or several CUTOUT statements.
If no CUTOUT attribute is given the bracket cannot have any
cutouts. For brackets with a defined CUTOUT rule the system
automatically finds the penetrating profiles and selects the cutout
type based on the profile type and the rule.

5.4 Examples
Below you will find an example of a bracket definition file for the brackets are A, B and BK.
Bracket A is a big bracket that may have up to 3 stiffeners and whose toe lengths varies with
the bracket size.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:29 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

Bracket B is a simple bracket with soft toes and maximum one stiffener.
Bracket BK is similar to B but is stiffened by a folded flange replacing the stiffener.

!
! Standard profile dimensions available for bracket stiffener.
! Used for all brackets.

PROFILE, STD_DIM

/ DIM = (10, 90, 12)

/ DIM = (10, 120, 12)
/ DIM = (10, 150, 12)
/ DIM = (10, 200, 12)
/ DIM = (10, 200, 15)
/ DIM = (10, 200, 20)
/ DIM = (10, 250, 20)
/ DIM = (10, 300, 20)
/ DIM = (10, 300, 25)
;

!
! Standard toe of basic type 11 (e.g. at arm A of A-bracket)
!

TOE, TA_A

/ TYPE = 11
;

!
! Tight connection of bracket A at toe A
!

CON, TIGHT

/ TYPE = 2
/ FLAT_DX = 0
/ FLAT_DY = (20, 0)
/ FLAT_LIM_A = 45
/ FLANGE_DY = 40
;
!
! Toe at arm B of A-bracket
!

TOE, TB_A

/ TYPE = 3
/ TOE_H = 15
/ TOE_L = ( 35, 100, 300)
/ TOE_L_LIM = ( 400, 800)
/ R_ANG = 10
;

!
! The patterns used for the A-bracket, see example in PATTERN
! statement
!

PATTERN, PAT_1_1

/ ......
;

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:30 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

!
! Stiffener definition for bracket type A (number of stiffener
! depending on size (depth=Z) of bracket)
!

STIFFENER, STI_A

/ PROF_SET = STD_DIM
/ MIN_LENGTH = 700
/ END1_CUT = ( 1302, 15)
/ END1_DIST = 50
/ END2_CUT = ( 1302, 15)
/ END2_DIST = 50
/ PATTERN = (PAT_A_1, PAT_A_2, PAT_A_3)
/ SIZE_LIM = ( 1100, 1850)
/ END_DIST_MOULD
;

!
! Definition of bracket A (arm B has no connection, is "free")
!

BRACKET, A

/ SYNTAX = (1.7)
/ SYMBOL = 10
/ TOE_A = TA_A
/ CON_A = TIGHT
/ TOE_B = STI_A
/ STIFFENER = ’’
/ NOTCH = ’’
/ NOA
;

!
! Soft toe (used e.g. for B-bracket)
!

TOE, T4

/ TYPE = 3
/ TOE_H = 15
/ TOE_L = 35
/ R_ANG = 0
;

!
! Connection with gap 50 mm (e.g. for brackets B and BK in syntax)
!

CON,GAP

/ TYPE = 1
/ CL_TS = 50
/ CL_OS = -50
/ CL_FREE = 20
;

!
! Standard stiffener "pattern" for brackets with one stiffener
! (e.g.B-bracket)
!

PATTERN, PAT-STD

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:31 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

/ NO_STI = 1
/ LOC = 20
/ LENGTH_NO = 0
/ RULE = 2
;

!
! Common stiffener definition for brackets with one stiffener
! (e.g.bracket B)
!

STIFFENER, STI_STD

/ PROF_SET = STD_DIM
/ MIN_LENGTH = 700
/ END1_CUT = ( 1302, 15)
/ END1_DIST = 50
/ END2_CUT = (1302, 15)
/ END2_DIST = 50
/ PATTERN = PAT_STD
/ END_DIST_MOULD

!
! Default notches for brackets B and BK
!

NOTCH, NOTCH_B

/ NOTCH_TYPE = ( ' ', R50, R75, R100

/ LIMIT_SIZE
;

!
! Definition of bracket B (connection used only in syntax 1)
!

BRACKET, B

/ SYNTAX = (2, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8)
/ SYMBOL = 28
/ TOE_A = T4
/ CON_A = GAP
/ TOE_B = T4
/ STIFFENER = STI_STD
/ NOTCH = NOTCH_B
;

!
! Simple toe of type 1 with toe height 15 (used e.g. for BK-
! bracket)
!

TOE, T1_15

/ TYPE = 1
/ TOE_H = 15
;

!
! Standard flange definition for smaller flanged brackets (both a
! flange end type 2 with radius 75. Flange end type may have to
! be set up by flange control facility (SBH_FLANGE_CTRL)
!

FLANGE, FLA_STD

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:32 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

/ END1_FLANGE = 200
/ END2_FLANGE = 200
/ H = ( 100, 160, 220, 280 )
/ RULE = 1
;

!
! Definition of bracket BK
!

BRACKET, BK

/ SYNTAX = (2, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8)
/ SYMBOL = 29
/ TOE_A = T1_15
/ CON_A = GAP
/ TOE_B = T1_15
/ FLANGE = FLA_STD
/ NOTCH = NOTCH_B
;

Next follow two examples showing how two quite different brackets can be created using the
bracket definition language. The same profile standard is supposes as above.
First a bracket, called BMA, looking like the figure below. The height of the 'total toe height'
'h' is by default set to 150 by can be changed by used input.

Figure 5:20. Bracket BMA as defined by an example.

TOE, TA_BMA
/ TYPE = 15
/ TOE_H = 15
/ H_TOT = 150
/ R_ANG = 30
;
CON, CONA_BMA

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:33 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

/ TYPE = 1
/ CL_TS = 25
/ CL_OS = -25
;
!
! Toe length of toe B calculated by projection of toe
! height A according to connection CONB_BMA
!
TOE, TB_BMA
/ TYPE = 3
/ TOE_H = 15
/ TOE_L = -1
/ R_ANG = 15
;
CON, CONB_BMA
/ TYPE = 7
/ LAP = 2
;
PATTERN, P_BMA
/ NO_STI = 1
/ RULE = 101
/ LOC = 20.0
/ SIZE_FACTORS = 0.14
/ LENGTH_NO = 1
;
STIFFENER, STI_BMA
/ PROF_SET = STD_DIM
/ END1_CUT = (1302, 15)
/ END1_DIST = 45
/ END2_CUT = (1302,15)
/ END2_DIST = 45
/ PATTERN = P_BMA
;
BRACKET, BMA
/ SYNTAX = 1
/ SYMBOL ??
/ CON_A = CONA_BMA
/ TOE_A = TA_BMA
/ CON_B = CONB_BMA
/ TOE_B = TB_BM
/ STIFFENER = STI_BMA
/ NOTCH = ’’
;

The next bracket is a similar bracket, however with different toes and connections at both
arms, see the figure below. The radius of the free side is by default set to 150 but may be
changed via input.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:34 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

Figure 5:21. Bracket BLA as ¨defined by an example

!
! Toe length of toe A calculated from connection type of
! arm B.
!
TOE, TA_BLA
/ TYPE = 13
/ TOE_H = 15
/ H_TOT = 150
/ R_ANG = 30
/ RAD = 150
;
!
! CONA_BLA same as CONA_BMA. Same definition could be
! used.
!
CON, CONA_BLA
/ TYPE = 1
/ CL_TS = 25
/ CL_OS = -25
;
TOE, TB_BLA
/ TYPE = 1
/ TOE_H = 15
;
CON, CONB_BLA

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:35 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

/ TYPE = 6
/ LAP = 1.5
/ PT_FACT = 1.0
;
PATTERN, BLA
/ NO_STI = 1
/ RULE = 301
/ LOC = 20.0
/ SIZE_FACTORS = 0.14
/ LENGTH_NO = 1
;
STIFFENER, STI_BLA
/ PROF_SET = STD_DIM
/ END1_CUT = (1302, 15)
/ END1_DIST = 45
/ END2_CUT = (1302, 15)
/ END2_DIST = 45
/ PATTERN = BLA
;
BRACKET, BLA
/ SYNTAX = 1
/ SYMBOL = ??
/ CON_A = CONA_BLB
/ TOE_A = TA_BLB
/ CON_B = CONB_BLB
/ TOE_B = TB_BLB
/ STIFF = STI_BLB
/ NOTCH = ’’
;

Finally a hint about the toe combinations that can be used to create some other typical
brackets, see the figures below. The indicated toe types are the basic types that should be
used for these brackets.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:36 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

Figure 5:22. Bracket toes to be selected for some special bracket types.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:37 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set Up of Brackets

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 5:38 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

6 Standardised Bracket Toes

6.1 Background
Brackets in general are normally small parts with two (sometimes three) arms at an angle to
each other. The ends of the arms are called the toes of the bracket. A bracket is often
generated by connecting two bracket arms by a "free" edge.
The extended bracket handling of specifically supposes that the shape of each of the two
free arms of a bracket may be defined by a length and a (generalized) toe with some
belonging parameters. The available toes are standardized to their general shape and to the
parameters controlling them.
This document specifies all the standardized bracket toes currently available in the Hull
system regarding general shape and parameters. Each toe type is identified by its number.

6.1.1 Survey of Bracket Toes

This document contains a survey of the complete set of standardised bracket toes that can
be used to create type standard brackets. For each of the toes there is a detailed
specification of all parameters controlling its shape.
The parameters may be of four types:
1. Those that are fixed and cannot be affected by the designer when the bracket is
instantiated.
2. Those that are individual for each instantiation of the bracket. Thus they need be given
by the designer directly or evaluated automatically by the system as a result of how the
bracket is depending on the surrounding structure.
3. Those that are of the second category but for which default values can be given in the
set-up of the toe to be used if not supplied by the designer or evaluated by the system.
4. Parameters that are normally supposed to be calculated from other parameters but that
may be overridden by a value defined in the bracket set-up or by designer input. For an
example of this category, see RAD of toe types 3 and 4 below.
For details about bracket set-up in general and of bracket toes in particular, see TOE
Statement in Chapter Customer Set Up of Brackets.
In the survey below parameters identified as "Fixed" may be set-up in the toe definition,
those within brackets are optional, i.e. they may be given by the user or may be calculated
automatically. Those identified as "Given" should not be part of the bracket set-up.
In most bracket toes with a flange the bracket toe is combined with one end of the flange. In
such cases it may be difficult to distinguish between the characteristics of the toe and of the
flange end, respectively. In all such cases, however, all radii etc. following the toe height (cf.
below) are supposed to be part of the flange end definition, not of the bracket toe definition.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

• Bracket Toe 1

Figure 6:1. Bracket toe 1

Fixed: TOE_H

Given: LENGTH

Remarks: 1. The toe height is always perpendicular to the bracket arm.

2. The toe may be combined with any flange end type.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

• Bracket Toe 2

Figure 6:2. Bracket toe 2

Fixed: TOE_H, O_LAP

Given: LENGTH

Remarks: 1. The toe height is always perpendicular to the bracket arm.

2. The overlap may have several discrete values, e.g. depending on the
size of the bracket.

3. The toe may be combined a flange.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

• Bracket Toe 3

Figure 6:3. Bracket toe 3

Fixed: TOE_H, R_ANG [,TOE_L, RAD]

Given: LENGTH [,RAD, TOE_L]

There are three different cases for the evaluation of this toe:

1. The normal situation is that TOE_L is controlled via the bracket set-
up (or sometimes evaluated automatically by the modelling). Then
RAD is calculated from R_ANG and TOE_L.

2. Another option is that RAD is given, either in the bracket setup or by

the user. Then TOE_L is calculated from R_ANG and RAD.

3. All of R_ANG, TOE_L and RAD are given (in bracket set-up and/or by
the designer). Then the toe is over-determined. The following will
happen:
• R_ANG will be re-calculated. If the calculated angle is bigger
than the value from the bracket set-up the new value will be
accepted.
• If the calculated value is smaller (e.g. because the given RAD is
small in relation to TOE_L) then a line segment will be inserted
in the direction of the original value of R_ANG from the top of the
toe to the beginning of the arc. This case is illustrated by the
dashed contour above. In the other cases the result will be as in
the solid contour.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

Other 1. The toe is always perpendicular to the bracket arm.

remarks

2. Normally, this bracket toe should not be used in combination with a

folded flange.

• Bracket Toe 4

Figure 6:4. Bracket toe 4.

Toe type 4 is similar to toe 3 but it has an overlap along the bracket arm.
The comments for toe type 3 are valid also for toe type 4 with the addition, that there is
another fixed parameter O_LAP. This parameter may have several discrete values as
defined in the bracket set-up.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

• Bracket Toe 8

Figure 6:5. Bracket Toe 8.Fixed:TOE_H, R_ANG (normally)

Fixed: TOE_H [,R_ANG]

Given: LENGTH [,RAD]

Remarks: 1. This toe type may only be used in a bracket, when the free edge of the
bracket consists of one arc. The toe it is connected to must be of a
similar type.

2. The radius of the arc segment connecting the bracket toes may be
calculated from the R_ANG parameter.

3. As an alternative the radius (RAD) may be given, and thus R_ANG will
be derived from this parameter.

4. The toe must not be combined with a flange.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

• Bracket Toe 9

Figure 6:6. Bracket toe 9.

Toe type 9 is similar to toe 8 but it has an overlap along the bracket arm

Fixed: TOE_H [,R_ANG.]

Given: LENGTH.

Remarks: 1. This toe type may only be used in a bracket, when the free edge of the
bracket consists of one arc. The toe it is connected to must be of a
similar type.

2. The radius of the arc segment connecting the bracket toes may be
calculated from the R_ANG parameter.

3. As an alternative the radius (RAD) may be given, and thus R_ANG will
be derived from this parameter.

4. The overlap may have several discrete values, e.g. depending on the
size of the bracket.

5. The toe must not be combined with a flange.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

• Bracket Toe 11

Figure 6:7. Bracket toe 11

Fixed: [TOE_H]

Given: LENGTH, TOE_H, T_ANG

Remarks: 1. This toe is normally used in a connection to (the flat side of) a profile
section or to a plate surface.

2. The toe may be combined with a flange.

3. This toe may be used in combination with toe types 8 and 9 for
brackets with a one-arc free side.

3. TOE_H is normally calculated automatically, but a default value may

be set up to be used e.g. in a connection to a plate surface.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

• Bracket Toe 12

Figure 6:8. Bracket toe 12

Fixed: [TOE_H]

Given: LENGTH, TOE_H, TOE_L, T_ANG, R_TOE

Remarks: 1. This toe may be used to connect to a profile section when the
extension of the free side should intersect the bracket arm in a given
point. (This point will decide the value of TOE_L.)

2. Normally this toe should not be combined with a flange.

3. TOE_H is normally calculated automatically, but a default value may be

set up to be used, e.g. in a connection to a plate surface.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:9 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

• Bracket Toe 13

Figure 6:9. Bracket toe 13

Fixed: TOE_H, R_ANG

Given: LENGTH, H_TOT, TOE_L, R_TOE

Remarks: 1. The toe height is always perpendicular to the bracket arm.

2. Normally this toe is not combined with a flange.

3. TOE_H<0 means that TOE_H is set to H_TOT -ABS(TOE_H)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:10 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

• Bracket Toe 14

Figure 6:10. Bracket toe 14

Fixed: [TOE_H]

Given: LENGTH, T_ANG, TOE_L, TOE_H, R_TOE

Remarks: 1. This toe may be used to connect to a profile section, especially if this
profile has a flange on the side to which the toe is connected (cf. toe
type 11).

2. This toe may be combined with a flange but then R_TOE must be
zero, because there is normally a separate radius definition as part of
the flange and set-up.

3. R_TOE may be 0, resulting in a knuckle.

4. TOE_H is normally calculated automatically, but a default value may

be set up to be used e.g. in a connection to a plate surface.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:11 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

• Bracket Toe 15

Figure 6:11. Bracket toe 15

Fixed: R_ANG.

Given: LENGTH, T_ANG, H_TOT, TOE_H.

Remarks: 1. This toe may be used to connect to a profile section.

2. Normally this toe is not combined with a folded flange.

3. Normally it is used so that the toe will look like a toe type 13, i.e. with
the free edge parallel to the bracket arm.

4. TOE_H<0 means that TOE_H is set to H_TOT -ABS(TOE_H)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:12 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

• Bracket Toe 31

Figure 6:12. Bracket toe 31.

This toe type is used for overlap of profile ends.

Fixed: TOE_H, O_LAP.

Given: LENGTH, H_TOT.

Remarks: 1. The toe height is perpendicular to the profile it overlaps.

2. The toe may be combined with a flange.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:13 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

• Bracket Toe 32

Figure 6:13. Bracket toe 32.

Toe 32 is almost like toe 31, except the parameter T_ANG

Fixed: TOE_H, O_LAP.

Given: LENGTH, H_TOT, T_ANG.

Remarks: 1 The angle (T_ANG) between the toe height and the profile is arbitrary.
. Normally it is chosen so that the toe height is parallel to the opposite
bracket arm.

2 The toe may be combined with a flange.

.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:14 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

• Bracket Toe 33

Figure 6:14. Bracket toe 33.

This toe type is another overlap of a profile end

Fixed: TOE_H[, O_LAP,] R_LUG.

Given: LENGTH, L_LUG.

Remarks: 1. The toe height is always perpendicular to the profile.

2. The toe may be combined with a flange.

3. O_LAP is normally fixed but may also be defined so that (H-O_LAP)

is constant (H is the profile height).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:15 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

• Bracket Toe 34

Figure 6:15. Bracket toe 34.

The toe is almost like toe 33, except the parameter T_ANG

Fixed: TOE_H, O_LAP, R_LUG.

Given: LENGTH, L_LUG, T_ANG, H_TOT.

Remarks: 1. The angle (T_ANG) between the toe height and the profile is arbitrary.
Normally it is chosen so that the toe height is parallel to the opposite
bracket arm.

2. The toe may be combined with a flange.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:16 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

• Bracket Toe 35

Figure 6:16. Bracket toe 35.

A profile overlap similar to toe 33, but the lug has no radius and it is not welded to a panel

Fixed: TOE_H, O_LAP.

Given: LENGTH, L_LUG, H_TOT.

Remarks: 1 The toe height is always perpendicular to the profile it overlaps.

.

2 The toe may be combined with a flange.

.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:17 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

• Bracket Toe 36

Figure 6:17. Bracket toe 36.

The toe is almost like toe 35, except the parameter T_ANG

Fixed: TOE_H, O_LAP.

Given: LENGTH, L_LUG, H_TOT, T_ANG.

Remarks: 1. The angle (T_ANG) between the toe height and the profile is arbitrary.
Normally it is chosen so that the toe height is parallel to the opposite
bracket arm.

2. The toe may be combined with a flange.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:18 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

• Bracket Toe 37

Figure 6:18. Bracket toe 37.

This toe type overlaps a profile end

Fixed: TOE_H.

Given: LENGTH, O_LAP.

Remarks: 1 The toe is always perpendicular to the profile it overlaps.

.

2 The toe may be combined with a flange.

.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:19 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

• Bracket Toe 102

Figure 6:19. Bracket toe 102.

This toe type is almost as toe 2 but it has a "soft corner"

Fixed: TOE_H, O_LAP, R_CORN.

Given: LENGTH.

Remarks: 1. The toe height is always perpendicular to the bracket arm.

2. The overlap may have several discrete values, e.g. depending on the
size of the bracket.

3. The toe may be combined with any flange end type.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:20 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

• Bracket Toe 131

Figure 6:20. Bracket toe 131.

This is a toe type 31 supplied with a "soft corner"

Fixed: TOE_H, O_LAP, R_CORN.

Given: LENGTH, H_TOT.

Remarks: See Bracket Toe 31.

• Bracket Toe 131, Variant

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:21 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

Figure 6:21. Bracket toe 131, Variant

Fixed: TOE_H, O_LAP.

Given: LENGTH, H_TOT.

Remarks: 1. This variant is valid when R_CORN (see Bracket Toe 131, basic
variant) is 0, and is calculated as toe 31 supplied with a fillet in the toe
geometry.

2. The radius of the fillet (RAD) is derived from the toe geometry.

3. The toe must not be combined with a flange.

• Bracket Toe 132

Figure 6:22. Bracket toe 132.

This is a toe type 32 supplied with a "soft corner".

Fixed: TOE_H, O_LAP, R_CORN.

Given: LENGTH, H_TOT, T_ANG.

Remarks: See Bracket Toe 32.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:22 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

• Bracket Toe 132, Variant

Figure 6:23. Bracket toe 132, Variant

Fixed: TOE_H, O_LAP.

Given: LENGTH, H_TOT, T_ANG.

Remarks: 1. This variant is valid when R_CORN (see Bracket Toe 132, basic
variant) is 0, and is calculated as toe 32. The toe geometry is then
replaced with a fillet.

2. The radius of the fillet (RAD) is derived from the toe geometry.

3. The toe must not be combined with a flange.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:23 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

• Bracket Toe 133

Figure 6:24. Bracket toe 133.

This is a toe type 33 supplied with a "soft corner".

Fixed: TOE_H, O_LAP, R_CORN, R_LUG.

Given: LENGTH, L_LUG, H_TOT.

Remarks: See Bracket Toe 33.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:24 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

• Bracket Toe 133, Variant

Figure 6:25. Bracket toe 133, Variant

Fixed: TOE_H, O_LAP, R_LUG.

Given: LENGTH, L_LUG, H_TOT.

Remarks: 1. This variant is valid when R_CORN (see Bracket Toe 133, basic
variant) is 0, and is calculated as toe 33 supplied with a fillet in the toe
geometry.

2. The radius of the fillet (RAD) is derived from the toe geometry.

3. The toe must not be combined with a flange.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:25 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

• Bracket Toe 134

Figure 6:26. Bracket toe 134.

This is a toe type 34 supplied with a "soft corner".

Fixed: TOE_H, O_LAP, R_CORN, R_LUG.

Given: LENGTH, L_LUG, T_ANG, H_TOT.

Remarks: See Bracket Toe 34.

• Bracket Toe 134, Variant

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:26 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

Figure 6:27. Bracket toe 134, Variant

Fixed: TOE_H, O_LAP, R_LUG.

Given: LENGTH, L_LUG, T_ANG, H_TOT.

Remarks: 1. This variant is valid when R_CORN (see Bracket Toe 134, basic
variant) is 0, and is calculated as toe 34 supplied with a fillet in the
toe geometry.

2. The radius of the fillet (RAD) is derived from the toe geometry.

3. The toe must be not combined with a flange.

• Bracket Toe 135

Figure 6:28. Bracket toe 135.

This is a toe type 35 supplied with a "soft corner".

Fixed: TOE_H, O_LAP, R_CORN.

Given: LENGTH, L_LUG, H_TOT.

Remarks: See Bracket Toe 35.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:27 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

• Bracket Toe 135, Variant

Figure 6:29. Bracket toe 135, Variant

Fixed: TOE_H, O_LAP.

Given: LENGTH, L_LUG, H_TOT.

Remarks: 1. This variant is valid when R_CORN (see Bracket Toe 135, basic
variant) is 0, and is calculated as toe 35 supplied with a fillet in the toe
geometry.

2. The radius of the fillet (RAD) is derived from the toe geometry.

3. The toe must not be combined with flange.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:28 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

• Bracket Toe 136

Figure 6:30. Bracket toe 136.

This is a toe type 36 supplied with a "soft corner".

Fixed: TOE_H, O_LAP, R_CORN.

Given: LENGTH, L_LUG, H_TOT, T_ANG.

Remarks: See Bracket Toe 36.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:29 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Standardised Bracket Toes

• Bracket Toe 136, Variant

Figure 6:31. Bracket toe 136, Variant

Fixed: TOE_H, O_LAP.

Given: LENGTH, L_LUG, H_TOT, T_ANG.

Remarks: 1. This variant is valid when R_CORN (see Bracket Toe 136, basic
variant) is 0, and is calculated as toe 36 supplied with a fillet in the toe
geometry.

2. The radius of the fillet (RAD) is derived from the toe geometry.

3. The toe may not be combined with a flange.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 6:30 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set-up of Brackets Instances

7 Customer Set-up of Brackets Instances

7.1 General
The bracket set-up facility allows a customer to define a bracket standard of his own. In
doing that some parameters of the brackets are given specified values, e.g. toe heights, toe
lengths, etc. whereas other parameters are supposed to be evaluated or given by the user
when the bracket is used.
This paragraph specifies in detail a facility by which a customer may define default values
for some bracket parameters other than those that can be defined in the normal bracket set-
up file. Examples of such parameters are those defining the size and thickness of a bracket.
A set of bracket parameters for a certain bracket type is said to form an instance of the
bracket type.
Bracket instance definitions are created by writing definition data in an ordinary text file in a
special language based on The Interpretative Language (TIL). The format and the handling
of the bracket instance definition file are described in detail below.

7.2 Handling of Definition File

The definition file may be given an arbitrary name. In order to make the bracket instance
definitions available to the application programs it should be compiled by a function of the
hull utility inithull. If the compilation is successful a bracket definition object will be stored in
the structure data bank (associated with SB_OGDB) by name
__SBH_BRACKET_INSTANCE__.
The compilation will also result in a receipt list with input and errors, if any. If inithull has
been started via the Job Launcher this list can be accessed like all other files resulting from
a Job Launcher run. If inithull has been started outside the Job Launcher the receipt list will
be stored in the print directory of the current project with the file extension .lst appended to
the name of the input file.

7.3 Organisation of Bracket Instance Definition File

Two types of statements, namely the BRACKET statement and the INSTANCE statement,
build up the bracket definition file. The BRACKET statement defines a bracket type while the
INSTANCE statement defines a set of default parameters valid for the current instance of
the bracket type.
The INSTANCE statement may be said to be a subordinate to the BRACKET statement in
the sense that it may occur several times after each BRACKET statement. In that way a
number of bracket instances may be defined for each defined bracket type in the definition
file.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set-up of Brackets Instances

Thus, a normal layout of the file will be:

BRACKET, ...
INSTANCE, ...
INSTANCE, ...
.
.
BRACKET, ...
INSTANCE, ...
INSTANCE, ...
.
.
BRACKET, ...

7.4 Statement Types, Detailed Specification

7.4.1 BRACKET Statement

The BRACKET statement specifies the bracket type for which one or many bracket
instances will be defined.

Syntax:
BRACKET, <bracket_type>;

<bracket_type> The name of an existing standard bracket type, e.g. 'BA'.

7.4.2 INSTANCE Statement

The INSTANCE statement defines the default values of a set of bracket parameters forming
a bracket instance. The bracket instance is valid for the bracket type defined in a preceding
BRACKET statement. The name of the bracket instance must for identification reasons start
by the name of the bracket type, followed by digits or slash-characters (/).
The keywords for the bracket modelling parameters are with few exceptions the same as in
the input data language of Hull Modelling.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set-up of Brackets Instances

Syntax:

INSTANCE, <instance_name>
[/A=<A-measure>]
[/B=<B-measure>]
[/C=<C-measure>]
[/D=<D-measure>]
[/H=<H-measure>]
[/R=<radius>]
[/OFF=<offset>]
[/MAT=<thickness>]
[/QUA=<quality>]
[/BEV=(<bevel>[,<bevel>,<bevel>,<bevel>,<bevel>])]
[/NOTCH = < notch_name >]
[/NOA = < notch_name >]
[/NOB = < notch_name >]
[/NOC = < notch_name >]
[/COM=<comment>]
[/AS1=<general purpose string 1>]
[/AS2=<general purpose string 2>]
[/AS3=<general purpose string 3>]
[/AS4=<general purpose string 4>]
[/POS=<position number>]
;

<instance_name> The name of the bracket instance.

Note: that it must start with the name of the bracket type
followed by digits or slash-characters (/). The bracket
instance name must be unique.
A A measure.
B B measure.
C C measure.
D D measure.
H Flange height.
R Radius of the free side.
OFF Distance the bracket is displaced from the profile plane.
MAT Bracket material thickness.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set-up of Brackets Instances

QUAL Steel quality of the bracket.

BEV Bevel along connected edges of the bracket. Default value for
max 5 bevel types may be defined.
NOTCH Default notch definition for use in the origin corner of the
bracket.
NOA Ditto for notches at the end of arm A,
NOB at the end of arm B and
NOC at the start of arm A for a three-edge bracket.
COM A free comment, maximum 26 characters long, describing the
bracket instance. Used only for identification purposes within
the instance file.
AS1 General purpose string 1.
AS2 General purpose string 2.
AS3 General purpose string 3.
AS4 General purpose string 4.
POS Position number.

7.5 Example of a Bracket Instance Definition File

The example below shows an excerpt of a bracket instance definition file.
BRACKET, 'B';
INSTANCE, 'B10' /A=200 /B=200 /MAT=8 /NOTCH='KS10';
INSTANCE, 'B11' /A=250 /B=250 /MAT=9 /NOTCH='KS10';
INSTANCE, 'B12' /A=300 /B=300 /MAT=9 /NOTCH='KS10';
INSTANCE, 'B13' /A=350 /B=350 /MAT=9 /NOTCH='KS10';
INSTANCE, 'B14' /A=400 /B=400 /MAT=10;
INSTANCE, 'B15' /A=450 /B=450 /MAT=10;
INSTANCE, 'B16' /A=500 /B=450 /MAT=10;
BRACKET, 'BC';
INSTANCE, 'BC10' /B=250 /MAT=8;
INSTANCE, 'BC11' /B=250 /MAT=10;
INSTANCE, 'BC20' /B=300 /MAT=10;
INSTANCE, 'BC21' /B=300 /MAT=10 /NOTCH='R50' /NOA='R50';
INSTANCE, 'BC22' /B=350 /MAT=10 /NOTCH='VU100*50' /
NOA='KS10';
INSTANCE, 'BC30' /B=500 /MAT=8;
BRACKET, 'KLK';
INSTANCE, 'KLK10' /A=500 /MAT=12 /QUA='A36';
INSTANCE, 'KLK20' /A=700 /B=500 /MAT=10;
INSTANCE, 'KLK21' /A=700 /B=700 /MAT=10 /QUA='E';
INSTANCE, 'KLK22' /A=700 /B=700 /MAT=10 /QUA='A32' /
NOTCH='R50';
INSTANCE, 'KLK30' /A=1100 /B=1245 /MAT=15 /QUA='A' /
NOTCH='R75';

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set-up of Brackets Instances

7.6 Use of Bracket Instance

Bracket instances are used by simply replacing the bracket name with the name of a
bracket instance in the bracket statement. Also during interactive definition of the bracket
the user will be offered to select among instances and the parameters of the picked instance
will be copied into the normal definition form for brackets.
If the user changes any of the default parameters, those values will take over and will also
be displayed in the bracket statement.
Some of the default parameters may be irrelevant in a certain connection case ("syntax"). If
so, that parameter will normally be disregarded.
The example below shows two statements generating the same bracket with and without
use of a bracket instance.
BRA, B, MAT=9, A=350, B=350, SYN=2, ... ;
BRA, B350, SYN=2,... ;

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set-up of Brackets Instances

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 7:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Taps - Extension Pieces for Welding

Taps - Extension Pieces for Welding

© Copyright 1974 to current year. i 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Taps - Extension Pieces for Welding

© Copyright 1974 to current year. ii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Extension Pieces for Welding

1 Extension Pieces for Welding

1.1 Background
Seams divide panels into plate pieces. When a seam passes an edge contour (that may be
panel boundaries, holes, notches or cutouts) an extra piece of material may be added to
allow for a good welding result. In AVEVA Marine such pieces are called "taps".
The designer has an option to define taps in the modelling phase. They will then be
converted in actual geometry when the plate parts are created in the automatic plate part
generation (ppanparts).
A customer may define his own standard for taps via a special set-up facility described
below. It consists of a file in a special format.

1.2 Tap Set-up File and Symbol

1.2.1 File Name

The name of the set-up file may be chosen arbitrarily and is given as input to the inithull
function for set-up of tap standard. However, the file extension should be .dat.
The result of the interpretation (if successful) will be a "tap object" stored in OGDB named
"__SBH_TAP_CTRL__". Moreover, a list file will be produced during the process of
interpretation of this file. Inithull is normally run via the Job Launcher and the list file will be
stored as defined in the set-up for the Job Launcher.

1.2.2 Layout of the File

The input file for tap standard is an ordinary text file in a simple language based on the
general TIL format. This language has only one statement type (TAP) that may be repeated
any number of times.

Note: Existing tap object, __SBH_TAP_CTRL__, will be replaced when the function is
used.

The statements need not be in any particular order and there may be more than one TAP
statement for the same standard type in one file. However, in that case the last statement for
a particular standard type will overwrite all previous taps of the same type. I.e. in the tap
object, one TAP type occurs only once.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Extension Pieces for Welding

Syntax:

TAP, <type> /A=<dimA>

/B=<dimB>
[/R=<rad>]
[/FONT_NO=<font> /SYMBOL=<symb>];

Description:

<type> An integer number representing the type of a certain TAP.

/A Dimensions describing the geometry of the resulting tap. R
/B may be left out and will then be interpreted as if no radii
should be used. (For details, see the figure below)
/R
/FONT_NO An integer number representing the font where to find the
symbol that will be presented in symbolic views
/SYMBOL An integer representing the symbol number within
FONT_NO that will be presented in symbolic views

FONT_NO and SYMBOL may be excluded. If excluded, the standard symbol number 105 in
symbol font 8 will be used.
FONT_NO and SYMBOL must, when given, always occur together, i.e. only FONT_NO or
only SYMBOL will not be accepted.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Extension Pieces for Welding

1.2.3 Example of symbol

The figure below shows an example of a symbol used in symbolic views to indicate taps.
The symbol in the example has number 105 in symbol font 8.

The black arrow is the connection point of the symbol with connection code 2.
The red arrow is the text position point with the text code 3.
When used in a hole the result will be as in the figure below:

1.2.4 Example of Input File

The following is a short example of an input file that will create a TAP standard object.

TAP, 1 /A=50 /B=50;

TAP, 2 /A=50 /B=50 /R=10;
TAP, 3 /A=75 /B=75 /R=10;
TAP, 80 /A=80 /B=50 /R=15;
TAP, 125 /A=125 /B=125 /R=20 /FONT_NO=199 /SYMBOL=4;

Note that if some of these types should already exist in the tap object
(__SBH_TAP_CTRL__) they will be replaced by the ones in the file.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Extension Pieces for Welding

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Knuckled Pieces and Swages

Knuckled Pieces and Swages

© Copyright 1974 to current year. i 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Knuckled Pieces and Swages

© Copyright 1974 to current year. ii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Handling of Knuckled Panels

1 Handling of Knuckled Panels

1.1 Background
The Hull application distinguishes basically between two different types of plate structures,
the planar structures in the internal of the ship and the curved structures in the shell.
The knuckled parts in the internal structure form a category of their own in between the
planar parts and the arbitrarily curved parts. However, the system treats them as a variant of
planar plate parts using basically the same tools as for the rest of the internal structure.
This document describes the general characteristics handling of knuckled plate parts and
panels.

1.2 General Principles

The handling of knuckled structures has the following characteristics.
• Knuckled plates are supposed to be generated by knuckled panels in a similar way as
ordinary plane plate parts are parts of plane panels.
• The handling of knuckled panels is an extension to the handling of plane panels.
• The individual planar parts of a knuckled structure are described in panels of their own
(called subpanels) which are supposed to be combined into one main knuckled
panel.
• The subpanels have many characteristics common with bracket panels, e.g. they do
not individually belong to any blocks, the subpanels plate parts cannot be used
individually as parts, the symmetry codes for panels are irrelevant for subpanels, etc.
• Knuckled structures where the knuckle is along a seam between plates are preferably
divided into ordinary individual panels.
• Knuckled panels need not be restricted to the regular types of knuckled panel you may
find e.g. in corrugated bulkheads. Thus a knuckled panel may consist of a number of
subpanels, more or less arbitrarily connected to each other.
• Each individual subpanel may consist of several plate parts. However, plate parts
having knuckle lines as boundaries must be possible to combine with plate parts on
adjoining subpanels.

1.3 Generation of Knuckled Panels

Certain extensions have been made to the Design Language of Planar Hull Modelling in
order to support the generation of knuckled panels. The changes affect only the Panel and
Boundary statements.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Handling of Knuckled Panels

The subpanels are described like normal panels, however, they must be given a tag, telling
that they are subpanels. The user must also indicate the edges of the subpanel along which
connection (knuckling) should take place.
Basically, the subpanels are generated as ordinary panels in a way similar to bracket
panels. Boundaries of subpanels to be connected need not coincide exactly - the system
will, whenever reasonable, adjust their geometry to fit. Thus, a certain gap or overlap will be
accepted. However, the planes of the subpanels will not be changed.
Once the subpanels have been generated the main panel is generated by reference to all
the subpanels by which it is built up.
In describing a knuckled panel there is some redundancy, because currently the plate
characteristics must be defined individually for each subpanel and the limits along the
knuckle line must be specified in both of the involved subpanels.
The given values must, of course, match for the two subpanels to be combined.
The position numbers of the combined plates will be fetched from the (first of the) subpanel
plate parts that are combined to the knuckled part.
Knuckled panels may contain stiffeners, holes, etc. like all other panels. These components
are supposed to be generated on the subpanels.
Holes, notches, cutouts and stiffeners across the knuckle lines are currently not supported.

1.4 Knuckled Panels in Drawings

In drawings knuckled panels are drawn in the most natural way, both in symbolic drawings
and in 3D views.
In symbolic 2D drawings all kinds of views are supported (planar views, sections
perpendicular to knuckle lines, sections parallel to knuckle lines, etc.). Certain intersections
where part of the panel is intersected, whereas others should be drawn in a plane view may
give curious results that may need manual editing.

1.5 Extracting Parts from Knuckled Panels

Plate and profile parts are extracted from knuckled panels via the function ppanparts in
exactly the same way as for all other panels. The plates across knuckle lines from different
subpanels will automatically be combined into plate parts with a knuckle line.
The profile parts, if any, will also be extracted in a similar way.
Faceplates may be modelled across the knuckled line in a knuckled panel. The flanges
should be generated as separate parts in the involved subpanels. In the panel splitting the
flanges are connected to one, provided they end close to each other and that the connection
code at the ends is of basic type 4.
Production information such as correct length, marking for knuckle line, bending angle and
radius will be created for the resulting flange part.

1.6 Control of Bending Characteristics

The parts to be knuckled are bent by a bending tool. The characteristics of the bending tool,
like radius and stretching compensations, may be set up in a so called knuckle control file,
described in this paragraph.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Handling of Knuckled Panels

The file is an ordinary ASCII text file and its full file specification must be assigned to the
environment variable SBH_KNUCKLE_CTRL.
The file is built up in the following way:
• It must always start with a TYPE statement defining the connection type code, e.g.
TYPE=45 (this is type of connection that is supposed to be defined in the boundaries of
subpanels along knuckle lines).
• Directly after the TYPE statement must follow a RADIUS statement defining the
bending tool radius, e.g. RADIUS=30.
• Then there must follow at least one so called thickness group. It starts with a
THICKNESS statement giving the maximum thickness up to which (and including) the
following parameters are valid, e.g. THICKNESS=10.
The parameters within a thickness group define stretch compensations as a function of the
knuckle angle (according to the experience of the individual yard). The values are given two
by two and define a knuckle angle up to which (and including) the following stretch
compensation should be applied for the current thickness. The number of pairs is not limited
but the knuckle angle must be ascending. The pair of parameters belonging to one
thickness group is interrupted by a new thickness group within the same connection type, by
a new connection type or by the end of the file. Thickness groups within one connection type
must be sorted in ascending thicknesses.
The compensation is used in the following way. The nominal size of the plate is considered
to be the length of the neutral line (plane) in the bending. This plane is supposed to be
located in the middle of the plate. The length of this line is calculated automatically taking
the bending radius into consideration and independent of the size of the subpanels when
generated (e.g. in case there happen to be gaps or overlaps). The compensation will add to
the nominal size of the plate if positive, reduce its size if negative. I.e. in a case where the
bending is found to cause a uniform stretching in the bend the plate will become too big
compared to the nominal length of the neutral plane and the compensation should be
negative.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Handling of Knuckled Panels

Example:

For a customer using two different bending tools with the bending radius 30 and 40
millimetres, a control file could be defined like this:

TYPE=9999

RADIUS=40

THICKNESS=10

15 0.4

30 0.6

90 0.8

THICKNESS=20

15 0.5

30 0.7

90 0.9

THICKNESS=999

15 0.6

90 1.0

TYPE=33

RADIUS=30

THICKNESS=10

15 0.5

30 0.7

90 0.9

THICKNESS=20

15 0.6

30 0.8

90 1.0

THICKNESS=999

15 0.7

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Handling of Knuckled Panels

Example:

90 1.1

If the bending type is omitted when generating the boundaries of the subpanel the type will
be set to 9999, i.e. the default bending type is 9999. If there is only one type of bending the
connection type need never be given, it is enough to indicate a connection across that
bounding.
The file may be checked for correctness by a subfunction of the hull utility inithull. If it is not
correctly built up, the check will identify the line where the first error occurs. The file should
then be corrected and the check rerun until the file is found to be correct.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Handling of Knuckled Panels

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Swaging (Small Corrugation)

2 Swaging (Small Corrugation)

2.1 General
Plate surfaces in ships must normally be stiffened for reinforcement and to prevent buckling.
The normal way of doing this is to weld stiffeners to the plate. Other means of getting the
same result is to corrugate the plate surfaces. There are two principal types of corrugations:
large-size knuckling, often used in bulkheads in tanks on the one side, smaller, stiffener-like
corrugations, often used in super structures, on the other. The latter type is called swaging
and the general principles and the customer control of it are described in this chapter.

2.2 Definition and Use of Swaging

Swages are by appearance and use very similar to small stiffeners welded to the plate.
However, they are generated as component types of their own via the SWAGE statement.
Details about how to generate swages can be found in Hull / Planar Modelling / Design
Language of Hull Modelling / Swage Statement.
Swages are formed by pressing the plate by a tool against a counter-part (a dye). Thus the
extension of the plate will become smaller in the fabrication process. Correspondingly, the
size of the plate before applying the swaging must be extended compared to the nominal
size. This is done automatically when extracting parts from the hull model in the ppanparts
module. The symmetry line of each swage (and optionally some additional information) is in
this process added to the plate as a marking line in a similar way as for ordinary stiffeners.

2.3 User Set-up of Swage Characteristics

2.3.1 General
The characteristics of the swaging may be very different between different yards. A certain
yard may also use multiple types of swages simultaneously. Therefore it is necessary that
each customer should be allowed to control all characteristics of the type of swages used by
him. This paragraph contains details about how this control is done.
All the characteristics of a customer's swaging are kept in a so called swage object which
should be stored in the structure data bank (SB_OGDB). The name of this object can be
selected freely but it must be given as an ip or default parameter in modules where the
swaging is used, e.g. in Planar Hull Modelling, Automatic Plane Part Generation
(ppanparts), etc. The swage object can be created in a subfunction of the inithull module.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Swaging (Small Corrugation)

2.3.2 Profile Types of Swages

Swages are generated in a statement of its own in a way very similar to stiffeners. Each
swage is identified by a type in the interval 100 - 110.
Regarding the type of swages used by a certain customer, different situations may occur:
1. There may be one type of swage with constant size (height, etc.).
2. There may be one main type of swage with a number of fixed sizes.
3. A customer may have different types of swaging, each of them with characteristics
according to (1) or (2).
Each main type of swage must be assigned a type of its own. Regarding swages of type (2)
there is a choice:
1. Either each size is assigned a profile type of its own, or
2. Each main type has one type with a number of predefined sizes (heights), registered in
the swage object.
In case (2), it is necessary to define both the type and a (registered) size when generating a
certain swage, in case a) it is enough to define the type.

Remark: The height specified for a swage is a nominal height and need not
necessarily correspond to the actual height of the swage (H in last figure).

2.3.3 Swages in Views

The swages is represented in both symbolic hull views and in 3D views. The representation
is controlled by the customer via the swage object.
In symbolic hull views in the plane of the plate the swaging is represented by one or several
lines which may be combined with a symbol, showing a symbolic cross section of the swage
profile. Sections of the plate show the true shape of the swages.
The available line types and symbols are identified by numbers as described below.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Swaging (Small Corrugation)

Line types (“code for plane views”):

=1 A dash-dotted line, combined with a symbol (if defined, see below)

_____ _ _____ _ _____ _ _____ _ _____ _ _____ _ _____

=2 Facing side: _____ _ _____ _ _____ _ _____ _ _____ _ _____ _ _____

Back side: _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ _____ ___

A dash-dotted line on the facing side, a dashed line on the back side, also
optionally combined with a symbol.

= 101 A symbolic representation of the swage (supposing e.g. a triangular swage):

Facing side: _____ _ _____ _ _____ _ _____ _ _____ _ _____ _ _____

_______________________________________________
_____ _ _____ _ _____ _ _____ _ _____ _ _____ _ _____

Back side: _______________________________________________

_____ _ _____ _ _____ _ _____ _ _____ _ _____ _ _____
_______________________________________________

= 102 A symbolic representation of the swage (supposing e.g. a swage with a section
as a trapezoid):

Facing side: ________________________________

_______________________________________________
_______________________________________________
________________________________

Back side: _______________________________________________

________________________________
________________________________
_______________________________________________

The following symbols can be used in combination with the line (see above).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Swaging (Small Corrugation)

Symbols:

Symbol No

0: No symbol

Example:
A line type 1 to be combined with symbol number 2 will result in the following representation
in a planar view.

The next figure shows a section view of a panel with swages (symbolic view). A 3D-view in
the direction of the swage will look the same.

2.3.4 Size Compensation for Swaging

All parts are in the model described to their nominal sizes, also swaged parts. In applying
the swages the extension of the plate is reduced, since part of the plate is “consumed” by
the swages. Consequently, when extracting the parts from the model their size must be
compensated for the amount of plate that goes into the swages.
The swage object contains information about the material addition caused by the swages.
There are the following options.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Swaging (Small Corrugation)

Figure 2:1. Height and width of swage.

• The amount of material addition is specified for one swage.

• It should be set up individually for each type (and size (H) in case of multiple sizes) of
swage.
• The addition can be defined as depending on the plate thickness.
• It is possible to define the width (D in the figure above) of a zone around the description
line of the swage that should be subject to deformation. This zone will then be
stretched accordingly when the plate parts are extracted.
The two lines restricting the zone of width D intersect the outer contour of the plate part.
After stretching the two intersection points along one edge will be connected by a straight
line. If the swage intersects the edge at an angle this will introduce small knuckles in the
edge contour.

2.3.5 Set-up File for Swaging

The swage object is created via an ASCII file with input written in a language based on the
general TIL format for interpretative input. The name of this file can be selected arbitrarily
(but should have a file extension .dat) and it is read and interpreted by a function of the hull
utility inithull. If the input can be interpreted without any errors the result will be a swage
object with the given name in the data bank associated with the environment variable
SB_OGDB. A list file will be created simultaneously containing the input and explicit error
messages, if any.
This list file will be handled as described in the documentation of inithull.
The input format has three different statement types:

SWEDGE Specifies the name of the swage object.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Swaging (Small Corrugation)

PROFILE Specifies a certain type of swage by a number to be used when

modelling swaged panels. It also defines certain parameters controlling
the views of the swage.

SIZE A certain swage type may occur in several predefined sizes (nominal
heights). This statement type specifies a certain size and some data
related to that size.

The structure of the input file is like this:

SWEDGE
PROFILE
SIZE
[SIZE]
[…]
[…]
PROFILE
SIZE
[…]]

• SWEDGE Statement

SWEDGE, <name>;

<name> Name of the swage object.

• PROFILE Statement

PROFILE, <type>
/VIEWING = <viewcode>
[/PLANE_SYMBOL = <symb_No>]
[/CROSS_SYMBOL = <symb_No>]
[MDIST=<distance>]
[MSIZE=<length>]
[MGAP=<length>]
;

<type> The number by which this type of swage is selected. It must be in

the interval 100-110.
VIEWING A code for the line types that should be used to represent swaging
in planar views of swaged panel. For allowed values, see above.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Swaging (Small Corrugation)

PLANE_SYMBOL Symbol to be used together with the line(s) in planar views of

swaged panels. For allowed values see above. If this attribute is
left out then no symbol will be set.
CROSS_SYMBOL Symbol to be used together with the line(s) in section views of
swaged panels. For allowed values see above. If this attribute is
left out then no symbol will be set.
(Is becoming obsolete for new swage handling).
MDIST Optionally it is possible to get extra markings at both sides of the
symmetry line of the swage at the edges of the plate. MDIST
specifies the distance of these from the symmetry line. See figure
below.
MSIZE Length of extra marking (right figure below).
MGAP Length of marking gap at boundary (right figure below).

• SIZE Statement
A certain swage type may occur in several (nominal) sizes. The "extra plate" required by the
swage is different for different sizes and may also differ with the plate thickness. The SIZE

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Swaging (Small Corrugation)

statement is valid for the type of the last preceding PROFILE statement and may occur in
any number.

SIZE, <height>
/WIDTH = <width>
/UPPER_WIDTH = <width1>
/R1 = <rad1>
/R2 = <rad2>
/LOWER_LIM = <thickn>
( /UPPER_LIM= <thickn>
/COMP = <compensation> ) 1 ... 25
;

<height> This is one nominal height of the current swage type (roughly equal
to H in the figure above - in most cases there is only one size per
swage type).
WIDTH The nominal width of the swage (dimension D in Figure 2:1.: Height
and width of swage.)
UPPER_WIDTH The nominal width of the upper part of the swage (dimension D1 in
Figure 2:1.: Height and width of swage.).
R1 The radius between the mould plane of the panel and the swage
(R1 in Figure 2:1.: Height and width of swage.).
R2 The radius in the upper part of the swage (R2 in Figure 2:1.: Height
and width of swage.).
LOWER_LIM The compensation for the swage may vary with the plate thickness
and is supposed to be constant within a certain thickness interval.
This is the lower limit of the first interval.
UPPER_LIM Upper limit of a thickness interval (and lower limit of the next).
COMP The size of the expansion of the plate for this swage in the current
plate thickness interval.

• Example File
The file below is an example of a swage set-up file with only one type with one size.

Example:

SWEDGE, 'SWEDGE_OBJ';

PROFIL, 100 /VIEWING=1

/PLANE_SYMBOL=1

/CROSS_SYMBOL=1;

SIZE, 75 /WIDTH=90

/LOWER_LIM=5

/UPPER_LIM=7 /COMP=68.1

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Swaging (Small Corrugation)

Example:

/UPPER_LIM=10 /COMP=68.9

/UPPER_LIM=12 /COMP=69.5;

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:9 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Swaging (Small Corrugation)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:10 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Shrinkage

Shrinkage

© Copyright 1974 to current year. i 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Shrinkage

© Copyright 1974 to current year. ii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Shrinkage Compensation

1 Shrinkage Compensation

1.1 Background
Each welding operation (and heating in general) in metal structures causes deformation
(shrinkage) of the structural elements involved. This means that if e.g. plate parts are
described to their nominal sizes they will in the fabrication and assembly process become
too small to fit. Thus when fabricating the parts they should already have been
compensated for the shrinkage so that the nominal dimensions are reached when the
assembly process is completed.
Hull has a facility for shrinkage compensation that allows a user to describe his model to
nominal dimensions but to extract parts which are expanded for the shrinkage. The purpose
of this chapter is to describe this facility, including how a yard's experience may be loaded
into a shrinkage compensation object for automatic or semi-automatic shrinkage
compensation.

1.2 General Characteristics

The shrinkage always takes place locally around the traces along which heating/welding
occurs. However, due to the complexity of the task to compensate for shrinkage, it is
inevitable that statistical and approximate methods must be used to some extent. AVEVA
Marine has two different options for evaluation and application of shrinkage compensation,
one is entirely statistical, the other supporting local application of the shrinkage to the extent
possible (i.e. compensation for the shrinkage locally along the trace where the heat is
applied). It is also possible to combine features from the two options in certain cases.
Below, and throughout this document, the following terms will be used:
• The shrinkage compensation is applied in certain directions, therefore it is important to
evaluate these directions (normally the direction is defined by the orientation of the
largest number of weld traces). There may be one or two trace directions, identified as
the primary direction and the secondary direction.
• The shrinkage in the direction perpendicular to the shrinkage direction (e.g.
perpendicular to stiffeners) is called perpendicular shrinkage.
• The shrinkage along the direction (e.g. along stiffeners) is called longitudinal shrinkage.
Longitudinal shrinkage compensation is always applied as a scaling factor.
The figure below shows a case where these entities are explained on panel level. This
figure is especially applicable for the statistical method of evaluating the shrinkage
compensation as explained below. The panel in the figure has only one shrinkage direction.
Independent partitions (pitches) have been calculated between stiffeners (d) and seams (D)
in the shrinkage direction.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Shrinkage Compensation

Figure 1:1. Shrinkage definitions.

The main characteristics of the two shrinkage evaluation methods are listed below in a
situation when they are operating in a fully automatic mode, i.e. when the user does not take
over any control.
1. The statistical method operates in the following way:
1. The most frequent stiffener direction (considering all the stiffeners in the panel) is
chosen as the shrinkage direction.
2. The most frequent partition (pitch) between the stiffeners in this direction is
evaluated and so is the partition between seams in this direction.
3. For each plate the following is done:
• Based on the plate thickness the amount of shrinkage for fillet welding is fetched
from a user defined shrinkage table. By dividing this with the pitch a scaling
factor is calculated by which the plate should be magnified perpendicularly to
the stiffeners.
• The same process is applied for the shrinkage caused by the butt welding along
the seams.
• These factors are combined to one which is used for scaling.
• Based on plate thickness and the pitch between stiffeners a shrinkage factor is
calculated by which the part will be scaled in the (longitudinal) direction of the
stiffeners.
This type of shrinkage compensation cannot be applied to shell plates.
Plane panel profiles are multiplied by the same scaling factor that has been used for
the plate (longitudinal scaling).
2. The method for local application of shrinkage has the following characteristics:
1. The total evaluation is on part level.
2. The evaluation of the shrinkage direction is done in a similar way as described
above, however all weld traces influence the evaluation, not only stiffener traces.
Moreover, depending on the trace pattern there may be two independent sets of
shrinkage directions. The corresponding compensations are applied independently
of each other.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Shrinkage Compensation

3. Shrinkage compensation for butt welding is applied locally along plate edges which
are butt welded.
4. Shrinkage compensation for fillet welding is applied locally along the weld trace (the
outer geometry of the part is actually split, translated and then combined again).
However, before doing so an analysis is made of the length of the trace compared
to the size of the part. Shrinkage is applied only if certain conditions are fulfilled.
These conditions can be set-up and modified by the customer.
5. When the plate part has several different plate thicknesses (which may happen in
"assembly parts" for panel lines) the shrinkage compensation will consider the
thickness where the stiffener is located on the part.
6. The longitudinal shrinkage compensation is applied as a scaling factor as described
under 1) above. However, all weld traces are considered in the evaluation of the
pitch and of the scaling factor.
7. The shrinkage compensation is applied according to the same principles for both
plane panel plates and shell plates.
8. The longitudinal shrinkage in plane panel stiffeners is applied so that the change in
length of the profile is identical to that of its marking trace in the plate part(s), even if
the trace should pass several plate parts.
9. A special local shrinkage compensation may be applied at the ends of butt welded
profiles (including shell stiffeners).
The automatic evaluation as described above may be partly overridden by manual input.
Both methods use currently the same shrinkage table.
The most important advantages of the second method are:
• It makes a much more detailed analysis of the weld traces and, therefore, the result
should be more reliable.
• The customer can control the conditions for application of shrinkage to a larger extent.
• The shrinkage is applied locally whenever possible which is important, especially in
combination the use of the GSD option for alignment of parts for butt welding.
• The shrinkage compensation may be applied also for shell plates in the same way as
for plane panel plates.
• Using the statistical method also areas with no weld traces might be subject to
shrinkage compensation (since in this method it is always applied as a uniform
scaling). This will not occur with the second method, at least not to the same extent.
• The shape of parts (e.g. if they are (close to) rectangular or triangular) will affect the
way the shrinkage is evaluated.
A disadvantage may be that the second method requires much more process power.
However, since the evaluation is executed in a background process that is not so critical.

1.3 Local Shrinkage Compensation Method

Above a description has been given of general characteristics of the method for local
application of shrinkage compensation. However, this method can be used to a somewhat
varying extent as controlled by a logical variable SBH_LOCAL_SHRINKAGE. Depending
on the parameters assigned to this variable the system will act differently. Allowed values
are:
EDGES_AND_FILLETS
EDGES
EDGES_BUTTS

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Shrinkage Compensation

1. SBH_LOCAL_SHRINKAGE = EDGES_AND_FILLETS
By this assignment the system is told to apply the local shrinkage method automatically
and to the full extent as described in general terms above. The weld traces of all kinds
of connected components, profiles as well as panels (plates), and brackets are
considered. So are also the welds along edges, both fillet welds and butt welds.
Flanges welded along edges will contribute to the longitudinal shrinkage.
It is possible to some extent for the user to take manual control of the shrinkage
compensation (via input in panel generation) and then the system will automatically
switch to case 2, i.e. as if SBH_LOCAL_SHRINKAGE=EDGES. This means that the
user takes over the full responsibility for the shrinkage compensation in the interior of
plates. Thus, it is not possible to combine manual control and automatic evaluation in
this case.
2. SBH_LOCAL_SHRINKAGE = EDGES
The shrinkage compensation along plate edges will be applied locally while the
compensation in the interior of the plate will be done according to the "statistical
method" as described above (however, without the contribution from the seams). To be
compensated for shrinkage an edge must have been supplied with a bevel definition.
However, the type of bevel (butt welding or fillet welding) is irrelevant.
3. SBH_LOCAL_SHRINKAGE = EDGES_BUTTS
Similar to the previous case, butt shrinkage will be applied locally only along edges with
bevel types for butt welding, i.e. one of the basic types 10, 20, 30, 33, 40, 41, 43, 50 or
51.
If the user (in cases 2 and 3) has taken control via any of the parameters M5 or M6 in
generation input then there will be a complete switch to the statistical method.

1.3.1 Fully Automatic Local Shrinkage Compensation

The main steps in the fully automatic evaluation of local shrinkage compensation have been
described above. However, there are certain preparatory steps taken before the actual
evaluation, e.g.
• "Fictitious" marking traces are created for all welds along the edges of the plate part.
They will be considered in the calculation of the shrinkage directions and will contribute
to the longitudinal shrinkage compensation.
• Curved marking traces will be replaced by straight ones if they have a restricted
curvature.
• Many (short) marking traces in line with each other will be combined to one for the
shrinkage evaluation.
Since somewhat different rules apply when a plate is rectangular compared to when it is
triangular it is necessary to check the plate in this respect. This is done in the following way,
see the figure below. The TOL_ variables used in the expressions below are default
parameters by which a customer can control this evaluation. They are described in detail in
a separate paragraph below.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Shrinkage Compensation

Figure 1:2. Surrounding rectangle in a simple case.

Calculate the extension of the plate contour in the shrinkage direction. Let the result be
called LEN. Calculate the extension of the plate in the direction perpendicular to the
shrinkage direction and let the result be called BRE. The area of the surrounding rectangle
is then LEN*BRE (=RA).
Calculate the area (=PA) of the plate (skip holes). In case PA>RA*TOL_RECT_AREA the
plate is supposed to be rectangular, otherwise in case PA<RA*TOL_TRIA_AREA the part
is supposed to be triangular.
If the shape of the plate is not classified according to previous conditions, check the
distances from the 4 corners of the circumscribed rectangle to the plate contour. Calculate
also the length (=D) of the diagonal of the same rectangle. If any of the 4 calculated
distances is larger than TOL_RECT_DIAG*D then the part is considered as triangular.
If still not classified, check D against length of the shortest edge of the rectangle (any of BRE
or LEN, BRE is used in the formula). If D>TOL_RECT_EDGE*BRE then the part is
considered as triangular.
If still not classified, assume rectangular shape.
A number of default parameters, all starting in TOL_ and used in expressions below,
control whether a certain marking trace should be considered to contribute to the shrinkage
or not. They have all certain predefined values which can be changed by the customer. The
figure below shows a rectangular plate with a number of marking traces of different lengths.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Shrinkage Compensation

Figure 1:3. Part with marking traces of different lengths.

Let LEN be the length of the two edges of the circumscribed rectangle parallel to the
shrinkage direction.
For rectangular plates check like this for all combined marking contours:
Project a trace on the shrinkage direction. Call the projected length PL<i>. Fictitious
marking traces will be skipped for perpendicular shrinkage. If PL<TOL_K1SFT*LEN then
the corresponding trace should not take part in the perpendicular shrinkage calculation,
otherwise it should. If PL<TOL_K1SFL*LEN then the marking line should not take part in
longitudinal shrinkage calculation, otherwise it should.
Calculate an average PL (=PLA) for the traces contributing to perpendicular shrinkage. If
PLA<TOL_K2SFT*LEN then skip the perpendicular shrinkage compensation altogether. If
PLA<TOL_K2SFL*LEN then skip longitudinal shrinkage compensation altogether.
For triangular plates the check is slightly modified.
Project traces as described above. Intersect the outer contour of the plate with a line parallel
to the shrinkage direction and through the midpoint of the current marking line. Calculate the
distance (=TOT<i>) between the utmost of these intersection points (normally there
should be two). If PL<TOL_K1SFT*TOT then the corresponding marking line should not
take part in the perpendicular shrinkage calculation, otherwise it should. If
PL<TOL_K1SFL*TOT then the marking line should not take part in longitudinal shrinkage
calculation, otherwise it should.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Shrinkage Compensation

Calculate an average PL (=PLA) for those marking contours that will take part in the
perpendicular shrinkage and an average of all TOT<i>:s (=TOTA). If
PLA<TOL_K2SFT*TOTA then skip perpendicular shrinkage compensation altogether. If
PLA<TOL_K2SFL*TOTA then skip longitudinal shrinkage compensation altogether.
Fictitious marking lines for welding along plate edges are considered in the evaluation of the
longitudinal shrinkage. Accept them only if their direction deviates less than 45 degrees
from the shrinkage direction and if PL>TOL_K2SFL*LEN (LEN is replaced by TOT for
triangular plates).
The longitudinal shrinkage will be applied proportionally all over the plate as a scaling in the
shrinkage direction. Some calculations are made to decide if there will be any longitudinal
shrinkage compensation or not.
This evaluation is done in the following way:
• Project the midpoints of all accepted traces on a line perpendicular to the shrinkage
direction.
• Sort the points along this line.
• DIST<i> is the distance between two adjacent points.
• The distance between the extreme points is denoted TOT_EXT.
If any DIST<i> exceeds TOL_MAXPART_IND or if the average of the DIST<i>:s
exceeds TOL_MAXPART_AVE then skip the longitudinal shrinkage compensation
altogether. Do the same if (BRE -TOT_EXT) / 2 > TOL_MAXPART_IND, i.e. if there
are big regions of the plate without any traces (for BRE, see figure above).
As already pointed out the length of stiffeners are modified so that they get the same
change of length as the marking traces they have caused on plate parts (even if a certain
stiffener should be the origin of marking traces in several plates parts).

1.3.2 Local Shrinkage Compensation at Plate Edges

Special attention should be given to shrinkage compensation along butt welded plate edges,
especially in a complicated situation when shrinkage compensation is applied in
combination with use of the GSD option and when the bevel code is associated with a gap
for welding. In order for the GSD to be used to position the plates in a correct distance from
each other the part extraction will behave as illustrated by the figures below under different
conditions.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Shrinkage Compensation

Figure 1:4. The effect of bevel gaps and shrinkage compensation at plate edge with GSD

1.4 Statistical Method for Shrinkage Compensation

General characteristics of the statistical shrinkage compensation method have been
described above.
When compensated according to this method the shrinkage directions and the pitches
between traces are evaluated on panel level. Depending on plate thickness and pitches
scaling factors will be evaluated and applied in directions perpendicular to and along the
shrinkage direction. These factors may vary with the plate thickness but the direction and
the pitch are common to all plate parts of a panel. Once the pitch has been evaluated the
scaling factors will be applied independently of the distribution of welding traces.
The stiffeners will be scaled using an average longitudinal scaling factor based on the
factors for the different plates.
All of the shrinkage direction, the pitches and the amount of shrinkage can be controlled by
the user on panel level, independently of each other, completely or partially overriding the
automatic evaluation.
Even if the local shrinkage method otherwise is used, manual control of any of the shrinkage
parameters will automatically cause a switch to the statistical method.

1.5 Local Shrinkage at Butt-welded Profile Ends

Local shrinkage can be applied at a profile end regardless of other types of shrinkage
compensation. It is applied to both plane panel profiles and shell profiles and also to profiles
converted to plates. There are two requirements for this:
1. The environment variable SBH_LOCAL_SHRINKAGE_PROF should be assigned the
name of the shrinkage object.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Shrinkage Compensation

2. The bevel code must be defined for the profile end and the basic bevel type must be
one of the main types for butt welding.
3. The values used for shrinkage compensation are fetched from table 2 of the shrinkage
object assigned to SBH_LOCAL_SHRINKAGE_PROF.

1.6 User Control of Shrinkage

1.6.1 Activation of Shrinkage Compensation

The user specifies that shrinkage should be applied for a certain panel in the modelling
phase (via the SHRINKAGE statement). He can either rely on an automatic evaluation of
the shrinkage compensation or control it manually. A mixture of automatic and manual
control can also be used.
Condition for the automatic evaluation is that a shrinkage object is available.
The modification of the part geometry takes place in the modules for automatic parts
generation.

1.6.2 Customer Set-up of Shrinkage Factors

The experiences of shrinkage is very different between different yards. Therefore it is
necessary that each customer should be allowed to control the parameters of the shrinkage
used by him. This is done in a so called shrinkage (compensation) object which should
be stored in the structure data bank (SB_OGDB). The name of this object can be selected
freely. It must be given as an ip or default parameter in programs where the shrinkage is
used, i.e. mainly in modules for automatic parts generation. The shrinkage object is
described in a single input language as described below and is established in a function of
the hull utility inithull.
In addition to creating the object this function outputs a list of input and of explicit error
messages, if any. The name of this file will be as described in the documentation of inithull.
The shrinkage object may contain at most three different types of tables:
1. The amount of shrinkage perpendicular to one weld trace of fillet type (e.g. of stiffeners)
as a function of the thickness of the plate against which the stiffener (etc.) is welded.
2. The amount of shrinkage perpendicular to butt welded joints (also as a function of the
plate thickness).
3. Multiple tables for the longitudinal shrinkage as a function of the plate thickness. Any
number of such tables may be created, each of them associated with a certain average
partition (pitch) between traces.
1) + 2) will be used in the perpendicular compensation shrinkage. The most suitable of the
tables of type 3) (i.e. the one with the pitch closest to that of the current panel or part) will be
used for the longitudinal shrinkage.
Any of the table of type 2) and 3) may be missing. In that case the corresponding
contribution to the shrinkage compensation will be zero (unless explicitly given by the user
in the modelling).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:9 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Shrinkage Compensation

1.6.3 Input data for creation of shrinkage objects

Input data for the creation of a shrinkage object is given via an ASCII file, using the
Interpretative Language (TIL). The possible statements and their usage are explained
below:

Statement Usage
SHRINKAGE Name of shrinkage object to be created
FILLET Statement for the creation of table 1 as explained above.
BUTT Statement for the creation of table 2 as explained above
LONGITUDINAL Statement for the creation of table 3 as explained above.

The input must start by a SHRINKAGE statement and may contain at most one occurrence
of each the other statement types in any order.

• SHRINKAGE Statement

Syntax:

SHRINKAGE, <name>;

<name> The name of the shrinkage object.

• FILLET and BUTT Statements

Syntax:

<type>,
(/UPPER_LIM=<u_lim> /COMP=<comp>) (1 ... 25)
;

<type> FILLET or BUTT.

UPPER_LIM The plate thickness up to which the associated shrinkage
compensation should be applied. The limit itself will be included in
the interval.
COMP Shrinkage compensation in mm for thickness up to UPPER_LIM.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:10 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Shrinkage Compensation

• LONGITUDINAL Statement

Syntax:

LONGITUDINAL,
( /PARTITION=<dist>
(/UPPER_LIM=<u_lim> /COMP=<comp>)(1 ... 25)) (1
... 25)
;

PARTITION The average partition between traces for which a certain table
should be used. Tables for at most 25 different partitions may be
created.
UPPER_LIM and COMP are used as in the FILLET/BUTT statement and are valid for
the table associated with the closest preceding PARTITION.

1.6.4 Example of an input file

SHRINKAGE,'TEST_SHR';
FILLET/UPPER_LIM=12/COMP=3/UPPER_LIM=22/COMP=5;
BUTT/UPPER_LIM=12/COMP=2/UPPER_LIM=22/COMP=4;
LONGITUDINAL/PARTITION=500
/UPPER_LIM=10/COMP=3/ UPPER_LIM=20/COMP=4
/PARTITION=1500
/UPPER_LIM=10/COMP=4/UPPER_LIM=20/COMP=5;

1.6.5 Conditions for Local Shrinkage Compensation

The shrinkage evaluation according the local method are based on a large number of
factors, tolerances, etc. that can be controlled by the customer in order to tune the
shrinkage compensation according to the experiences and needs of the specific yard. This
is done via a large number of default parameters. Their use has partly been explained in the
description of the local shrinkage method in section Local Shrinkage Compensation
Method. However, in the ppanparts and platemark default files the names used there should
be preceded by prefix SHRINKAGE_. A condition for proper operation is that the name of
the shrinkage object has been assigned to the ip SHRINKAGE. The default parameters are:
SHRINKAGE_FLA_LIM, <fla_lim>,
Flanges in holes will not participate in shrinkage evaluation if they are smaller than
<fla_lim> mm. Default value is 2000 mm.
SHRINKAGE_FLA_DIST, <fla_dist>,
Fictitious marking traces for flanges are created <fla_dist> mm from the boundary.
Default value is 5 mm.
SHRINKAGE_TOL_MAXPART_IND, <tol_maxpart_ind>,

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:11 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Shrinkage Compensation

If any individual stiffener pitch exceeds <tol_maxpart_ind> mm, no longitudinal

shrinkage should occur. Default value is 2000 mm.
SHRINKAGE_TOL_MAXPART_AVE, <tol_maxpart_ave>,
If the average stiffener pitch perpendicular to the shrinkage direction exceeds
<tol_maxpart_ave> mm, no longitudinal shrinkage should occur. Default value is 2000
mm.
SHRINKAGE_TOL_STR, <tol_str>,
Curved contours will be approximated by a straight line if the relation between the
"amplitude" of the contour and the length between the end points is less than <tol_str>.
Otherwise the contour will be excluded from the shrinkage calculation. Default value is 0.25.
SHRINKAGE_TOL_ANG, <tol_ang>,
Two lines are supposed to be parallel (and in principle possible to combine) if their direction
angle deviates less than <tol_ang> degrees. Default value is 5 degrees.
SHRINKAGE_TOL_DIST, <tol_dist>,
Two lines with the same direction in the sense of <tol_ang> are supposed to be able to
be combined if at least one of the end points of the second line is within a perpendicular
distance <tol_dist> mm from the line defined by the first line. Default value is 20 mm.
SHRINKAGE_TOL_DIR, <tol_dir>,
Two lines are considered to have the same direction if their directions deviate less than
<tol_dir> degrees. This tolerance is used for internal welding traces in the evaluation of
the shrinkage direction. Default value is 5 degrees.
SHRINKAGE_TOL_EDIR, <tol_edir>,
Corresponding tolerance to be used for "fictitious" marking traces, i.e. for edge welding.
Default value is 10 degrees.
SHRINKAGE_TOL_FACT, <tol_fact>,
The shrinkage direction is affected by both fictitious and actual traces. However, the real
ones have a higher "weight" in the evaluation. <tol_fact> specifies the weight factor.
Default value is 10.0.
SHRINKAGE_TOL_2ANG, <tol_2ang>,
Least allowable angle between the primary and secondary directions. Default value is 50
degrees.
SHRINKAGE_TOL_2LEN, <tol_2len>,
The accumulated length (L2) of the secondary direction must at least exceed
<tol_2len>*L1 to be considered (where L1 is the accumulated length of traces in the
primary direction). Default value is 0.5.
SHRINKAGE_TOL_RECT_AREA, <tol_rect_area>,
Factor for 'fullness check' of a plate part relative to min-max rectangle in the shrinkage
direction. Default value is 0.65.
SHRINKAGE_TOL_TRIA_AREA, <tol_tria_area>,
Ditto for acceptance as triangular plate. Default value is 0.55.
SHRINKAGE_TOL_RECT_DIAG, <tol_rect_diag>,
Used for check of distances from corners of min-max rectangle to plate part as a factor of
rectangle diagonal. Default value is 0.33.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:12 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Shrinkage Compensation

SHRINKAGE_TOL_RECT_EDGE, <tol_rect-edge>,
Ditto for comparison with length of shortest edge of min-max rectangle. Default value is
0.85.
SHRINKAGE_TOL_K1SFT, <tol_k1sft>,
Factor for relative length of an individual marking trace to be accepted for perpendicular
shrinkage. Default value is 0.2.
SHRINKAGE_TOL_K2SFT, <tol_k2sft>,
Factor for average length of marking curves for perpendicular shrinkage. Default value is
0.4.
SHRINKAGE_TOL_K1SFL, <tol_k1sfl>,
Factor for relative length of an individual marking trace to be accepted for longitudinal
shrinkage. Default value is 0.4.
SHRINKAGE_TOL_K2SFL, <tol_k2sfl>,
Factor for average length of marking curves to be accepted for longitudinal shrinkage.
Default value is 0.4.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:13 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Shrinkage Compensation

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:14 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Weld Compensation for Built Profiles

2 Weld Compensation for Built Profiles

2.1 Background
The welding involved in the assembly of built profiles causes a deformation that need be
compensated for in one way or another. AVEVA Marine has an option to automatically
compensate for this deformation by modifying the web of built profiles before they are cut.
The compensation is controlled by a profile weld compensation object that is set-up and
maintained by the customer.

2.2 General Characteristics

This facility can be applied to plane panel stiffeners, shell stiffeners (longitudinals and
transversals) and to planar panels (provided they have been generated with Geometry Type
90). The compensation will be added to the web plate and will only be made if:
• The web part is stored as a plate on the plate data bank
• The web does not have too heavy curvature (less that 3 degrees).
• The compensation is asked for in the set-up file controlling the conversion of profiles
into plates (see Conversion of Profiles to Plates).
The compensation will be applied as illustrated by the figure below where M1 is a
customisable value and M3 is calculated by the program:

Figure 2:1. Parameters of compensation.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Weld Compensation for Built Profiles

2.3 Set-up of Compensation Table

The compensation table is defined using an ordinary text file in TIL format with statements
as specified below:
COMPENSATION, <M1_value>/LENGTH=<length>/WIDTH=<width>;
CONSTANT,<constant_value>;
The COMPENSATION statement defines the M1 value for a certain length and width of a
profile web (see the table below).
The trace of the web is recreated as passing through 5 points. These points are:
• The original end points of the trace, moved the distance M1.
• The midpoint of the trace (not moved)
• Two additional points at a distance 1/4 of the total length from the ends. These two
points are moved the distance CONSTANT * M1. Default value of CONSTANT is 0.25.
The table shown below illustrates the result of the set-up:

5000 6000 7000 8000 9000 .....

350 M1=xx M1=xx M1=xx M1=xx M1=xx

400 M1=xx M1=xx M1=xx M1=xx M1=xx
420 M1=xx M1=xx M1=xx M1=xx M1=xx
450 M1=xx M1=xx M1=xx M1=xx M1=xx
500 M1=xx M1=xx M1=xx M1=xx M1=xx
.
.
.

2.4 Finding a Value in the Table

When finding a value in the table, the moulded length and the web height is used. The
interpretation of the table is always made in a way that values to be found are equal or
smaller than the given values and the length is always checked before the width.

2.5 Example of an Input File

CONSTANT,0.3;
COMPENSATION,1.5/LENGTH=5000/WIDTH=350;
COMPENSATION,1.8/LENGTH=6000/WIDTH=350;
COMPENSATION,2.1/LENGTH=7000/WIDTH=350;
COMPENSATION,2.4/LENGTH=5000/WIDTH=450;
COMPENSATION,3.3/LENGTH=6000/WIDTH=450;
COMPENSATION,3.8/LENGTH=8000/WIDTH=450;

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Weld Compensation for Built Profiles

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Weld Compensation for Built Profiles

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Alignment Marking

Alignment Marking

© Copyright 1974 to current year. i 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Alignment Marking

© Copyright 1974 to current year. ii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Reference Planes

1 Reference Planes

1.1 General
Reference planes, arbitrary placed in the ship, can be defined to be marked on individual
plates (planar and curved) for assembly purposes. The planes should be defined in an early
stage of the project, selected in the modelling phase and finally result in marking lines on the
plate parts.

1.2 Definition of Planes

Reference planes can be created by the customer and are stored in an object named
“__SBHM_PLANE_DEFINITIONS__” in the data bank connected to the environment
variable SB_OGDB. Furthermore, in cases where the plane intersects the shell, a reference
curve is created and stored in the data bank assigned to SB_CGDB. This is done to allow
the user to mark the planes on developed shell plates as well. The curve and the plane are
given the same name as defined by the user at definition (see below).
The reference planes are created from a file, containing input in TIL format. The name of
this file may be selected freely.

1.2.1 Syntax
The input file may contain two different types of statements, as described below.

CREATE_PLANE, <name_of_plane>
([/ARBITRARY =(X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2, Z2, X3, Y3,
[/PRINCIPAL Z3)] |
[/PLANE_NORM =('X' | 'Y' | 'Z', COORD)] |
=(X, Y, Z, N1, N2, N3)])
[/BOX =(X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2, Z2)]
[/SYM];
DELETE_PLANE, <name_of_plane>;

• Statement Parameter

<name_of_plane Arbitrary name given by the user. The resulting plane and curve
> will be given this name (for CREATE_PANEL) or a plane with this
name will be deleted (for DELETE_PLANE).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Reference Planes

• Statement Qualifiers
Note that the qualifiers ARBITRARY, PRINCIPAL and PLANE_NORM are mutually
exclusive, i.e. only one of them can appear in the same CREATE_PLANE statement. The
BOX qualifier can, however, be given together with any of the other qualifiers. The SYM
qualifier can be given together with PRINCIPAL=('Y', COORD) qualifier. All coordinate
values for planes can be given as relative coordinate, i.e. co-ordinates referring to frames,
waterlines, etc. are allowed. Because of this, coordinates in the input file are handled as
strings and must be surrounded by apostrophes also when true numerical coordinates are
given.
There is no limit to the number of statements that can be given in one input file.
/ARBITRARY=(X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2, Z2, X3, Y3, Z3)
This qualifier is used when an arbitrary plane is defined by three points.
/PRINCIPAL=('X' | 'Y' | 'Z', COORD)
This qualifier can be used for the definition of a plane parallel to one of the principal planes
by specifying a coordinate along its normal axis.
/SYM;
This qualifier can be used together with /PRINCIPAL=('Y', COORD) qualifier and
means that two planes will be created, principal plane parallel by axis and its reflected
image in center line.
/PLANE_NORM=(X, Y, Z, N1, N2, N3)
By using this qualifier, a plane is defined by giving a point and a normal vector to the plane.
/BOX=(X1, Y1, Z1, X2, Y2, Z2);
This qualifier restricts the defined plane to be within the box formed by the given coordinate
limits.

Example:

CREATE_PLANE, 'PLANE1'

/ARBITRARY=('123.5', '-12000', '0.0','1500.0', '0.0',

'0.0','0.0', '1221', '7100')

/BOX=('-10000.0', '-10000.0', '-10000.0','10000.0',

'10000.0', '10000.0');

CREATE_PLANE, 'PLANE2'

/PRINCIPAL=('X', 'FR38-227.5');

CREATE_PLANE, 'PLANE4'

/PRINCIPAL=('Y', '4000')
/SYM;

CREATE_PLANE, 'PLANE3'

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Reference Planes

Example:

/PLANE_NORM=('FR65', '-12000.0', '0.0', '0.0', '1.0',

'1.0');

DELETE_PLANE, 'PLANE1';

1.3 Environment
The created data is placed on the data bank connected to the environment variable
SB_OGDB (the planes) and to SB_CGDB (the curves).
All messages and printouts will be displayed on the screen.
Reference planes are created by the use of the hull utility program inithull.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Reference Planes

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Marks for Assembly (GSD)

2 Marks for Assembly (GSD)

2.1 General about GSD

This document is a detailed description of the use of assembly marking - GSD,
Gütesicherungsdreiecke (“Quality assurance triangles”) within the Hull application.
One of the major shipyard requirements is to reduce the need for additional fitting in the
assembly process and thus reduce the production time. One way of doing this is to increase
the accuracy of the fabrication at part level by introducing new technology and equipment.
Another method is to increase the accuracy in the assembly process, preferably at each
step so that the accumulated errors are reduced. An important means to facilitate improved
accuracy in both fabrication and assembly is the use of assembly marks (GSD). These are
used both for alignment in the assembly process and for checking of accuracy after
assembly.
There are two kinds of GSD:s. One is a symmetric triangle with 90 degree angle and the
other is a straight line. In general the illustrations in this document show, with few
exceptions, triangular GSD:s. It is not possible by looking at an isolated GSD to determine
which of the two "tips" or ends that is significant, e.g. for a marking line. Thus the use of a
GSD is defined by the context in which it occurs.

2.2 Environment

2.2.1 General
All GSD settings are defined in a file.
The name of this file shall be assigned to the environment variable SBH_GSD. A detailed
description of all available keywords in the default file is found in Control of GSD:s via a
Default File.

2.3 GSD's on Plane Panel Plate Parts

2.3.1 General
The GSD:s are first placed in their nominal position, i.e. in the position they should have had
if shrinkage could have been neglected entirely. The effect of the shrinkage compensation is
that the geometry will be enlarged so that the part after assembly will have its correct
geometry. The GSD:s will be affected by this geometry modification like all the rest of the
part.
Some consequences of the principle above:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Marks for Assembly (GSD)

• Along a seam for butt welding with gap the tip of triangles will be in the "gap zone", e.g.
the tip will be cut by the burner. See the figure below.
• The same is true for the end of a line marking. The end in the "gap zone" will be cut by
the burner. See the figure below.

Figure 2:1. GSD:s in "gap zone".

• Similarly, triangular GSD:s can be used for positioning of two plates relative to each
other by checking the distance between them. The effect is also that this distance after
welding will be less due to the shrinkage.
• The outer geometry of the plate part will be in the nominal position after welding.
If there is excess in the panel the GSD will be placed as though there had not been any
excess, i.e. in the nominal position.
In general, marking traces are either entirely replaced by a number of GSD:s or the marking
traces may be supplemented with GSD:s.
The distance between adjacent GSD:s along a trace that has been replaced entirely by
GSD:s must not exceed the distance given by the default parameter MAXDIST. The "inner"
GSD:s will be equally spaced and triangular GSD:s is facing towards the centre of the
marking trace.
Short marking traces may be represented by both GSD:s at the ends and the actual trace
curve to avoid confusion. This will occur when the length of the marking is shorter than the
distance given by the default parameter TRACE_LIM. By setting a very large value to this
parameter one will get the result that all traces will be marked. If the trace is wanted there
will not be any "inner" GSD:s.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Marks for Assembly (GSD)

GSD:s are not added at all to marking traces with a length less than three times the value of
CORNER_DIST. The figure below shows complete marking information for a stiffener with
different parameter settings (triangular GSD:s used).

Figure 2:2. GSD:s along Marking Trace.

It should be noted that in some circumstances large parts of a GSD along an edge may be
removed (or even disappear entirely) e.g. in case of bevelling, especially if combined with
chamfer. In such a case the marking will have to be amended or added by the workshop.
See the figure below.

Figure 2:3. GSD in Chamfer Area.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Marks for Assembly (GSD)

The following paragraphs describe the different positions where GSD:s are evaluated, in
most cases quite automatically.

2.3.2 Plate Corners

One GSD is placed at the predefined distance (CORNER_DIST) from the corner of the
plate along each of the boundaries/seams that meet in the corner. The GSD:s are placed in
the nominal position, disregarding excess, gaps, etc. The orientation of the GSD is
perpendicular to the boundary curve. In case of a triangular GSD the triangle is facing away
from the corner. The figure below shows a plate edge to be fillet welded against a base
plate.

Figure 2:4. GSD:s at Plate Edge.

The position of a GSD is affected differently by notches and cutouts in the corner depending
on the default USE_WELD_TRACE.
GSD:s will only be placed on boundaries defined by reference to the surrounding structure,
a hull curve, a stored plane or any edge where WELD is defined, i.e. free edges will not get
GSD:s. This can be overridden by the default GSD_AT_FREE. The figure below shows a
case where GSD:s have been set in all corners.

Figure 2:5. GSD:s in all Corners.

GSD:s will not be placed at plate corners where the boundaries intersect at 180 degrees.
At the intersection of the boundary or a seam with an internal plate seam, one GSD will be
placed on the seam only (i.e. at T-junctions). This can be overridden by the default
GSD_AT_T. The figure below shows the effect of this parameter.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Marks for Assembly (GSD)

Figure 2:6. The effect of GSD_AT_T.

GSD:s will not be placed on boundaries with flanges or where the geometry of the plate
edge does not allow it.
GSD:s will not be placed on boundaries defined by reference to a profile on another panel
(e.g. profile cross section).
GSD:s will not be set on inner seams for assembly parts (for the panel line).

2.3.3 Stiffener Traces

A stiffener trace will be marked with GSD:s at the predefined distance (CORNER_DIST)
from the ends of the trace. If USE_WELD_TRACE=YES, then the distance will be measured
from the point where the endcut contour starts at the trace. These GSD:s will be placed on
the mould line side of the trace and TRIANGLES will be turned towards each other. They
match the corresponding GSD:s on the stiffener itself.
If USE_WELD_TRACE=NO then the distance will be measured from the end of the mould
line but moved in the vertical direction to start at the endcut contour. See the figure below.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Marks for Assembly (GSD)

Figure 2:7. The effect of USE_WELD_TRACE.

Depending on the length of the trace and the size given by the parameter MAXDIST,
additional GSD:s may be added according to the general rule above. These "inner" GSD:s
will not have any corresponding marks on the stiffener.
There are no inner GSD:s on traces for stiffeners attached to assembly parts (for panel
lines).
If the position of the trace on the part is such that any GSD on the trace lies outside the part,
the marking of this trace is replaced with a solid line with end tags showing the position of
the end GSD:s. See the figure below.

Figure 2:8. GSD:s replaced by End Tags.

2.3.4 Abutting Panels

A trace for an abutting panel is calculated taking any notches at the corner of the panel into
consideration if the keyword USE_WELD_TRACE is set to YES. If set to NO it is the
moulded trace of the intersecting panel that is calculated.
The trace shows the marking side of the intersecting panel as defined by the parameter
SBH_MARKING_SIDE.
The GSD:s along this trace are added in the same way as for stiffeners. This means that the
end point GSD:s will match the corresponding marks along the limit of the intersecting
panel.
The GSD:s will be placed against the trace on the side opposite to the material of the
abutting panel. If the position of the trace on the part is such that any GSD on the trace lies
outside the part, the marking of this trace is replaced with a solid line with end tags showing
the position of the end GSD:s (see figure above where a part with a weld trace for an
abutting plate is matching the GSD:s on the abutting part).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Marks for Assembly (GSD)

2.3.5 Bracket Traces

A trace for an abutting bracket is calculated taking the notches at the corners of the bracket
into consideration. The bracket may be on the current or an adjacent panel.
The GSD:s along this trace will be added in the same way as for stiffeners (see also the
description for the parameter MARK_BRA_TRACE). On the bracket itself currently two
GSD:s (one at each end) will be added along each bracket arm. This will be done
independently of the number of GSD:s that have been added to the trace.
If the position of the trace on the part is such that any GSD on the trace lies outside the part,
the marking of this trace is replaced with a solid line with end tags showing the position of
the end GSD:s (cf. Figure 2:8.: GSD:s replaced by End Tags.).

2.3.6 Ship Centre Line

For plate parts over the ship centre line a "double" GSD will be added at a distance of
CORNER_DIST from the intersections of the nominal boundaries and the ship centre line.
These marks are placed on both sides of the plate.

2.3.7 Shell Boundaries

Panels with notches for seams/butts in the shell plating will have one GSD on either side of
the seam/butt to be used for the alignment of the shell plate. This type of GSD is only placed
along a shell curve.
The distance of the GSD from the seam/butt is defined by the variable (SEAM_DIST).
These marks will be placed on the marking side of the panel (see the figure below).

Figure 2:9. GSD:s for Seams/Butts in the Shell.

2.3.8 Manual Setting

As there may be a need for additional reference marks along the boundaries of a panel, the
interactive modelling function for the plane panel has been supplied with a facility to allow
the user to specify this.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Marks for Assembly (GSD)

Syntax:

MAR,LIM = <lim_no>;

LIM defines the limit along which reference marks are to be added
<lim_no>::=<integer>

The GSD:s are placed along panel limits and are oriented towards one of the three principal
axes.
The spacing between GSD:s in the direction of the y- and z- axes is defined by the variable
INTERVAL and the positions are calculated as even multiples, measured from the ship
centre line and base line, respectively. Reference marks in the direction of the x-axis are
placed at frame locations.
The evaluated GSD:s are displayed during modelling but will not be part of the drawing.
These marks are placed on both sides of the plate.

2.3.9 Physical Marking of GSD:s

It is possible for GSD:s to be marked using either equipment which supports GSD macros or
ordinary burning machines without such support.
For marking with ordinary burning machines the GSD:s will be expanded into explicit
geometry. The GSD:s are treated as a type of marking and as such they are handled
together with other types of marking, e.g. normal marking traces. However, if there is a
combination of a solid line and a triangular GSD:s along that line then the line and the
GSD:s are combined into one geometry.
Where GSD macro handling is available, the GSD:s and the line will be treated as
independent entities. The optimization of the marking sequence is a feature of the
implementation of the GSD:s.

2.4 GSD’s on Shell Plates

The description in this section is valid only for plates produced by shell plate development.
The GSD marking on developed plates is similar to the marking in plates of the internal
structure.
A marking trace on a developed plate is always represented by both a solid line and GSD:s
as described in detail below.

2.4.1 Shell Plate Corners

One GSD is placed at the predefined distance (CORNER_DIST) from the corner of the
plate along each of the edges. The GSD:s are placed in the nominal position, disregarding
excess, gaps, etc. The orientation of the GSD is perpendicular to the boundary curve and
facing away from the corner.

2.4.2 Shell Stiffener Traces

GSD:s will be placed along profiles traces if marked on the developed plate. The GSD:s will
be placed at a predefined distance (CORNER_DIST) from the profile endcut if

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Marks for Assembly (GSD)

USE_WELD_TRACE=YES, otherwise from the profile end (cf. stiffeners in section Stiffener
Traces). The orientation of the GSD is perpendicular to the profile trace and triangular
GSD:s are facing away from the end.

2.4.3 Traces from Internal Structure

GSD:s will be produced for intersecting plane panels if they are marked on the developed
plate. The GSD:s will be placed at a predefined distance (SEAM_DIST) from the
intersection of the nominal boundary and the panel trace. The orientation of the GSD is
perpendicular to the panel trace.
If the panel does not intersect the boundary, the GSD will be placed at the predefined
distance (CORNER_DIST) from the end of the trace.

2.4.4 GSD’s along Shell Plate Edges

Additional GSD:s will be placed along the nominal edges of the developed plate if either the
variable EDGE_ON is set, or the plate belongs to the block given by the variable
EDGE_BLOCK. The GSD:s will be placed at the intersection of the nominal edge and the
(imaginary) traces of each longitudinal and transverse frame intersecting the plate. The
GSD:s are aligned along the trace and placed on the marking side of the plate (see the
figure below).

Figure 2:10. The effect of EDGE_ON.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:9 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Marks for Assembly (GSD)

2.4.5 Centre Line

Centre line GSD:s will be placed on the plate if the curve defined as the centre line
(CL_NAME) intersects the plate. A "double" GSD will be added at a distance of 50 mm from
the intersection of the nominal boundary and this curve.
These marks are placed on the marking side of the plate.

2.4.6 GSD’s in Plate Nesting

In the nesting system, GSD:s are handled in the same way as other marking traces. In case
the shape of the GSD is TRIANGLE and both the GSD:s and the marking trace are available
for a marked item, they will automatically be combined into one contour, with only one
marking start necessary.
In the Panel Line module (PLCM), GSD:s are always handled as separate marking contours
and will not be combined with the marking traces. This is due to the features of the post
processor for the panel line.

2.5 GSD’s in Profiles

2.5.1 Plane Panel Stiffeners

One GSD is added at each end of the stiffener at a fixed distance (CORNER_DIST). If
USE_WELD_TRACE=YES the distance is measured from the starting point of the endcut
contour. Otherwise from the stiffener end.
The GSD:s are placed on the moulded side of the stiffener web.

2.5.2 Plane Panel Welded Flanges

Welded flanges will not be supplied with any GSD:s. There are several reasons for this, e.g.
small profile dimensions, asymmetric flanges, narrow angles in endcut geometry will mean
that the GSD:s often would be positioned outside the actual profile. Instead of GSD:s a
special marking for flanges is implemented as shown in the figure below. This marking
defines the transverse and longitudinal position of the plate edge as well as the material
orientation using the contour shown in the picture below

Figure 2:11. Marking on Welded Flange.

Line "A" defines the moulded line of the attached panel. The line "B" defines the material
side (direction of line "B" = into material of panel). The corner between "A" and "B"
corresponds to the position of the associated GSD on the panel (see the figure below).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:10 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Marks for Assembly (GSD)

Figure 2:12. Connection between GSD and Flange Marking.

The length of "A" and "B" is controlled by the parameters FLA_A and FLA_B. The marking
will be placed at a distance (CORNER_DIST) from the nominal flange ends.
If, for some reason, the marking extends outside the raw profile edges, then line "A" and/or
"B" will be omitted from the marking geometry. If the flange marking from both ends of the
flange profile overlap, then measure "A" will be shortened accordingly.
The marking on the flange profile will be on the side that is welded to the plate edge. The
GSD on the plate will be on the side defined by SBH_MARKING_SIDE.
In case the flange extends outside the plate edge, the marking will be placed at a distance
(CORNER_DIST) from the plate corner. Notches in the plate geometry will be taken into
consideration if the keyword USE_WELD_TRACE=YES (see the figure below).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:11 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Marks for Assembly (GSD)

Figure 2:13. Flange Marking and GSD at Corner Notch.

2.5.3 Shell Profiles

GSD:s are added to shell profiles in the same way as for plane panel stiffeners.

2.6 GSD Customising

2.6.1 General
The environment variable SBH_MARKING_SIDE controls on which side of the plates the
GSD:s should be marked.

SBH_MARKING_SIDE MOULDED GSD:s are marked on moulded side of plate.

This is the default value when
SBH_MARKING_SIDE is not defined.
BRACKET GSD:s are marked on the side with most
attached brackets.

PROFILE GSD:s are marked on the side with most

attached profiles.

ALL GSD:s are marked on the side with most

attached brackets and profiles.
In all cases, if not possible to determine any
side, the marking side is selected as the side
in the positive direction of the w-axis of the
plate.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:12 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Marks for Assembly (GSD)

The environment variable SBH_MARKING_SIDE is by default set to MOU(LDED). In this

case the selection of the marking side of the plate for GSD:s is made as follows:
If the moulded plane coincides with one of the plate surfaces then that surface is the
marking surface.
If the moulded plane does not coincide with a plate surface then:
• the marking surface is the panel surface having the largest number of attached profiles
with the same lowest assembly name as the panel itself, but...
• if there are no such profiles on the panel, or an equal number on each side, then the
marking surface is selected as the positive direction of the w-axis of the panel (i.e.
normally top, forward or starboard).
A single plane panel can have its marking side defined via the keyword GMS in the PANEL
statement. See also Hull / Planar Modelling / Design Language of Hull Modelling / Panel
Statement / Normal Panel Syntax. If given, it overrides the value given to
SBH_MARKING_SIDE.
Next to GMS, any defined swedging or swaging will also override the value given to
SBH_MARKING_SIDE. The first set swedging (or swaging) will be searched for and, if
found, the marking side will be the one opposite to the defined swedging (or swaging) side.

2.6.2 Control of GSD:s via a Default File

The default file is a normal ASCII file, created by any standard editor. The complete file
name must be assigned to SBH_GSD to be available to the function. The file shall be built
up by keywords (as described below) followed by an equal sign and a value. One keyword
shall be written per line and all information after the first blank character is interpreted as a
comment.

Name Default Description

BKT_MIN1 300 Bracket arms less or equal to the assigned value

will get no GSD's at all.

BKT_MIN2 2000 Bracket arms less or equal to the assigned value

will get only one GSD. The GSD to be marked is
the one closest to the origin of the bracket.

CL_NAME none Name of a curve to be used as centreline when

adding CL marking to developed plates. If not
wanted, then this keyword should not be given
(i.e. none).

CORNER_DIST 50 Distance of GSD to corner.

BRA_CORNER_DIST 50 Distance from corner of bracket to GSD.

FLA_CORNER_DIST 50 Distance from corner of flange to GSD.

STI_CORNER_DIST 50 Distance from corner of stiffener to GSD.

BUILT_STI_CORNER_ 50 Distance from corner of built profile flange to

DIST GSD.The default value for the above four
keywords is the value of CORNER_DIST.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:13 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Marks for Assembly (GSD)

Name Default Description

EDGE_BLOCK none Name of a single block for the plates of which

reference marks should be added along the
edges of developed plates. If not wanted, then
this keyword should not be given (i.e. none).

EDGE_ON NO Flag controlling if reference marks should be

added along the edges of all developed plates or
not. Possible values are YES and NO.

EXCL_CORNER_SHELL NO GSD:s are normally defined in the corners of all

shell plates. The definition of these GSD:s can be
excluded by setting this parameter to YES.

EXCL_PLANAR_BSEAM NO GSD:s are normally defined in the corners of

planar plates along all boundary seams, unless it
is a free side without a bevel definition. The
definition of these GSD:s can be excluded by
setting this parameter to YES.

EXCL_PLANAR_ISEAM NO GSD:s are normally defined in the corners of

planar plates along all internal seams. The
definition of these GSD:s can be excluded by
setting this parameter to YES.

GAP 0 Distance between the GSD reference point and

the plate edge, see the figure below.

Figure 2:14. The effect of GAP

GSD_AT_FREE NO GSD:s at free edges on plate are by default not

displayed. This can be changed by setting this
keyword to YES (see figure above).

GSD_AT_T NO GSD:s at T-junctions at plate edges are by

default not displayed. This can be changed by
setting this keyword to YES (see figure above).

FLA_A 500 Flange marking. Length of marking line

defining the moulded line of the attached web
panel.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:14 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Marks for Assembly (GSD)

FLA_B 20 Flange marking. Length of the marking line

defining the material direction of the attached
web panel.

FLA_LIM 1000 This limit defines the maximum length of a

flange for which only one marking will be
necessary.

FLA_SHAPE HOOK Controls if a flange should be marked as a

hook (HOOK) or if the panel thickness should
be indicated with two parallel lines (TRUE), or
marked with a combination of a hook and a
thickness marking (HOOK_THICKNESS).

BUILT_FLA_SHAPE THICKNESS Controls if the flange of a built profile should be

marked with two parallel lines indicating the
thickness of the web (THICKNESS) or marked
with a hook (HOOK) or marked with a
combination of a hook and a thickness marking
(HOOK_THICKNESS).

INTERVAL 1000 Interval length between GSD:s for manual

insertion along panel boundaries.

MARK_BKT_PROF YES Parameter controlling if profiles on brackets

shall be marked with GSD:s

MARK_BRA_TRACE YES Parameter controlling GSD:s along bracket

traces. YES will cause the GSD:s along
bracket traces always to be marked. NO will
remove all GSD:s for bracket traces.
YES_NOALIGN will mark GSD:s along bracket
traces except if the bracket trace in line with
(and connected) to a stiffener trace. See the
figure below.

MARK_FLA YES The parameter controls the generation of

GSD.s for flanges. Both the face plates of built
profiles as well as panel face plates are
considered.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:15 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Marks for Assembly (GSD)

Figure 2:15. The effect of MARK_BRA_TRACE

MARK_WHEN_NOTCH NO Allows the user to decide what to do in cases when a

corner GSD and a notch coincide. Options are either to
skip the GSD (NO) or to draw the GSD above the notch
(YES). See the figure below.

Figure 2:16. The effect of MARK_WHEN_NOTCH

MAX_DIST 2000 Maximum distance between internal GSD:s along a

marking trace.

NOMARK_BKT none The designation of a bracket that should not

generate any GSD:s. The keyword can be repeated
any number of times.

NOMARK_BKT_ANGLE -1.0 If the angle between the arms A and B of a bracket is

close to the assigned value (+-0.5 degrees), then no
GSD marking should be set.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:16 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Marks for Assembly (GSD)

NOMARK_CON none Connection code of stiffener that should not

generate a GSD in the corresponding end of the
stiffener. This keyword can be repeated any number
of times.

NOMARK_PL_ANGLE -1.0 If the angle BETWEEN TWO SEAMS IN A PLANAR

PLATE CORNER is close to the assigned value (+-
0.5 degrees), then no GSD marking should be set.

NOMARK_PR 0.0 If the marking trace of a stiffener is shorter or equal

to the parameter value, then no GSD marking should
be set.

PERCENT_MTRL 0 Percent of size of the GSD that the GSD shall be

moved in the direction of the material on marked
traces. If for example SHAPE=LINE, SIZE=100 and
PERCENT_MTRL=25 then the GSD line will be
moved 25 mm from the trace line into the material of
the member welded along the trace. Only valid for
marking trace. See the figure below

Figure 2:17. The effect of PERCENT_MTRL

PL_LIM 0.0 This parameter affects all plate edges that cause a marking
trace. If the length of such an edge is shorter or equal to the
given limit value, then only one GSD will be presented
(corner GSD and GSD at marked trace). The GSD that is
presented is the one in the end closest to BOTTOM, AFT or
shell of SB side. This type of reduction cannot be used
together with the REDUCE_DIR keywords (see the figure
below).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:17 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Marks for Assembly (GSD)

Figure 2:18. The effect of PL_LIM

PL_LIM2 0.0 This parameter affects all plate edges that

cause a marking trace. If the length of such an
edge is shorter or equal to the given limit value,
then only one GSD will be presented on the
marked trace and no corner GSD's at all on the
abutting plate. The GSD that is presented is
the one in the end closest to BOTTOM, AFT or
shell of SB side. This type of reduction cannot
be used together with the REDUCE_DIR
keywords.

PR_LIM 0.0 This parameter affects all profiles. If the length

of a profile trace line is shorter or equal to the
given limit value, then only one GSD will be
presented on both the plate and along the
profile trace. The GSD that is presented is the
one in the end closest to BOTTOM, AFT or
shell of SB side. This type of reduction cannot
be used together with the REDUCE_DIR
keywords.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:18 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Marks for Assembly (GSD)

REDUCE_DIR_X BOTH Keyword allowing a customer to reduce the

number of GSD:s at corners and along
marking traces for intersecting panels and
profiles in all cases where the main direction of
the marking trace is in the x direction of the
ship. Default value is BOTH (no reduction) and
the other two possibilities are AFT and FWD,
instructing the program to add GSD:s only at
the end of the trace in the specified direction.

REDUCE_DIR_Y BOTH Keyword allowing a customer to reduce the

number of GSD:s at corners and along
marking traces for intersecting panels and
profiles in all cases where the main direction is
in the y direction of the ship. Default value is
BOTH (no reduction) and the other two
possibilities are PS and SB, instructing the
program to add GSD's only at the end of the
trace in the specified direction.

REDUCE_DIR_Z BOTH Keyword allowing a customer to reduce the

number of GSD:s at corners and on marking
traces for intersecting panels and profiles in all
cases where the main direction is in the z
direction of the ship. Default value is BOTH (no
reduction) and the other two possibilities are
BOT and TOP, instructing the program to add
GSD:s only at the end of the trace in the
specified direction.

SEAM_DIST 100 Distance from GSD to seam/butt along hull

curve as a boundary of a plane panel.

SHAPE TRIANG Shape of GSD, possible values are TRIANGLE

LE and LINE.

SIZE 50 Leg length of triangle or length of line.

TRACE_LIM 3500 Maximum length limit for marking trace to be

represented by both trace and GSD:s. Valid for
ordinary plate parts (see also
TRACE_LIM_PLCM below).
TRACE_LIM_PLCM 3500 Length limit for marking trace to be
represented by both the trace and GSD's. Valid
for assembly parts - Panel Line Control
Modules (see also keyword TRACE_LIM
above).

USE_WELD_TRACE YES Allows the user to select if the weld trace or the
moulded trace shall be marked and be used in
positioning of GSD's. Possible values are YES
and NO (see the figure below).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:19 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Marks for Assembly (GSD)

Figure 2:19. The effect of USE_WELD_TRACE.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:20 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
(Fibre) Reinforced Plastic Option (FRP)

(Fibre) Reinforced Plastic Option (FRP)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. i 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
(Fibre) Reinforced Plastic Option (FRP)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. ii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
(Fibre) Reinforced Plastics Option (FRP)

1 (Fibre) Reinforced Plastics Option (FRP)

1.1 General
FRP (Fibre Reinforced Plastics), sometimes also called GRP (Glass Fibre Reinforced
Plastics) is a technique to design and construct normally rather small vessels by replacing
the standard metal plates and profiles (made of steel or aluminium) by laminated plastics.
The plates consist of a relatively light and fragile core material that is reinforced by several
layers of fibre carpets glued together to form a tensile and endurable coating, normally on
both sides of the plates. Originally the carpets were made of glass fibres but an alternative
is to use coal fibres that are lighter and stronger.
There are several important differences compared to standard ships, e.g.:
• The thickness of plates is much larger that in a steel ship. This means that if the plate
thickness can be neglected in certain cases, it cannot for vessels built in FRP material
(e.g. in drawings, in calculating volumes, etc.).
• A consequence is that project settings must be made to consider plate thickness when
modelling planar panels and shell profiles.
• Other ships have uniform material qualities whereas densities vary between layers in a
FRP sandwich.
• The amount of stiffening is less than in steel or aluminium ships since the FRP plates
are very stiff in themselves and the stiffening that is there is of a partly different type.
• Where members of standard ships are fillet welded together FRP members are
connected in a different way, e.g. by a combination of beads and fibre tissue.
• In an FRP vessel there are fewer parts and not so many small details like notches,
clips/collars etc.

1.2 Special FRP Features in Hull

Different areas are affected by setting a project to FRP mode. Below is a brief description of
the differences compared to a steel project.

1.2.1 Modelling
Additional features of the planar hull modelling input language are described in detail in
User Guide Hull Detailed Design / Planar Modelling / Design Language of Hull Modelling /
Special FRP Additions. The component types affected by the FRP setting are plates,
stiffeners, holes and flanges. Moreover, beads are available as an additional component
type in an FRP project (accompanied by the corresponding BEAD statement in the input
language).
The Statement Wizard will adapt as well in an FRP project.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
(Fibre) Reinforced Plastics Option (FRP)

Laminate information may be set for shell plates and shell stiffeners, both interactively and
in the XML input files used in batch modelling of curved hull.
In both planar and curved hull, the concept of material quality refers to the core material in
an FRP project.

1.2.2 Views
Symbolic views generated in an FRP project differ to some extent from those in a steel
project.

• Panel sections
Sections of panel plates will show the thickness including the thickness of the lamination.

• Stiffeners
A top view of a stiffener contains two lines indicating the actual width of the profile (as
opposed to the single mould line in a steel project). The two lines will be dashed for a profile
placed on the upper side of the panel in the view and dash-dotted for a profile on the
opposite side. No material or endcut symbols of the profile are drawn.
In a section view of a stiffener, attached beads will be drawn as well.

• Holes
Lamination along the edge of a hole is indicated by a dashed contour parallel to and outside
the actual hole contour.

• Beads
A bead in the view plane will be indicated by a dashed line parallel to the boundary along
which it is defined.
In a section view, the actual cross-section shape of the bead will be drawn.
A bead is drawn in a 3D view as well.

1.2.3 Parts Splitting

Plate thickness values in split parts include both the core material and laminate on both
sides.
The ppanparts module (splitting of planar parts) moreover calculates and outputs areas of
core material and of fibre carpets, considering the number of layers of the lamination.

1.2.4 Weight and Centre of Gravity (WCOG)

Calculations of weight and centre of gravity take into consideration both core material and
laminate.

1.2.5 FRP Material List

The Hull PPI menu contains an additional function for producing material lists relevant to an
FRP project.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
(Fibre) Reinforced Plastics Option (FRP)

1.3 Setting up an FRP Project

An AVEVA Marine project can be setup to enable special features for design and production
of a vessel built with FRP techniques. The setup consists of three parts:
• Setting the project to FRP mode (either FRP only or mixed steel/FRP)
• Defining blocks as steel or FRP (relevant only in a mixed project)
• Defining laminate types

1.3.1 Setting the Project to FRP Mode

Basic customisable FRP settings can be defined via the hull utility program Inithull. The
function requires an input file written in TIL format described later in this text. The settings
are stored in the OGDB data bank in an object with the fixed name
__SBH_GRP_OBJECT__. This object is required if SBH_GRP is set (see below).
The setting of the environment variable SBH_GRP controls whether FRP is enabled in a
project:
• If SBH_GRP is set to MIXED, the project may contain both steel and FRP objects.
Every block is then defined to contain either steel or FRP, so the two may not be mixed
within the same block.
• If SBH_GRP is set to any other value, the project may contain FRP objects only.
• If SBH_GRP is not set, the project may contain steel objects only.

1.3.2 Defining Blocks as Steel or FRP

In a mixed project the type of panel (steel or FRP) is defined by placing them into either a
steel or FRP block. When creating a block in mixed mode each block is defined as either
steel or FRP. Interactively the block type is defined in the function Project > Block > Edit.
When creating blocks in Inithull, add either, FRP or STEEL (without quotes) to the end of
each block statement in the csv input file.

1.3.3 Defining Laminate Types

The FRP object is created via a function of hull utility program Inithull. It is described in
input written in a language based on the Interpretative Language (TIL). The general
principles for this language are described in User Guide Hull Basic Features and Concepts /
Basic Features / Getting Started / The Interpretative Language (TIL).
The version of TIL used for creation of the FRP object has three different statement types:

LAMINATE_PLANE The LAMINATE_PLANE statement defines different

laminates in plates, i.e. it is surface oriented

LAMINATE_BEAD The LAMINATE_BEAD statement defines laminates used

for beads along planar panel boundaries.

LAMINATE_FLANGE The LAMINATE_FLANGE statement defines flange

laminates.

The three statement types may occur in an arbitrary order in the input file. There may be a
maximum of 99 statements of each type.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
(Fibre) Reinforced Plastics Option (FRP)

• LAMINATE_PLANE Statement
Syntax:

LAMINATE_PLANE, <type_no_plane>
/ NAME = '<name>'
/ PERCENT_OF_FIBER = <fiber>
/ DESIGNATION = '<designation>' (1…11)
/ FABRIC_WEIGHT = <fiber_weight>
(1…11)
/ TOTAL_THICKNESS = <total_thickness>
/ TOTAL_WEIGHT = <total_weight>;

<type_no_plane> An integer number in the interval 1-99 that identifies a

specific laminate combination. This number will be used
for plates, stiffeners and holes to define the lamination.
NAME A name to identify the laminate.
PERCENT_… The percentage of fibre or other fibre material of the
laminate.
DESIGNATION The designation/name of a layer of the laminate.
FABRIC_WEIGHT The weight of fibre (kg/m2) of the corresponding layer of
the laminate
TOTAL_THICKNESS Total thickness of this laminate.
TOTAL_WEIGHT Total weight (kg/m2) of the laminate.

The number of DESIGNATION and FABRIC_WEIGHT attributes must be equal and the
values should match each other in order of appearance.

• LAMINATE_BEAD Statement

LAMINATE_BEAD ,<type_no_bead>
/ NAME = '<name>'
/ WEIGHT = <weight>;

<type_no_bead> An integer number in the interval 101-199 that identifies a

specific laminate. This number will be used to select the
laminate at beads along boundaries.
NAME A name to identify the laminate.
WEIGHT Total weight per length unit (kg/m) of the laminate.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
(Fibre) Reinforced Plastics Option (FRP)

• LAMINATE_FLANGE Statement

LAMINATE_FLANGE ,<type_no_flange>
/ NAME = '<name>'
/T_FL1 = <thickness>
/T_FL2 = <thickness>
/R = <radius>
/H_FL2 = <height>
/H_TAP = <height>
/DESIGNATION = <designation> (1….11)
/FABRIC_WEIGHT = <weight> (1….11)
/FABRIC_WIDTH = <width> (1…..11)
/RESIN = <resin name>
/RESIN_DENSITY_CURED = <density>
/TOTAL_WEIGHT = <weight>;

<type_no_flange> An integer number in the interval 201-299 that identifies a

specific laminate. This number will be used to select the
flange.
NAME A name to identify the laminate.
DESIGNATION Fabric name of ply
FABRIC_WEIGHT Fabric weight/m2 of ply
FABRIC_WIDTH Fabric width of ply
RESIGN Resign name, max 20 char

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
(Fibre) Reinforced Plastics Option (FRP)

RESIGN_DENSITY_CUR Density of cured resign kg/m3

ED
TOTAL WEIGHT Total flange weight per length unit (kg/m)

• Input File, Example

LAMINATE_PLANE, 42

/NAME='L42'
/PERCENT_OF_FIBER=51
/DESIGNATION='L450(C)'
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=0.409
/TOTAL_THICKNESS=0.45
/TOTAL_WEIGHT=0.8;

LAMINATE_PLANE, 92

/NAME='L92'
/PERCENT_OF_FIBER=51
/DESIGNATION='L450(C)'
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=0.409
/DESIGNATION='L450(C)'
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=0.409
/TOTAL_THICKNESS=0.90
/TOTAL_WEIGHT=1.6;

LAMINATE_PLANE, 93

/NAME='L93'
/PERCENT_OF_FIBER=51
/DESIGNATION='L450(C)'
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=0.409
/DESIGNATION='L450(C)'
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=0.409
/DESIGNATION='L450(C)'
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=0.409
/TOTAL_THICKNESS=1.35
/TOTAL_WEIGHT=2.4;

LAMINATE_PLANE, 52

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
(Fibre) Reinforced Plastics Option (FRP)

/NAME='L52'
/PERCENT_OF_FIBER=56
/DESIGNATION='LT650(C)'
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=0.612
/TOTAL_THICKNESS=0.70
/TOTAL_WEIGHT=1.1;

LAMINATE_PLANE, 61

/NAME='L61'
/PERCENT_OF_FIBER=56
/DESIGNATION='DBL700(C)'
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=0.615
/TOTAL_THICKNESS=0.70
/TOTAL_WEIGHT=1.1;

LAMINATE_PLANE, 71

/NAME='L71'
/PERCENT_OF_FIBER=55
/DESIGNATION='L450(C)'
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=0.409
/DESIGNATION='DBT700(C)'
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=0.619
/DESIGNATION='L450(C)'
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=0.409
/TOTAL_THICKNESS=1.6
/TOTAL_WEIGHT=2.6;

LAMINATE_PLANE, 74

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
(Fibre) Reinforced Plastics Option (FRP)

/NAME='L74'
/PERCENT_OF_FIBER=56
/DESIGNATION='LT650(C)'
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=0.612
/DESIGNATION='LT650(C)'
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=0.612
/DESIGNATION='DB450(C)'
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=0.410
/DESIGNATION='LT650(C)'
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=0.612
/TOTAL_THICKNESS=2.5
/TOTAL_WEIGHT=4.0;

LAMINATE_PLANE, 81

/NAME='L81'
/PERCENT_OF_FIBER=55
/DESIGNATION='DB450(C)'
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=0.410
/DESIGNATION='LT450(C)'
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=0.414
/TOTAL_THICKNESS=0.9
/TOTAL_WEIGHT=1.5;

LAMINATE_PLANE, 84

/NAME='L84'
/PERCENT_OF_FIBER=41
/DESIGNATION='DB450(C)'
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=0.410
/DESIGNATION='LT450(C)'
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=0.414
/TOTAL_THICKNESS=1.4
/TOTAL_WEIGHT=2.0;

LAMINATE_PLANE, 8

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
(Fibre) Reinforced Plastics Option (FRP)

/NAME='L8'
/PERCENT_OF_FIBER=41
/DESIGNATION='DB450(C)'
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=0.410
/DESIGNATION='LT450(C)'
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=0.414
/TOTAL_THICKNESS=1.4
/TOTAL_WEIGHT=2.0;

LAMINATE_BEAD, 101

/NAME='FL1'
/WEIGHT=0.55;

LAMINATE_BEAD, 102

/NAME='FL2'
/WEIGHT=0.85;

LAMINATE_PLANE,1/NAME='TEST'

/PERCENT_OF_FIBER=40
/DESIGNATION='A'
/DESIGNATION='B'
/DESIGNATION='C'
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=0.45
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=1.8
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=0.45
/TOTAL_THICKNESS=4.3
/TOTAL_WEIGHT=4.3;

LAMINATE_FLANGE, 201 /NAME='FL500B'

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:9 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
(Fibre) Reinforced Plastics Option (FRP)

/T_FL1=20
/T_FL2=10
/R=15
/H_FL2=40
/H_TAP=60
/DESIGNATION='DB450-G10-2RVE-xxxxx'
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=0.410
/FIBER_WIDTH=140
/DESIGNATION='L450x-xxx-xxxx-xxx'
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=0.410
/FIBER_WIDTH=160
/DESIGNATION='DB450-G10-2RVE-xxx'
/FABRIC_WEIGHT=0.410
/FIBER_WIDTH=180
/RESIN='VE-XX2010-XXX-XX-XXX'
/RESIN_DENSITY_CURED=12.3
/TOTAL_WEIGHT=5;

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:10 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Setup for Production

Setup for Production

© Copyright 1974 to current year. i 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Setup for Production

© Copyright 1974 to current year. ii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Conversion of Profiles to Plates

1 Conversion of Profiles to Plates

1.1 General
This document describes an option to convert flat bars and built profiles into plate parts or
into plate parts and new profiles. If a built profile is split into other profiles these will always
be flat bars.
The selection of profiles to be converted is done via a decision table (see below). No other
input is necessary for the conversion.
The conversion of profiles takes place in the automatic parts extraction.

1.2 Result
For flat bars the name of the converted plate parts will be the same as the name of the
profile parts on the profile data bank. The data type (object code 1) of the converted parts
will be 87.
If the profile type is not a flat bar, a ´W´ for web and ´F´ for flange will be added to the name
of the profile part.
The naming for the new plate parts will in that case be as follows (supposing that the name
of the original profile part is ES123-1/S3):

ES123-1/S3PF for the flange of the built profile and

ES123-1/S3PW for the web

1.3 Decision Table

The conditions for conversion of profiles to plate parts are defined in a decision table in an
ordinary file, whose total file specification should be assigned to the environment variable
SBH_PROF_TO_PLDB.
This file should be built up by a number of "statements" with one statement per line. The line
width is restricted to 80 characters.
Each statement starts with a keyword followed by a varying number of values.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Conversion of Profiles to Plates

The structure of the input file is (only statement keywords shown):

PROFILE_TYPE
DIMENSION
QUAL_LENGTH
QUAL_LENGTH
.
.
DIMENSION
QUAL_LENGTH
.
.
DIMENSION
.
.
BEVEL
.
.
FLANGE
COMP
STRAIGHT
PROFILE_TYPE
..

(See also the remark in the example in section Example)

Limitations:
• Number of DIMENSION:s per PROFILE_TYPE is restricted to 200.
• Number of QUAL_LENGTH:s per DIMENSION is restricted to 200.
• Number of BEVEL:s per PROFILE_TYPE is restricted to 200.
• The statements FLANGE, COMP and STRAIGHT can be given once and are valid for
all dimensions within the profile type.
• The file assigned to SBH_PROF_TO_PLDB must not have empty lines.

• PROFILE_TYPE
Layout:
PROFILE_TYPE=<proftype>;
<proftype> is the profile type according to standard (any of 10, 35, 36, 37, 38, 43 is
allowed)

• DIMENSION
Layout:
DIMENSION=<dim_string>;
<dim_string> should contain the parameters in the order according to the standards,
separated by capital X. Any parameter may be replaced the “wildcard” symbol *. The
number of parameters must always be correct even when wildcards are used.
If there are several DIMENSION statements for one PROFILE_TYPE, the statements
should be given in order from specific to more general, e.g. from explicit dimensions to
dimensions selected via wildcard.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Conversion of Profiles to Plates

• QUAL_LENGTH
Layout:
QUAL_LENGTH=<qual>,<min_len>,<max_len>;

<qual> The quality of the profiles to be transformed to plate parts. Can be

replaced by wildcard *.

<min_len Minimum length of the current profile type/dimension/quality that should

> be converted to plates. Must be given explicitly.

<max_len Ditto maximum length.

>

If there are several QUAL_LENGTH statements for one DIMENSION, the statements should
be given in order from specific to more general, e.g. from explicit qualities to qualities
selected via wildcard.

• BEVEL
Layout:
BEVEL=<bevel_from>,<bevel_to>;
<bevel_from> and <bevel_to> define an interval of allowable bevel codes for those
profiles that should be converted.
The BEVEL statement is optional and if missing the bevel code will not be considered.

• FLANGE
Layout:
FLANGE=PROFILE; (or FLANGE=PLATE;)
This statement is optional. For built profile the web will always be converted to a plate if the
conditions are fulfilled. The flange will also, by default, be converted to a plate but this may
be inhibited by FLANGE=PROFILE. (Thus, FLANGE=PLATE; is always redundant).

• COMP
Layout:
COMP=<YES/NO>;
This statement is optional and the default value is NO. If YES, then weld compensation will
be added to the web of the profile if such a compensation table is defined. The set-up of the
compensation table is described in Hull - Setup and Customisation - Shrinkage
Compensation - Weld Compensation for Built profiles.

• STRAIGHT
Layout:
STRAIGHT=<YES/NO>;
This statement is optional and the default value is NO. If YES, then the web of shell profiles
will be stored on the plate databank without curvature. Marking of the inverse bending lines
will be added to the plate parts.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Conversion of Profiles to Plates

1.4 Example
An example of a decision table is as follows

PROFIL_TYPE =43;
DIMENSION =400X12X125X15;
QUAL_LENGTH =*,10,16000;
DIMENSION =*X*X*X*;
QUAL_LENGTH =A,10,16000;
QUAL_LENGTH =*,10,2500;
BEVEL =0,310;
FLANGE
=PROFILE;

Note: When using '*' characters be sure to give the 'explicit' values first. As the dimension
cards are given in the example the program finds the profile 400X12X125X15 first.
This means that QUAL_LENGTH = *,10,16000 is only valid for that dimension. For all
other dimensions the QUAL_LENGTH = A,10,16000 or *,10,1500 is valid. I.e. the
first matching dimension is taken, then the first matching quality. All bevel cards may
come at the end.

1.5 Error Messages

The following error messages may occur:
• Error in opening decision table.
• Internal overflow in tables.
• Error in profile type section.
• Error in quality control file.
• Syntax error on line: nn
• Endcut cannot be converted <endcut> .

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

2 Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

2.1 Background
The generation of production data is an integrated part in the complete system, which may
affect the user already at the modelling stage.
This chapter describes the set-up of profiles with respect to the actual fabrication and the
production methods used at the customer site.

2.2 Automatic Addition of Bending Excess to Curved

Shell Stiffeners

2.2.1 General
When a curved shell profile is manufactured in the workshop there is often a need for
excess material at the ends to be able to bend the profile. This document describes how this
bending excess can be automatically calculated and added to the profile using Profile
Nesting Utility and presented to the user with Profile Cutting Interface (PCI). All "keywords"
that are referred to below can be found in the restriction file described in Curvature Control
of Shell Stiffeners.

2.2.2 Activating Bending Excess

Bending excess can be defined as a simple "over-length" to curved shell stiffeners via the
OVERLENGTH keyword. Furthermore, an extended functionality to define bending excess
is available. Within the scope of a selected method, the bending excess will be calculated
and applied to the profile. The simple over-length addition will be used if no method is
selected. Modelling excess, such as excess defined for endcuts, is regarded to be included
in bending excess.
Two methods exist, M1 and M2. For each of the methods various parameters can be set to
control detailed behaviour. All parameters controlling bending excess shall be set in the
profile restriction file.

2.2.3 Method M1
This method is a customer specific implementation, with a number of customer specific
details, e.g. very complex rules for calculating bending excess, German printouts in the list
etc. No functional changes can be made that are not approved by this customer, but still it
could be valuable as an example for other customers. More general methods can be found
below.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

Method M1 is activated by setting BENDING_TAB_METHOD=M1 in the general section of

the profile restriction file.

2.2.4 Customer Defined Major Profile Type

There are two "major profile types" defined, "L-schaubilder" and "S-schaubilder". An L-
schaubilder is defined as a curved profile with a maximum of B bending curves. Here B is
given via the keyword BENDING_TAB=<B> in the general section of the profile restriction
file.

2.2.5 Bending Excess for L-schaubilder

The calculation of bending excess for profiles of type L-schaubilder is controlled via a table
in the profile restriction file. The table shall be defined per profile type and each line in the
table has the following syntax:
BENDING_EXCESS_CONTROL_TAB<a>_<X>=[+]<S>[,<V>]
Parameter <a>:
<a> shall be equal to either 1 or 2 depending on if the table should be used for a stiffener
end with or without a notch:

Figure 2:1. Endcut Geometries for a=1 and 2.

Parameter <X>:
<X> is the maximum bending for which the line (row in the table) is valid:

Figure 2:2. Measuring of Curvature.

If the profile is shorter than 2000 mm it is temporarily extended at each end in the direction
of the tangent because the curvature is examined at both ends independently.
Parameter <S> and <V>:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

[+]<S> is the amount of bending excess to add to the profile. It is calculated and applied
differently depending on if [+] is given or not.
If [+] is given then <S> is an absolute amount of material to add to the profile either at the
endcut zero point or to the profile end point depending on the angle of the endcut.
If [+] is not given then the amount of bending excess is calculated as <S>*<profile height>
and applied to the point where the endcut geometry has y = 0.
The amount given by +<S> is called "stoss". This name is used in the generic file and in the
list for manual fabrication of profiles created by PCI. If <S>*<profile height> is used then
"stoss" is calculated and presented as if it was given via +<S>
.

Figure 2:3. Bending Excess given with <s>.<profile height>.

Figure 2:4. Bending Excess is given with +<s>.

[,<V>] is optional. It controls the amount of bending excess together with <S>. It is only valid
if [+] is NOT given and is always used as a factor of the profile height. It is calculated from

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

the profile end point. If both <S> and <V> are given then the one creating the largest
bending excess for that end is used.

Figure 2:5. Bending Excess is given with <v>.

Example of table
.
.
.
PROF_TYPE=20
.
.
.
BENDING_EXCESS_CONTROL_TAB1_30=+100
BENDING_EXCESS_CONTROL_TAB1_100=1
BENDING_EXCESS_CONTROL_TAB1_9999=1.5
BENDING_EXCESS_CONTROL_TAB2_100=0
BENDING_EXCESS_CONTROL_TAB2_9999=1.5,0.8
.
.
.

This example is interpreted as follows:

For profiles of type 20 without a notch in the endcut (<a>=1):
• If the bending (<X>) is less or equal to 30 then 100 mm material is added to the profile
end.
• If 30 < X < 100 then 1*<profile height> mm material is added to the profile end.
• If 100 < X < 9999 then 1,5*<profile height> mm material is added to the profile end.
For profiles of type 20 with a notch in the endcut (<a>=2):
• If 0 < X < 100 then no material is added to that profile end.
• If 100 < X < 9999 then either 1,5*<profile height> mm material is added to the point
where the weld trace start or 0.8*<profile height> mm material is added to the true
profile end point depending on which gives the biggest bending excess.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

2.2.6 Holes Notches and Cutouts, L-schaubilder

When bending excess is applied holes, notches and cutouts are only marked. The following
geometry is used to indicate the centre point of holes.

Figure 2:6. Geometry for Marking of Holes.

Notches are marked with a straight line with length L, perpendicular to the root edge of the
profile.
L is controlled via the keyword HOOK4 that shall be given for each profile type in the profile
restriction file. The default value is 50 mm.
The marking of macros is also indicated in the normal way, i.e. they have OPEN=10 or
OPEN=11 in the generic file. It is also visible in the plot of the nested profile where they are
dashed.

2.2.7 Information to the User, L-schaubilder

Information about bending excess is presented in the output from PCI:
• With keywords in the generic file.
• Visible in plot of nested profile.
• In the manual fabrication list.

• Keywords in the Generic File

When bending excess is applied there are two sections with keywords for each end of the
profile, LEFT_END, MARKING_LEFT_END, RIGHT_END and MARKING_
RIGHT_END.
LEFT_END and RIGHT_END describe a straight cut outside the bending excess.
MARKING_LEFT_END and MARKING_RIGHT_END describe the endcuts of the profile.
There are also a number of other new keywords, e.g. STOSS, BENDING_TAB_METHOD
etc.

• Plot of Nested Profile

Bending excess is added to the profile and the original endcuts are dashed. The true
geometry of holes notches and cutouts are replaced by the geometry described above and
they are dashed.

• Manual Fabrication List

Three changes are made to the list compared to when there is no bending excess:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

1. The bending table now also includes the bending excess.

2. The profile is intended to be marked positioned with the flange upwards.
3. "stoss links" and "stoss rechts" is printed in the list. "stoss links" means stoss in the left
end if the profile is in it's normal position with the flange downwards. According to point
2 this must be shifted by the worker that manufactures the profile as well as all other
measures referring to a profile end.

2.2.8 Bending Excess for S-schaubilder

To calculate bending excess the program uses the same table as for an "L-schaubilder".
There is, however, one difference: the value given as +S is not used for an S-schaubilder.
Instead another keyword is added to the profile restriction file. It is FABRICATION_EXCESS
and it shall be given per profile type. FABRICATION_EXCESS is always added to the
bending excess if there is any otherwise to the true profile end point
The definition of "stoss" is completely different compared to an L-schaubilder, see below.

2.2.9 Holes Notches and Cutouts, S-schaubilder

Holes, notches and cutouts are neither burned nor marked regardless of if bending excess
gets applied or not. This is indicated in the normal way in the generic file, i.e. they have
OPEN=20 or OPEN=21.

2.2.10 Information to the User, S-schaubilder

• Bending Table for S-schaubilders

There is no bending table for an "S-schaubilder". Instead the bending table is replaced by
the geometry of the trace extended at both ends. This geometry is then used to create a
template after which the profile is bent.
The extension made to each of the ends of the template is called "stoss" and is completely
different from "stoss" for "L-schaubilder". It is calculated differently and is applied to the
template and not to the profile. It is always 700 mm for the first end and is calculated to
always reach two bending points outside the profile at the second end.

• Burner ID
A new burner ID, ROBOT_BENT_S, has been added and is used for S-schaubilders.

• Keywords in the Generic File

When bending or fabrication excess is applied there are two sections with keywords for
each end of the profile, LEFT_END, MARKING_LEFT_END, RIGHT_END and
MARKING_ RIGHT_END.
LEFT_END and RIGHT_END describe a straight cut outside the bending and fabrication
excess.
MARKING_LEFT_END and MARKING_RIGHT_END describe the endcuts of the profile
except for the geometry that also is a straight cut positioned at the true profile end point.
There are also a number of other new keywords, e.g. STOSS, BENDING_TAB_METHOD
etc.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

• Plot of Nested Profile

Bending excess is added to the profile and the original endcuts are replaced with straight
lines. Holes, notches and cutouts are not shown.

• Manual Fabrication List

Stoss for "S-schaubilders" is printed in the manual fabrication list in the same way as for "L-
schaubilders". "Beigezugabe links" and "Beigezugabe rechts" is also printed in the list below
the line with stoss and is the sum of fabrication and bending excess.

2.2.11 Method M2
The method M2 is activated by setting BENDING_TAB_METHOD=M2 in the general
section of the profile restriction file.

• General Definitions
For every bending curve on the profile set:

n = Ls/d Ls = length in space of bending curve.

d = distance between bending points (in bending table printed by

PCI in the manual fabrication list).

xk x-values for each of the bending points, k = 0..n

C a constant controlled by the keyword M2_BEND_TOL that shall be

given for each profile type in the profile restriction file. The default
value is 30 mm.

Figure 2:7. Definitions used for Method M2.

With the above definitions create the inequality:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

• Bending Excess
Bending excess is added to the profile if one or more of the following conditions are met:
1. Profile length is less than 3000 mm.
2. There is more than one bending curve.
3. If the formula above is satisfied for k=0 on the first bending curve and/or for k=n-1 on
the last bending curve.
The amount of bending excess is controlled by the keyword M2_BENDING_EXCESS that
shall be given for each profile type in the profile restriction file. The default value is 950 mm.
Bending excess is always applied at both ends of the profile at x1 on the first bending curve
and at xn-1 on the last bending curve.

• Holes, Notches and Cutouts

If (1) above is satisfied for one or more of the intervals,
xk-1 to xk; k=1..n
for any bending curve then holes, notches and cutouts are only marked.

• Information to the User

- Keywords in the Generic File

When bending excess is applied there are two sections with keywords for each end of the
profile, LEFT_END, MARKING_LEFT_END, RIGHT_END and MARKING_
RIGHT_END.
LEFT_END and RIGHT_END describe a straight cut outside the bending excess.
MARKING_LEFT_END and MARKING_RIGHT_END describe the endcuts of the profile
except for the geometry that also is a straight cut positioned in the macro zero point.
There are also a number of other new keywords, e.g. STOSS, BENDING_TAB_METHOD
etc.

- Plot of Nested Profile

Bending excess is added to the profile and the original endcuts are replaced with straight
lines positioned in the macro zero point. Holes, notches and cutouts are only marked.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

- Manual Fabrication List

Profile length includes bending excess. Bending excess is also printed in the list below the
bending table.

2.3 Early Checks of Restrictions for Profile Robot

2.3.1 Background
The Profile Nesting Utility allows the customer to specify the limits for a profile robot. If these
limitations have been set up, the profile nesting has a function to check if a profile nesting
contains parts that violate them. If so, this nesting is stored with a signal that it should be
fabricated manually.
However, it is possible to get information already in the modelling phase about the profiles
that do not comply with the restrictions set up by the customer. This document describes
how to activate this facility and the parameters of the restriction file that are relevant in this
context.

2.3.2 Profile Modelling

Profiles generated in the following modules are available for nesting:
Profiles created via Curved Hull Modelling
Profiles created in Hull Planar Panels

2.3.3 Profgen
Add the line CHECK_PROFGEN=YES to the restriction file to activate the feature. The
restrictions are only checked in this module if the user gives IP SPLITPROF.
For Profgen it is also possible to get the profile controlled against available stock material as
specified in the profile stock-number file (SBH_PROF_STOCKNO). This check is controlled
by the keyword CHECK_STOCKNO in the restriction file and replaces the one made against
the MAX_PROF parameter. Possible values for CHECK_STOCKNO are:
• IGNORE - no check is made
• WARNING - warning printed, profile stored on SB_OGDB and SBH_PROFDB.
• ERROR - warning printed, profile stored on SB_OGDB but NOT stored on
SBH_PROFDB
Note: that CHECK_STOCKNO has no effect if CHECK_PROFGEN=NO or not given.

Any warning messages will be printed in the log file.

2.3.4 Hull Modelling

Add the line CHECK_HULLMOD=YES to the restriction file to activate the feature.
The contents of the restriction file will be checked during the processing of the following
statements:
• Stiffener
• Flange
• Pillar

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:9 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

All warning messages will be presented to the user in the dialogue area on the screen.

2.3.5 Considered Restrictions

The restriction file contains keywords both for control of the nesting process and for
specification of the profile robot limitations. Only the limitations are of course considered
when performing checks within the modelling modules. The following keywords are used:

MIN_PROF Minimum profile length

MAX_PROF Maximum profile length (replaced by a check against available stock

material in Profgen if CHECK_STOCKNO is given)

MIN_DIM<x> Minimum value for dimension <x> of the current profile type (x is the
order number of the parameter in dimension parameter list)

MAX_DIM<x> Maximum value for dimension <x> of the current profile type

LM_MIN<ph> Minimum attachment length (i.e. length of welding trace of a

stiffener) for a certain height (<ph>) of the current profile type

TRUE_SCRAP The length of a scrap piece that shall be considered as true scrap.
This could be the basin width for scrap to fall down at the robot.

Note: Normally this keyword restricts the scrap piece between two
profiles but in this case it is checked against the scrap piece
created for each endcut.

BEVEL Bevel-type that can be treated by the robot. There may be more than
one BEVEL-keyword.

All these keywords are given for each profile type, that is a section within the restriction file
starting with the keyword PROF_TYPE defining "current profile type". The PROF_TYPE
keyword must exist for the treated profile.
Furthermore, specific endcut restrictions can be given. These restrictions, valid within the
current profile type are all given inside a section starting with the keyword ENDCUT, that
must exist for the current end of the treated profile:

EXCESS Excess may or may not be defined

BEVEL_FLANGE Bevel on flange may or may not be defined.

BEVEL_WEB Bevel on web may or may not be defined.

Possible values given to these keywords are YES and NO. The default value for all of them
is YES.

2.3.6 Warning Messages

The following warning messages all starting with "Profile restrictions" will be presented to
the user in case generated profiles are outside restrictions:
• Profile type not allowed
• Profile parameter no <parameter no> is too small
• Profile parameter no <parameter no> is too big

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:10 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

• Endcut<endcut no> not allowed

• Profile too short to comply
• Profile too long to comply
• Excess not accepted for endcut-type <endcut-type>
• Bevel web not accepted for endcut-type <endcut-type>
• Bevel flange not accepted for endcut-type <endcut-type>
• Bevel <bevel-code> not allowed for this profile-type
The message Profile too short is presented when the profile is below minimum length, below
minimum attachment length or when scrap when cutting endcuts is longer than true scrap.
The following additional messages may be printed by Profgen if CHECK_STOCKNO is
given:
• Error reading STOCKNO file, length could not be checked.
• No suitable stock material found
• Only rest material found when checking against STOCKNO

2.4 Curvature Control of Shell Stiffeners

2.4.1 Introduction
A curved shell profile is normally bent in the workshop before it is mounted in the ship. If the
profile is only slightly curved this step may not be necessary, the profile can be
manufactured as a straight one and will then "fall into place" when mounted in the ship. The
facility described here makes it possible for the yard to set up rules to decide if a shell
stiffener should be stored as curved or straight on the profile data bank, SBH_PROFDB. It is
applied in this storing process.

2.4.2 Control File

This facility is controlled via a text file whose full path and name should be assigned to the
logical name SBH_SHELLPROF_BENDING_CTRL. The file is organised in statements,
written in TIL-format.

Syntax
Each statement in the text file has the syntax:
PROF

[/TYPE = <profile type> ]

/HEIGHT = <profile height>
/METHOD = <method>
/CVAL = <control value>
;

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:11 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

The attributes have the following meaning:

TYPE The profile type for which METHOD and CVAL are valid. If this keyword
is omitted then the values in this statement will be used as defaults for all
profile types not mentioned in other statements.
HEIGHT The biggest height for which METHOD and CVAL are valid.
METHOD The method used to evaluate if a shell profile is curved. Valid choices are
WHOLE_TRACE_INDEP_DIST and PER_1000_FACT. The two
methods are described below.
CVAL Described below for each METHOD.

2.4.3 Method WHOLE_TRACE_INDEP_DIST

WHOLE_TRACE_INDEP_DIST stands for "whole trace independent distance". With this
method the largest distance is measured between a line between the end points of the
profile and the trace. If this distance is bigger than CVAL the profile is considered as curved.

Figure 2:8. Calculations performed for method WHOLE_TRACE _INDEP_DIST.

Thus, if d > CVAL then the profile is considered as curved.

2.4.4 Method PER_1000_FACT

When the method PER_1000_FACT is used a number of chords (Li) with equal length
(=1000) are computed along the curve. For each of the chords the maximum distance xi is
calculated.

Figure 2:9. Calculations performed for method PER_1000 _FACT.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:12 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

Let the biggest of these xi values be called X. If (CVAL*<profile length>) > X

then the profile is considered to be straight.

2.4.5 Example of Control File

! The first line handles profile type 10 with heights up to 100 mm
!
PROF /TYPE=10 /HEIGHT=100 /METHOD=PER_1000_FACT /CVAL=0.0025;
!
! The next line is valid for profile type 10 with heights between 100 and 200 mm.
!
PROF /TYPE=10 /HEIGHT=200 /METHOD=PER_1000_FACT /CVAL=0.0018;
.
.
.
! The last line for every profile should have a height that is greater than any possible
! profile height.
!
PROF /TYPE=10 /HEIGHT=10000 /METHOD= PER_1000_FACT /CVAL
=0.0005;
!
! This line handles profile type 20 with heights up to 100 mm
!
PROF /TYPE=20 /HEIGHT=100 /METHOD= PER_1000_FACT /
CVAL=0.0022;
!
! The next line is valid for profile type 20 with heights between 100 and 200 mm.
!
PROF /TYPE=20 /HEIGHT=200 /METHOD= PER_1000_FACT /CVAL=0.0016;
.
.
.
PROF /TYPE=20 /HEIGHT=10000 /METHOD= PER_1000_FACT /CVAL =0.0003;
!
! The last line is the default for profile types not listed in the file. This is in fact what
! you get if SBH_SHELLPROF_BENDING_CTRL is not defined.
!
PROF /HEIGHT=10000 /METHOD= WHOLE_TRACE_INDEP_DIST /CVAL=5;

2.4.6 Default Method and Values

If SBH_SHELLPROF_BENDING_CTRL is unassigned then the storing of shell stiffeners in
SBH_PROFDB behaves as before. This is equal to having a control file with only one line
containing:
PROF /HEIGHT=10000 /METHOD= WHOLE_TRACE_INDEP_DIST /CVAL=5;

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:13 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

2.4.7 Error Handling

If a profile has a type that is not present in the file and no default (line without /TYPE) is
given then a message is given to the user and the profile is NOT stored on SBH_PROFDB.
The same is true if the profile height is bigger than the maximum /HEIGHT given for that
profile type. If a syntax error is found in the file then a message is printed in the log saying
that the user should run inithull for details. A new menu-entry is implemented in inithull
(choice number 43) for that reason.

2.5 The Restriction File

2.5.1 General
The restriction file is used mainly by the Profile Nesting module and by the Profile Interface,
but to some extent also by modelling programs and other production programs. This is
explained further in the descriptions of the restriction keywords below.
Defaults and restrictions are defined by the user in a normal ASCII-file assigned to the
environment variable SBH_PROF_RESTRICT. The file is keyword oriented and can by
handled by any editor.
The contents of this file is divided into one general information part, valid for all types of
profiles and one part that is type dependent.
All profile types used should have it's corresponding section in this file (see PROF_TYPE
below).

2.5.2 Keywords in the General Section of the Restriction File

CHECK_PROFGEN=YES/NO
If YES there is a warning given from profgen if the profile is outside restrictions. Default
value is NO.
CHECK_HULLMOD=YES/NO
Same as above but for Hull Modelling.
CHECK_STRUCTURE = YES/NO
Same as above but for structure.
CHECK_CURVMOD = YES/NO
Same as above but for Curved Hull Modelling.
CHECK_PROFPART = YES/NO
Same as above but for Profile Coding in Drafting.
KERF_COMP=<mm>
The size of the kerf compensation in mm. Default value is 0.
COMMON_CUT=YES/NO
Information to the system whether common cut between profiles are allowed or not. Default
value is 0.
MIN_DIST=<mm>
Minimum distance in mm between profiles or between profile and raw material edge. Default
value is 0.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:14 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

MIN_DIST_RBENDS=<mm>
If greater than zero, the value is interpreted as the minimum distance from the first endcut
on the first profile and the last endcut on the last profile. Default value is -1.
If not greater than zero, the MIN_DIST value is used.
USE_ENDCUT=YES/NO
Information to the system whether the scrap material produced when cutting an endcut,
shall be possible to use for nesting. Default value is 0.
PRESENT_RIGHT=YES/NO
If yes, the result from the nesting will be presented from right to left on the raw bar. The
individual profiles will be pushed to the right end of the raw bar leaving scrap, if any in the
left end. Default value is NO.
BEFORE_BENDING=YES/NO
Measuring of holes along a shell profile is presented in the fabrication list of profiles.
Measuring can be done before (YES) bending or after (NO) bending. The default value is
NO.
LENGTH_IN_LIST=MOULDED/MOULDED_EXCESS/TOTAL
The length of a profile is presented in the fabrication list for profiles. The presented length is
presented either as the moulded length (MOULDED), the total length (TOTAL) or the
moulded length plus any excess values (MOULDED_EXCESS). Default value is
MOULDED.

Note: For curved profiles, MOULDED should be read as the moulded trace length of the
profile transferred to the neutral axis of profile.

MANSTIFF_ECUT=FULL/TYPE
The endcut is either presented with the code (FULL) or the type (TYPE) in the fabrication list
for profiles. Default value is TYPE.
MANSTIFF_WEIGHT=YES/NO
The approximate weight (not considering endcut and holes) can be presented in the
fabrication list for profiles. Default value is NO.
NEST_AS_SORTED=YES/NO
This keyword is to be used if nesting shall be done exactly in the same order as given in
input. Default is NO.
IDENT_STRING=<Customisation of IDENT STRING>
The following keywords in the generic file can be used in the IDENT_STRING:

NEST_NAME POSNO BUILDING_STRATEGY

SHAPE MLENGTH ASSEMBLY_SEQUENCE
DIMENSION TLENGTH BAUGRUPPE
WEB_HEIGHT PARTNAME_LONG ZEICHNUNGSNO
WEB_THICKNESS PARTNAME_SHORT ZAEHLNO
MAX_WEB_HEIGHT SHIP_NO BLOCK_NO

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:15 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

FLANGE_WIDTH PROF_SIDE NO_OF_REF_LINES

FLANGE_THICKNESS DIRECTION MIRROR
RAW_LENGTH DIRECTION_SIGN FORM
REST_LENGTH DIRECTION_TRACE NO_OF_BENDING_TABLES
USED_LENGTH ASSEMBLY ADDITIONAL_INFO1 ..
ADDITIONAL_INFO12
LAST_SCRAP_LENGTH ASSEMBLY_HIGH NO_OF_MACS
QUALITY ASSEMBLY_TOT NO_OF_MARKS
DENSITY CUST_DATA_1 KNUCKLE_U_START
AREA CUST_DATA_2 KNUCKLE_V_START
RAW_BAR CUST_DATA_3 KNUCKLE_U_END
BUYING_MARK CUST_DATA_4 KNUCKLE_V_END
CUTTING_STN SURFACE_TREATMENT KNUCKLE_INCLINATION
NO_OF_PROFS PLANNING_UNIT TLENGTH_MANUAL
NAME WORKING_LOCATION

All keywords are given within the signs < and > and they shall be given in capital letters. All
text outside these signs is not translated in any way, but simply transferred to the resulting
IDENT string of the generic format
The example below is illustrating the use of this option:

Example:

IDENT in restriction file is given as

<ASSEMBLY_LOW>-<CUSTOMER_DATA_1>X<QUALITY>

This will result in the following IDENT string in the generic format:

U_A-BDXA00

when lowest assembly is U_A, first customer data is BD and quality is A00

IDENT_MAN=<number>
The standard fabrication list for profiles generated via the generic format contains a row for
each profile with lowest existing assembly. This is possible to change to a row with the
IDENT string instead. Assembly string is selected by giving the number 1 (default), the ident
string is selected by giving number 2 and by giving 0, no row at all will be printed.
The possibility to select assembly is kept for compatibility reasons, since the ident sting can
be customized to contain this.
IDENT_PLOT=<number>

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:16 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

The Nested Profile sketch program is marking the profiles in their left end with a text in case
the program is not setup with a drawing form containing $ rules. This text is by default either
customer specific or strings containing ship number, long part name, direction and side of
ship.
If <number> equals 0 then no text is presented. If <number> equals 1 (default) the default
text is used and if <number> equals 2 then the IDENT string is used.
PSKETCH= YES/NO
Keyword used to activitate the profile sketch function when running Profile Sketch and List.
PSKETCH_BEND_SIMPLE= YES/NO
The keyword can be used to activate the profile sketch function only for profiles with simple
bending curves (profiles with bending that can be described by feed and bend instructions).
Only needed in case the PSKETCH keyword has been set to NO. Default value is NO.
PSKETCH_BEND_COMPLEX= YES/NO
The keyword can be used to activate the profile sketch function only for profiles with
complex bending curves (profiles with bending that can’t be described by feed and bend
instructions). Only needed in case the PSKETCH keyword has been set to NO. Default
value is NO.
PGEN= YES/NO
When PGEN is set to NO generic files and mounting data will not be created by Profile
Sketch and List. When PGEN is set to YES generic files and mounting data will be created.
Default value is YES.
CGEN= YES/NO
When CGEN is set to NO generic files and mounting data will not be created by Profile
Cutting Interface. When CGEN is set to YES generic files and mounting data will be created.
Default value is YES.
CSKETCH= YES/NO
Keyword used to activate the profile sketch function when running Profile Cutting Interface.
Default value is NO.
CSKETCH_BEND_SIMPLE= YES/NO
The keyword can be used to activate the profile sketch function only for profiles with simple
bending curves (profiles with bending that can be described by feed and bend instructions).
Only needed in case the CSKETCH keyword has been set to NO. Used when running
Profile Cutting Interface. Default value is NO.
CSKETCH_BEND_COMPLEX= YES/NO
The keyword can be used to activate the profile sketch function only for profiles with
complex bending curves (profiles with bending that can't be described by feed and bend
instructions). Only needed in case the CSKETCH keyword has been set to NO. Used when
running Profile Cutting Interface. Default value is NO.
MANSTIFF=YES/ENG/ENGLISH/GER/GERMAN/NO
Keyword used to activate the manstiff list when using the Profile Interface or the Profile
Cutting Interface. The list can be presented in either English or German. Default is English.
Default value of the keyword is NO.
MANSTIFF_COMBINE=YES/ NO
If set to YES, then equal profiles (profiles with the same long partname) will be sorted
together and presented in one row in the manstiff list. Default value is NO. The keyword will
not have any effect when using the Profile Cutting Interface (using Nested Profiles as input).

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:17 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

MANSTIFF_ONE_LIST=DEFAULT/BLOCK/ASS
The absence of this keyword will result in individual Manstiff lists for each different profile
type and dimension. The file is named as the first selected profile of this type.
Using this keyword, will combine all Manstiff lists from a Profile List and Sketch session into
one list file. The naming of this file will be made according to the keyword value:

DEFAULT The list file is named according to one of the involved profiles (in the same
way as when not using this keyword.

BLOCK The list file will be named: Manstiff_<block name>. Block name is
fetched from one of the involved profiles

ASS The list file will be named: Manstiff_<assembly name>. Assembly

name is fetched from one of the involved profiles. If no assembly name is
found, then the block name is used.

This keyword is not valid when presenting Manstiff lists for nested profiles (using the Profile
Cutting Interface). In this case each nested profile will generate a separate list file
TSK=<text>
Keyword used to define the text to be used on knuckle lines on bent profiles. The text will be
presented together with an angle value and will be used for knuckles on the non-moulded
side (as presented in the profile sketch). Default value is DSK.
OSK=<text>
Keyword used to define the text to be used on knuckle lines on bent profiles. The text will be
presented together with an angle value and will be used for knuckles on the moulded side
(as presented in the profile sketch). Default value is OSK.
TSR=<text>
Keyword used to define the text to be used on knuckle radius lines on bent profiles. The text
will be presented together with an radius value and will be used for rolling on the non-
moulded side (as presented in the profile sketch). Default value is DSW.
OSR=<text>
Keyword used to define the text to be used on knuckle radius lines on bent profiles. The text
will be presented together with a radius value and will be used for rolling on the moulded
side (as presented in the profile sketch). Default value is OSW.
RADIUS = <text>
Keyword used to define a prefix to the presented radius value when rolling on bent profiles.
Default value is R.
MARK_BEND_SIDE = BOTH/REFLECTED
Knuckle lines are by default marked on the bending side. This can be changed by using this
keyword.
LE1
LE2
LE3
Keywords used to set values used when creating hooks in holes as described by the figure
below. LE1 is used for all thicknesses below 10 mm, LE2 is used for thicknesses greater or
equal than 10 mm and below 26 mm and LE3 is used for all thicknesses greater or equal
than 26 mm. Default values are 10 mm for LE1, 20 mm for LE2 and 30 mm for LE3

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:18 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

DE1
DE2
DE3
Keywords used to set values used when creating hooks in holes as described by the figure
below. DE1 is used for all thicknesses below 10 mm, DE2 is used for thicknesses greater or
equal than 10 mm and below 26 mm and DE3 is used for all thicknesses greater or equal
than 26 mm. Default values are 0 mm for DE1, 0 mm for DE2 and 15 mm for DE3
RE1
RE2
RE3
Keywords used to define the safety radius when creating hooks in holes as described by the
figure below. RE1 is used for all thicknesses below 10 mm, RE2 is used for thicknesses
greater or equal than 10 mm and below 26 mm and RE3 is used for all thicknesses greater
or equal than 26 mm. Default values are 10 mm for RE1, 20 mm for RE2 and 50 mm for
RE3

Figure 2:10. Description of Keywords affecting the Hook in Holes.

BEV_COMP_ANG = YES/NO
The opening angles resulting from bevel definitions are presented by default (YES) as the
complementary angle. This can be changed by setting this keyword to NO.
BENDING_TAB_METHOD
Different customer specified methods are implemented and can be activated using this
keyword. The implementation is made only for the Profile Cutting Interface. Further
information can be found in Automatic Addition of Bending Excess to Curved Shell
Stiffeners.
MIRROR_BENDING = TRACE/TABLE
Keyword describing how to reflect a shell profile stored on the “other side” when calculating
the inverse bending information. Either the profile trace is mirrored or the contents of the
bending table is reflected. Default value is TRACE.
BENDING_TAB = <No. of>
Maximum number of bending tables. Default and maximum value is 10.
DIST_BEND_POINTS

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:19 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

Defines the distance between the reference points in the bending table(s) for the bending
sight line(s). Default value is 500. See also Hull / Manufacturing / Profile Manufacturing /
Production Output Profiles / Bending Information for Shell Profiles.
OVERLAP = <No. of Points>
When creating the bending lines, the overlapping number of reference points can be
controlled using this keyword. Default value is 1.
BEND_ON_TOTAL = YES/NO
Bending information can be calculated on moulded length or the total length. Default value
is NO (moulded).
SELECT_ONE_ASSEMBLY_LEVEL = YES/NO
This keyword applies to the Profile Nesting application when profiles to be nested are
selected by assembly input. If the keyword is set to YES then only profiles on the specified
assembly level are selected. Otherwise when set to NO (Default) profiles on the specified
level and all levels below are selected.
SKIPHOLE_DIST = <mm>
Distance in mm. Holes that are closer than SKIPHOLE_DIST to profile edge will not be
present in the production output files.
SKIPTWIST_DIST = <mm>
Distance in mm. If a frame intersects a twisted profile at a distance less than
SKIPTWIST_DIST, measured from the profile end at the top of the manufactured profile,
then twist data for this frame is disregarded in production output files.
Please also see the description of frame twist data in the profile generic file.
DOTORI_ANG_INT = <deg>
Dotori marking along profile trace is calculated at equal angle intervals. DOTORI_ANG_INT
specifies in degrees the angle interval for dotori presentation in all production output files.
DOTORI_ANG_TOL = <deg>
A tolerance used to calculate the angle intervals described above.
BEVEL_ON_SKETCH = YES/NO
A bevel code text can be optionally presented at the bevelled segment of an endcut. Also
bevel along the trace is presented if bevel presentation is on. Bevel trace code is placed in
the middle of the profile close to the trace. Bevel trace is not marked if Dotori.
YES (default) - bevelling information is placed on the sketch
NO - bevelling information only possible via $-value
BENDING_INSIDE_PROFILE = YES/NO
Bending information can now be set inside the profile picture.
For more information see separate section under Hull / Manufacturing / Profile
Manufacturing / Production Output Profiles.
BENDING_MARK_START
Label for start of bending. Default value is BS.
BENDING_MARK_END
Label for end of bending. Default value is BE.
PREFIX_RAD_TS

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:20 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

Radius prefix for This Side bending. Default value is BD.

PREFIX_RAD_OS
Radius prefix for Other Side bending. Default value is BM.
PREFIX_ANG_TS
Angle prefix for This Side bending. Default value is D.
PREFIX_ANG_OS
Radius prefix for Other Side bending. Default value is M.
KNUCKLE_MARK
Label for bending at knuckle point. Default value is KN
NEST_WITHOUT_REST = YES/NO
When this keyword is set to YES profile nesting will not create rest profiles. Raw profiles of
zero length will be accepted, but nesting will be performed as if the length was the maximum
length defined for the profile type.

2.5.3 Keywords in the Profile Section

The following keywords are valid for all profile types but may also have an overriding
definition for a specific profile type:

MIN_DIST

MIN_DIST_RBENDS

For a description of those keywords please see the previous section Set-Up for Profile
Fabrication.
All other keywords in the restriction file are only valid for the profile type below which they
are listed. A section like this is always started by the keyword:
PROF_TYPE=<No.>
The number used is according to the design standard, e.g. 10 for flat bars, 20 for HP bars,
etc. The section is ended by a new PROF_TYPE keyword or by end of file.
SHAPE_TRANSLATE=
This keyword is used to translate the default shapes (FB, HP, etc.) into a yard specific
translation. The translated shape will be used in fabrication lists.
MIN_RAW=<mm>
Minimum length in mm of raw material that can be handled by the robot used. Raw materials
below this length will be handled manually.
MAX_RAW=<mm>
Maximum length in mm of raw material that can be handled by the robot used.
MIN_PROF=<mm>
Minimum length in mm of profiles that can be handled by the robot used.
There is also a possibility to restrict the size of the endcuts and the size of the middle part of
the profile, possible to clamp. The definitions in the picture below is used in this document.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:21 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

Figure 2:11. Figure Showing the Definitions used in this Document.

Length of profile is LA+LM+LE

MAX_PROF=<mm>
Maximum length in mm of profiles that can be handled by the robot used.
TRUE_SCRAP=<mm>
Maximum length in mm of scrap possible to handle by the robot used. Normally it's the basin
width in the robot. The limit given is the maximum for the values LA and LE (see above).
WANTED_SCRAP=<mm>
Size of any wanted scrap in mm at end of each raw material.
SCRAP=<mm>
Limit given in mm used when deciding if a stock number defined as a rest stock number
shall be used instead of a stock number with defined length.
If scrap on the nested material exceeds this limit and there exists a raw material with length
0, then this one is used and the length of this raw material will be set to the used length.
To be set to zero if feature is not to be used.
MAX_WEIGHT_M=<kg>
Maximum weight/metre of profile to be handled by robot used.
MIN_DIM1=<mm>
Minimum size of parameter one of current profile type, as defined by the Design Standard,
to be handled by robot used.
MIN_DIM2=<mm>
Ditto for parameter 2.
MAX_DIM1=<mm>
Maximum size of parameter one of current profile type to be handled by robot used.
MAX_DIM2=<mm>
Ditto for parameter 2.
TEXT_HEIGHT=<mm>
Height of text characters signed on profiles by robot.
TEXT_WIDTH=<mm>
Width of text characters signed on profiles by robot.
Text signing on profiles can be selected to be done in two different ways:
TEXT_PLACING=BOTTOM/TOP

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:22 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

The two different ways to place text on profiles are selected by value TOP or BOTTOM.
TEXT_DIST_TOP=<mm>
Distance from top of text to top of profile. This keyword is used when TOP is selected above.
TEXT_MAX1=<mm>
Limit 1 used when positioning text from bottom.
TEXT_MAX2=<mm>
Limit 2 used when positioning text from bottom.
TEXT_HOR1=<mm>
TEXT_VER1=<mm>
TEXT_HOR2=<mm>
TEXT_VER2=<mm>
TEXT_HOR3=<mm>
TEXT_VER3=<mm>
When BOTTOM is selected, the text position is depending of the profile height. The text
position is calculated as a horizontal and a vertical distance from the profile bottom line and
from the profile left edge to the lower and left edge of the text. The following rules are used:
Use HOR1 and VER1 if profile height is less equal than TEXT_MAX1.
Use HOR2 and VER2 if profile height is less equal than TEXT_MAX2.
Use HOR3 and VER3 if profile height is greater than TEXT_MAX2.
Hooks are automatically inserted in holes. The keywords below defines the size of such
hooks.
HOOK_<thickness>=<radius in mm>
The system automatically selects the hook valid for the current profile thickness. If this one
is not defined in this restriction file, it tries to find a hook radius for a thinner profile.
<thickness> above can have values between 1 and 50.
SIDE_UP = MOULD/NON_MOULD/MOST_MARKINGS
Profile sketch looking direction. Default value is MOULD side.

Endcuts allowed by the robot used shall be defined with the keyword below:
ENDCUT=<No.>
The keyword can be used any number of times. The value of the keyword must be
according to the Design Standard.
Each ENDCUT-keyword can be followed by three new keywords, with information valid for
this keyword:
BEVEL_FLANGE=YES/NO
BEVEL_WEB=YES/NO
EXCESS=YES/NO
These keywords are restricting the robot used, but are also used when formatting output
data in the Profile Cutting Interface, i.e. when no bevel on web, the bevel code is normally
presented with a zero (0), but with the corresponding keyword set, it will be presented with a
dash (-).
EXTRA_DIST=<endcut type>_<distance in mm>

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:23 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

This keyword is used to add an extra distance to the A-measure of a endcut.

Bevel types possible to be handled by a robot are defined with the keyword below:
BEVEL=<No.>
Also this keyword can be repeated any number of times and the values used are to be
fetched from the Design Standard.
OVERLENGTH=<mm>
Overlength in mm to be added to all profiles to be bent.
BEND_DIST
The minimum distance between the bending lines and the flange or trace. Default value is
50. See also Hull / Manufacturing / Profile Manufacturing / Production Output Profiles /
Bending Information for Shell Profiles.

Burner information is given below a burner keyword:

BURNER=<No.>
Number 1 is used for robot and number 2 is used for manual. The keywords below are
connected to the specified burner:
BURNER_ID=<name>
Name of burner.
TRANS_TIME_PER_METER=<value>
Time value on transportation time per metre.
SIGN_TIME_TEXT=<value>
Time value for signing of one text.
MARKING_TIME=<value>
Time value for one marking.
ADDITIONAL_TIME=<value>
Additional value to be added to each endcut, hole, notch or cutout.
V_BEVEL=<number of cuts>
Number of cuts needed to burn a V bevel.
Y_BEVEL=<number of cuts>
Number of cuts needed to burn a Y bevel
X_BEVEL=<number of cuts>
Number of cuts needed to burn a X bevel.
B_SPEED_<thickness>=<value>
The time value is calculated by dividing the burning length with this value.
Thickness can be given in the interval between 1 and 50.
When used and not defined for a certain profile thickness, a speed for a thicker profile is
used if available.
Tuning time values needed for endcuts and other macros are defined in a separate file
pointed to by logical SBH_PATHTIME_TUNING. The syntax of each row in this textfile is:
<Raw profile type>_<Raw profile height>_<Endcut type>=<Tuning
time in seconds>

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:24 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

For example means 20_100_21=11 that the tuning time for profiles of type 20 with height
100 and endcut of type 21 is 11 seconds.
The time calculations are performed in the Profile Cutting Interface and is described in the
documentation of this product.
ADDDISTBULB_<profile_height>=<mm>
An extra distance between profiles with a bulb or flange can be defined if needed for some
reason. Profile height can have the values 150 and 200 to 500 with steps of 5.
The keywords below shall be used if there are restrictions on the length of the last profile
nested on the raw material. If these keywords are set and fulfilled, then the first profile is
moved to be last and the last profile on the raw material is moved to be first.
LM_MIN_<height>=<mm>
See definition on LM above (below MIN_PROF). If the last profile nested is below this limit.
LM_MIN_REST_<height>=<mm>
REST_LIMIT_<height>=<mm>

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:25 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Set-Up for Profile Fabrication

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:26 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Miscellaneous

Miscellaneous

© Copyright 1974 to current year. i 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Miscellaneous

© Copyright 1974 to current year. ii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set-up of Material Qualities

1 Customer Set-up of Material Qualities

1.1 Background
Hull allows the user to specify the material quality (grade) of all parts when they are
modelled. The assigned material qualities must all have been registered on beforehand via
a user defined text file that is described in this document.

1.2 Quality Set-up File

The customer should register the qualities that are open for use in an ordinary text file. The
file is used as input to the catalogue where the quality elements can be stored in the
Property World. The quality elements are defined in Paragon using the pml-script
HullCreateQualityList.
The layout of the file is described below. The format is free, but it is recommended to let
each quality be defined in a line of its own. The line width is restricted to 80 characters. Any
number of qualities may be defined

File layout:

'<quality1 <int_code1> <density1> ['<paint1>';]

>' <int_code2> <density2> ['<paint2>';]
'<quality2 <int_code3> <density3> ['<paint3>';]
>' <int_code4> <density4> ['<paint4>';]
'<quality3
>'
'<quality4
>'
....
....

The meaning of the different terms is described below.

<quality> The identification of certain quality. This is the ’name’ by which a

certain quality is picked. Its length is restricted to 24 characters.
<int_code> An integer number is used internally to represent a certain quality
string. It must be unique within the file and must not be changed
during a project.
<density> The density of this material. Should be expressed in kg/mm3.
<paint> This is an optimal parameter that, when given, should be followed
by a semicolon. It may be used to specify special painting to be
associated with certain material quality. The length is restricted to
26 characters. Blanks should be avoided.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customer Set-up of Material Qualities

Remarks:
1. The densities can be changed at any moment. The new value will come into operation
the next time the material is accessed.
2. <paint i> can be changed at any moment. The new string will come into operation the
next time the paint information is accessed.
3. New qualities can be added at any moment.
4. For a material quality with the default density the density need not be given explicitly
but may be replaced by an asterisk (*).
5. The quality with <int_code>=0 will be output as the default quality, i.e. the quality you
get if not explicitly defined.

1.2.1 Default Density

The default density is 0.00000786 kg/mm3. The default density can be changed by defining
the quality 'DEFAULT' in the quality file. The definition should be made in the beginning of
the file and should occur only once.
There exists no default paint, but it can be defined by the DEFAULT statement.

1.2.2 Quality File, Example

The file below is an example of a quality set-up file,

DEFAULT -9999 8.00E-6 DefaultPaint;

A 1001 * A-paint;
A27 1027 * A27-paint;
A32 1032 *
A36 1036 *
D 4000 7.86E-6
D27 4027 7.86E-6
D32 4032 7.86E-6
D36 4036 7.86E-6
A27Z 1279 *
...
...
STE305 9305 *
ALU 30000 2.70E-6

1.3 Remark
The hull utility inithull can be used to check a newly established quality file for correctness.
If only numbers are to be used in the quality name it is necessary to give the same numbers
in the code.
e.g.

14571 14571 *

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Destination Definition

2 Destination Definition

2.1 Description
Hull allows the user to specify the destination in the workshop of parts such as plates,
brackets, stiffeners, flanges and pillars. The valid destinations must be defined by the
customer, see the specification below. The intention is to define the workshop station where
the different parts will be assembled. However, the user is free to use it as he likes.
The user has the possibility to pick the destination in the different hull modelling modules. A
given value will be accepted only if it has been registered in a special set-up file otherwise
an error message will be returned.
The selected destination of plates and brackets will be transferred to the parts after parts
extraction. Destinations are available e.g. via Data Extraction.
For plane panel profiles, as well as for shell profiles, the destination will be transferred to the
split profile parts (if necessary assignments are made).

2.2 Set-up of Destinations

The customer should define all allowed destinations (workshop stations) to be used in an
ordinary text file. The total name of this file must be assigned to the environment variable
SBH_DESTINATION_CTRL.

2.2.1 Layout of the Destination File

The layout of the text file is very simple. One destination (workshop station) is given in each
line surrounded by apostrophes. The length of a destination is restricted to 24 characters.
'<destination_1>'
'<destination_2>'
'<destination_3>'
'<destination_4>'
....
....

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Destination Definition

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 2:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Surface Treatment Set-up

3 Surface Treatment Set-up

3.1 Description
Hull allows the user to specify surface treatment of different types of parts such as plates,
brackets, stiffeners, flanges and pillars. The values given must be registered by the
customer on beforehand as specified below. The intention is to define the type of treatment
of the parts before the production phase. However, the user is free to use it as he likes.
The user has the possibility to set surface treatment in different hull modelling modules. A
given value will be accepted only if it has been registered in a set-up file otherwise an error
message will be returned.
For plate parts in general the surface treatment will be transferred to the plate parts after
parts extraction. The surface treatment can be accessed e.g. via Data Extraction.
For plane panel profiles, as well as for shell profiles, the surface treatment will be
transferred to the split profile parts (if necessary assignments are made).

3.2 Set up of Surface Treatment

The customer should register all available surface treatments in an ordinary text file. The
total name of this file must be assigned to the environment variable
SBH_TREATMENT_CTRL.

3.2.1 Layout of the Surface Treatment File

The layout of the surface treatment file is very simple. One surface treatment is given in
each line surrounded by apostrophes. Slashes (/) are not allowed in the strings for reasons
explained below. Each string is restricted to 24 characters.
'<surface_treatment_1>'
'<surface_treatment_2>'
'<surface_treatment_3>'
'<surface_treatment_4>'
....
....
When setting the surface treatment for plates the user has the option to define different
surface treatments on the two sides of the plate. They must be given in the same string,
separated by a slash. E.g. if the surface treatment of the upper side of a plate is PRIMER
and the lower side is NONE, then the value 'PRIMER/NONE' must be given as input (the
set-up file must of course contain PRIMER and NONE as separate items). For other types of
components, only one value can be defined.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Surface Treatment Set-up

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 3:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Panel Data and Geometry Type Set-up

4 Panel Data and Geometry Type Set-up

4.1 Description
Hull allows the user to specify the Data type and Geometry type of a plane panel. These
numbers offers the user a way of classifying panels in a way that he finds suitable. When
using Create statement for the panel statements the data and geometry types that are
available can be controlled in files associated with the environment variables
SBH_PANEL_DT and SBH_PANEL_GT, that is, ordinary text files containing the valid
numbers to use (one number on each row). In the Panel statement form only those numbers
available in the files are presented. The numbers are presented in the same order as in the
files. Reserved numbers (957, 958 and 959 (Bracket Panels, Knuckled Sub-panels and
Outfitting Steel Panels)) will not be valid even if present in the files.
If a file is missing, the default number ‘101’ will be used.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 4:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Panel Data and Geometry Type Set-up

4.2 Layout of the Data and Geometry Type Files

The layout of the type files is very simple. One data/geometry type is given in each line.
123
321
228
912
....
....

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 4:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customising Dialogs in Hull

Customising Dialogs in Hull

© Copyright 1974 to current year. i 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customising Dialogs in Hull

© Copyright 1974 to current year. ii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customising Dialogues

1 Customising Dialogues

1.1 General
Graphical menus used in dialogues (e.g. hole type selection) are controlled and customised
by updating a specific drawing and the corresponding picture object attributes connected to
these drawings. The drawings all have fixed names and are stored on SB_SETTINGS_DB,
which is accessible from the Drafting application.
The Template project, delivered together with the product, contains examples of the
drawings that are used for the dialogues.

1.1.1 General Principles for Interaction

The dialogues are presented as list boxes with picking possibilities and a key-in field for
selection. The key-in field will always be initially current when the dialogue is first shown,
which allows for alphanumeric input in all cases. Depending on what has been keyed in, the
list box alternatives are searched in alphabetic order. If default designations are defined (as
explained below), then also these ones will be selectable in the same alphabetic order.
The hole selection can be used as example. If character H is keyed in, the menu item
representing a HE hole will be the selected one. Furthermore, the first default designation
will be used, which maybe will result in a hole selection represented by the designation
HE200*100. If, on the other hand, HE25 is keyed in, then the designation HE250*125 will be
selected.

1.2 Drawings
The dialogues are controlled and customised by updates of normal drawings where each
view represents an entry point within the dialogues. The updating is made using standard
Drafting functions in general and specifically the function Tools->Inspect Drawing-
>Attributes to change the attribute information
The following drawings (existing in the Template project) are currently used:

Drawing name Used in Dialogue

__SBH_HOLE_MENU__ When creating holes in planar panels.

When creating holes in curved panels.
When creating holes in planar profiles.
When creating holes in shell profiles.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customising Dialogues

Drawing name Used in Dialogue

__SBH_EDGE_NOTCH_MENU__ When creating edge notches along limits of

planar panels.
When creating notches on planar profiles.
When creating notches on shell profiles.

__SBH_CORNER_NOTCH_MENU__ When creating corner notches on planar

panels.

__SBH_BKT_SYNT_MENU__ When selecting bracket syntax.

__SBH_BKT_MENU__ When picking a bracket.

__SBH_REST_TYPES__ When selecting classification shapes for rest

plates in nesting.

__SBH_CUTOUT_TYPES__ When creating cutouts in panels and profiles.

__SBH_PROF_TYPES__ When selecting profile types and designation.

__SBH_ECUT_MENU__ When selecting profile endcut.

1.2.1 Customising
Customising is normally made by manual changes to the drawings used for dialogue
creation. However, in some cases this is made by the functions automatically as specified
below:

Drawing name Updating function

__SBH_BKT_MENU__ Initiate Hull Standards->Other Standard Set-

up->Bracket std, Create.
Attribute -9960 will be added with bracket
specific keywords as specified below.

Note: that this automatic dialogue creation

requires that the names of brackets in
the customized bracket control file
corresponds with the names of
brackets in the set-up drawing. The
drawing is delivered with brackets
named according to the standard. If
other names are used in the bracket
control file, then bracket names must
be changed accordingly in the set-up
drawing. The function Tools >
Subpicture > Rename can be used for
this purpose, changing the names on
view level.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customising Dialogues

Drawing name Updating function

__SBH_CUTOUT_TYPES__ Initiate Hull Standards - Cutout setting -

Create. Drawing will be automatically created
and the cutouts will be updated with attribute -
9960 containing information for which profile
types the cutout can be used. Further
information can be found in Hull - Setup and
Customisation - Cutouts and Clips - Automatic
Setting of Cutouts.

__SBH_ECUT_MENU__ Initiate Hull Standards - Profiles and Flanges -

Endcut selection, create. The Setting drawing
will be automatically updated with:
• Customised description of endcut type in
attribute -9961.
• Profile type filter in attribute -9960. This
information is used by the endcut
selection dialog, when deciding which
endcut types that should be displayed in
the dialog. In that way only those endcut
types that can be used for a given profile
type will be shown.
• Endcut code and endcut parameters in
attribute -9962. This information is shown
in the endcut dialogue as the standard
parameters, which may be picked
amongst.
• Connection code restrictions in attribute -
9963. The endcut dialog uses this
information when deciding the standard
parameters to be displayed. If a
connection code restriction is defined,
then corresponding standard parameters
are displayed only if the connection code
associated with the profile end is one of
the codes in the restriction group.
For further information see Selection of Active
Endcuts .

1.2.2 Attributes
To control the dialogue, picture attributes are added on view level. The following general
attributes should be used:

Attribute Variable Value

9963 Endcut specific:

I1 Number of connection code restrictions.

S1-Sn Connection code restrictions.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customising Dialogues

Attribute Variable Value

9962

I1 Number of default designations.

S1 - Sn Default designation to be selectable within the dialogue.

9961

I1 Order number when displayed in dialogue.

I2 Meaning depending on dialogue type:

Hole dialogue:
0 - Standard hole.
1 - Penetration for a pipe or a ventilation duct.
2 - Penetration for a pillar.
3 - Hole from curve.
If the variable I2 does not exist then a standard hole is
assumed.

Notch dialogue:
0 - Standard notch.
1 - Notch from curve.
If the variable I2 does not exist then a standard notch is
assumed.

Endcut dialogue:
Endcut type.

S1 - S3 Text presented within the dialogue. The text information

can be used as documentation for the user.

9960

S1 - Sn All views are by default displayed in all dialogues.

Using certain keywords, some views can be hidden when
the dialogue is used in certain applications or in a project.
The following are valid keywords

General
PLPL (Planar Plate)
PLPR (Planar Profile)
SHPL (Shell Plate)
SHPR (Shell Profile)
STPL (Structure Plate)
STPR (Structure Profile)
NDIS (Not Displayed)

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customising Dialogues

Attribute Variable Value

Bracket specific:
SYN1
SYN2
SYN3
SYN4
SYN5
SYN6
SYN7
SYN8
SYNV
Cutout Specific:
10
20
21
.
.
.
43
For the classification shapes in drawing
__SBH_REST_PLATES__ the contents of this attribute is
defined differently as specified below:

S1-Sn T
The names of classification shape arguments.
Totally 7 can be defined. The exact number is
defined by I2 below.
I1
Shape type
I2
Number of arguments

R1-Rh
Optional default values for each shape argument.

Endcut Specific:

S1 - Sn Excluded profile types.

I1 Number of excluded profile types.

9959

S1 - Sn Reference to a new drawing with the same layout (in case

the user wants to customise dialogues in levels) or (in
some cases) a reference to a Vitesse script. Strings are
concatenated.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:5 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customising Dialogues

Attribute Variable Value

Only the drawings on the top level are having fixed names,
defined by the system. Drawings on lower levels are
named by the user, all referenced drawings must start with
two underscores ("__")

9958 The presence of such an attribute (on the first view)

indicates that no user input is needed. The name of the
view shall be returned in dialogues.
The content of this attribute is irrelevant.

9957 The presence of such an attribute indicates that

designations are possible to change by the user, i.e. the
profile dimensions may be changed by the user when
selecting a new profile type and dimension.

1.2.3 Example
The picture below shows the drawing __SBH_HOLE_MENU__ that is used for the hole
dialogue implementation:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:6 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customising Dialogues

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:7 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Customising Dialogues

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:8 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Symbolic Hull Views

Symbolic Hull Views

© Copyright 1974 to current year. i 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Symbolic Hull Views

© Copyright 1974 to current year. ii 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Symbolic Hull Views

1 Symbolic Hull Views

1.1 General
This document describes the set-up and customisation of line types and colours in Symbolic
Planar Hull Views. The set-up is generated as a control object (named LT below) on the data
bank from an input file written by the user using the syntax described below. The LT object is
created in Inithull (Other standard set-up) and it is activated via a default in the standard
default file used by Marine Drafting.
The customisation can be made on individual hull components. The components that are
not customised will be drawn with default line type and colour.

1.1.1 Syntax of Customisation Language

• The NAME Statement

This statement is used to define an LT object. It is given with the name of the object as
argument.
The statement can have the following attributes:

/LIST A list of the LT object is generated. The list includes both settings made by the
user and the default values. The result file can be used as an input file with
small modifications.

• OVERRIDE_COLOUR_P Statement
The statement is used if this customisation shall override any modelled colour on a
Production Panel.

• OVERRIDE_COLOUR_D Statement
The statement is used if this customisation shall override any modelled colour on a Design
Panel.

• Component Statements
All component statements can have attributes to control the line type or the colour. The
attributes are listed below:

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:1 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Symbolic Hull Views

/LT='value' The attribute controls which line type to use for a specific
component. The line type value is given as a string.

/ The attribute controls which colour to use for a specific

COL_DESIGN='value' component on a Design Panel. The colour value is given
as a string.

/COL_PROD='value' The attribute controls which colour to use for a specific

component on a Production Panel. The colour value is
given as a string.

The following statements represents the hull components can be controlled:

PAN Used to control a panel in a planar view.

PAN_INT Used to control a panel in a cross section view. The panel is

intersected by the view plane.

PAN_TS Used to control a panel in a cross section view. The panel is

on this side of the view plane.

PAN_OS_NORM Used to control a panel in a cross section view. The panel is

on the other side of the view plane. The panel is type is
normal.

PAN_OS WT Used to control a panel in a cross section view. The panel is

on the other side of the view plane. The panel is type is
watertight.

PAN_OS_NOWT Used to control a panel in a cross section view. The panel is

on the other side of the view plane. The panel is type is non
watertight.

STI Used to control a stiffener in a planar view.

STI_INT Used to control a stiffener in a cross section view. The

stiffener is intersected by the view plane.

STI_FICT Used to control a fictitious stiffener.

STI_UNSYM Used to control an unsymmetric stiffener.

STI_TS Used to control a stiffener in a cross section view. The

stiffener is on this side of the view plane.

STI_OS Used to control a stiffener in a cross section view. The

stiffener is on the other side of the view plane.

FLA Used to control a flange in a planar view.

FLA_FOLD_DEV Used to control a folded flange presented developed.

FLA_FOLD_TS Used to control a folded flange in a cross section view. The

flange is on this side of the view plane.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:2 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Symbolic Hull Views

FLA_FOLD_OS Used to control a folded flange in a cross section view. The

flange is on the other side of the view plane.

FLA_TS Used to control a flange in a cross section view. The flange

is on this side of the view plane.

FLA_OS Used to control a flange in a cross section view. The flange

is on the other side of the view plane.

PIL Used to control a pillar.

BRA Used to control a bracket in a planar view.

BRA_INT Used to control a bracket in a cross section view. The

bracket is intersected by the view plane.

BRA_TS Used to control a bracket in a cross section view. The

bracket is on this side of the view plane.

BRA_OS Used to control a bracket in a cross section view. The

bracket is on the other side of the view plane.

DPLATE_TS Used to control a doubling plate in a planar view. The

doubling plate is on this side of the plate it is attached to.

DPLATE_OS Used to control a doubling plate in a planar view. The

doubling plate is on the other side of the plate it is attached
to.

CLIP_TS Used to control a clip plate in a planar view. The clip plate is
on this side of the plate it is attached to.

CLIP_OS Used to control a clip plate in a planar view. The clip plate is
on the other side of the plate it is attached to.

HOLE Used to control a hole.

HOLE_FICT Used to control a fictitious hole.

HOLE_CROSS Used to control a cross mark in a hole.

RSO Used to control a RSO.

RSO_GA Used to control a RSO in a GA view.

COMP Used to control a compartment.

COMP_CROSS Used to control the cross mark of a compartment.

1.1.2 Line Types

Line type names that can be used are specified in Marine Drafting / User Guide / Model
Viewing and General Drafting / Geometric Entities / Line Types.

1.1.3 Colours
Colour names that can be used are specified in Marine Drafting / User Guide / Appendices.

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:3 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.
 Hull Setup Customisation and Standards User Guide
Symbolic Hull Views

1.1.4 Default Keyword in Marine Drafting

The keyword SVIEW_LT_COL in the Marine Drafting default file is used to define which LT
object to be used.

1.1.5 Example of Definition File

The file below is an example of a definition file that defines line types and colours for all
components in a symbolic view:
NAME,'OUTF_32';
OVERRIDE_COLOUR_D;
OVERRIDE_COLOUR_P;
PAN/LT='Solid'/COL_DESIGN='Green'/COL_PROD='NavyBlue';
PAN_INT/LT='Solid'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='Green';
PAN_TS/LT='SolidWide'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='Green';
PAN_OS_NORM/LT='DashedDoubleDottedWide'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/
COL_PROD='Green';
PAN_OS_WT/LT='Track'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='Green';
PAN_OS_NOWT/LT='DashedWide'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='Green';
STI/LT='Solid'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='Green';
STI_INT/LT='Solid'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='Green';
STI_FICT/LT='ShortDashed'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='Green';
STI_UNSYM/LT='Solid'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='Green';
STI_TS/LT='DashedDotted'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='Green';
STI_OS/LT='Dashed'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='Green';
FLA/LT='Solid'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='Green';
FLA_FOLD_DEV/LT='DashedDotted'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='Green';
FLA_FOLD_TS/LT='Solid'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='Green';
FLA_FOLD_OS/LT='Dashed'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='Green';
FLA_TS/LT='Solid'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='DimGrey';
FLA_OS/LT='ShortDashed'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='DimGrey';
PIL/LT='Solid'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='DimGrey';
BRA/LT='Solid'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='Green';
BRA_INT/LT='Solid'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='Green';
BRA_TS/LT='SolidWide'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='Green';
BRA_OS/LT='DashedWide'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='Green';
DPLATE_TS/LT='Solid'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='Green';
DPLATE_OS/LT='ShortDashed'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='Green';
CLIP_TS/LT='Solid'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='Green';
CLIP_OS/LT='ShortDashed'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='Green';
HOLE/LT='Solid'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='Green';
HOLE_FICT/LT='ShortDashed'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='Green';
HOLE_CROSS/LT='DashedDotted'/COL_DESIGN='DimGrey'/COL_PROD='Green';
RSO/LT='DashedWide'/COL_DESIGN='Blue'/COL_PROD='Blue';
RSO_GA/LT='Solid'/COL_DESIGN='Blue'/COL_PROD='Blue';
COMP/LT='Solid'/COL_DESIGN='GreyT50'/COL_PROD='GreyT50';
COMP_CROSS/LT='DashedDotted'/COL_DESIGN='GreyT50'/COL_PROD='GreyT50';

© Copyright 1974 to current year. 1:4 12 Series

AVEVA Solutions Limited and its subsidiaries.
All rights reserved.